The Pilot

The Pilot

Сообщение Timecops » 05 дек 2011, 08:19

Web auditing in any place on the planet http://webauditing.org/

The Pilot
Copyright 1996
All commercial rights are reserved to the author,
who currently wishes to remain anonymous and
therefore is writing under the pen name of "The
Pilot". Individuals may freely copy these files on
the internet for their own use and they may be
made available on any web server who does
not charge for them and who does not alter their
contents.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE............................................................................................................................1
CHAPTER 1.........................................................................................................................6
WHAT IS AND WHAT ISN’T TRUE ABOUT SCIENTOLOGY.....................................6
CHAPTER 2 - COSMIC HISTORY........................................................................................82
INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................82
IN THE BEGINNING................................................................................................84
THE DANCE OF CREATION....................................................................................87
THE WOMB............................................................................................................89
THE JEWEL OF KNOWLEDGE...............................................................................91
WE BEGIN THE CREATIVE PROCESS...................................................................94
THE REALITY WARS................................................................................................95
THE EARLY CAPABILITIES AND ABERRATIONS...................................................98
THE MIS-ALIGNED SPACES...................................................................................101
THE AGREEMENTS UNIVERSE..............................................................................103
HOME UNIVERSE...................................................................................................106
THE PENALTY UNIVERSES OF THE HOME UNIVERSE ERA.................................108
THE FALL OF HOME UNIVERSE.............................................................................110
THE GAMES UNIVERSE..........................................................................................114
THE MOTION UNIVERSE........................................................................................116
THE SYMBOLS UNIVERSE.....................................................................................119
THE THOUGHT OR THETA UNIVERSE.....................................................................127
THE THETA - MEST WARS......................................................................................129
THE CONFLICTS (or MEST) UNIVERSE..................................................................130
THE MAGIC UNIVERSE..........................................................................................132
THE CURRENT PHYSICAL (or Space Opera) UNIVERSE......................................133
THE MUD UNIVERSE..............................................................................................136
WHERE ARE WE NOW..........................................................................................137
SUMMARY..............................................................................................................140
CHAPTER 3 - THE ACTUAL GOALS PROBLEM MASSES OF THIS UNIVERSE..................141
BACKGROUND........................................................................................................142
GOALS IN OPPOSITION..........................................................................................144
THE LINEPLOT........................................................................................................146
HOW THE LINEPLOT FITS TOGETHER....................................................................148
MORE THINGS CONNECTED TO THE GOAL.........................................................153
THE SOURCE OF THESE GOALS.............................................................................155
PROCESSES THAT CAN BE RUN............................................................................160
OBJECTIVE PROCESS............................................................................................162
SIMPLE RECALL.....................................................................................................163
ARC RECALL...........................................................................................................164
COMMUNICATION PROCESS................................................................................166
HELP PROCESS......................................................................................................167
PROTECT PROCESS................................................................................................168
PROBLEMS PROCESS...........................................................................................169
OVERTS / WITHHOLDS...........................................................................................171
CHANGE.................................................................................................................172
UPSETS....................................................................................................................173
JUSTIFICATIONS......................................................................................................177
RIGHTNESS and WRONGNESS..............................................................................178
VIEWPOINTS...........................................................................................................179
ADVANCED PROCESSES ON OPTERMS...............................................................180
PROCESSING THE ROCK........................................................................................185
AFTERWORD...........................................................................................................191
CHAPTER 4 - AUDITING TIPS AND TECHNIQUES..............................................................193
THE UNDERLYING BASIS OF AUDITING................................................................193
HOW MUCH OF THE MIND IS ACCESSIBLE........................................................195
TYPES OF AUDITING...............................................................................................198
METHODOLOGY.....................................................................................................202
HOW TO RUN PROCESSES....................................................................................212
RUDIMENTS............................................................................................................214
ASSISTS....................................................................................................................218
GRADES OF RELEASE............................................................................................237
REPAIR AND BOOSTER RUNDOWNS....................................................................258
OTHER RUNDOWNS...............................................................................................264
A NEW RUNDOWN - WORLD CLOSED IN RUNDOWN........................................265
WRONG IDEAS IN STANDARD TECH.....................................................................268
CHAPTER 5 - IMPLANT UNIVERSES..................................................................................275
INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................275
THE NATURE OF UNIVERSES..................................................................................277
THE MECHANICS OF UNIVERSES.........................................................................281
THE DECLINE OF THETA........................................................................................284
THE LATER TRACK..................................................................................................287
FACTORS INVOLVED IN RUNNING IMPLANT UNIVERSES...................................289
THE UPPER DYNAMICS.........................................................................................291
PENALTY UNIVERSES, GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................296
THE TOP OF THE PENALTY UNIVERSES................................................................301
STRUCTURE OF THE EARLY PART OF THE INCIDENT...........................................304
PENALTY UNIVERSES
AUDITING INSTRUCTIONS.......................................................................................306
PLATEN I - PENALTY UNIVERSES..........................................................................319
PENALTY UNIVERSE MASTER LIST........................................................................330
PENALTY UNIVERSES TIGER UNIVERSE SYMBOLS.............................................380
CHAPTER 6 - DIVIDE AND CONQUER...............................................................................394
A MORE ACCURATE LOOK AT INCIDENT 2..........................................................400
PROGRAMMED MACHINE ENTITIES (PMEs)......................................................408
CONTROL ENTITIES................................................................................................422
THOUGHT POOLS....................................................................................................426
SPIRAL DECAY AND DEATH..................................................................................430
ARSLYCUS...............................................................................................................432
ADVANCED SOLO NOTS........................................................................................439
NOTS IN SCIENCE FICTION....................................................................................448
SPLIT VIEWPOINTS (SVs).......................................................................................450
CHAPTER 7 - OT DRILLS AND ADVANCED PROCESSES.................................................457
MY FAVORITE EXTERIORIZATION PROCESSES....................................................458
SOP 8C REVISITED.................................................................................................460
SOME HIGH POWERED PROCESSES...................................................................464
SOP 8 OT.................................................................................................................470
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - INTRODUCTION............................................................481
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - PRELIMINARY STEP....................................................487
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - ADVANCED PROCESSES (Space etc.).......................496
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - ENERGY.......................................................................504
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - MORE ENERGY PROCESSES......................................508
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - HANDLING OF GRAVITY AND OTHER
ADVANCED PHENOMENA.........................................510
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - UNION STATION PROCESSING....................................519
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - MACHINERY AND OTHER STOPS...............................521
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - TR8................................................................................524
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - OBJECTIVE HANDLINGS.............................................525
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - EXTERIOR OBJECTIVES (BODILESS
PROCESSING).............................................................528
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - BODY LIFTING..............................................................530
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - DRILLING WITH AN OBJECT.......................................532
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - BODILESS PROCESSING.............................................551
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - THE GRAVITY PROCESS (AN ADVANCED
LEVITATION DRILL).....................................................552
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - END NOTE....................................................................554
CHAPTER 8 - VARIOUS IMPLANT PLATENS......................................................................555
OT2 ADDITIONS......................................................................................................556
THE HELLATROBUS PRISON PLANET IMPLANT...................................................560
THE DEAR SOULS IMPLANT...................................................................................604
THE AMUSEMENT PARK GOALS...........................................................................610
THE TRAIN IMPLANT..............................................................................................615
THE AIRCRAFT DOOR IMPLANT.............................................................................621
THE AGREEMENTS UNIVERSE IMPLANT..............................................................624
THE DISABILITY IMPLANT......................................................................................633
THE DISCONTINUITY IMPLANT..............................................................................664
FAC 1 .....................................................................................................................683
THE INDIVIDUATION IMPLANT..............................................................................686
THE JUST REWARDS IMPLANT..............................................................................688
SERVICE FAC IMPLANTS.......................................................................................689
THE HUMAN IMPLANT...........................................................................................699
THE POLES IMPLANT.............................................................................................700
THE ANTI-PSYCHIC IMPLANT................................................................................702
THE CHOICES IMPLANT........................................................................................705
THE THIRD EYE IMPLANT......................................................................................708
THE 10 WAY COMPULSION IMPLANT.................................................................710
THE 4TH DIMENSIONAL IMPLANT........................................................................723
THE TIME IMPLANT................................................................................................741
THE JEWEL OF KNOWLEDGE...............................................................................745
THE FALSE JEWEL OF KNOWLEDGE....................................................................754
CHAPTER 9 - ADVANCED MATERIAL AND RESEARCH TECHNIQUES...........................768
HOW I CAME TO RESEARCH THIS........................................................................768
RESEARCH AUDITING............................................................................................779
ADVANCED PENALTY UNIVERSE PROCESSING..................................................784
PENALTY UNIVERSE ASSESSMENT LIST INCLUDING NEGATIVE GOALS...........791
THE TREADMILL.....................................................................................................795
The 5 WAY OPPOSITION GPMs.............................................................................801
PICTURE MAZES.....................................................................................................814
THE BIG SPLITTER IMPLANT..................................................................................817
PLATEN HS (HIGHER SELF)...................................................................................829
PLATEN 2................................................................................................................837
ROCK SLAMS..........................................................................................................839
NOTE .....................................................................................................................841
ENTITY ASSESSMENT.............................................................................................842
CORRECTION LIST..................................................................................................844
SECTION 2 - INFINITE TERMINAL..........................................................................849
SECTION 3 - UNIVERSE ITEMS..............................................................................851
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE REMAINING SECTIONS.................................................854
SECTION 4 - REALITY.............................................................................................856
CHAPTER 10.......................................................................................................................922
ORDER AND CHAOS..............................................................................................922
THE MOST BASIC GOALS.......................................................................................928
FASTER THAN LIGHT TRAVEL.................................................................................930
LOSS AND EMOTION..............................................................................................934
THE CHAKRAS.........................................................................................................937
THE UNIVERSE MACHINES...................................................................................945
THEORY OF UNIFIED STRUCTURE..........................................................................949
THE BETWEEN LIVES IMPLANT............................................................................951
TEACHING YOURSELF LESSONS...........................................................................961
THE GAMES TONE SCALE.....................................................................................963
HOME UNIVERSE VALENCE GAME TERMINALS................................................965
THEORY OF RESET TIME........................................................................................966
RESEARCHING PAST LIVES...................................................................................974
MISCELLANEOUS NOTES......................................................................................984
SOME MORE TECHNIQUES FROM EASTERN PRACTICES..................................1014
THE PROTECT BUTTON...........................................................................................1019
HAVINGNESS GOALS.............................................................................................1022
ELECTIONS.............................................................................................................1025
COMPUTERS...........................................................................................................1026
ETHICS AND MORALITY.........................................................................................1028
POSTULATES...........................................................................................................1031
AFTERWORD...........................................................................................................1035
EPILOGUE..........................................................................................................................1041
HOW I WOULD FIX THE ORGS...............................................................................1041
DETAILED LIST OF THINGS TO CORRECT..............................................................1049
SCIENTOLOGY POINTS FOR REFORM...................................................................1056
1
PREFACE
I have been involved in Scientology since 1965.
I came in with great hopes and high goals, and since they were not
entirely betrayed, I kept my mouth shut and hung on despite all of the
obvious failings.
By late 1968, I had passed beyond the fanatic stage and could see that
the organization and the tech had serious flaws.
But I would not abandon the truths I had learned just because of Ron’s
imperfections or the Sea Org’s insanities.
Instead, I followed Ron’s own advice, which was to ignore all
authorities, including Ron, and evaluate each datum on its own merits
and discover what was true for myself rather than simply believing in
the subject.
When I finally finished my staff contract in the early 1970s, I was too
disillusioned to continue working for the organization. But I still believed
and continue to believe deeply in the expressed goals and purposes
of the subject.
I had made tremendous gains in auditing and helped others by auditing
them (often for free on my own time).
Any deficiencies I perceived in the tech and the organization were
attributed to the incomplete research and the failings of the all too
human members of the group.
So I continued to study and do upper levels, and especially, I began to
track down and study the thousands of hours of taped lectures from
the 1950s, searching first for the origins of the almost magical materials
we were using and eventually discovering that three quarters of the
subject had been lost and that the bulk of later policy and flag orders
were almost 180 degrees in conflict with the basics that were outlined
in the early days.
And I decided to follow Ron’s original ideas and inspirations in
preference to the later dramatizations.
And the further I went with this, the more I found myself at odds with
the organization and its current policies and practices.
2
I now firmly believe that the subject is still on a research line and that
we do not have all the answers.
I believe that Ron was right originally when he said (upon discovering
implants and other advanced materials in 1952) that it would be deadly
to make any of the tech confidential.
And I think that he was spot on when he said that someday we will
have to cry “Auditors of the world arise, you have nothing to lose but
your certs” (auditors certificates).
For the last decade, I have been researching on my own, trying to
carry the subject on to its next stage.
No subject has ever been researched completely by a single
individual, nor has two ever been enough.
Its an ongoing process and the number of great names connected with
even a single practical area such as electricity is enormous.
For all this time, I have kept quiet and supported the existing
organization because I could offer nothing better.
Now, however, its time to blow the lid off and give you everything I’ve
got.
The first document in this series will shoot heavily at the existing
organization.
This is unfortunately necessary because there is so much wrong and
the lies and overts block the road to truth.
Certainly the anti-cultists will have a field day.
But my goal is to bring about a reform rather than the destruction of the
subject.
I am remaining anonymous at this time because I expect a severe
knee jerk reaction from the organization.
It’s bitter medicine for them to swallow and they may lash out.
But I expect that time will temper this, so my only purpose in
remaining anonymous is to stay out of sight until things cool down a
little. This will interfere with people sending me mail on the internet,
but I will try to watch for general postings on the net which mention
3
the “Pilot” in their message headers and will try to answer any
reasonable questions that are posted.
This is not an attempt to duck any responsibility. I will let you know
who I am eventually, just give it some time. I am making these
materials freely available on the internet despite the tremendous
amount of work that has gone into researching them and writing them
up because the existing examples of what can happen to a spiritual
subject when it is used to generate income is enough to make my
flesh crawl. I ask only that you try to make the entire set of documents
available rather than simply copying around document #1 which is a
bit of an expose. I think it would be unfair to put out that much criticism
without offering the positive materials that are in the remaining
documents.
Also, the full set of documents, or at least #2 through #4, are necessary
to convince the tech trained loyalists that reform is indeed possible and
necessary.
The auditors and case supervisors are the high priests of the subject
and if they can be turned around, then the rest of the membership will
follow.
International management will have no choice but to go along.
For those who wish to destroy the subject, I would point out that it
never works to persecute a religion.
The faith and fanaticism always grow stronger.
The only workable course is to change it into something better.
In this I ask your help in keeping these materials available and helping
to spread them to the loyalists. Let Scientology become what it
pretends to be, a learning center for spiritual growth instead of a cult of
greed and power.
I am not trying to promote a new subject or start a freezone
organization.
I have no personal vested interest in this.
I’m just giving this stuff away.
If I receive any exchange for doing this, it will be in inspiring others to
do research which will aid me in my own efforts.
4
I don’t think that I (or anyone else, including LRH) can go the entire
route alone.
I don’t think that there is any serious leagal liability in posting this or
putting it up on the web.
I need to remain hidden because it is a suppressive act (per policy) to
attempt to reform the subject.
Its hard to reform from within if you’re officially kicked out.
Also there is a slight chance that I might be placed in physical danger if
my identity were exposed before any storm that I might be raising has
a chance to settle out. Those outside of the subject might not think so,
but some in management might consider this to be the most
dangerous threat that they have ever faced because their own
supporters might turn on them.
For any of my friends who might be in the middle of some Scientology
level when they get ahold of these documents, I wish to warn them
that they might want to finish what they are doing first before they
plow into these materials.
First of all, I believe that some of the things that I have found are
considerably more advanced that anything being used currently in
Scientology.
And secondly, I believe that it is necessary to be totally unconstrained
in discussing material that has been labeled confidential.
Also, for anyone reading the internet it is a bit silly to worry about the
confidentiality because almost all of the OT platens, clearing course
materials, and full NOTs auditors packs have been flying around on-line
for quite some time now and a free and sensible discussion is liable to
cool things down rather than stir them up.
I think that one of the major factors that dragged Ron down in the end
was that he cut his own communication lines when he made the
materials confidential.
Until then, he was continually talking to his students (on the Briefing
Course in the 1960s and in the Advanced Clinical Courses (ACCs) in the
1950s) and this probably acted to some degree like an auditing
session, allowing the mental charge of what he was researching to
flow away from him.
5
When he cut that line, it backed up on him.
This was a sad fate for someone who truly loved to talk and lecture.
I apologize for the fact that these files are very big.
There is a lot of material.
The contents are as follows:
6
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS AND WHAT ISN’T TRUE ABOUT SCIENTOLOGY
This document attempts to confront various things which are wrong
with Scientology. It is not idle natter or an unjustified viscous attack. I
believe in the stated goals of the subject and wish to see them
achieved. To some degree, the subject has become its own worst
enemy and this needs to be handled so that forward progress can be
made. It would be wrong of me to simply shoot without offering
something positive as well. For this reason, I ask that anyone making
this document available to others should also include the remaining,
more positively oriented, documents in this series.
WHAT IS:
That Hubbard was a self educated intuitive genius capable of
great leaps of inductive logic.
WHAT ISN’T:
The supposedly thorough research.
It did not happen that way.
LRH assumed that if something worked once, it would work
again. He wanted to learn what he could from it and then go on to
something else.
Once the early Dianetic boom petered out, he was generally only
teaching small classes of 10 to 20 advanced students and they
jumped from one process to the next like jackrabbits. The
techniques of one month were old in the next. The collection
and codification of this material was left to others.
Later, when there were thousands of practitioners, there was no
room left for criticism of his words. He accepted little feedback
from the field.
In later days, backwards rundowns would be in use for years
before any hint of failure filtered back up to the top.
WHAT IS:
7
Scientology is a study of the mind and spirit.
WHAT ISN’t: Scientology has not really earned its claims of being a
science.
It might best be described as an “alchemy” sitting on the border
between superstition and real understanding.
Scientology works often but not always.
The discrepancies are forced to fit by “Making it go right” and the
failures are blamed on “out-Ethics” and hidden under the carpet
least they blacken the reputation of the subject and thereby deny
freedom to all mankind.
This is a fanatical rather than a scientific approach.
WHAT IS:
A science is the work of many individuals, each working
independently.
Hopefully there would be a free interchange of ideas but
progress can occur even when this is absent.
For example, Edison and Tesla were notorious enemies and yet
the electricity in our homes depends heavily on both of their
discoveries (Edison for the lights and motors and Tesla for the
generators and transmission system).
Progress does not come from committees.
Ideas, inventions, techniques, and discoveries do indeed
originate from singular and individual sources. I have been on
software design committees that achieved less than any of the
individual members could have done alone.
But this does not mean that everything comes from one single
source.
WHAT ISN’T:
A complete science has never been originated exclusively by a
single individual.
8
In attempting to deny any possibility of other researchers,
Hubbard has barred the road more thoroughly than any of the
closed minds who reject the very existence of a spirit.
WHAT IS:
The original foundations of Dianetics was in regression therapy.
Ron made improvements, but the majority of the valuable
enhancements came out in later years and are the valid product
of years of running engrams on people.
WHAT ISN’T:
The research line of regression therapy was never followed up
properly by the professionals in psychotherapy.
The problem was that regression therapy will quickly open up
past lives.
This made it obviously false to anyone who had the average
scientist’s anti-religious bias.
In modern times, this prejudice has faded and you will find some
psychotherapists practicing regression therapy, and it is almost
always referred to as past life regression because that is what it
inevitably leads to.
I doubt that Ron knew about this “bug” in regression therapy
when he was writing DMSMH (Dianetics the Modern Science of
Mental Health). He certainly doesn’t mention it in the book and in
his early lectures and taped demonstrations (1950), he forces the
PCs (Preclears) into prenatal incidents as a solution to the inability
to find basic incidents in the current lifetime.
These prenatal incidents almost never show up in modern
Dianetics and can safely be discounted as trivial and unimportant
in most cases.
This puts the entire Dianetics book in a bad light as far as any
claims to producing real results or having been researched
thoroughly.
Actually it was probably a lucky break for us (except for those
who hate the subject) that he didn’t do extensive research before
9
he wrote the popular book and found himself committed to a
supposedly invalidated technique.
He opened his eyes, accepted the past lives, and ran with it.
WHAT IS:
Many of the ideas and techniques in Scientology stem from
earlier sources.
Ron would say this quite freely in the early days.
The Dianetic breakthrough into past lives (which strips away all
the usual BS about everybody having been Cleopatra that comes
up in many mystical circles) provided an organizing point (a
stable datum) around which all the existing data in metaphysics
and philosophy could be aligned.
Scientology was originally a system for separating the wheat
from the chaff (see the 1952 lecture “Scientology: Milestone
One”).
Ron pulled together stuff out of everything from General
Semantics and Magic to Krishnamurti and the Tibetan materials.
He distilled out the essence of what he saw as true, discarded the
old superstitions that were mingled in, and pulled it together into
what he considered to be a cohesive whole.
Even as late as 1955 he talked about himself as being the great
organizer rather than an originator.
From magic and Crowley he deduces that the one thing they
were doing that worked was to practice clearly visualizing the
effect of a spell before trying to cast it so as to avoid the spell
going wrong and backfiring.
Ron realized that when these spells work, it was this visualization
and “The Will” which created the success rather than the mumbojumbo
rituals.
He distills this down to the mockup processing which is the
mainstay of the Philadelphia Doctorate Course and he refines
Crowly’s idea of “Will” into a much more clearly defined concept
of “Intention”.
10
Early in this century, self hypnosis and auto-suggestion were in
vogue and according to the unauthorized biographies, Ron
jumped on the bandwagon with his “affirmations”.
This makes total sense because if you drop out the hypnosis
(which Ron turned his back on fairly early) and evolve the
concept into its highest imaginable form, you find yourself with
the Scientology concept of making postulates.
And that’s quite a step above positive thinking (which also
evolved out of auto-suggestion).
You’ll find the “Yoga of the psychic heat” (see Evan’s “Tibetan
Yoga and Secret Doctrines”) in a vastly improved form among the
Route 1 drills in Creation of Human Ability and you’ll find that the
“Meditation on a Breathing Object” is the forerunner of TR0. But
the improvements made are vast and show real brilliance.
He got very good at this over the years.
WHAT ISN’T:
The subject of Scientology did not spring out of thin air.
Hubbard didn’t come from some advanced Galactic Civilization to
teach us poor yokels.
This is a weird idea that has gained popularity on the dumb
rumor line within the subject.
Of course he jokingly says that he’s not from this planet, but
neither is anybody else according to Scientology theory.
He certainly never says that the subject came from off planet.
In fact he says the exact opposite.
The subject evolved.
It must continue to evolve.
WHAT IS:
The Mind’s Protection.
11
If you read or talk about something, or even if you engage in
consciousness raising techniques or processes, it is nearly
impossible to do any lasting harm.
If an idea is too dangerous to the person’s current mental state,
he will tune it out, misunderstand it, or simply consider it to be
ridiculous.
“They have ears that hear not” is basically a protective
mechanism, and it works. LRH was a strong proponent of this
idea.
WHAT ISN’T:
The mind’s protection does not work in the presence of duress
or high pressure techniques.
Brainwashing, hypnotism, and even the implants (electronic
implantation of hypnotic commands as done in advanced space
traveling cultures found in past life incidents) described in the
Scientology literature illustrate this quite clearly.
Sea Org training techniques intentionally bypassed the mind’s
protection and made robots.
Consider, for example, the early FEBC (Flag Executive Briefing
Course) students studying with poor food and sleep in a
dangerous environment (Ethics etc.) under heavy time and peer
pressure with literal minded instructors and occasional bouts of
physical duress (“run around the deck 10 times”). Listening to the
course tapes in a reasonable environment, you might actually
learn something from them.
But most of the original students came back crazy as loons and
acted like dramatizing psychotics.
Most auditing is light enough in its methods that the mind’s
protection concept is effective and keeps you from doing any
long term damage.
The rule against evaluating for the PreClear and telling him what
to think rules out many of the potentially dangerous pressures
that could be brought to bear.
But there are exceptions.
12
The most notable is listing techniques where the PC gives
answers to a listing question (such as “What do you use to make
others wrong”) in an effort to find “The Real Answer”.
When the PC finds the correct answer, the auditor gives it back to
him indicating that it is the correct answer.
The technique is very powerful and can produce fantastic results.
But the auditor can make a mistake and jam a wrong answer
down the PCs throat.
The questions are generally so hot and the answers of such
importance that this puts significant pressure on the PC and the
mind’s protection idea ceases to work.
Goofing this up can make the PC worse.
There was an HCOB (Hubbard Communication Office Bulletin) to
this effect at one time but it dived out of sight and is not in the
Tech Volumes.
WHAT IS:
The lower level grades of release can produce marvelous
results.
The grades 0 to 4 address communication, problems, overts,
upsets, and fixed ideas.
This was probably the cleanest and most thorough research
done in the subject.
WHAT ISN’T:
These grades were not well planned out and designed. Instead,
they evolved on a hit or miss basis.
They began as a hodge-podge of processes that handled things
that Hubbard kept running into while trying to research the areas
that he was really interested in.
Eventually he packaged these up into the grades in 1965.
13
But there were errors and mistaken assumptions and it wasn’t
until the 1970s that these were knocked around into a really
workable form.
Much of the compilation and even the process commands were
put together by others and apparently not even reviewed by
Ron because years later he was shocked at one of the processes
being used (a particular grade 4 technique) and issued a bulletin
saying that it was a dumb idea.
WHAT IS:
These grades do work (unless grossly misapplied) to produce a
state of release on the topic addressed so that the person not
only feels better about the specific thing handled but also
becomes free of the accumulated weight of the entire topic. For
example, problems are handled until the mass of past problems
that he is still carrying around suddenly falls away and leaves him
much relieved.
WHAT ISN’T: The grade releases are known to be unstable.
What was handled generally remains handled, but the extra effect
of being free on the entire subject (e.g. can make problems
vanish at will etc.) is a temporary condition.
The area is not actually erased, it is only “keyed-out”.
If it later “keys-in” again, more processing is needed to rehabilitate
the release.
WHAT IS:
Ron believed that the “reactive mind” underlied the grades of
release and that when it was erased by going clear, the
underlying source of these grades would be gone and they
would be automatically erased as a consequence.
WHAT ISN’T:
This is obviously incorrect.
All auditing sessions begin with handling any problems, upsets,
etc. that have newly arisen.
This is done even on Clears and OTs.
14
You can see the effect of a grade release in that the PC doesn’t
come up with new problems for awhile after a problems release
etc., but they certainly come up with them eventually even if the
person is Clear or on the upper OT levels.
WHAT IS:
The latest effort to explain why a clear has problems is to blame
it on OT III or NOTs.
WHAT ISN’T:
Again this is a mistake, and a bad one.
The person is the source of their own problems.
There is nothing on the upper levels which shows them to be a
primary source and there is plenty of material on the grades
themselves which logically speaking could be viewed as a
primary source for aberration. The person does become free of
problems by running Grade I and he does not do so by running
OT III.
WHAT IS:
The theory of the grades is stand alone and does not include
anything which requires the prior existence of engrams,
implants, entities, or anything else.
The grades contain factors which could be operative on a godlike
thetan who was incapable of being hurt whereas things such
as implants and engrams require that the being has already sunk
low enough to be kicked around. The idea of an upset god wildly
committing overts is quite common and probably rests on real
buried memories.
WHAT ISN’T:
We’ve got it backwards.
The grades are the ultimate OT levels.
They are what was really wrong in the first place. Nobody in
Scientology has ever erased the basic material on these grades.
15
Total cause over communications would include the ability to
acknowledge a speeding bullet and have it vanish.
WHAT IS:
All that other stuff on the upper levels is there to be audited out.
But it’s minor stuff.
A mere distraction which is in the way of getting to the basics on
the grades.
WHAT ISN’T:
It is not practical to try and erase the grades at lower levels.
People are nowhere near being able to reach the original
problems, overts, etc. which they had when they were early
god-like beings and which caused them to postulate their own
downfall.
They can’t even visualize the multi-dimensional realities that had
to be present early on.
They are fixated on an Earth-like three dimensional existence and
you can only expect so much of them.
So the right approach would be to get a release on the grades
(the basic aberrations), then fool around with all the other stuff to
get it out of the way and raise the guy’s awareness, and then get
back to the grade materials and really erase them in the basic
area of his past existence.
WHAT IS:
There is a state of Clear.
It might be described as regaining control over painful mental
pictures.
Even the psychiatrists recognize that a person can get flashbacks
of a violent incident.
It is attained either by gradually accustoming the PC to recalling
painful incidents (as in Dianetics) or by repetitive spotting of
commands implanted with heavy force eons ago (as is done on
16
the Clearing Course) until the person can confront the force in
mental pictures without being bothered by it.
WHAT ISN’T:
The wild ideas and sales talk about the state of clear in
Scientology is mainly advertising and wishful thinking. The
description of a Clear in the Dianetics book is an impossible
condition since it assumes perfect recall etc. in one lifetime
without any spiritual awareness or knowledge of earlier lives.
It was never possible.
If you extend the definition out into the realm of Scientology and
expect full recall across the whole course of a being’s existence,
then we are talking about an ultimate super OT condition that
Scientology is nowhere near achieving at this time, but which
might be the ultimate target that we are working towards.
WHAT IS:
There is a CofS policy to the effect that invalidating the state of
clear is a suppressive act.
WHAT ISN’T:
The shortcomings of the definition of clear are not generally
talked about among Scientologists and nobody dares say
anything to mitigate unrestrained sales hype on the subject
because that might well get them kicked out.
People who have gone clear know what they did and didn’t get
from it but keep their mouths shut because it really is a
wonderful state despite its limitations.
The unfortunate side effect is that many who do achieve the state
then look at the definition and invalidate themselves because
they don’t match up to what the book says. And so they have an
entire auditing rundown (the CCRD - Clear Certainty Rundown) to
cure the harm done by this wrong information.
WHAT IS:
The clear cognition is the awareness that the individual is
mocking up his own bank (reactive mind) and pictures.
17
WHAT ISN’T:
Knowing this in the abstract is not the same as being aware of
and in control of it.
The cognition is not confidential and is mentioned often on Ron’s
Tapes.
It is generally helpful for someone who is not clear to know it
because it encourages them to take control over their reactive
mind.
It was common knowledge among most Scientologists in the
1960s.
When they started letting people attest to Dianetic Clear, there
was a technical bulletin saying not to push people into falsely
attesting to the state by feeding them the Clear cog.
This is commonly (but not always) misinterpreted to mean that
the cog is confidential and so the cog has ceased to be common
knowledge among lower level Scientology public.
WHAT IS:
The Church’s polices on confidentiality of upper level materials
are quite drastic.
Lose a piece of confidential paper and you may be disbarred
from upper levels for life.
Breath a word of it in casual conversation, even with others who
have done the level, or forget to lock a briefcase, and you may
be doing a substantial amends project.
WHAT ISN’T:
The policy isn’t successful except to harass their loyal members
and generate a big mystery.
Back in the 1950s, Ron used to talk jokingly about the cults which
kept big hidden secrets in their inner sanctums so as to keep the
bucks flowing. Just check out the introduction to Dianetics 55
(“Secrets, Secrets, Secrets) for a sample of this.
18
As far as keeping anything out of the hands of their enemies, the
confidentiality seems to have caused a publishing boom in
unauthorized copies.
WHAT IS:
In the early days, when Ron was digging up material on implants,
issuing OT drills, and even coming up with early versions of the
NOTs techniques (1952-1953), some of the students asked if this
stuff should be confidential and he said that it must not be made
confidential and hidden because then it will fall into the wrong
hands and be used against people who are unaware of it. He said
that the only safety was to shout this stuff from the rooftops and
publish it broadly.
The only real danger is in keeping it secret.
WHAT ISN’T:
The horrible danger of seeing the confidential materials without
proper preparation.
It just doesn’t happen that way. The mind’s protection is at
maximum when somebody is safely reading something on their
own.
You can sometimes get somebody sick by jamming this stuff
down their throats, but that’s true of force feeding any
Scientology process or, for that matter, the techniques of other
practices as well.
WHAT IS:
The idea that entities are the source of bank, aberrations, and
somatics is currently believed in the upper levels of the Church.
Ron certainly ranted and raved enough about it in the Class VIII
Course lectures and he theorized it as the source of somatics.
WHAT ISN’T:
This is totally contrary to all basic Scientology theory.
The whole reason that auditing works is that the person himself
is generating all of his own ills.
19
WHAT IS:
There is a benefit to running NOTs.
The BTs (body thetans - entities) get in the way.
They are a bit like a boat anchor that makes it difficult to build up
any horsepower.
They will amplify your pains and aberrations.
But they are never the source.
They are not worth bothering about while you have things to
handle which are closer to home (such as problems, upsets, etc.)
but eventually they need to be knocked out of the way.
Blaming stuff on these guys is the exact reason that the org has
trouble if a PC finds out about them at lower levels.
It’s a license to blame somebody else for your overts and
problems and that has always been known (at least in
Scientology) to be a sure way to get worse.
WHAT ISN’T:
Most of the BTs are not independent beings.
That is simply a mistaken idea.
We all put pieces of ourselves on each other.
Joe puts a bit of himself on Bill to keep Bill in line. Parents will
instinctively shove a bit of themselves into their kids to keep tabs
on them.
The child would find these as “BT”s.
The big mass implants were to make us do this compulsively
and unconsciously so as to keep each other obedient and
human.
The implants didn’t reduce the population at all.
WHAT IS:
20
The solo nots technique is simple and useful.
Everybody should know that you ask “What are you”/”Who are
you” if an entity of some sort does pop up, and to encourage
them to answer “Me” until they do so and stop fooling around
with mocking themselves up as demons or whatever.
This stuff does show up on rare occasions at lower levels, and
the org leaves you stumbling around in the dark when an easy
trick would handle it.
WHAT ISN’T:
The idea of handling court cases by fooling around with the
opponent’s BTs at a distance was ridiculous.
Maybe it would have worked if entities really were the source of
all aberration, but they’re only a minor factor.
The auditors would have been better off visiting enemies in their
sleep and trying to give them nightmares.
But Ron used to joke about his students doing that to him, he just
though it was funny and not very effective.
As a little aside, there is also an old Tibetan technique for
handling demons.
This is from the Book of the Dead.
If a demon shows up to scare you, you mock yourself up as an
even bigger and more horrible demon and scare him right back.
If you really get in trouble with an entity of some sort haunting
you, this does work as a last resort.
Its not very nice so don’t use it without just cause.
WHAT IS:
The idea that if the specific details of implants were not kept
confidential, they would be used in advertising etc.
This was being spread about as one of the reasons for
confidentiality.
21
WHAT ISN’T:
It’s just not an important point.
Madison avenue has already found all the hottest buttons on
people.
They would laugh at using Scientology’s stuff for this.
If you find some really early implants, you will often find Gorillas,
Tigers, Bears, Planes, Trains, Automobiles, etc.
These are the hottest buttons. That’s why this universe is so
solid.
Its all around us.
Madison Ave. might not know about implants, but they sure do
know about the key buttons and they push them with great
vigor.
By this time, we have become so thick skinned that we just
shrug this stuff off with hardly a quiver.
By the way, the hotter TV commercials are good ways to spot
implanted buttons.
The advertisers do all the surveys for you and then you just
notice what item had to have been implanted for the
commercials to work.
For example, “To be everybody” is not very hot as a sales
button but “To be just like everyone else” is pretty good and is a
popular underlying button in advertisements.
Guess which one has the bigger kick on an E-meter.
Of course the opposite was also implanted (implants often use
positive/negative pairs) so that “To be different” is also a hot sales
button and implant item.
WHAT IS:
XENU (or XEMU) is a bad guy mentioned in the confidential
literature.
22
He’s a villain comparable to Hitler except that he had a higher
level of technology to kick people around with.
WHAT ISN’T:
Scientologists who have done OT III don’t have any particular
flinch at this guy.
Its not like you’re talking about Satan or some evil god who can
reach out and get you.
He was just a bad guy.
The flinch that you see when the “dreaded” name comes up is
not fear of Xemu.
It is fear of Ethics.
I would not be surprised if you saw an OT turn green at the
mention of him.
But it’s visions of being put on thousands of hours of amends
projects or being permanently barred from upper levels that is
scaring him.
WHAT IS:
Ron was all excited about writing and filming a popular movie
about Xemu.
It showed him (Xemu) shipping all the malcontents and minorities
to Earth and then bombing the volcanoes and ended with the
brave fight of the loyal officers to bring Xemu to justice.
It centered around a particular loyal officer and (for a sexy
heroine) a movie starlet who find out about the plot but are too
late to stop it.
But they lead the revolution that overthrows Xemu.
Of course there is no mention of BTs or past lives.
The story is presented as a record left for future civilizations on
Earth so they can know what happened when the dinosaurs died
out.
23
It is found by archeologists or something like that and shown to
the president of the US who promptly has it destroyed.
WHAT ISN’T:
This movie, which was called “Revolt in the Stars”, apparently
isn’t going to be made.
There was an unsuccessful attempt to film it in the late 70s and a
second try (which I think never got past the financing stage) in the
early 80s.
The screenplay circulated quite widely, being given out to
anyone who they were trying to talk into taking a share in the
financing. In the late 80s the SO got scared about this film (I can
hardly imagine why) and started trying to gather up all the copies
and jumping on anyone who had ever had their hands on the
screenplay.
Maybe their attitude will change eventually.
It wasn’t a bad screenplay.
Nowhere near as good as “Total Recall” but better than “The
Black Hole”.
Maybe with all the ARS publicity (the alt.religion.scientology
newsgroup on the internet) it would do better if it was retitled
“XENU, The Movie”.
I think LRH would have liked that.
WHAT IS:
There are all sorts of parody’s of Xemu and various OT levels
floating around on the net.
WHAT ISN’T:
I can’t see the harm in this.
Not only is it funny, but it helps you get exterior to the whole
mess.
By placing such fantastic importance on a few incidents and
making them confidential, and furthermore loading them all with
24
tons of sales hype, we have actually created a great deal of
mental charge on this stuff and given it more power than it has.
A few jokes can blow off this artificially built up charge and get
the whole thing in perspective.
I particularly liked the parody of Incident One where a Ford
Mustang comes out and turns right, then left, followed by the
sounds of Snap, Crackle, and Pop, and then the being is
overwhelmed by waves of soggy Rice Crispies.
WHAT IS:
There is a Scientology policy against jokers and degraders issued
around 1969 or 70.
It basically makes it a suppressive act to make fun of the subject.
WHAT ISN’T:
This is not a good policy.
Humor is more than just entertainment.
The ability to laugh at ourselves is a mechanism for social
change.
It is one of the few ways to relieve charge outside of auditing.
It even works on groups, and relieving group charge has always
been one of our biggest problems in Scientology.
WHAT IS:
There used to be many jokes within the organization.
We enjoyed laughing at ourselves.
How many OTs does it take to change a light bulb?
Seven.
One to hold the light bulb and six to turn the universe around it.
25
One of our layout artists once made up an ad about how the R6
course enlarged breasts, complete with before and after
pictures.
She pasted this into a ladies magazine in a vary professional
manner and we used to hand it to unsuspecting students and
staff members and tell them to look at the exciting new ad from
St. Hill (the advanced training center in England).
One time we drew up an org board (Scientology organization
chart) for a Scientology whorehouse.
The examiner would check that the “session” went OK.
There would be success stories, etc.
We figured that it would be light years beyond the competition.
There were slogans like “The Golden Age of Standard Screwing”.
WHAT ISN’T:
This kind of stuff is now forbidden.
That, all by itself, I consider to be a key characteristic of a
suppressive group.
WHAT IS:
There are “group engrams” discussed in the early tech. Ron saw
that groups did have many of the characteristics of individuals
and could be bent out of shape by external impacts (or for that
matter by committing overts etc.).
WHAT ISN’T:
All attempts at group engram running failed.
Ron finally concluded that it couldn’t be done with the existing
technology.
He never got back to this topic and its still an area that is in
desperate need of research.
As a stopgap measure, he offered the idea of writing honest
histories as the best way of blowing group charge.
26
At one time he considered this to be of tremendous importance
in keeping a group sane and true to its original goals.
Now, unfortunately, the real stories of what happened are hidden
and buried under a tidal wave of PR.
WHAT IS:
To publish or even say anything publicly about Scientology, a
Scientologist must first get “Issue Authority”.
This doesn’t apply to talking to friends, which is dissemination,
but it does apply to anything which reaches the public at large.
This was the way it was in the sixties and seventies.
They might call it something else now.
One guy I know was all excited about Scientology and planned to
give a little speech about it as part of a presentation he was doing
at a computer conference and was stopped by the GO (this was
late 1970s).
Someone like Travolta would have to rehearse and clear exactly
what he was going to say about the subject before making any
statement on TV.
But sometimes if they trust the guy’s judgment (and maybe put
him through some training) they will give someone a blanket OK
to say things publicly, but even then the ethics officer will be
looking over his shoulder to be sure that no out-ethics occurs,
and anything that puts the subject in a bad light is considered to
be out-ethics.
WHAT ISN’T:
There isn’t a lot of real communication from
Scientologists on the internet.
Of course they will let an innocent beginner blabber about how
wonderful it all is and there are real professionals hatted up to
handle the internet, but anyone else better be careful what they
say or they’ll end up in Ethics. You might still have a gutsy OT
who takes his chances, but it would be rare.
27
Also, since there is NOTS material on the internet, anyone who
has not already started NOTS would be risking terrible amends
projects or disbarment by reading ARS.
WHAT IS:
The book “What is Scientology” and the other stuff that has been
put up at the church’s website obviously has issue authority.
Therefore any member will be allowed to freely copy and
spread this stuff around.
I’m talking now about internal Church policies rather than
copyright laws.
WHAT ISN’T:
They can’t normally say anything else.
Even quoting an innocuous line from a technical bulletin might
get one in deep trouble.
Getting issue authority used to take many months and endless
hassles and arguments.
It puts a big stop on the communications.
Their horrible spam (flooding the newsgroup with messages to
drown out the opposition and break the communication line)
might actually have been interesting and of use to some people if
they had dumped megabytes of real material (maybe tape
transcripts) onto the internet.
There are about 3000 hours of taped lectures and most of them
have been transcribed.
They could have gone on for weeks without ever repeating
themselves.
Instead, they couldn’t say anything worthwhile and had to keep
repeating quotes from that shallow book which isn’t even by Ron
and is hardly more than a collection of sales hype.
WHAT IS:
Some of LRH’s most famous lines were “When In Doubt,
Communicate” and “Communication is the Universal Solvent”.
28
WHAT ISN’T:
Current policy apparently frowns on applying this. But as is often
the case, Ron’s early statement was correct and the later policy is
self-destructive.
They have been trying to stop communications on the internet
and it has been rebounding against them badly.
But they are not all stupid, and some of them know the early
tech. I believe that there has been an internal push for many
months now to give at least a few trustworthy OTs a blanket OK
to really talk on the internet.
The terrible failure of the existing effort to handle the net by
spamming (which lead to all sorts of “horrible” consequences
such as the Xenu message headers etc.) has probably caused
enough of an upheaval internally that this OK may have been
issued.
I believe that this is the status of “Clear Baby” who has shown up
on the internet lately.
I don’t know for sure, but she does seem to be communicating
rather freely without looking out for the Ethics officer.
People like this will probably communicate honestly as long as
you don’t push them too hard on delicate issues or try to pull the
Church’s withholds.
They might not even know anything about Flag Orders or the
Church’s internal operations.
If OSA was smart, they gave this OK to devoted public rather
than SO staff and are trusting to the person’s love of the subject
rather than trying to control the communication.
(Update: Clear Baby’s identity was exposed and she now seems
to be headed for the freezone).
Needless to say, I don’t have any such OK.
If you said the kind of stuff within the Church that I’ve been
saying here, you’d be in
Ethics the next day.
29
That would happen even if you only said it in a confessional,
nothing to say of blabbing it all over the internet.
WHAT IS:
In the old days, Ron was basically honest with his course
students.
Occasionally he exaggerated or got carried away with himself or
downplayed something, but he was not busily concocting lies or
making up stories.
WHAT ISN’T:
The various little biographical sketches placed in the books were
highly inaccurate and were not written by Ron. His overt was in
ignoring all the stuff that his staff was putting out.
He really didn’t care what they told the public. He was annoyed at
society for ignoring his big discoveries and saw himself in
competition with the heavy outpouring of false advertisement
from big business.
The “Story of Dianetics and Scientology” tape that is available at
the Scientology website is just one example of what he would
really say to his students.
Of course he shows himself in a good light, but he doesn’t make
false claims about having a degree in Nuclear Physics either.
Quite the opposite.
Concerning that silly Nuclear Physics degree, someone in the
org’s PR department got the Academy of Scientology to issue
an honorary degree in Nuclear Physics to Ron when they put out
the Radiation book.
He thought it was very funny and makes jokes about it with the
students in his next lecture.
Concerning “Snake” Thompson (the unauthorized biographies
claim that he was made up by Ron), the guy really did exist and
he wrote a book called “The Navy Operations Manual on
Psychoanalysis”.
30
It was used in the Navy in WW2 and is probably the underlying
source for the popular picture of pleasant and sensible Freudian
analysts in the military which we get from shows like “MASH”.
It was a very good and practical book and was reprinted as a
popular paperback in the late 1950s.
I think it even uses phrases like “This is an operation manual for
the human mind” and includes techniques on regression therapy
etc.
I had a copy back around 1963 and it was the best book on
psychoanalysis that I have ever read.
Unfortunately, it was tossed along with loads of other psych
books when I became fanatically inspired by LRH tech a few
years later.
If I’d known, I’d have hung on to it.
In the book, the commander discusses studying with Freud in
Vienna and then going to various military bases in Asia to
experiment with the techniques.
I think that the timing was right for Ron to bump into him while
sailing back to the US.
The org doesn’t seem to be digging out this book and holding it
up to prove Ron’s story.
Perhaps it has a bit too much of early Dianetics in it.
Or more likely, he got the guy’s name wrong. It has been over 30
years since I read the book and I’m not sure but it could have
been by Commander Thomas something or other (“Snake” is
obviously a nickname).
The org wouldn’t dare bring it up if Ron misremembered the
man’s name since a Clear should have perfect recall and since
Ron was supposed to have studied with him instead of simply
talking with him a bit (and maybe getting a copy of his book)
during a long sea voyage.
WHAT IS:
31
The unauthorized biographies of LRH are generally accurate as to
verifiable facts but are badly slanted in terms of the stories they
contain.
Much of the material came from people who were very upset
and pissed off at Ron and Scientology.
They often had been abused and mistreated, but this makes
them a very biased source and there is a tendency to
exaggerate, make up things, and only tell one side of the story.
WHAT ISN’T:
The SO can’t really correct any of the inaccuracies or tell the other
side of any of the stories because then they would have to admit
all the bad things that really did happen.
Let’s take, for example, Otto Roos’ story about Ron demanding to
see his own PC folders.
Its not quite right.
Ron ordered that his PC folders be taken away from Otto and
carried to the Qual Sec (the Scientology name for the chief of
quality control in a Scientology organization) for her to examine
rather than looking at them himself.
You might not think this is a big point but it is of significance to
church members because the inaccurate story makes Ron seem
hypocritical (PCs aren’t supposed to look at their own folders).
However, Ron did indeed punch Otto and he did indeed have
Rock Slam type discreditable meter reads (he freely talks about
this on earlier Briefing Course tapes) and the org doesn’t want to
confirm any of that.
WHAT IS:
In later times (1970s), Ron was notorious for his screaming rages.
WHAT ISN’T:
This was not purely reactive.
He had it firmly under control.
32
There are many stories where somebody else would walk by
and Ron would break off in mid-yell to give them a soft and
pleasant “Hello, how are you” before jacking the decibels back up
and resuming the attack.
I don’t think this was a good way to handle people.
It was based on a mistaken idea that you handle other people’s
bank (meaning the reactive bank or reactive mind) by exerting
more force at them than the bank does.
He would never have said that in the early days.
Force begets force and causes the target to key-in more heavily.
If force helped people, police states would be therapeutic.
This wrong idea was simply his way of justifying to himself that
he was correct in launching these tirades.
Here we see the real difference between a cleared and an
uncleared individual.
Before clear, the rage would have been a stimulus response
blind rage that was out of control.
After clear, it is all quite conscious and supposedly well thought
out and is actually under the individual’s control.
None the less, the desire to throw that shrieking fit is not at all
handled by going clear, and the impulse is quite abberated.
In this case, I see the aberrations as coming from the mental
charge that was bypassed by making errors in researching what,
after all, is one of the most difficult subjects to figure out correctly.
WHAT IS:
The first Clear to graduate the clearing course in the mid-1960s
was John MacMasters (affectionately refereed to as “John Mac”).
He had had cancer and had his stomach removed and was told
that he only had a year to live back around 1960.
He responded by getting into Scientology and auditing and
training as hard as he could and was in much better shape and
even capable of eating real food instead of gruel by the late 60s.
33
He used to go around on world tours promoting Scientology and
the clearing course.
WHAT ISN’T:
He didn’t like the Sea Org.
They mistreated him. He had other interests.
They called this “other intention-ness” and tried to put him in
lower ethics conditions.
He walked out. They declared him suppressive.
He had been a known homosexual, but they could not use this
directly at that time because there were many homosexuals in
Scientology.
So instead, they declared him for putting himself in a position
where he could be blackmailed (supposedly for being a secret
homosexual even though that was an “everybody knows”
situation) because they didn’t want to talk about his real reasons
for leaving.
This was sometime in the early 70s.
Later he became very bitter and said nasty things about his
earlier experiences with Hubbard, but in the 1965-68 period he
really loved the subject and would do anything for Ron.
The love turned to hate after too much contact with later Sea Org
craziness and that’s what we hear in his later statements.
He did well for quite awhile after leaving, but eventually he
passed away.
He used to talk about how he really wanted to drop his surgically
mutilated body and go find a teenager in a coma in a hospital
(because the thetan would have left) and pick right up again
without all the troubles of having to reincarnate as a baby.
WHAT IS:
The CofS is currently anti-homosexual.
Practicing homosexuals are currently blocked from upper levels.
34
WHAT ISN’T:
This was not the case until sometime in the 1980s. The only
early reference by Ron was that thetans basically don’t have a
sex (there aren’t male and female thetans).
It was believed that people became homosexual due to mental
charge of some sort (such as a bad incident that might need to be
run out), but when this charge was removed, they tended to
become bi-sexual (no longer blocked from heterosexual relations)
rather than abandoning homosexuality.
There was even an idea circulating among staff in the 1960s that
everyone should try a homosexual experience once just to get
your TRs in on it (in other words, get your confront up on it).
I know a few who tried it on this basis, and even one girl who
decided that she liked being gay better.
However, most of us (including myself) felt that just because you
hadn’t screwed a gorilla, it didn’t mean that you had to go and do
it just to get your TRs in.
Even so, the place was liberal and safe for alternative lifestyles.
The idea of removing mental charge was that nobody would be
prejudiced or much bothered by anything as long as no one was
getting hurt.
WHAT IS:
The Sea Org is currently pushing a very conservative sexual
morality.
SO members can be put into liability (a lower ethics condition
with amends projects etc.) for sleeping with someone outside of
marriage.
WHAT ISN’T:
This is again the reverse of the early attitude which was
exceedingly liberal.
Basically, there were no rules until the 1965 policy “Student’s
guide to acceptable behavior” and the sexual rules in this were
canceled in 1967 by the policy “New Second Dynamic Rules” (the
35
first dynamic is self, the second dynamic is sex/family/children,
the third dynamic is groups, etc.) which says there are no rules
except that ethics can hold you responsible if you mess up
somebody’s case.
Sometime in the 1970s, a Flag Order came out forbidding extramarital
sex by SO members.
This was probably issued originally for reasons of PR, but since
they are under these restrictions, they try and use this flag order
on non-SO Scientologists.
The result is a confusing mixture of the Flag Order, the 1965
policy, and the 1967 policy (which was never canceled but tends
to be hidden from the membership).
Interestingly enough, when they started pushing strict sexual
mores, an LRH technical bulletin came out called “Pain and Sex”.
This is actually from the 1952 tapes (see the technique 88
lectures) and is out of context.
Pain and sex were indeed bundled up together by implants and
thetans have committed many overts in the area, but Ron’s
advise at that time was not to abandon sex but simply to run out
the incidents.
WHAT IS:
The E-meter (a sort of lie detector) is used to do security checks
on Scientologists.
These “sec checks” are lists of possible overts (crimes etc.) which
are called off while watching the meter for reactions so as to
discover anything the person is withholding.
WHAT ISN’T:
This wasn’t designed to gain blackmailing material or to find out
what a bad guy the PC was so as to bar him from further
services.
It was actually indented as a means of finding out the guy’s overts
and processing them to relieve the mental charge and free him
from the overt/motivate sequence (the Scientology equivalent of
Karma).
36
Even in modern times they try to clean up the charge rather than
simply finding out what he’s done.
On this basis, this could be considered to be a positive auditing
action meant to better the person.
I personally had an extremely big gain while being run on a sec
check once.
The topic that produced the big result was implanting others.
All of the current OT levels are highly motivatorish (a motivate is
what happens to you as a result of the overts you have
committed - a sort of karma).
They address what has been done to the person instead of what
he has done and this was known to be a mistake as early as
1952.
A thetan could never have been implanted in the first place
unless he had intentions to implant others sometime in the past
(perhaps to make others good or keep them under control). The
smart thing to do would be to have the PC run something like
“Recall implanting another” somewhere on the OT levels.
Since this is not done, the deficiency is to some slight degree
remedied by means of sec checking.
But its going the long way around. There are much better
processes on grade 2 for handling guilt and overts.
Instead, they hound people endlessly with these sec checks.
WHAT IS:
In the 1960s, the sanctity of the confessional and the
confidentiality of PC folders and the idea that whatever had been
run out was therefore gone and should not be held against the
person or even considered were all pushed as being of absolute
importance. In ancient times, priests have let themselves be shot
and their churches burned down rather than ever reveal or use
anything told in a confessional.
In the old days, we saw this as being more important than the
survival of any Scientology organization because it was a key
point in the survival of the entire subject.
37
You would let an org collapse rather than using anything revealed
in PC folders because if you did violate this, it would become
unsafe for the PCs to run out their overts and it would
permanently block the entire subject.
WHAT ISN’T:
This has been grossly violated in modern Scientology. The first
mistake was the idea of looking over the PC folders of someone
who was being declared suppressive to see if he had made any
gains (because no case gain was a suppressive trait).
This evolved into checking the folder’s of declared SPs for overts
and withholds (this was considered acceptable because of the
Fair Game law).
It kept getting worse.
Eventually, even the registrars (the org’s salesmen) began looking
through folders, supposedly with the excuse that they were
double checking that the person had gotten all the hours of
auditing they had paid for but really to get buttons to push on the
person to get them to buy their next service.
If there was ever a justifiable reason for declaring someone a
suppressive, this would be it (just kidding, I really think you
should straighten people out instead of throwing them out).
WHAT IS:
Sec checks are often mis-audited, mis-used, and overrun
endlessly when they are not the correct case action for the PC.
There are times when they can do somebody some good, but
not when they are run unnecessarily (especially at high prices) or
audited in an accusative manner (which seems to be popular
these days), and most especially not if you then send the person
to ethics and “handle” the overts that have already been erased
(that almost guarantees that the person will start committing
overts). Because of this, the technology itself is unpopular and
keeps being renamed, being called, at various times, Hubbard
Confessionals, Integrity Processing, and the False Purpose
Rundown.
WHAT ISN’T:
38
Nowadays, they tell the PC “I’m not auditing you” in a ridiculous
attempt to keep the PC from feeling that the safety of auditing has
been violated.
Maybe I’ll put on a sign that says “I’m not really driving” the next
time a cop tries to pull me over for a speeding ticket.
Sometimes something would come up that really would have to
be handled in Ethics.
For example, the PC has a kilo of pot in his closet and now that
we have gotten him to swear off drugs, he’s going to start selling
it on the street to pay for his auditing. In such cases, I would hand
carry the PC folder over to the Ethics officer myself and give him
a lecture about maintaining the safety of auditing.
The PC must not be made wrong or told to make amends. He
should just be talked to in a reasonable way and coaxed into
doing the right thing.
You would expect a good ethics officer to know this, but often
they did not have enough auditor training.
WHAT IS:
Scientology administrative staff are not trained in the technology
of Scientology.
They are trained in organizational policy instead. An early 70s
Policy letter started this.
Sometimes you do get someone who has trained on both sides
of the fence, but its contrary to the normal way things are done.
WHAT ISN’T:
Most Scientology staff (only a small percentage work as auditors)
have no real idea what Scientology IS except for some shallow
beginner’s level stuff and promotional BS.
They are working on some sort of a vague purpose to save the
world without having much of a clue as to what it is all about.
In the old days, an organization would often boom when they
made all their staff train as auditors.
39
Of course you can’t just take an auditor who knows nothing else
and put him on a management post without any training in his
job.
But knowing the technology of the mind is what Scientology is all
about.
As far as I’m concerned, a Scientology executive who has not
also trained as an auditor isn’t really a Scientologist (in the fullest
sense), doesn’t have any idea what he is doing, and tends to
screw things up.
On a new staff member, the lack of training in the subject is
understandable, it takes time to learn things.
But if he isn’t studying the technology like mad, then what is
doing there?
The only answers are religious fanaticism (big Ron in the sky will
solve all the guys problems for him?) or he’s hoping to gain
money or power or something.
WHAT IS:
The org’s registrars are really big league salesmen with worse
behavior than the most extreme of the used car salespeople.
They push buttons endlessly, hound people and threaten them
with ethics, make false promises and try to get people to
mortgage their lives away to raise the money to pay the orgs
high prices.
There are exceptions, especially when you get far away from
the Flag organization (the closer they are to “Source”, the worse
they get), but they live on big commissions so that ethical
behavior is invalidated and out-ethics is praised.
WHAT ISN’T:
It doesn’t have to be this way.
At one time there was a policy that “Only Accounts Talks Money”
and the regs were forbidden to discuss it.
Also, they did not receive any sales commissions. This kept
them a bit more honest.
40
The better ones stuck to their real job which was to explain what
services where available and encourage people to do them.
By the way, standard org finance policy is to never borrow
money but always pay cash (except that you may have to
borrow money to promote with to get a business out of
emergency, but you don’t borrow for anything else).
This is a good policy.
Its an overt to talk people into doing the opposite.
WHAT IS:
To complete a service at the org, you must write a success
story.
If you refuse or write one that is negative, the standard action is
to handle you, either in review or ethics, to fix what is wrong.
There are cases where this fix up does indeed correct something
that was done wrong and which was contrary to standard tech.
However, there are cases where the thing done wrong was
correct per standard tech and is therefore unremediable, and
cases where the course or auditing action was either
unnecessary or not of great interest to the person.
In these situations, a bad success story launches one into
endless unnecessary or upsetting repair or ethics actions.
So you always find something nice to say and write a PR success
story unless you know that you’re on firm ground in complaining
that the auditor or supervisor has violated standard tech.
WHAT ISN’T:
There is no way to evaluate the quality of service being delivered
or even to determine if an action is positive or detrimental based
on these enforced success stories.
You’ll get glowing success stories even on backwards or
unnecessary actions unless the person is so upset that he
doesn’t give a damn anymore.
41
There are real success stories, both unsolicited ones and ones
that are written on completing something which really did have a
magical effect on the person.
But there is no way to separate out the wheat from the chaff.
It would not be a bad idea to have people rate the quality and
effectiveness of the services delivered, like they do at some
restaurants.
Perhaps this should be done by checking boxes on a slip handed
to you by the success officer and then placed into an anonymous
voting box.
Maybe the success officer should ask the person if he was
happy with the service or wants something handled without
pushing at him or insisting on anything.
And then maybe he should ask the person if he feels like writing
a success story, and should also have a big sign posted behind
him saying that people are never required to write success
stories.
With this, the success stories you got might really mean
something. And if the voting slips were compiled on a weekly
basis and the averages were computed, you would have a real
gauge of what the public thought of your services.
WHAT IS:
Per Scientology Policy, managers must manage exclusively by
statistics.
If the courseroom ceiling has caved in and the students are
bleeding on the floor, the solution is to have them stay late so
that the Scientology Academy will meet its quota of student
points and course completions.
Well, perhaps I am exaggerating.
Most instructors would indeed put aside their fixed ideas and
work like mad to care for their students in an emergency.
But the stats would indeed go down and somewhere in upper
management, there would be an executive who would refuse to
42
be reasonable about any justification for downstats (as per policy)
and some heads would roll.
WHAT ISN’T:
Management by statistics alone is basically insane.
It is a fixed idea that interferes with looking at what you are really
doing.
Its not that you shouldn’t watch the stats, every successful
corporation knows that you must keep graphs of production,
encourage the uptrends, and remedy the downtrends.
You can really make an organization fly by finding out what
changed just before a radical shift in a graph.
But it is only one of many indicators that monitor the performance
of an organization and predict its long range expectations.
Things such as employee moral, customer satisfaction, the
potential depletion of non-renewable resources, and improving
the product are all highly important.
As a staff member, every problem you can’t solve or situation
that you can’t confront is handled by getting the stats (statistics)
up with the idea that this will lead to the expansion of Scientology
which in turn will result in the eventual solution of all problems
and social ills.
This is then used to justify committing overts on public and other
staff members and that leads to the idea becoming fixed because
they would have to face the overts if they let go of it.
The biggest mistake is to force the stats up when they start to
collapse because this hides the real reason the stats are
collapsing and eventually makes it impossible to spot what was
messed up. For example, when the insane idea of harassing the
student for MUs (Misunderstood words) every time he moved an
inch while studying in the course room was put in, the academy
stats collapsed. If they had been able to confront a down stat and
tried to find out what had changed, they could have spotted this
error right away and fixed it.
Instead, supervisors got the stats back up by making the
remaining students stay late etc.
43
Of course the stat went into a slow downward collapse anyway
so it didn’t even work in the long term.
A cute side note is that Ron used to tap his foot while studying,
so in the Flag courserooms, this was known as the one body
motion you could do without the supervisor hounding you to
death.
WHAT IS:
The supervisor isn’t supposed to evaluate, interpret, or explain
the course materials to the student.
This is a reasonable idea.
The student should find out for himself.
WHAT ISN’T:
Per current policy, the supervisor does not need to be trained on
the materials he’s supervising.
He often has no idea what the students are learning.
If the student needs help, all the supervisor can do is robotically
ask for MUs, often on words he himself does not know the
meaning of.
This is pure idiocy.
In the old days, we had instructors who knew their materials
backwards and forwards and who cared about the students.
The rules kept them from spouting off and overwhelming the
student with too much evaluation but they weren’t taken
absolutely and the supervisor could help a lot, finding other
references, giving examples from his experience, explaining
lightly about things that weren’t on the students course etc.
If the student is studying, for example, level I (problems
processing), the instructor should not be telling him the theory of
the level or how to run the processes.
It’s in the students materials and he really should study it for
himself.
44
But the problems material also mentions GPMs (Goals Problem
Masses) and that’s not on the students level and he’s not going to
be auditing it without much more study, but he may need a few
words of explanation and a pat on the back to get him going
again on the materials that do pertain to his level.
WHAT IS:
Current Scientology study technology tends to specialize in
handling MUs and doing demonstrations of things in clay. These
are useful techniques.
Sometimes its enough, especially for adults who already have a
great deal of knowledge and are doing a course with a great deal
of enthusiasm.
WHAT ISN’T:
This is totally inadequate for use in schools. The 1950s view was
much broader and actually highlights how bad the current
approach is.
The basic Scientology idea on the whole topic is that
understanding comes from affinity, reality, and communication
(ARC).
They still know this, but they have forgotten how to apply it.
First and foremost, you need to get the students to like a subject.
An interested student will learn the subject despite a bad teacher.
You need to promote free and open communication about the
subject, especially between the students (currently discouraged
in the CofS).
You need to see and examine things and try things out to build
reality.
You need to look through the materials multiple times rather than
just working forward through a checksheet robotically.
As a substitute for experience, you need to sit and imagine what
you’re going to do and how you’re going to handle anything that
could go wrong. And you need to decide that you invented the
subject to make it your own and get it fully into your own
45
universe (yes Ron actually tells students to do this on a 1954
tape).
WHAT IS:
Training people with force makes robots who can’t think with the
data they have learned.
This was well known in the 1950s. Pounding the data into the
students head is totally contrary to all Scientology basics.
But the original Class VIII auditor’s course was taught by tossing
the students off the side of the ship whenever they flubbed.
“The auditor is trying to kill the PC, OVERBOARD 3 TIMES” was a
common CS (Case Supervisor Instructions after reviewing a
session done by the auditor).
WHAT ISN’T:
The impact of these overwhelmed and unthinking CLASS VIIIs
pretty much destroyed the subject within a few months.
The entire backbone of trained auditors and old timers in the
subject was destroyed.
One org had about 50 trained auditors on staff (both shifts,
including trained auditors who were doing other posts) just
before they arrived (fall 1968) and only had a handful by mid-
1969.
These original Class VIIIs, by the way, were not evil people.
They all had intentions to help and to save the world.
They had simply been turned, temporarily, into dramatizing
psychotics.
Most of them regretted it later.
Some of them are busily sacrificing themselves for the sake of
Scientology in a misguided effort to make amends (Artie Maren
for example).
Others started running freezone splinter groups.
46
Many of them don’t audit anymore.
WHAT IS:
Standard Tech (everybody doing the same thing the same way
without variation) was introduced by the Class VIII course. It is
continually promoted as the ultimate in technical perfection.
WHAT ISN’T:
Standard Technology does not mean the same thing as either
correct technology or high quality technology.
What standard tech really meant was that the same error was
repeated consistently on everybody.
This does have benefits for research since it makes it easier to
see what is wrong with the tech.
Unfortunately, this research gain is mostly wasted if you have a
fixed idea about the tech already being perfect.
The introduction of standard tech caused a total collapse of
Scientology in 1969.
Luckily, it did make many of the basic errors visible so that
eventually, when the screw-ups could no longer be ignored (late
1970), the worst faults were corrected and the subject
rebounded.
They should have put standard tech in carefully and watched it
with an eagle eye.
If we hadn’t had the fanaticism and the insistence on being right
and the training by force, we could have spotted the errors in the
tech within a few months and retained our backbone of sane and
experienced auditors and executives.
Instead, the subject fell into the hands (by and large) of fanatics
and incompetents.
Even as the theory of auditing was getting straightened out and
improving in the early 70s, the skill level of auditors was crashing
because of the disappearance of the old timers, the gross
mistakes on how to run a course, and the heavy threats and
47
invalidation which were being brought to bear on students and
auditors.
The TRs and metering skills of an old Class IV cannot be found
short of Class XII (if at all) in modern Scientology.
I remember doing the “dating drill” one time in the late 70s. This
drill has nothing to do with picking up girls.
It consists of the coach writing a complex date on a slip of paper
and hiding it and then you try and find the precise date through emeter
reactions alone.
I tossed the coach in the chair and pretty much read the date
straight off of her with total accuracy in less than a minute. The
sea org instructor didn’t like this.
I looked at the PC instead of the meter.
I pleasantly asked questions instead of barking at the PC.
I looked at her with a friendly and confident manner instead of
drilling her with a death stare.
These were all grievous faults.
It took weeks for my skills to recover after having one of those
incompetents on my back for five minutes.
WHAT IS:
The Sea Org is set up like a military organization. This is not
surprising since Hubbard’s only management experience in this
lifetime was his brief stint in the Navy.
Remember, he was a writer, an entertainer, and pretty much of a
lone wolf.
As far as I know, he never worked a salaried job.
His only experience with groups outside of the Navy was with
social clubs like the Explorers and gatherings of science fiction
writers.
WHAT ISN’T:
48
Despite his lack of experience, the great wealth of his research
into the human mind lead Ron to formulate many useful ideas
about groups and organizations.
Like most of us, he considered the military approach to be one of
the dumbest ones. In the 1950s he encouraged the idea of
having groups composed of true individuals, and considered that
a few free and independent beings working together were
comparable to a large army which only had a few non-robotic
individuals doing all the thinking at the top of the command
structure.
WHAT IS:
Before the founding of the Sea Org, there used to be a rumor
going around the organization about how the book “Mr. Roberts”
was written about Ron by one of the people who served with
him in the Navy.
Of course we all thought that Ron was supposed to have been
the wonderful junior officer who helps everyone in the story.
WHAT ISN’T:
As we now know, Ron was the captain of that sub chaser, and
the book pictures him as a psychotic.
I can’t say whether the book is an accurate picture or just sour
grapes, or even if it was really written about Ron, but it certainly
shows what’s wrong with military organizations. Check out the
movie sometime, its a lot of fun.
WHAT IS:
The SO (Sea Org) is 180 degrees in reverse to Ron’s theories
from the 1950s.
WHAT ISN’T:
There is no great heritage of early Scientology organizations.
It was not Ron’s area of interest or expertise and the early
material has only the barest beginning of a true management
science.
49
The early organizations mearly got by rather than being dramatic
demonstrations of some kind of an OT organization system. But
they generally did so without crushing people and many good
results were produced.
There are some later bits of brilliance in Scientology
organizational theory, but they are overwhelmed and swept
away by the grossly screwed up basic concepts which make
robots and fanatics.
Its very sad, especially as he knew the right basics in the 1950s
and turned his back on them.
For example, he considered that it was a suppressive trait to
sacrifice the individual for the sake of the many and even in later
times would point out that SPs (suppressive persons) would
justify their overts on individuals by saying that they are working
for the common good.
And yet this business of working for the sake of mankind is the
standard justification for the commission of overts in the church.
WHAT IS:
The lower ethics conditions with their liability projects and abuse
are in use in Scientology.
The conditions formulas (for what to do when you’re in the
condition) are probably even correct or at least workable if you
really are in such a condition and want to do something about it.
WHAT ISN’T:
The idea that someone who has done $20,000 worth of work in
the last year and has been paid only $200 could be a liability if he
accidentally breaks an e-meter worth only a few thousand dollars
is nothing more than gross exploitation.
This is not a real example. The damage is usually something
much sillier and inconsequential.
The lower conditions do not cure people of being liabilities and
becoming enemies to Scientology.
Instead, they take people who had dedicated their lives to the
organization and turn them into enemies.
50
There is no better demonstration of the Scientology idea that you
create your own opposition than to examine the great vigor with
which the CofS creates its own enemies.
WHAT IS:
The RPF (Rehabilitation Project Force) exists in the Sea Org.
It is a method for degrading people and beating them into
agreement.
I speak now from hearsay and observation rather than actual
experience.
When I was first working for a Scientology org, this kind of activity
was called Not-ISness rather than rehabilitation and we knew that
it was a sure route to failure because trying to make nothing of
something never works in the long run.
WHAT ISN’T:
The RPF was never intended to rehabilitate anyone. It seemed to
me that it was always the most able and individualistic SO
members who I saw being put into it (although I’m sure there
were some exceptions).
The actual intention was obviously to create compulsive
agreement (this is my idea, I have never seen it in writing in a
Policy Letter or Flag Order).
As such, it is a dramatization of the basic intention behind every
attempt to implant people.
WHAT IS:
In one of his last writings, Hubbard labeled the suppressive
influence up and down the whole track as being psychiatrists and
priests.
If we translate the Scientology terms “Auditor” and “Minister of the
Church of Scientology” into ordinary English, we discover that
they ARE the latest generation of psychiatrists and priests.
How Sad!
WHAT ISN’T:
51
That late bulletin, like many things in the later days, is not really
correct.
The psychs (or auditors) and priests (or ministers) are the only
groups that might conceivably help mankind.
These are the ranks that people join when they really feel an
urge to aid their fellows.
The truth of the matter is that these groups are so dangerous to
the oppressive control and manipulation of the masses that they
are constantly infiltrated and twisted against their own purposes.
Sure there have been some bad psychs and priests but there
have been many good ones too, ones who cared and tried to
help.
But it does seem like their information and techniques have been
twisted and distorted by some subtle hidden influence so as to
ensure their failure.
The same could be said of Scientology.
People who live in glass cities shouldn’t throw H-Bombs.
As an aside, I would say that the suppressive influence up and
down the whole track of our existence consists of those who
want to implant people to make them slaves and those who
want to implant people to make them good.
These two groups are diametrically opposed to each other, but
both want to make the rest of us into obedient robots.
The slave makers include some psychs such as Pavlov, but
certainly don’t include well intentioned men such as Freud and
Jung.
This group also includes a certain percentage of industrialists,
rulers, fascists, etc., but don’t make the mistake of generalizing.
Not everybody wants slaves.
And on the opposite side, there are those “priests” who would
brainwipe you to make you “good” according to some arbitrary
code (this especially includes the hell preaching demagogues),
but they are only a small (but highly visible) percentage.
52
Don’t confuse them with the well intentioned majority.
And please notice that these “do goodie” mind controllers also
include a certain percentage of communists and even some
teachers, lawyers, and politicians, etc.
It should be obvious that there are at least a certain percentage of
robot makers (whether to get slaves or make others good) within
the current Sea Org management hierarchy.
WHAT IS:
The continual infiltration of CofS by covert operatives of various
organizations.
In the early days (1966-68) at one large organization, we
discovered a newspaper reporter, an FDA agent, and an IRS
agent.
We completely missed another reporter who subsequently
wrote an expose, and we were slow in catching a Mafia infiltrator
who rose to an executive position before being found out.
Notoriously absent were agents of the FBI, CIA, and KGB.
But the E-meter only reads on overts and a loyal agent might well
consider that he was doing a service for his country rather than
committing overts and therefore might not react. Also, these
guys are often trained and conditioned to fool lie detectors.
So I would assume that there were a few of these agents in the
organization as well and we never spotted them.
In later days at least a few FBI agents were uncovered.
Agents on being spotted usually confessed that they had been
sent in to investigate but had been “converted” by the wonderful
tech.
So they often remained on staff acting as double agents.
But this is a fairly standard intelligence technique when dealing
with “culties” who will swallow anything if you start praising the
glories of the cult. In all likelihood, most of these were probably
triple agents who continued to do their work in a more exposed
manner.
53
I wonder if it might be considered entrapment (enticing someone
to break the law) to have given CofS these double agents with
their knowledge of Bureau internals.
WHAT ISN’T:
There was a tremendous error in judgment in launching
operation Snow White.
The Church might well have felt that it was a justified tit for tat
and in their mistaken egotism thought that Flag training and OT
abilities would carry them through unscathed. But they were
playing with the big boys, real professionals.
Even so, Guardian Intelligence (the spy branch of the GO) put on
quite a show and penetrated longer and more deeply than any
amateur organization had a right to, but they were burnt in the
end and the results were quite harmful.
With Ron driven into hiding and Mary Sue in jail, it created a
power vacuum about which much has already been written by
others.
Around this time period, we also have the death of Quentin
Hubbard who was the most likely heir to Ron’s position.
He was not only the oldest of Mary Sue’s sons, but he was
supposed to have a flair for the tech.
He went around giving talks and he liked to tell stories about
whole track (past life) civilizations.
I had very little personal contact with him and I really don’t know
what the whole story is, but he seemed on the whole to be
enthusiastic rather than depressed.
The “suicide” looks like a gangster style fake.
Probably someone was getting him out of the way, maybe to
ensure that there was a really big power vacuum.
To her credit, Diane Hubbard tried to curb the SO craziness of
the early 1980s but she failed and was slapped down for her
troubles.
54
As far as I know she has kept a low profile since and has little
involvement with management.
None of the other children ever swung much weight in the
organization.
This is the same time period that David Mayo and other highly
placed people were driven out of the subject.
The power vacuum was so complete as to raise the suspicion
that it was engineered. As to who did it and for what purpose, I
haven’t a clue.
Maybe the attempt was defeated and loyal (but misguided)
fanatics now guard the subject.
Maybe the bad guys won and are in power now. It could be
Mafia (lots of bucks flowing through there) or CIA (wonderful
place for mind control experiments) or just a bunch of little
messengers who wanted to be fanatically worshipped. For all I
know, it could even be space aliens (just joking - I hope).
WHAT IS:
The CofS declares its enemies to be “Suppressive Persons”.
It has family and friends disconnect from them.
It has Fair Game laws (supposedly canceled but still followed in
spirit) to harass them.
And their members are pushed to believe that these people are
real bad guys, rotten to the core.
WHAT ISN’T:
There is Scientology processing technology on the subject of
one person being suppressive to another.
There is even an analysis of the characteristics of a suppressive
person. All of this is ignored when the CofS declares someone
suppressive. For them there is only one suppressive
characteristic, and that is that someone is not in compulsive
agreement with or obedient to the Sea Org.
55
As a side note, the entire suppressive person (SP) and potential
trouble source (PTS) technology is slightly questionable since the
person himself (rather than an SP) is supposed to be responsible
for the condition he is in.
Sometimes you do have to pry someone away from a
suppressive influence so that they can cool down enough to get
audited.
This should always be looked on as a temporary measure.
There are already Scientology processes for auditing out the
situation (the Suppressed Person rundown) and the person who
was being suppressed ceases to have problems with the “SP”
and can communicate with them comfortably.
Somehow or other, this useful technology (to handle the guy
who’s continually caving in because someone in his environment
is always cutting him to pieces), has become mixed up with
witch hunts and inquisitions.
And they do indeed have witch hunts, despite Ron’s warnings
about not doing that.
Mass declares of SPs within the organization happen periodically.
Its almost like the periodic purges that you see in the more
viscous governments.
WHAT IS:
Ron said that the greatest overt was making others guilty of
committing overts.
WHAT ISN’T:
This isn’t the worst one.
The real worst one is convincing others to commit overts that
they wouldn’t otherwise have done for the sake of a higher
purpose.
This is routine within Scientology.
56
One of the many kinds of examples are the cases where
someone turns against an old friend who has been declared
(often without just cause) as an enemy of the church.
WHAT IS:
A basic Scientology idea is that you are responsible for the
condition that you are in.
I might twist this slightly and say that you need to become
responsible for the condition that you’re in if you are to have any
hope of changing that condition.
WHAT ISN’T:
This doesn’t mean that other people can’t help or hinder you.
It just means that in the final analysis, you need to be master of
your own life and you will not make a lot of progress by sitting
around and blaming others, even if they did work very hard to do
you in.
But the CofS has continually twisted this datum to always place
blame on the individual and never on the organization.
If its an outsider screwing up the person’s life, then the outsider
is an SP and its the outsider’s fault but if its the org that’s screwing
the guy up, then the guy is responsible for the condition he is in
and the org is not to blame.
There have been rare exceptions to this hypocrisy, because
there are well meaning individuals mixed in among the robots,
but you will almost never find the organization taking
responsibility for any overts that it has committed.
WHAT IS:
LRH never cared for the existing religions.
He figured that they usually were based on some keyed out OT
showing up and overawing the natives and making them
worship.
In one lecture he talks about Moses having been a high powered
OT.
57
The assumption is that Moses pretended that “God” did it so that
the Children of Israel wouldn’t blame things on him.
If that is the case, then Genesis might be a vague sketch of the
implants and past lives that Moses ran out (e.g. confronted and
erased) while he was up in the mountains which resulted in his
becoming a keyed out OT.
WHAT ISN’T:
The dumb quote about Jesus being a pederast etc. is obviously
not written by Ron.
It was almost certainly written by Captain Bill.
Captain Bill announced that Ron’s thetan had left his old body
(turning it over to BTs?) and had moved into Captain Bill’s body
and he would issue new bulletins etc. on this basis.
The CofS, of course, declared Captain Bill suppressive.
Sometimes there’s a processing rundown attached to this bogus
bulletin when it appears on the internet.
It might be the real CofS
OT8 (attached to the wrong introduction), or an invention of Bill’s,
but more likely it is some older rundown (possibly from the 1st
Melbourne Advanced Clinical Course) that Captain Bill was putting
out as OT8.
WHAT IS:
Ron preached tolerance for the poor Christians etc. who were
busily worshipping some long gone OT.
He did say that you might have to work hard to keep from
laughing out loud when you were in church, but you should
respect their beliefs and just keep auditing them.
He expected them to cognite eventually.
Many of us in the early days had a fondness for Jesus,
considering him to be an old OT who tried to do something about
the sorry state of mankind.
58
John MacMasters (while he was still a loyal CofS member) used to
quote sayings of Jesus such as “Ye shall do greater things than I”
in his talks.
WHAT ISN’T:
When he messed around in OT III incident 2 and got all keyed in,
Hubbard found that it included pictures of “Christ on the Cross”
etc.
He got pretty upset and over restimulated and decided that all of
Christianity was an R6 dramatization (in this usage, R6 refers to
the implant material found on Routine level 6 auditing which was
considered to form the core of the reactive mind).
Some of his comments on this are floating around on the internet.
This is obviously just the mental “charge” stirred up by getting an
old incident half run out and messed up.
He sees an implant picture of someone on a cross and gets
upset and starts damning Christianity.
The truth of the matter is that there are very early implants (much
earlier than inc 2) which lay in the idea that the best of us must
always sacrifice ourselves for others. They show you that it is
your duty to get up on that cross and how wonderful it is to do
so, but the real intention was to get rid of anyone who keyed out
OT in a big way.
Many great OTs have been done in by this implant during the
course of our existence in this and earlier universes.
There were others, such as Krishna, on this planet who had this
happen to them.
When Jesus got up on the cross, we lost a great teacher and
eventually most of his wonderful teachings were lost or twisted
out of shape as the Romans altered Christianity into a politically
acceptable religion.
WHAT IS:
Scientology has a rule against mixing practices.
59
This is used in the CofS to make it an ethics offense to have
anything to do with or even read anything from any other
metaphysical subject, whether it be Zen or Astrology or Science
of Mind.
They have declared various other groups such as the
Objectivists and the Edgar Cayce group (I forget what its called) to
be suppressive groups.
They don’t dare do this with the big religions, but I’m sure that
they wish they could.
WHAT ISN’T:
This is NOT in Scientology auditing technology.
There is a different point, which is that you mustn’t mix up two
things because they can get in each others way and you have no
way of evaluating what changes came from which source if he’s
doing two things at once.
On this basis, mixing Dianetics and Scientology processes
together were at one time officially considered to be mixing
practices and even now it is considered that the Scientology TR
drills must not be done at the same time that a person is getting
audited.
Of course Ron did consider that a number of subtle traps and
backwards ideas had been planted in the various earlier
metaphysical studies.
For example, he considered meditations on “I am nothing” to be
a mistake (he actually tried some processes based on this and
they did not go well).
He does recommend that you learn his stuff first before you go
and study metaphysics.
But he never tells you not to look.
After all, he was reading tons of the stuff himself, at least in the
early days.
Some of the old timers used to send him books and things any
time that they thought that another practice had come across
something that might be useful.
60
The current rules block any comprehension of Scientology’s
backgrounds.
They interfere with well rounded spiritual growth. They promote
rigid thinking.
And they are a direct attack on those other groups who might
actually be considered closest to Scientology in their goals and
ideas.
This would only be sane if the org has the intention of becoming
a monopoly in the field of metaphysical thought.
Which is probably why they do it.
WHAT IS:
OT (Operating Thetan) abilities.
Mind over matter. Telekinesis and telepathy.
Even teleportation (and Hubbard does not say this is impossible,
he mearly says that it is done by disintegrating the object in one
spot and recreating it in another rather than by shifting it).
I have seen these things and I have done them.
Almost any old time (pre 1968) auditor will swear that they are
real even if he has left the church.
WHAT ISN’T:
Stable OT abilities.
Stable achievements of OT states. Repeatable demonstrations of
OT powers at will.
The current OT levels have been renamed PreOT levels
because they don’t produce these things.
If the CofS had anyone who could repeatedly lift an ashtray at
will, they would have him on TV the next day.
These things are never demonstrated, not even in confidential
briefings for OTs.
61
Ashtrays have been lifted, but Scientology never produced
anyone who could do it on demand.
WHAT IS:
The keyed-out OT state.
By keyed-out, we mean that some part of the person’s mental
blockage has temporarily moved out of the way. This has been
the source of most of OT manifestations observed in the subject.
The key-out is much less stable than that produced by lower
level Scientology processes.
It often only lasts hours or days.
Mine lasted for three months.
A rare few (possibly including Ron) may have kept the state
considerably longer, but it is known to be an extremely unstable
condition. Trying to study it, experiment with it, exercise it to
build up strength, or demonstrate it are the fastest ways to bump
into something that will turn it off and drop you back to human
with a horrible thundering crash.
I probably kept the state longer than most because I was young
and innocent and wasn’t pushing it.
I could not do things at will.
The abilities did not respond to mental effort and pushing.
Just occasionally I would think something like deciding to grab a
cup of coffee and it would slide to me across the table.
The intention to do something, projected lightly and without
effort, occasionally caused it to happen in a bypass of physical
laws.
The only thing that worked was to think to do something, with
the thought and the deed becoming the same.
It never worked to try hard to do something.
WHAT ISN’T:
62
The processes that occasionally produced a keyed-out OT are
almost never used in modern Scientology.
These are a) the processes of 1952-54 (a few of them are in the
book “Creation of Human Ability”), b) the power processes (never
run on Dianetic Clears), and c) the old (before NOTS) OT levels 4
to 7.
It seems like everything that did turn on OT abilities has been
carefully pushed out of use.
Those processes are being publicized now on the Internet and
CofS seems to be upset about it.
Maybe we’ll start seeing some more OT manifestations as
people try this suff.
Note that there has never been a process in Scientology which
consistently produced a keyed-out OT state.
It has always been a wild random variable.
It has never been thoroughly investigated or pinned down.
Ron himself admitted on one of the Briefing Course tapes (I think
it was the one on the Classification and Gradation chart) that he
had no idea why they occasionally produced one on Power
Processing.
The real approach to making a keyed-out OT is to try a carton full
of techniques and hope that you get lucky.
Often you will if the collection is big enough.
WHAT IS:
Although the big OT powers have never been produced stabily,
minor abilities would sometimes be achieved, at least in the old
days. A good example is Ingo Swann.
See your local occult bookstore for data on what has been
confirmed on him under laboratory conditions. He’s about as
good as any of the stable OTs.
He doesn’t lift ashtrays but he can raise the temperature of an
object under laboratory conditions.
63
WHAT ISN’T:
Ingo doesn’t talk about having been in Scientology or doing the
OT levels in the late 1960s.
The Church doesn’t mention Ingo or claim that he ever was a
member.
I think they must have a mutual agreement to leave each other
alone and keep quite.
I think they declared him a suppressive.
It was a long time ago.
How many ways can you shoot yourself in the foot?
WHAT IS:
Ron probably went keyed out OT in 1952.
There was an incredible outpouring of bright ideas from 1952 to
1954.
He was positively inspired.
Later he often made mistakes or misses the obvious that he’d
already found.
For example in 1952 he says to get the postulate that the person
made during an engram.
This was forgotten and it took a decade of running standard
Dianetics before they created New Era Dianetics (NED) by asking
for the postulate (which makes Clears fairly quickly).
I wonder if he actually remembered it or whether somebody
simply heard the old tape and suggested doing it.
WHAT ISN’T:
Ron didn’t remain in the OT state.
The keyout is notoriously unstable.
64
My guess is that the state crashed when the police broke into the
course room in 1954 and hauled him down to the station.
He talks about the arrest in his next lecture to the class and about
how he managed to talk his way out of there without getting
locked up, but he’s obviously a bit shaken and he gets out of the
country real fast and heads for England.
He even cut the 10th ACC (Advanced Clinical Course) short and
they filled it out by playing tapes from the 9th ACC.
If you compare the tapes of 1950-51 to those of 1952-54, you will
see a fantastic jump in speed and intelligence.
His exuberance knows no bounds and he’s really something to
listen to.
If you then compare them with the tapes of 1955 onwards, you
can see that he slows down and is nowhere near what he was,
but he’s still better than in the 1950-51 timeframe.
Note that my slightly strange word usage (“went keyed out OT”
etc.) is proper Scientology speak and one would hope that any
ARS readers would have picked up this lingo by now.
WHAT IS:
Ron kept on researching in the later 50s and 60s, often trying to
get back what he’d had his hands on in those early days and
often missing the right answer that he’d found previously. OT III
is a complex arduous mess researched in the late 60s and the
simple NOTs handling is from 1952! (see the HCL lectures,
especially the two different lectures that are both titled “Theta
Bodies”).
And they have still completely missed the 1953-4 processes on
handling mockups of Thetans and blowing them etc. (see the 3rd
ACC etc.).
WHAT ISN’T:
He never really got beyond the high point of the 3rd ACC and
modern Scientology is perhaps 10-20% of what he had at that
time.
65
And even that peak was not high enough to allow mass clearing
or produce stable OT supermen.
WHAT IS:
In 1967 Ron went to North Africa and tried to research OT III.
He went into it backwards and ended up half dead.
Its one thing to read about the OT III incident casually, its another
to go in and bang around for months and make a mess of it
besides. It is quite possible that he got panicky and, fearing
death, began to take all sorts of medical drugs even though this is
quite contrary to normal Scientology practice and almost
guarantees that you will screw up the auditing.
Tony Dunlevy used to tell a story at Scientology events about
how Ron came back to St. Hill with a roomful of materials and told
him that if he (Ron) should die while trying to finish getting though
it, then Tony was to take the materials and his best people and a
staff of medical doctors and try and get someone through it using
medical assistance to make it possible for someone to survive
running it. Ron flew off and eventually came back and told Tony
to forget the room of materials and that he had found an easier
way through the level which could be done with a small pack of
materials.
WHAT ISN’T:
The things that were then mocked up, the Sea Org, crush ethics,
crush sell, and a backwards quickie standard tech which lost us
most of our experienced auditors and turned the rest into robots
were not the work of a monster.
They were the last ditch efforts of a dedicated researcher who
came close to death and feared that the discoveries which he had
already put together would be lost with his passing.
And so he cast it all in concrete and set up a cadre of fearless
storm troupers and Gestapo agents to guard it with their lives and
never let it vary least some fool turn it all to dust.
Needless to say, this was not a very high toned attitude.
66
The astounding side effect was that all this organizational insanity
eventually brought people into Scientology in droves and filled
the Church’s coffers.
It really makes one wonder about the average public mentality.
You can’t attract the suckers by giving them an even break. The
sucker will only go to where he knows he will be sucked.
WHAT IS:
The subtle OT abilities.
The manipulation of chance and probability.
The pulling in of serendipitous coincidences, and also the pulling
in of motivators for one’s overts.
The future is in flux, predetermined in the ordered motions of
physics but indeterminate in the subtler interactions of particles
and random variables.
The flux responds to thought, and especially to strong
visualizations, whether intentional or reactive, because these
mimic the observation which breaks down the probability waves
into actuality.
All participate in this working out of the future into the present,
whether consciously or unconsciously.
The subtle influence of chance events can never be proven
because by its vary nature it is always in accordance with
physical laws and can be shown to be a random occurrence.
Even long runs of luck are provided for and even required in the
mathematical analysis of statistical probability.
And yet there are born losers and people upon whom luck
always shines.
This is all in accordance with (although not stated or proved by)
the modern theories of Quantum Mechanics which sees all
existence as consisting of probability waves which are broken
down into reality by the action of observation.
WHAT ISN’T:
67
Gaining a larger say in the workings of probability is not the
exclusive prerogative of the Scientology OT.
Many methods, from Positive Thinking to Trusting That God Will
Provide are all capable of raising the level of your input into this
flux.
Deep Faith is one of the strong amplifiers.
It matters not what the faith is in, it is the raw power of the faith
itself which can alter the flow of events.
This is a good reason for giving respect to holy men of all
persuasions.
Even the businessman’s faith in himself or the craftsman’s faith in
his ability have their impact.
Self confidence is often seen as a key to power.
But there are negative aspects to raising your input into this flux.
Your subconscious reactive thoughts may bring on your fate
instead of your desire.
The selfish businessman is always risking the backlash of his
own overts when he begins to push his horsepower up with
various tricks and gimmicks.
The holy people are much safer as long as they don’t turn
hypocritical or discover the flaws in their belief systems and
moral codes. In theory, the Scientologists should be in the best
position to handle this flux safely because of the concentration on
responsibility and the handling of overts, but in practice, they are
at risk when they let fanaticism override good sense and
judgment.
WHAT IS:
If a coin has been tossed but the results not yet looked at, it is still
subject to probabilistic manipulations. You may still alter the
results by intense visualizations, deep prayer, strong postulates,
stubborn determination that the results must come out randomly,
or reactive dread at the consequences of loosing (which of course
causes you to loose).
68
WHAT ISN’T:
Once the results have been viewed, they are fixed in physical
universe mechanics.
All the regretful wishing in the world will not change an observed
result.
Altering anything at this stage requires a total bypass of physical
laws and is a major OT ability rather than a subtle one.
WHAT IS:
The main “OT Ability” that has often been achieved in
Scientology is simply an increase in the person’s input into this
flux.
Fascinating improbabilities sometimes occur.
WHAT ISN’T:
This is not a new ability.
Everyone has some input into the shuffling of probabilities.
Amazing coincidences occur to everybody.
The gain is simply in terms of the scale and frequency of
coincidences.
But as I mentioned earlier, nothing about this can be proved
easily and as a consequence, this area is highly subject to wishful
thinking and unsubstantiated claims.
Perhaps some of Rhine’s work would help here.
We might even use large control and test groups running
different processes and then give each person ten bucks, turn
them lose against a bank of Las Vegas slot machines, and run
statistical distributions on the winners.
The above discussion of subtle OT abilities is my own
codification of vague ideas and concepts that are in the early
materials.
69
Ron never did give a clear and concise description of the
mechanisms of pulling in motivators for your overts or of how to
make postulates stick, but I think the above is in keeping with
what he did say on the subject.
WHAT IS:
The CofS and the Sea Org have an expressed goal to Clear the
Planet.
This goal has been pushed for almost 30 years now.
WHAT ISN’T:
There are many reasons why this cannot happen in any
reasonable timeframe given their current methods of operating.
If the planet were to be cleared (which I consider to be a good
thing), there are only three ways its going to happen.
These are:
a) Mass Clearing. This would be the opposite of the mass
implanting. It would require developing clearing procedures that
could be done on a group processing basis via TV shows. This
would require radical breakthroughs which they are not
researching and which they currently believe themselves
forbidden to research. It would also require a willingness to give
the tech away which is contrary to current policy.
b) They would have to do enough individual clearing to get ahead
of the birthrate. This would again mean giving the tech away. It
would have to be done in schools and self-help groups. There is
no way it could happen given current org prices and the average
income level of the public.
c) There is an idea in Scientology that you can have a clear group
without all the members being clear and that in a similar manner
you could have a clear planet. This would hopefully let you
boom the economy so that individual clearing could also take
place.
Again I think this would be a good thing but a great deal of honest
research would be needed.
We are miles away from figuring out how to make a clear group.
70
The Sea Org certainly does not act like one.
In fact, it dramatizes quite badly and has a tendency to make
clears act like they are abberated which is the exact opposite of
what a Clear group would do.
Only when they can figure out how to clear their own group will it
be appropriate for them to consider clearing the planet.
WHAT IS:
There are a great deal of court cases being fought on both sides.
WHAT ISN’T:
This isn’t very bright.
There are legal precedents being establish that will hurt
everyone except for those who want to see all mental practices
banned.
Even psychiatrists may see their victories now used as
precedents against them in their own field later.
Of course anyone being sued needs to fight a strong defense.
But the sheer stupidity of the CofS in fighting to prove that it is a
business with trade secrets rather than a religion is hard to
believe.
And in the matter of liability suits, CofS, Freezone, and even
psychologists should be banding together before all of them end
up paying out their entire income for malpractice insurance.
The basic purpose of the legal profession is to get rich off of
people’s desire for vengeance and safety.
To misquote Samuel Clemmens, “It would not clear the planet to
declare all the lawyers suppressive, but it would sure be a lot of
fun”.
And maybe there is a real use for the RPF after all (just kidding).
WHAT IS:
It is proper for the holders of the copyrights to Ron’s works to
receive a reasonable fee for those materials.
71
WHAT ISN’T:
Since these are religious materials, it is a violation of the
Constitution for them to refuse to make those materials (of course
at a reasonable fee) available to anyone who professes to have a
religious purpose in studying them, even if those people have
been declared enemies of the Church.
What if the Catholics had copyrighted the Bible and refused to sell
copies to the Baptists and hauled them off to court if they tried to
reproduce the materials themselves?
That is the reason people fled here from Europe and it is the
basis for our tradition of religious freedom.
I also have a personal prejudice against corporations who buy up
patents for the purpose of suppressing inventions instead of
putting them to use.
The whole reason for the patent system was to encourage
invention rather than suppress it.
This doesn’t usually come up with a body of writing, but in this
case we do have a situation where knowledge is being hidden
and suppressed instead of encouraged.
In general I do support the rules on copyrights and trade secrets,
but not in the case where knowledge is suppressed or religious
freedom is trampled on.
For this reason, I would give Scam-iz-dat a pat on the back for
broadly publishing confidential materials on the internet (it’s not a
bad idea to break the word up various ways to defeat keyword
triggered software).
WHAT IS:
It is not unusual for a religion to splinter into an orthodox and a
liberal sect.
The orthodox often feel that the liberals have perverted their
religion and have been known to attack and persecute them.
The liberals often splinter further and in some cases have been
known to fight among themselves as well as with the orthodox
who are persecuting them.
72
WHAT ISN’T:
It isn’t right to fight a holy war.
I know of no good that has ever come of one.
It doesn’t matter who is right or wrong, the war itself is a great
evil.
These wars were, at one time, Christianity’s curse, and the active
persecution, which is a lesser version of the war, has weighted
on the conscience of many.
When they have put aside fanaticism and attempted to teach and
to help and to heal, the Christians have done much good in the
world.
If L. Ron Hubbard walked into a Scientology org today, they’d
declare him a squirrel (Scientology’s name for a freezoner -
squirrels gather nuts) in short order.
WHAT IS:
There has been some picketing of Scientology events.
WHAT ISN’T:
The last thing you want to do with a bunch of religious fanatics is
harass them with nasty signs.
That REALLY strengthens their resolve.
Since people will probably ignore this and keep picketing
anyway, they should at least use slogans which might actually
bring about some change for the better.
The idea would be to use some mental ju-jitsu rather than
toughening up your opponent.
You might try the following signs.
The Scientologists will suppress their reactions, but they might
think about these things later and even end up helping your carry
the signs eventually.
a) Sacrificing people to get stats up is an overt.
73
b) You have become the priests and psychs that you opposed.
c) The overt speaks loudly in the accusation.
d) You have created your own opposition.
e) End PTSness, Disconnect from the Sea Org.
If you say the subject doesn’t work or is a scam, you will hit
absolute resistance.
It never works to use your own buttons on someone else.
You have to hit their buttons.
They have them. Most believe the prices are too high.
They detest registrars, routing forms, and sec checks.
They are afraid of Ethics. They are often run on wrong or
unnecessary processes.
Some feel they have betrayed their friends by disconnecting.
The membership does know that there are things wrong.
They swallow it because the subject does work well enough that
most people will have had at least one big gain.
WHAT IS:
Don’t let me give you the wrong impression.
Things were not perfect in the early days either.
I was not there in the 1950s to see for myself what was going on
(I have simply heard most of the thousands of tapes from this
timeperiod), but I’m sure that they had their share of craziness.
For the mid to late 1960s (prior to the Class VIIIs and the Sea Org
and the 1969 collapse), I can point to many dumb ideas that were
in vogue for brief periods of time.
At one point, many auditors would not let the PC run past lives
because it was too restimulative (!!!).
74
At another time, a bulletin (1967) came out saying that “All
sickness equals PTS” (PTS means that the person is a Potential
Trouble Source because they are connected to a suppressive
person) and so the org went crazy on having everybody
disconnecting from supposed SPs every time they had a sniffle.
I remember one course supervisor who decided that he was
PTS to his DESK (!) and we had to carry it out into the hallway for
him.
These are just examples, there were plenty more.
WHAT ISN’T:
The stupid ideas generally did not stay with us and the subject
kept evolving.
You could always wait for next year or find another auditor or go
to a different organization that wasn’t riding the same hobby
horse.
The subject was not being held in a rigid mold and there was
room to maneuver around the barriers.
And there was always hope for next year’s technical
breakthrough.
Now we supposedly have all the answers (what a joke), and the
technology is perfect (even when it fails), and the organization is
in a case condition which we know as “resisting change” which is
a characteristic of a suppressive person.
WHAT IS:
When the movie “2001 A Space Odessy” came out, there was a
dumb ethics officer at some org who issued an order forbidding
people to see it because it was “too restimulative”.
WHAT ISN’T:
Never confuse the actions of individual idiots with the group as a
whole.
It was a local order, not a general one.
75
At the org I was at, we shook our heads and felt sorry for
anyone who was affected by this order and continued to
encourage everyone to go see a nifty movie.
WHAT IS:
Scientology was once known as the high IQ religion. Ron was
extremely bright and anti-authoritarian and so he appealed to
every genius who had been forced to swallow crap from
teachers that were dumber than themselves.
There were many of us who were in MENSA.
We even had a National Merit Scholar (that wasn’t me, I only
made the 99.3 percentile).
This is just in one small organization in 1966.
Scientology processing would occasionally raise IQ.
There was no steady progression or specific thing that did this.
Just occasionally, some big mental block or stress that interfered
with the person’s ability to think would get handled and there
would be a dramatic IQ jump.
In the old days, the org used the California Capacity Questioner
which is a well respected non-Scientology IQ test (it is one of the
ones that Mensa uses).
WHAT ISN’T:
Although it still has more intellectual appeal than some of the
more mindless forms of ritual worship, organized Scientology has
been slipping in this area for quite some time now.
First of all, the anti-authoritarian air has been replaced by a belief
in LRH as a new and even more absolute authority.
They might still occasionally be creating a sudden surge in IQ
with processing, but they no longer can tell.
They moved off of standard IQ tests and started using one
designed by Ron.
76
Even assuming that it was structured and calibrated accurately, it
only runs to 150 which means that it is inaccurate above about
135 (the upper edge of any IQ test’s range is considered to be
random, being affected more by mood, experience, and careless
mistakes rather than an actual difference in IQ).
You can hardly tell if you were really raising or lowering IQ with
such a test, and there is a reason for this.
When the technology was screwed up in 1969 due to the Class
VIII auditors and the introduction of Standard Tech, there was a
dramatic crash in actual, properly tested, IQ scores among
Scientologists.
I heard from many other staff members that their IQ scores had
fallen, generally by 10 to 20 points, after being audited on the
quickie “Standard Tech” which was in vogue at that time.
An order came out to stop telling people what they had scored
on the IQ tests (until then, it was freely mentioned and even used
as a sales point because it occasionally jumped significantly and
almost never slipped by more than the normal day-to-day
variation of a few points). The next thing that happened was that
the CCQ and other “wog” IQ tests were declared to be
suppressive (because they showed that we were lowering IQs)
and they were replaced by this test of Ron’s.
I think that the technical corrections that came in during the early
1970s fixed this lowering of IQ and that we are back to the
occasional significant improvement.
But we have lost the ability to see what is going on.
The worst plight is that of the current staff members.
They rarely get the processing which might give them a
significant IQ increase. They are constantly pounded with
authoritarian dictates that inhibit their ability to think freely (and it
was removing this stuff that used to raise IQ!).
And they continually use things referred to as “Learning Drills” on
the staff members (doing what they call “Chinese School” reciting
things etc.).
These learning drills were developed and tried briefly in the early
1960s.
77
Per Ron’s actual statement (on the Briefing Course tapes), they
are known to lower IQ by actual test (while improving the ability
to recite formulas by rote) and they were dropped at that time for
that reason.
So they have created a generation of staff members who can’t
think, and especially, can’t think for themselves about the subject
of Scientology.
WHAT IS:
Most Scientology staff really are there to help people. They are
enduring terrible conditions for the sake of mankind. They don’t
get rich.
They generally don’t even get a lot of Scientology processing.
A few may be on a power trip, but that is only possible to top
management.
WHAT ISN’T:
A lot of money flows into the Sea Org, but few ever see any of it.
Most of it disappears into reserve funds for fanatically defending
the organization, or it is wasted on various bits of foolishness.
A tiny handful might be living like kings and a few might be
siphoning off funds into their own private nest eggs, but 99.9% of
the staff are in self sacrifice mode. This is why you fail in any
effort to attack them.
Most are already martyrs to the cause.
They have been so abused that anything they do to you does
not seem to them to be an overt because they have suffered far
worse at the hands of the organization, and they have swallowed
it for the sake of mankind.
I have said many critical things about the organization, but they
are still trying to help people.
And the processing does help people even if it doesn’t live up to
the sales pitches.
On this basis, they should be helped rather than destroyed.
78
I am not in opposition to the Sea Org or the CofS and I do not
consider them an enemy (although they will probably consider
me to be one). I simply consider that they need widesweeping
and radical reforms. And what they need most is truth, honesty,
and free communication. You cannot clear a society if you
yourself are loaded with withholds.
Like handling a wayward child, you have to hold a firm line and
refuse to tolerate their overts while encouraging everything about
them that is right and sane.
WHAT IS:
The CofS charges high prices, withholds data labeled confidential,
tries to restrict other data as being out-gradient, imposes endless
barriers and pre-requisites, and often attacks any use of its
materials that are not under their control.
They act like a corporation which is trying to impose a strict
monopoly and dribble out a small amount of service in a tightly
controlled manner.
WHAT ISN’T:
The actually is not the way to get rich.
The big joke is that if they made everything freely and easily
available (at reasonable book prices of course) and encouraged
self-help groups and co-audit clubs and do-it-yourself magazines
and gave away free group processing on TV specials, they
would have so much business flooding them that they couldn’t
handle it.
WHAT IS:
The clam is described in “History of Man”.
It is presented as being part of our evolutionary history.
WHAT ISN’T:
This isn’t a real incident.
The entire set of evolutionary pictures presented in the portion of
the book that deals with the genetic line was later found to be an
79
implant. Hubbard referred to this as the “Darwinian Implant” (see
the 1963 tape “Errors in Time” etc.).
The book was written in 1952 after only a few months of running
past life incidents.
As was the case with most of the early research, Ron took a
quick stab at it, felt satisfied that a few people could find the stuff
he was talking about, and went on to something else.
Dianetics and past life incident running wasn’t used again until
1957-58 (see “Have you lived before this life”) and was again
dropped until 1963 when some research was done on implants
and past lives.
What we actually have is only three brief but intensive research
periods in this area.
It was only in 1966 that they began regular training of Dianetic
auditors.
The 1966 technique was a beginners technique aimed at giving
people who had no auditor training some experience in engram
running before doing the clearing course.
It would actually make a much better do it yourself type book
than the 1950 Dianetics book, but I doubt that the SO would be
willing to tolerate such an endeavor.
Real use of professional Dianetics techniques did not begin until
1969.
With the vast amount of data that has been accumulating since
the 1970s, it might actually be possible to start putting together a
real history of man, but the will to seek out new answers seems
to have deserted the subject.
Based on my own experiences, I have tried to produce a real
roadmap of the course of our existence (see my next document,
“Cosmic History”).
But again, this is only based on the work of one person (myself).
At best (if I’m not wholly deluded), it will serve as a starting point
and a framework for organizing more data.
80
It is not thorough research.
Ron used to say that we are still on a research line.
That statement was never canceled.
It IS still true.
WHAT IS:
Cults exist and will always exist as long as society and families
are imperfect and leave the teenager (or anyone) with a painful
vacuum that needs to be filled.
WHAT ISN’T:
Scientology isn’t very bad as far as cults go.
You might think of them as mind-bending, money-grubbing, and
dangerous fanatics, but they will at least keep your kid off drugs
and away from gang violence and perhaps even make him into a
good worker who can get a job elsewhere if he leaves them. At
worst, it’s probably better than joining the army.
Some lives have been ruined and a few have even been lost but
they’re nowhere near as bad as the competition where the death
toll is often beyond counting.
WHAT IS:
There is a spiritual side to man.
WHAT ISN’T:
We don’t have all the answers.
We are in the position of Columbus who, having found America,
believed that he was in India. But the untapped resources of the
new world were far greater than anything he could have
imagined.
It was well worth the trip.
AFTERWORD:
I can’t claim to be a true scientist in the field of the human mind.
81
I still live in the darkness of alchemy, searching for the light of
truth.
But it is my hope that perhaps I will be the last alchemist.
If I inspire others to look further and carry us forward into a true
science, then I have done my job.
May Truth Be With You,
The Pilot
Fall 1996
82
CHAPTER 2 - COSMIC HISTORY
INTRODUCTION
We have come down through a long series of universes. All of the
more advanced sources seem to be aware of this, most notably the
Tibetan scriptures and L. Ron Hubbard’s investigations of 1952.
However, no one has ever provided a detailed description of the
sequence or characteristics of these universes. If we have indeed
fallen from a godlike state, then the universes themselves must follow
some sort of a dwindling progression and the mechanics of that decay
must reflect, on the whole, how we have come to be in the state that
we are in.
This document will attempt to sketch out the broad outlines and
provide a context which will hopefully support further research. I
cannot guarantee that all the information given here is exactly correct.
The best I can do is to say that I think it comes reasonably close. But
of one thing I am certain, the picture can be no less complex than that
presented here. If I have erred, it is on the side of missing things
rather than putting too much there. Nothing less would serve to
explain the degree to which we have fallen.
Before embarking on an actual discussion of the history, it is important
to define my usage of the word “universe” because it is used in many
sloppy ways in the field of metaphysics.
By universe, I mean a complete system of space and time. And for
this discussion, I mean specifically those large agreed upon universes
in which we all have lived.
There is not a one to one mapping between the points in space within
one universe and those in another. A universe can have more than
one 3 dimensional plane and can also have other 3 dimensional spaces
(bubbles or pockets) tied to it. These are all considered to be part of
the same universe because there is a mapping of points and there is a
correspondence of time and there is a carry over of physical laws. But
truly separate universes do not tie together in a direct manner and do
not have identical laws. Note that you can setup transfer points
between separate universes, but these are arbitrary points linked
together without any correlation.
The current universe is one of very strict physical laws and is best
characterized as a highly mechanical MEST (Matter/ Energy/ Space/
Time) oriented creation. The immediately preceding universe was
83
one of Magic where physical laws were not quite as solid. Just as the
literature of science fiction hints at the flavor of our life in this universe,
the literature of fantasy hints at the nature of the Magic universe. But
even the magic universe was quite physical and highly structured in its
own context. As we work backwards from this universe, we see that
each preceding universe was slightly less solid and more conducive to
thought until we reach the earliest ones where the Thetan (Spirit / that
which thinks) is senior and the physical aspects are trivial things that
can be modified by the merest whim.
Let us now go all the way back and set the stage for the entire
procession of universes.
84
IN THE BEGINNING
Before anything exists, there can only be nothing.
But the preternatural nothingness must have a potential, and that
potential must be infinite because an infinity of creations has
descended from it. If there had been no potential, then we would not
exist, and if the potential had been limited, we would have ground to a
halt long ago.
The nothingness exists before all space and time, therefore it is
unchanging and may be described as static.
Matter and energy and any other possible forms can only exist within
space and time and therefore are second order creations.
Counting and the quantification of things are dependent on the
existence of things which can be counted, therefore all mathematics
and the very concept of quantification is a second order creation. And
so the nothingness is above the concept of quantification and is neither
few nor many, neither zero nor infinite, it is literally beyond counting.
The nothingness has the potential for thought, but there is nothing to
think about until something is created, therefore, the first thought and
the first creation must be one and the same, for something must be
conceived of to exist. Therefore, the process of thought in its ultimate
form, is the process of creation.
Of the four basic components of this universe, namely Matter, Energy,
Space, and Time, only Space can be conceived of without reference to
any of the other factors. Therefore, the first creation must be space
rather than matter, energy, or time.
IN THE BEGINNING, THE ZERO-INFINITE LIFE STATIC CONCEIVED
OF SPACE. AND IN THE CONCEPT OF SPACE, IS THE CONCEPT OF
SEPARATION. AND THE ONLY THING THERE WAS WHICH COULD
BE SEPARATED WAS THE LIFE STATIC ITSELF.
But the basic life static which is the unchanging nothingness is senior to
space time and therefore cannot be affected by this separation.
It is not made less by it, and therefore it may again separate. And from
the view of the basic nothingness, the separations cannot be before or
after each other because it is indeed timeless, but from the lesser view
of that which is separated, the separated almost statics can conceive
that one separated before another and therefore we have time.
85
And the lesser near-statics are also nothingness with the potential for
infinite creation, but they have the experience of time and therefore
the experience of what they have created.
Once those who can conceive are separated from the basic
nothingness, they then proceed to apply further separations to bring
about the creation of existence. A positive and a negative can be
pulled out of nothing and the net equation remains the same. 1 - 1 = 0
= 2 - 2 = 0 = 256 - 256 etc. The only difference between these is
consideration and consideration is the product of thought. Infinite
matter and energy may therefore be generated by thought alone.
SPACE IS THE SEPARATION OF PARTICLES TIME IS THE
SEPARATION OF EVENTS IDENTITY IS THE SEPARATION OF
THOUGHT
The interposition of distance is necessary for viewing or perceiving
anything.
The interposition of time is necessary for emotion. There is no loss
without time, nor is there feeling.
The interposition of identity is necessary for consideration. Without
identity, all thought is one which is a passive condition of cosmic
allness. Therefore, to think about or consider thought, it is necessary
to introduce at least a slight separation from all thought and therefor it is
necessary to be an individual to some slight degree. Therefore,
identity is necessary for self awareness. Furthermore, the Zero-Infinite
Life Static is not a self aware unit, instead it is the sum total of all
awareness that is or that might be (or might have been). Therefore, it
does not judge or intervene, it just IS.
MATTER IS THE CONSIDERATION THAT SOMETHING IS THERE.
ENERGY IS THE POTENTIAL FOR SOMETHING TO HAPPEN.
Since the basic nothingness is beyond all limitations of time and space,
it may be considered as infinite and eternal from our time/space limited
perspective. By its very nature, it will always exceed the highest
orders of infinite creation that have been achieved and therefore will
always demand the creation of even further infinities of somethingness
to balance the nothingness. Therefore, the scope of creation is
limitless and eternal. Since the nothingness is always with us, we do
not lack for it. Our only lack is for the somethingnesses (those things
which are not nothing) which will always fall short of completely
balancing the nothingness. The self aware near-statics which we will
86
call Thetans (thought units) fulfill themselves by an ongoing process of
creation.
Only when this creative process is blocked or stifled do they become
miserable.
Furthermore, the separation itself is only a matter of consideration.
The thought beings are still part of the original static and therefore have
no need to rejoin it since they never really left it in the first place. The
ultimate state of these beings is to be an operating manifestation of the
ultimate static and project an infinity of creation to balance the
nothingness. All lesser states are therefore at least slightly unpleasant
but are maintained in the hope of future creation.
87
THE DANCE OF CREATION
At the highest levels, the self-aware life statics participate in a dance of
infinite creation. Here, everything that can be conceived of is created,
exchanged, and experienced. Here we have an infinity of universes in
constant flux, varying even in the number of dimensions used by each
universe. At this level, the individual is himself near infinite, creating
and experiencing multiple universes simultaneously and projecting an
infinity of personalities, and yet the individual is still individual and
separate and distinct from the other individuals who also participate in
the dance of creation. And the flux between these individuals is the
dance and is the infinity of creation.
This level is the co-existence of static and here each individual is, to all
intents and purposes, God. And the only compelling purpose of it all is
to continue to add to the richness of creation. And this might well be
termed divine and infinite bliss. It is a nirvana, but a nirvana of infinite
somethingness rather than nothingness.
But given an infinity of infinities to fill, it becomes mandatory to leave
no stone unturned in the search for yet more new and varied
creations. In pursuit of this, there is the idea that a new being, freshly
separated from the zero-infinite life static, might conceive of new
systems of creation, different from those which are already in
existence. And so new beings were indeed separated out and did add
greatly to the richness of creation.
But the most original creations would stem from beings who were
isolated from the existing order and were not tainted by exposure to
what the older beings had created. And so there is the concept of
isolating a new crowd of individuals within a sort of womb where they
can develop on their own.
We are now in such a womb, and the entire series of universes that
we have built and inhabited are in this womb. When we have finished
our development, we will exit the womb and carry our new systems
of creation with us into the dance and begin an infinitely interesting
exchange of mockups with the older beings. And someday, eons
hence, when we have milked dry every variation of our own systems,
and the systems of the older beings, and the endless variations of
intermixing the systems, then we will eagerly await the birth of yet
another crop of new beings who will bring forth their own set of
wonders.
88
No matter how miserable you might be today, the duration of the
misery is short in comparison with eternal bliss. When you have
achieved the ultimate godlike state, you will consider the pains of birth
a small price to have paid for it.
89
THE WOMB
How is it possible to enclose a group of godlike beings and prevent
them from experiencing the vast and interesting body of existing
creations? How can you control someone whose mearest whim has
the power to create and destroy universes? Initially, since you are
dealing with innocent new beings, you can distract them with an
interesting object and channel their attention in the direction that you
desire. But this does not work for very long, and soon they will begin
to look around and be attracted by the fascinating works of the older
beings. And with that, the freshness of new unbiased creation would
be lost. So something further is needed.
But a god can only trap or limit himself, and at most, he can be aided
by the deception and trickery of others. But even in this, the older
beings must not be directly involved or they will eventually
contaminate the new crowd.
And so the new group of beings must be tricked into conflict among
themselves and into building traps for each other. And each one is
trapped, not so much by the traps that others laid for him, but by the
traps that he laid for others for sooner or later, he will forget one of his
own traps and fall into it by mistake.
The general plan is that the new beings will dig themselves into a trap
of their own devising. And will sink deeper and deeper into it and
eventually will become the effect of their own creation and even forget
who they are and how they built the trap in the first place. But in so
doing, they will evolve a new system of creation which will be the
anatomy of the trap. And eventually, they will begin to dig themselves
out, which will require regaining control over the entirety of their
creations.
We lie now at the bottom of such a trap, and it might seem that we
could never create even a single atom of the physical universe around
us. But these abilities will return as we dig ourselves out. And when
we exit the womb, each of us will not only have all of the rich and
interesting details of Earth at our fingertips, but we will also have the
details of the Star Wars like physical universe and the Magic universe,
and the numerous universes that came before. We will bring all of this
out into the greater society of beings and our rewards will be great. It
has been a hard road and will continue to be rough for awhile, but it
has worked before and it is the only way to develop in true isolation.
90
And the older beings will not and cannot intervene. We must dig
ourselves out, for it is this which will give us the power over these
creations of ours. If the older beings were to step in and rescue us, so
to speak, by pulling us out of this trap, they would be stealing from us
our richly deserved reward.
These are our creations and it is for us to take command over them.
We have been totally isolated for a long time. There was only one
external intervention at the very beginning. This was the absolute
minimum possible and there have been no others although we have
frequently pretended to each other that we were older or higher
beings and have even sometimes imitated the actual intervention with
the intent of bedeviling and tricking each other.
This one and only bit of external interference consisted of presenting
us with a single ultra-complex object which would prejudice us
towards conflict and entrapment. This object was the Jewel of
Knowledge.
91
THE JEWEL OF KNOWLEDGE
This is the only creation we have ever received from “outside” and it is
the only contact we have ever had with the older beings.
There have been many false beginnings of the time track that we have
implanted in each other during our trap building frenzy. There have
also been many true beginnings of track in the various universes in
which we have been engaged. But the jewel of knowledge is the
actual first experience for all of us. Each being’s attention was directed
to it as they separated from the ultimate static and it was so fascinating
that all were drawn in and by the time anyone might have felt like
looking outward for something else from outside, we had already sunk
too low to penetrate the walls of the trap that we had been encouraged
to build for ourselves.
The experience of the jewel of knowledge does not have a big sign on
it saying that it is the first experience or that it is the beginning of track
or the start of time. In fact, it is just the opposite. Incidents that yell
loudly about being the beginning do so as a means of trickery and are
never actually the first incident. Furthermore, you can’t find the jewel
of knowledge experience by trying to find the first incident, there are
just too many falsely labeled first ones. But once you do spot it, all of
the “first” incidents always seem to be later.
Another misleading factor, is that the jewel of knowledge is extremely
complex. It is quite possibly the most complex thing we have ever
had contact with. And our creations become simpler as we look earlier
on the time track. So our expectation would be for the first incident to
be very simple. And its not, because it came from outside.
The jewel of knowledge is an object in 17 or more dimensions. It has
a diamond like structure, but this extends in a huge number of
directions and contains endless faces or facets. It is extraordinarily
beautiful and interesting. We have a tremendous problem visualizing it
because one of our little traps that we used on each other intentionally
blocked our ability to visualize or perceive more that 3 dimensions.
But even before we became blocked on many dimensional structures,
the jewel was really too complex for a new innocent being to grasp as
a whole. It was intentionally created that way so that we wouldn’t
simply digest it quickly and then look around for more interesting
creations made by the other beings.
92
The jewel was divided into chambers and we went through each
chamber sequentially. Each chamber explained something that was
interesting and useful to a new being, and most of the data was
correct. Only very slyly and subtly did they work in misleading
information that predisposed us towards conflict and entrapment.
For there was no way to force us to swallow the jewel, we could only
be coaxed into accepting it all by a great show of true knowledge and
beauty.
There is no language in the experience of the jewel. We did not have
any at that time and they certainly would not teach us one for that
would have prejudiced our thinking far too much. Instead, it is all
demonstrations using very simple objects. These were simple
squares, triangles, circles etc. with many dimensions. We refer to a
three dimensional square as a cube and a four dimensional square is
called a tesseract by the mathematicians but we lack good words for
seven or eight dimensional versions of this shape,. However, an eight
dimensional square is still a simple abstract object that would not
impart very much of a bias into our own creations.
The jewel’s chambers also never show anything that looks like bodies
or people. They use nebulous clouds or points of light to represent
other beings in the chambers that deal with the interactions of beings.
The demonstrations are generally very simple. For example, one of
the early chambers demonstrates how to perceive an object. Looking
at things with only one eye open is adequate for a flat two dimensional
view but true depth perceptions in three dimensions is best done with
two eyes. In a similar manner, looking at a 7 dimensional cube is best
done by looking at it from 6 points simultaneously.
They don’t tell you this, instead they show you. It begins with the
vague impression of an object in front of you. Then you feel yourself
drawn into putting out more and more points from which to view the
object. When you finally get six unique viewpoints (and they mustn’t
be in the same plane), the object suddenly becomes very real and
there is a satisfying feeling.
Then they have you put out even more viewpoints and the object
becomes thin and unsatisfying again. So you learn to synchronize the
number of viewpoints that you use with the dimensions of the object
that you are viewing.
Many of the chambers are interesting and helpful in this manner. But a
few of them are misleading and treacherous. For example, one of the
93
chambers shows many “beings” participating in creating a collection of
objects that are moving around in harmony. The sensation is very
pleasant. Then one of the beings begins working contrary to the
efforts of the others and the sensation is unpleasant, the harmony is
destroyed. So the other beings gang up on the disagreeable one and
force him back into agreement and the sensation becomes pleasant
again. It is actually a false idea that predisposes you to beating up on
anybody who is different and implanting people to force them into
agreement.
When we finished going through all of the chambers, we were left with
the idea that it is necessary to control and trap others. We were also
given the idea that we now had to build something of our own in
exchange for the jewel before we had a right to look at any more of the
older beings creations. But of course before we finished that, we had
dug ourselves in so deeply and trapped ourselves so well that we had
lost any hope of reaching outside and were launched on our decent
into more and more complex traps of our own making.
94
WE BEGIN THE CREATIVE PROCESS
We left the jewel of knowledge with an enthusiastic desire to create a
complex and interesting universe. There were no rules but that it had
to be interesting and complex. Even the number of dimensions to be
used was unspecified and therein lay the first and ultimate conflict.
It takes time and effort to devise and build an elaborate mockup. And
the more dimensions you use, the more time and work is involved.
Three dimensions are more complex than two, and four dimensions
are even worse, and an entire system of creation had to be built up
from scratch. Imitating the 17 dimensions used in the jewel would
have been ridiculous for new beings and would have lacked originality
besides.
And each of the beings was godlike and had been advised to make his
own decisions and go his own way as well as being told to keep
others in line (a sure recipe for conflict) and so each chose an arbitrary
number of dimensions and began working.
Soon there were some people working on one dimensional systems
and some on two or three or four all the way up to about a dozen
dimensions with occasional dabbling in even greater numbers of
dimensions. And the distribution of beings was fairly even with a bit
more working on the lower numbers of dimensions since it was easier
and a gradual petering out up towards the higher numbers. And as
each being invested more and more time and effort into mockups
using a certain number of dimensions, he developed an attachment for
that number of dimensions and a vested interest in it.
But fewer dimensions are simpler and the beings who were trying to
devise a one dimensional system began to show results early while
those who were working on a larger scale were still in the rudimentary
stages of invention.
Those one dimensional systems of creation are still with us. One of
them is music. The one dimensional “object” (e.g. a sound or musical
note) can only go up and down. It moves forward in time, but time is
not a dimension in the sense that were are discussing here (we are
concerned with dimensions of space). The “object” can have a width
and shape in the form of a chord (as opposed to a single note) and
there are all sorts of interesting aesthetics in the inter-relationship of
many notes moving up an down in a complex work, but it is still
motion in only one dimension. The notes can also have a quality as in
the sound of a piano Vs that of a violin but this also does not change
95
the number of dimensions just as adding color to a three dimensional
world doesn’t add an extra dimension.
The fruits of the two dimensional effort encompassed the basic
versions of many of our board games such as chess.
As these low dimensioned systems began yielding results, some of
the beings working on large numbers of dimensions began to feel that
they had too long a runway and switched over to one of the lower
groups. But the tendency was to join the 3, 4, or 5 dimensional efforts
where there was substantial room for new contributions rather than to
join the 1 or 2 dimensional efforts which were already being sewn up
so to speak.
And it came about that the 3 dimensional group had more members
than any of the others with slightly less in the 4 dimensional group.
But there were still quite a few working above 4 dimensions. And
because 3 dimensions was simpler than 4 and it had more people
working on it, it was fast approaching completion at least in its basic
architecture. The 3s could see that the remaining people working very
high dimensions would eventually drop down and work with the 4s (or
possibly the 5s). They wouldn’t join the 3s because the 3s were
nearly done and also because these were diehards who had already
stuck with very complex forms and would probably prefer to at least
have 4 or 5 dimensions to work in rather than 3. So their estimate was
that although the 3s were currently the largest group, they would
eventually be outnumbered by the 4s as more and more beings
abandoned the higher dimensional efforts.
In a sane society, this would have been fine. There is room for many
systems of creation. But they all knew (thanks to the jewel of
knowledge) that everyone would have to be beaten into line and settle
into one system. And they had a vested interest in continuing with
their own mockups in the system that they had devised rather than
abandoning it for a 4 dimensional system created by others.
Furthermore, they knew that a 4 dimensional system can manipulate
and overwhelm a three dimensional system just as someone operating
in a 3 dimensional system can crumple up a 2 dimensional painting or
sweep a 2 dimensional chess game onto the floor.
All the 3 dimensional group had was a temporary numerical advantage
combined with a system that was nearly complete in comparison with
the 4 dimensional system. They knew that they would be
overwhelmed eventually. So they decided to strike first and so began
the reality wars.
THE REALITY WARS
96
This was the longest period in our history and the most extreme
conflict we have ever been engaged in. It took place between beings
of awesome capabilities who were invulnerable to anything except for
the side effects of their own infinitely powerful postulates and
decisions. And it took nearly forever for these immortals to wear each
other down and finally get everyone beaten into line.
And there is nobody who did not at one time or another fight on every
side of this conflict. And there is nobody who did not occasionally say
the hell with it all and go off on their own to build universes only to
eventually be sucked back into the conflict again. And the fighting of
this war as an interesting game was probably as important to us as the
issues being fought over, and so the desire of the majority was always
to perpetuate the battle rather than to come to some reasonable
compromise.
And the flavor of the battle was more like that of kids playing a war
game where people only rarely suffered any actual harm rather than
the horror of humanoid warfare.
But over the long course of time, people did eventually succeed at
abberating and controlling and entrapping each other.
In the final stages of the conflict, the 3 dimensional proponents did
succeed in laying in mental blocks that interfered with creating or
perceiving things with more than 3 dimensions. They could not block
out 1 and 2 dimensional capabilities because these are part of 3
dimensional constructions, but they could and did block the use of 4 or
more dimensions.
The 4 dimensional crew could not retaliate in kind because to block 3
dimensions would block 4 as well. Instead, they took the only
countermeasure possible which was to implant a craving for 4
dimensional mockups.
A single 4 dimensional coin might remedy your cravings for wealth.
Since one can’t have that, one wants endless 3 dimensional coins
because that approaches the condition of a single 4D coin which
consists of an infinity of 3D coins layered together along the 4th axis.
Consider having a 2D picture of a coin. If you layered enough of those
together, you would come close to having a 3D coin. But you never
quite make it, its not really the same. So the 3D never really satisfies
and you get abberated on the subject of quantity.
97
This left us in the strange state of being unable to perceive 4
dimensional mockups while at the same time not only reacting to them
but also needing them. There is a 4 dimensional component to things
such as sexual ecstasy. The very universe we live in, although built of
3 dimensional mockups, has a 4 dimensional thickness which is what
makes it so solid and difficult to manipulate. If you hit the wall with
your hand and then do a mental mockup of a hand hitting a wall, you
will notice a significant difference in the two experiences. If you then
mockup thousands of identical hands striking thousands of identical
walls, all in parallel, you will notice that the mocked up sensation
comes much closer to the real thing. So our current reality does have
a 4 dimensional component. It is a thickness consisting of multiple
copies of the 3 dimensional reality all sort of glued together and
moving as a unit.
To gain some understanding of how this happened, we must look at
the early capabilities and aberrations of the beings in this time period.
98
THE EARLY CAPABILITIES AND ABERRATIONS
As to abilities, we are now talking about beings who were virtually
unlimited in their ability to create and alter matter, energy, space, and
time and who were furthermore capable of being in many places at
once and tracking and managing many complex operations at the
same time.
But the beings were very limited as to both experience and
philosophy. Their thinking was almost of the idiot savant style with
tremendous mechanical capabilities but little interest in the meaning of
things. The use of symbols and abstractions is something that
evolved gradually and it only started to appear bit by bit in this early
period.
The earliest communications were simply an exchange of
knowingness. You would know that someone else wanted you to
come over and look at something they had created. You’d go over and
look at it and then decide that they knew that you liked it (or didn’t like
it). Then they would decide that you knew that they were happy (or
unhappy) with the judgment and so you would know that as well. This
was soon followed by exchanging simple pictures. But exchanging
pictures of abstract symbols as a means of communications only
evolved on the eve of the reality wars as the universe building work
was approaching completion.
It is in the area of communications that the first aberrations developed.
This was due to the influence of the jewel of knowledge which hinted
continually that completely free communication was not really such a
good idea. This hidden purpose behind this was both to keep the
new beings from trying to communicate with things outside of the
womb and also to lay the stage for the conflicts and entrapment that
was necessary to their development, for people do not fight nor do
they get trapped if they are in full communication.
Unlike other aberrations, these early communication aberrations were
by choice and they are slightly different for each of us, although the
mechanics are the same, because each of us made our own decisions
about who and what we didn’t feel like communicating with. And here
is the road out. Since communication barriers are, at basic, created by
choice, they can be pushed through by the simple decision to
communicate again without having to unravel the entire maze that we
have built on top of them.
99
In modern times, we see long chains of problems and upsets layered
upon each other. And we see harmful acts and guilt and retribution.
And these all seem to lie on top of a core of incidents of loss and pain.
But the early beings could not be hurt and at first could not even suffer
loss because they could create anything again. And the earliest
problems, etc. could obviously not be dependent upon yet earlier
ones.
The early aberrations all stem from the communication blocks created
willfully based on the advise of the jewel of knowledge. Early
problems all stemmed from an unwillingness to communicate or from
leaving communications incomplete. Early harmful acts and upsets
came about because of the misunderstandings engendered by
messed up communications. And then these things began to feed on
themselves. This happened during the early universe building period,
and during the reality wars, and continues to this day.
And since these are the most basic aberrations, it is possible to
address them even on someone walking in off of the street without
long preparation, and you can undo their everyday problems as is
clearly illustrated by lower level Scientology processing.
But taking apart the original problems that occurred during the basic
universe building era has its own difficulty. It is not that these early
incidents are painful or hard to face, most of them would be a joke to
us now after all that we have been through. The real difficulty is that
this early period is almost incomprehensible. You might, for example,
have someone who is being a near infinite series of golden pyramids
spread out among 20 different universes of varying numbers of
dimensions deciding, let us say, to trick a being who is an infinite
progression of green and orange carrots into thinking that a right
handed space (whatever that is) is really left handed.
And that is the basic anatomy of the earliest aberrations, which came
about through the predisposition to not communicate. And then we
have the reality wars, with everyone working day and night to try and
figure out how to further confuse and abberate and control each other.
This could not be done by implanting commands through energy
waves or hypnosis or whatever because the beings could not at this
time be affected by force or energy. So these early efforts
concentrated heavily on showing you very aesthetic little stories that
would trick you into weakening yourself. They might, for example,
show you how glorious it would be to fight against overwhelming odds
and loose. Or they might show you the nobility of self sacrifice. And
100
then they might encourage you to go ahead and experience these
things in some sort of a mocked up universe,
And often, you would, because you were hungry for interesting
experiences and had not the slight concept that anything could ever
really harm you. And all the while, they’d be encouraging you to turn
off your own abilities and reduce your horsepower.
None of these things worked very well at first. But eventually, what
with continually changing sides, we all eventually fell into traps that we
had ourselves designed while playing on the other team. And if
enough time had passed for us to have forgotten that we had built a
trap, then it might be quite effective against us. And we were just too
stupid to fix the traps that we built so that they wouldn’t trap their
creators.
You wouldn’t be bothered by these traps now. They didn’t have
much more punch than our current TV commercials. Its just hard to
conceive of this stuff because the weight of the high powered
conditioning used in later universes interferes with our ability to think.
101
THE MIS-ALIGNED SPACES
After the reality wars, we basically settled down to mocking up 3
dimensional universes.
Up to and including this period, there is no single agreed upon
universe. Instead, people would mockup universes pretty much at
will. Both before and during the reality wars, these universes had
varying numbers of dimensions. After the conclusion of the wars, it
was 3 dimensional universes all the way, but it was still an infinite
variety and complexity with everyone going their own way.
Before the reality wars, people were simply individualistic in what they
wanted to mock up. But in the aftermath of the wars, they became
quite contrary and disagreeable. They had had one thing jammed
down their throat and had been forced into agreement on the point of
using 3 dimensions. So now they were going to be as individualistic as
possible in all other respects.
This era could be called the mis-aligned spaces because everyone
was trying to keep everything as far out of alignment as possible. Or it
could be called the mis-aligned agreements or the era of disagreement
or whatever.
Putting it in an oversimplified manner, if someone invented fire engines
to put out fires, then somebody else would immediately invent fire
engines to collect the trash and a third person would invent traveling
super fires that searched for fire engines and burnt them up. But it
was worse than that. There were the rudimentary forms of language
in the sense of meanings being assigned to symbols, and out of
contrariness, different or opposite meanings were often assigned to
the same symbol so that soon there were language difficulties and
great misunderstandings despite the fact that communication was still
basically telepathic in nature.
This carried on for a long time, and people fell further and further out of
communication with each other.
This of course encouraged even more problems, harmful acts, etc.
and led to games of entrapment.
The beings were also gradually condensing down and becoming
located throughout the entire early period of the track. At the time of
the jewel of knowledge, the being was close to omniscient and not
really located anywhere in particular except that his attention could be
102
occupied by something as elaborate as the jewel. But the jewel
convinced him that he should put some sort of mass or anchor point
into the places where he was operating. This was based on the false
idea that space was owned and belonged to individuals and so they
needed to stake their claim with some sort of mass. Eventually he
begins to believe that he is located where his masses are, but he still
continues to put out near infinite collections of objects to act as his
body so to speak. But his ability to occupy many viewpoints
deteriorates and eventually he condenses down to occupying a single
location. This deterioration is occurring during the era of the misaligned
spaces but he doesn’t really end up located as a single
individual until the agreements universe discussed below.
Again this is an extraordinarily long time period but is not really
measurable in human terms. All of these early eras are multi-verses
(collections of universes) rather than a single agreed upon universe and
time measurements are relative to a universe and tend to be
meaningless in situations such as this where time flows at different
rates in different universes. Your experience of the time is sequential
and you can probably lay out some sort of measuring system for
yourself, but different people will have experienced different amounts
of time due to being in different places which had different time rates.
Nothing, not even the time rate, was agreed upon consistently in this
era. It made it difficult to play games and to communicate. Eventually,
everyone came to agree on one thing, which was that some basis for
common agreement and consistent operation was necessary. And
under the surface, there was still the idea that we should build
something together that would be of comparable magnitude to the
jewel of knowledge.
Our solution was to build the agreements universe.
103
THE AGREEMENTS UNIVERSE
This is the first of the gigantic agreed upon universes where
everybody lived. It was not organized in any fashion except for having
an agreed upon set of definitions. It was just a big infinite space into
which anyone could project mockups of their choosing.
It was basically a 3 dimensional space and would, of course, contain 3
dimensional mockups, but it was also possible to project additional 3
dimensional spaces sideways of it or to redefine the same location as a
number of different 3 dimensional mockups in parallel. For example,
let us say that Bill creates a room with a green chair. Steve comes in
and agrees with it but then Joe shows up and decides that the chair is
blue. Steve and Bill resist this and so the space divides into two
parallels separated slightly in a 4th dimension with one space having
the green chair and the other one having the blue chair. When a fourth
person enters the room, he feels that he can go two ways, either to
the room with Bill and Steve and the green chair, or to the room where
Joe is sitting in the blue chair.
The basic flaw was in the definitions used. These were definitions of
basic things such as good and bad, happy and sad, big and small, etc.
The definitions were done as dichotomies - i.e. pairs of opposites.
The problem was that, whether due to inexperience or due to more
troublesome hints from the jewel, the pairs of definitions did not really
line up with each other. For example, there was a definition for good
(in the sense of nice) and bad, and there was a different definition for
good (in the sense of holy) and evil and the two versions of good did
not line up with each other so that it was possible to be good in the
holy sense while being quite nasty at the same time. This made for
more mis-communication and entrapment.
We designed these definitions ourselves, but we did it in teams. In
defining the agreements universe, each team designed one pair of
definitions without knowing what the other definitions were going to
be. This was considered to be fair since everyone had an equal hand
in making this mess. The definition was stated in terms of a simple
picture sequence. For example, good/bad was defined by a series of
pictures about the good bear and the bad bear. The good bear does
this and the bad bear does that. It shows about two dozen pairs of
examples of good and bad. Its all very silly and childlike. The charge
on these definitions is small but deep and is primarily due to the heavy
pressure of enforced agreement and the endless confusions and
upsets that occurred during our existence in the agreements universe.
The charge on these definitions and their association with childlike
104
mockups is probably why people sometimes have a great distaste for
childlike things.
We built these definitions in the mis-aligned spaces and then collected
them together. By extreme hard work, we build the definition
sequences into a 4 dimensional construction reminiscent of the jewel
of knowledge. It was basically a 4 dimensional inverted pyramid
golden in color. The inverted pyramid in this case symbolized the
narrowing down of many realities into one. Each 3 dimensional
pyramid in the 4 dimensional super-pyramid contained one of the
many pairs of definitions.
Even with true 4 dimensional abilities blocked, it was possible to build
a 4 dimensional construction by painstakingly layering together a large
series of 3 dimensional constructions. We all promised to agree to and
follow these definitions and we all made strong postulates that
everyone would be bound by the definitions. This was all done
before any of us had seen all of the definitions. Then we all gathered
around it and dived into it as a group.
You can spot rushing to get into agreement and going through a
golden inverted triangle. There will be a sense of thousands of other
beings rushing along with you similar to the sensation of the sperm
dream found by early Dianetics. After you pass through the triangle,
you get hit with the definitions one after the other beginning with the
good and bad bear. When we come out, we are all in a single empty
infinite space. The space is light (faintly golden) rather than dark. And
then we start creating things.
Death still did not exist, although we were getting pretty good at
forgetting things or dropping everything and deciding to go off to the
other end of the universe and start over. We were still not interiorized
into our creations. But there was a tendency to use the interesting
body types created for the agreements definitions as our
manifestations rather than using the simple pyramids or spheres that
we had used up to this time. But these were not really bodies as we
know them now because we flicked them in or out of existence as
necessary and were certainly not very bothered if one of them got
zapped since we’d just mock up another one.
This time period was long and interesting, but the conflicts gradually
got worse and eventually we wound up spending most of our time
tricking each other or messing up each other’s stuff. Eventually it got
so that you couldn’t build a complicated aesthetic creation without
some practical joker making some weird thing pop up in the middle of
it. People got frustrated and began to search for a solution.
105
The answer was to set up a new universe (since the agreements
universe was so messed up) in which each person would have their
own separate sub-universe. I.E.. each being would get their own
home universe which everyone else was supposed to leave alone.
106
HOME UNIVERSE
This occurs at the mid-point of our existence and in some respects it
was the peak of our efforts. By this point, we had gained enough
experience to develop very complex and sophisticated mockups, and
we had not yet decayed too far. It continues for a long period of
wonderful creation and the final collapse of home universe was
probably the first big loss that we experienced.
This was actually a collection of individual universes linked together in
a higher level space. This higher space was a sort of matrix of
gateways leading down into the individual home universes. Early on, it
seems like a sort of nebulous corridor with mirrors or thought pools
along the walls which lead into the individual universes. However, as
time passed, it gradually expanded until it had much the appearance of
the night sky full of stars. Except that the “stars” were the gateways
into the individual universes and if you went up close to them, these
stars might look like big golden balls or even symbols such as a flower
or an object hanging in the sky.
It is a mistake to think of this as a single universe with little balls in
which each thetan dwelled (there’s a later implant which presents it that
way). You would enter one of these spheres and find an entire infinite
universe. It would be as diverse and complex as the creating thetan
(or thetans in the case of agreed upon universes) had chosen to mock
up. It would not necessarily share physical universe laws or anything
else (except the primary entry point) with the other universes in the
matrix. It could also contain further subordinate universes below it.
Besides the individual universes, there were agreed upon universes
used for games or meeting places. These were quite numerous and
varied. There were also “story” universes, much like movies. These
story universes contained sequences of 3 dimensional pictures
arranged in a fixed time track that told a story and anyone could go into
one of these and enjoy the drama. There was actually quite a bit of
aesthetic competition involved, much like the academy awards. But
unlike our Hollywood productions, these were built as universes and
seemed just as real as our life here on Earth.
The development of the “stars” mockup at the top level is probably
due to the problem of managing an ever growing number of entry
points. Just lining the entry points up along the sides of a tunnel is too
inefficient. So we expanded the top level outward and started
arranging the entry points in a 3 dimensional space. Without a wall to
107
place them against, an oval thought pool is better mocked up as a
sphere. And so we have a sea of “stars” at the top level.
Within the individual universes, it became common practice to bring
this top level display of “stars” into view in the surrounding sky.
108
THE PENALTY UNIVERSES OF THE HOME UNIVERSE ERA
The home universe matrix had been built to keep people from
messing up each other’s creations. As such, it was a bit like sending
the children to their rooms because they are fighting. But this only
works if you can keep them out of each other’s home universes, and
without any means of enforcement, it was not long before pranksters
were sneaking into each others spaces and making trouble again.
And so we came up with the idea of punishing people for breaking the
rules. Everyone agreed that this was a good idea and intended it
purely for use on the bad guys. Nobody expected that it would be
used on them. It was the typical stupidity that has carried us ever
deeper into this trap.
But we were still immune to force and there was little that one
individual could do to another. However, by working as a group, it
was possible for us to build a complex series of sub-universes that
would at least make somebody feel uncomfortable and unhappy for a
little while. And so we created the penalty universes.
These penalty universes laid in the idea of descending down through a
scale of emotions beginning with a high exhilaration and working down
through anger, fear, etc. The scale is the emotional tone scale
observed by L. Ron Hubbard in the early days of Dianetics and
extensively researched and documented by him in 1951. And
everybody is going up and down that scale to this day, but it is
arbitrary and has no other reason for existence save that we picked
this pattern (almost at random) to use in building these penalty
universes.
A thorough discussion of the penalty universes needs it own book.
For now, let us just say that they were full of all sorts of interesting
symbols and body types which caught your interest combined with all
sorts of new degrading ideas such as sex and eating which were
presented to the person as interesting goals to pursue. Since these
were actual universes that you went through, the experience was real,
and yet it was all carefully orchestrated and twisted to give you
experiences which would convince you of all sorts of ridiculous and
abberative ideas (such as needing to eat) which later became part of
our everyday lives.
At first, these penalty universes hardly bothered us at all. And they
were not very effective at reducing the amount of mischief being done.
But we kept tossing each other into them for an extraordinarily long
109
time and eventually we became quite compulsive about dramatizing
the arbitrary and degraded ideas that they presented.
110
THE FALL OF HOME UNIVERSE
Throughout the home universe era, we built game playing universes
in which people could complete with each other. But there was
always a desire for rougher, tougher games. And there was always
the sticky problem of keeping people from sneakily overriding the
rules and cheating. Since beating others at the various games had
considerable status attached to it, this became an area of considerable
interest and importance.
And so eventually we tried to build a powerful and constraining game.
And to achieve this, we build the Games universe and for a playing
field, we built the original Earth. And it is not a matter of chance that
we are living on a copy of that world. It is a commonly used planetary
design because of its history. And because it was involved in the fall
of home universe, it is known to be a disturbing and restimulative
place. So any time a prison or dumping ground for undesirables is
needed in this galaxy, they go looking around for a copy of the original
Earth. There are probably thousands of them among the millions of
planets circling the stars of the Milky Way and any decent sized space
empire would have at least one somewhere within its borders.
But the original Earth itself was a nice and interesting mockup. After
all, it was built as the ultimate game rather than as a prison or a nasty
place.
We played this game endlessly. It was a subtle and complex version
of the child’s game where the rock can break the scissors and the
scissors can cut the paper but the paper can cover the rock. Except
that it was played with a huge variety of “identities” and endless
complex interrelations between them. These identities were things
like the “Ruler” and the “Scientist” and the “Artist” etc. But identity is not
a good term for this since many different individuals would put on
these packages of characteristics. So we will use the Scientology term
“Valence” (a package of personality characteristics) to describe these.
And this “Valence Game” was quite subtle despite the simplicity of the
rules. Each of the valences had a strict series of privileges, duties, and
constraints in relationship to each of the other valences. But a
character playing one valence might pretend to be another. For
example, an assassin might pretend to be a concubine and assassinate
the ruler.
111
It was quite popular and eventually championship games even had
crowds of spectators and commentators peering down from the top
level of the home universe matrix.
The real liability of this game was the use of high powered
conditioning to implant the form and constraints of the identities or
“valences” that were used to play the game on the original earth. This
was intended to make the game more interesting and prevent
cheating. But it lead to the building up of “mass” on these valences and
eventually it lead to our downfall.
Unlike other universes, the Games universe had a complex series of
rigid laws enforced by hitting the participants with “valence masses” on
the original Earth on their way into the game.
And we set up a sort of transparent copy of the original earth in the top
level of the home universe matrix itself.
As a result, we wound up with a complex planetary mockup being
used for a transfer point rather than a simple golden sphere.
There was a great deal of status and havingness attached to placing
mockups at the top level of home universe. To persist there, they
had to be mutually agreed upon. It seems as if one of the prizes for
winning in the games universe was to put something up at the top
level. Various objects and body mockups etc. wound up there as a
result. Eventually we even built some flat-Earth mockups at the top
level to give us a place to keep all of this stuff. Just guessing now,
there might have even been “embodyment clubs” meeting in these
places. If you hadn’t won the right to place a mockup at the top level,
you could only hang around there in an embarrassing disembodied
state. Of course you could just mock something up at the top level
illegally, but that was liable to get you tossed into a penalty universe.
We experienced aberration when entering the games universe but
once there we could leave easily and were only held by our interest in
the game. All of us tried every valence many many times. There
were different win and loss conditions for each valance. Afterwards,
we’d go back up to the home universe matrix and analyze the play.
Eventually, people began putting manifestations of their favorite
valences up in the top level matrix. I.E.., they’d win as the singer or as
the scientist or whatever and they’d put an appropriate body type up
at the top level as their prize. Some people might have even started
trying to collect the entire set of valance manifestations up at the top.
One thing that happened from this is that people would expect you to
112
follow games universe rules when dealing with a games universe
valence manifestation. Often they got compliance with this because
we’d hit the rules so often, but somebody would always disagree and
there were fights and upsets. Another problem with this was that it
gradually created more and more commonalty of agreement between
the top level matrix and the games universe.
Another thing that happened was the introduction of penalty universe
mockups onto the original Earth. Many beings flinched a bit at these
and so they could be used as barriers. It seems like people were
beginning to cheat and sidestep some of the implanted conditioning on
the way into the game and therefore something was needed to keep
them to the proper path.
Also, some of the hardier souls asked for penalty universe mockups as
game prizes and placed these up on the flat worlds in the top level as
well.
All of these factors caused an ever growing level of agreement and
connection between the penalty universes, the games universe, and
the top level of the matrix. The Original Earth and the flat worlds
orbiting around it acted as the central point of concentration.
And then an idea began circulating around that too great a commonalty
of agreed upon objects or anchorpoints bridging two universes could
cause those universes to collapse together. There might have even
been some popular story universes about this sort of thing happening.
And gradually people began to worry about the danger of having that
original earth tied in so tightly to the top of the home universe matrix.
And some people wanted to get rid of it, but others, real game playing
fans, were deeply attached to it and there was considerable fighting
and tension. And the tension kept building.
I’m not certain exactly what triggered the collapse. It seems to be
something to do with the penalty universes. Possibly they simply put
one too many penalty universe mockups on the original Earth when
the tension was at its peak. Or maybe they actually tried to connect or
merge the penalty universes with the original Earth either to beef up
the penalty universes or to enforce the rules of the game on earth
more strictly.
Or maybe some group decided to “cure” the more anti-social beings by
dragging them into agreement.
Regardless of the exact cause, what happened is that the entire matrix
began to collapse together.
113
Possibly you had the top level display on when the stars began to fall.
Or maybe you felt something strange and invoked the top level
display. The stars collapse into the Original Earth.
All the universes collide there.
The mass builds and the whole planet explodes. This is probably
basic on the big bang the astronomers get excited about.
Each of our universes fell into the Earth mass and flew outward in the
explosion. But you at least held part of your universe stably around
you during this. It was really just the outlying mockups and envelope
that shattered. Even so, you saw your universe (or universes)
scattered throughout the cosmos. There is tremendous loss and grief
on this.
When the piece you held together settled down, you probably moved
from grief up to anger. You’d already picked up the tone scale
dramatization from the penalty universes and this was enough impact
to bring about solid downtone emotions.
Somewhere in this incident, space seems to be filled with lightning and
energy. Your mockups begin decaying, getting corroded and
crumbling to dust. This is mainly due to the influence of the penalty
universes. Your universe is no longer separate and therefore is
affected by an agreed upon set of laws. But the only commonly
agreed upon laws were those of the penalty universes and the games
universe which had become part of the universe you were in. So
these agreements take precedence. And the biggest common
agreement between all the penalty universes is the downward slide
into decay.
You then tried to restore your mockups but you failed because others
invalidate them and downscale agreements were spreading around
and affecting you. So you started using the games valences against
others. You worked to destroy their mockups and impose your own.
Eventually this settles down into a big game to make your mockups
persist and others fail. In other words, have for self and can’t have for
others.
114
THE GAMES UNIVERSE
To all intents and purposes, the whole big ruined mess left after the fall
of home universe is the games universe vastly expanded with the
residue of all of the prior creations. And with the game twisted beyond
belief by the introduction of the penalty universe materials and
agreements. This is what we referred to as the games universe later
on the track. It is the first of the big compulsively agreed- upon
universes where we were no longer in full control of the creation of
reality.
In spite of all this, you were still a god; But a badly abberated one.
You were still immune to force and knew it, but your mockups could
be hurt and you were now subject to counter-emotion to some degree
because you could really loose something. In the home universe era,
this wasn’t true. You could always mock something up again and your
home universe knew no law but your own.
The body types, styles of mockups, etc. were quite varied in this
period. The penalty universes used 64 different body types of which
only one was truly human. Older styles such as people manifesting as
clouds or whatever were also in use. There was no pattern or
organization to the universe similar to the way our galaxy is structured.
It was just a hodge-podge of planets, flat-earths, pictures hanging in the
sky, or whatever and it all just sort of drifted around. Individuals
claimed areas and marked them off by filling the areas with faint light of
various colors so that space itself appeared to be a sort of patchwork
quilt. The old proponents of the one dimensional creation system also
often filled their space with music of some sort or another. These were
not sound vibrations but simply a musical telepathic wave that
permeated their areas.
The games leaned towards the intellectual side since we were not yet
very concerned with force and motion. These included things that
could be thought of as godlike equivalents of chess and cards and
various strategy games. They also included the old valence game and
various other games of one-upmanship where the opponents tried to
psych each other out in various ways. Elaborate mockups were often
built as prizes, or sometimes a period of service was wagered. There
is not as much motion as you might expect because much of the
motion was still non-linear (objects in motion might jump the way a
knight only touches certain squares in chess without passing through
the intermediate points).
115
The Games Universe goes on for a very long time. Some characters
are so bad that you want them out of the game but you have no way
of doing this. Everyone thinks this, but of course nobody agrees on
who should be thrown out.
Finally a solution is proposed. A lower universe could be built and the
undesirables sentenced to it. But a mechanism was needed to fix the
convicts up so that they couldn’t just pop back up and cause more
trouble.
So the remnants of all of the penalty universes were strung together.
Remembering the hate and urge to destroy that occurred during the fall
of home universe, this is used at the end of each positive goal to attach
a negative goal to it. I.E.. the positive (but degrading) penalty universe
goals such as the goal to eat were paired with their opposites such as
the goal to starve. The negative goal swings the victim around to the
next positive goal and makes him go round and round through these
penalty goals. This is called the treadmill. With the attachment of the
negative goals it became a self perpetuating cycle that is supposed to
set the bad guys up to do each other in forever. This is a very popular
idea. It is probably the first time after the collapse of home universe
that everybody agreed on something.
Needless to say, everyone builds this thing intending it for use on the
bad guys rather than themselves, and of course everyone eventually
gets tossed in. The treadmill leads the person down into what we
came to call the Motion or Motions Universe.
116
THE MOTION UNIVERSE
In the Motions Universe, we have the beginning of real sensation as
we know it now. These things were suggested in the penalty
universes, but they didn’t really have a kick until this period. It was
probably due, initially, to the spinning sensation that you get from the
treadmill (which is very slight the first time you go through it). It was not
particularly unpleasant at first and it seemed very interesting, so the
games in the Motions Universe tended more towards experiencing
sensations and having lots of complex motions.
It was a bit like being in a gigantic three dimensional video arcade. Of
course we are talking about a near infinite universe which lasted a long
time, so of course you could find just about anything somewhere in it.
But the predominant factor was big games of motion and sensation.
There was also more group activity than existed before. The individual
was weaker and so he did better playing as part of a team, and group
effort was generally needed to build the more elaborate mockups and
game playing areas.
And as people became more attached to sensation, it became
possible to control and confuse them by hitting them with waves of
sensations. And so we have the individual much more at effect than he
was previously.
This was the first large universe that was built specifically as a prison
to eliminate undesirables. This was the beginning of a pattern that we
have followed for the entire series of universes. Since there is no way
to kill an immortal spirit, the best way to get rid of him is to exile him to
some sort of lower universe built as a prison. Everybody works on
building these things and then the game becomes one of tossing
people into it and, if you have been tossed in, it becomes a game of
escaping.
Usually the implanted conditioning used to force one into the prison
universe and keep him there is not very effective at first. One of the
key ingredients is making the person forget that there is a higher
universe to escape to. Another is to make him forget that he is in
prison and distract him with all sorts of interesting things within the
prison universe itself. But the individual is pretty tough and shrugs this
stuff off after awhile and pops back up to the higher universe.
But as he keeps escaping and getting thrown back in and throwing
others in, the conditioning gradual begins to have a stronger effect on
117
him. Also, as the centuries pass, gradually more and more people are
in the prison universe at any given time and the game there evolves
and becomes more complex and interesting.
And so we have the individual being tossed into the motions universe
and playing there for awhile and developing some interest in motion
and sensation. And then he remembers that he is in jail and goes back
up to the games universe and reestablishes himself there. And then
maybe he tosses some other people into the motions universe, either
to punish them (because he has reformed and is now an upstanding
citizen) or for vengeance (because they threw him in) or just as a joke.
Sooner or later, he gets tossed in again himself and gets a bit more
attached to motion and sensation and this time when he gets out, he
feels something is lacking in the games universe. So he is more willing
to go back to jail again and eventually might stay in the Motions
Universe by choice.
There are always a few people who remain at the top, and who stay in
power and remain out of jail. These are the winners of the game in the
higher universe, so to speak. Gradually the Games Universe empties
out and all but these last few wind up down in the Motions Universe.
But without enough people, the Games Universe becomes
uninteresting. Furthermore, it is difficult to keep a large and elaborate
universe properly created and cleaned up without a lot of people. So
the Games Universe begins to shrink and decay.
The last group sitting up in the Games Universe then sees that they
have no choice but to descend down into the Motions Universe along
with everybody else. But they have been avoiding going through the
treadmill and getting hit with the various conditions used on the
prisoners and they have knowledge of higher realities beyond what
the convicts sitting down below are aware of. So they chose to invade
in style.
This again is a commonly repeated patter. The last crew in the higher
universe comes down into the prison bypassing the implanted
conditioning and using the technology of a higher universe to conquer
and gain power and establish themselves as rulers or gods over the
inhabitants of the lower universe.
In this case, where the Motions Universe is invaded by the “gods”
coming down from the Games Universe, the primary invader trick was
a “False Jewel of Knowledge” which conditioned the inhabitants to be
good and willing slaves by teaching them that they had been created
to serve the gods. These false jewels were constructed based on an
inmate knowledge of the treadmill (since the people in the Games
118
Universe had the plans for it and the people in the Motions Universe
had been kicked around by it and then made to forget) and the far
better recollection of the original Jewel of Knowledge that was available
in the Games Universe. A trip through a false jewel was promoted as a
wonderful holy experience. The entire invasion was fought as a holy
war and prisoners of war were given the “enlightenment” of the jewel
to make them into fanatics who would join the cause. These false
jewels were also given out as prizes in competitions and pushed down
peoples throats in every other manner that could be imagined.
And the “gods” grabbed power, but they never did manage to
thoroughly control the population. Everyone was still too free and
powerful and tended to shrug off even the most powerful conditioning
fairly quickly and go into revolt.
In the end, these “gods” were defeated and their kingdoms crumbled.
But what was to be done with these horrible people and their most
enthusiastic henchmen? The entire Motions Universe had been
devastated with endless waves of fighting back and forth and the
population was half crazy with strange religious ideas and rebellious
counter reactions. True organized warfare had come into existence for
the first time and the crime of its creation was deemed to be
unpardonable.
Instead of simply settling down to rebuild, the population of the
Motions Universe made the fatal choice which has led us ever
downward. Instead of simply treating the losers roughly for awhile or
even forgiving them, it was decided that the only thing to do was to
build yet a lower prison universe to hold these evil characters. And so
the Symbols Universe was built and they were tossed into it.
And in the fullness of time, it came to pass that others were exiled to
the Symbols Universe as well. And so the cycle repeats itself as we
take turns being good guys and bad guys and throwing each other
lower and lower down.
119
THE SYMBOLS UNIVERSE
The symbols universe was set up as a prison universe probably
around 60 or 64 quadrillion years ago.
The transfer implant used to send people down to the Symbols
Universe has them set up hidden pieces of themselves which give
them all sorts of compulsions etc. This is mental machinery which the
person builds and then hides from himself. This was based on penalty
universe symbols etc. and gives him urges such as needing to eat and
to feel sensation based on the degraded goals established by the
penalty universes. For the first time, the individual has a sort of
“subconscious” and does things (mainly to himself) that he is not aware
of doing.
Since each convict had hidden pieces of himself, various mockups
based on the penalty universes would stir up feelings of hidden things
in motion etc. This expanded into a general concept of symbols where
seeing any mockup might imply other things that are not immediately
visible. And so we have a situation where symbols were given great
significance and there was a continual struggle to communicate as a
result.
This actually acts as a sort of reactive mind based on symbols. The
person meets, lets say, a tiger and gets a stimulus response reaction
even without the presence of mental image pictures. He gets the
reaction because there is a piece of him sitting in a compulsion pool
being the tiger of the penalty universe “To Eat”. At this time, the
individual did not have an Engram bank or a time track. He could not
be affected by force (although his mockups could be affected) and
knew it. But you could show him some object out of a penalty
universe and make his hair stand on end.
As a result, the subsequent games, implants, etc. used here were
primarily based on symbols. A common method of fighting was for
opponents to send waves of symbols at each other (especially
symbols of penalty universe terminals). At first these only had mild
impacts. But everyone kept postulating so hard about wanting to
create heavy effects on their opponents that they agreed too heavily
with the power of symbols. So these symbols developed a real kick.
This in turn let people commit stronger overts and become motivator
hungry which made them even more affected by the impact of a
symbol.
120
The individual was mostly worried about the effect of a symbol being
pushed into his viewpoint since it could trigger compulsions. So he
tended to put out substitute mockups in place of himself (he was not
as concerned about these mockups being affected). Here you have the
individual flinching from direct telepathic contact and using
communication vias to protect himself.
The MEST (matter/energy/space/time) of the symbols universe
primarily consisted of “Thought Planes”. These are like photographs
drifting in space. You could float over to one of these and look at it and
then sort of turn sideways and step into the picture. The picture would
then expand out in its own 3 dimensional space that was at an angle to
the normal 3 dimensional space of the universe (2 co-ordinates were
shared and the 3rd co-ordinate would be in a different direction, hence
you get a 2 dimensional plane at the point of intersection).
Over the course of time, more and more beings were exiled to the
symbols universe. Eventually entire populations were mass captured
and dumped.
By around 46 Quadrillion years ago, the motion universe was getting
empty and wilting away. The remaining “winners” wanted to establish
themselves in the symbols universe while retaining high status. So
they invaded. There might have been many invasions and the range of
dates might be as much as from 48 quadrillion down to 42 quadrillion
years ago.
The invaders came in with implants. They designed the implants
based on their “higher” knowledge of earlier track and the anatomy of
the sentencing implant mentioned above. The symbol universe
people were not much affected by force (it only hurt mockups) but
were very subject to counter thought and gradually came to be
affected by counter emotion as well (symbol masses could pack a
considerable emotional punch as well as a heavy confusion of thought).
A common invader implant was the Pyramid Trap. This is a big
pyramid in empty space with an open doorway leading to something
interesting in the center. The unwary being goes in (later is drawn in
by beams or tricked in) and the door closes. The pyramid has 128
layers of walls, one for each penalty universe and each inversion. Each
wall is covered with the symbols of that penalty universe. The
innermost is create, next is destroy, etc. all the way out to Endure and
its inversion. The victim can push through a few of these, but then he
hits one that he can’t confront and falls back to the center. In some
variations, there is only a single wall for each dynamic covered with all
121
of the symbols for every goal associated with the dynamic. This
required fewer walls and therefore was easier to manufacture.
Once captured, the victim is left inside for a very long time to soften
him up. Occasionally the walls would state that another trillion years
had gone by to make him feel that it was even longer. Eventually he
gets worried about missing out on things and becomes abberated
about time. He starts getting desperate to get it over with and will put
up with being implanted if only they will let him out.
So he gets trapped in the pyramid, sits there for a few thousand years
while getting implant items that tell him that many trillions of years
have gone by and then the invaders come and pull him out. Then he
gets hung on a wall and simultaneously hit from both sides by a
stream of symbols. The first stream is Create/Destroy using the
terminals from the penalty universe and its inversion. These symbols
alternate in each wave and opposing symbols collide in the center of
the victim forming a ridge. The symbols have the “price” thought in
them (things like, the price of enlightenment is to suffer, etc.). This is
done 64 times, once for each penalty universe. After that he is allowed
to compete in a game. The winner is always an invader. The being is
then given to the invader as a prize.
There were also other sorts of traps based on symbols. Usually these
are either the terminal of a penalty universe or a symbol of one of the
valence masses (from the fall of home universe). The guy would be
floating along and then he’d come to a big mockup of The Tiger or
something like that floating in space and he’d feel drawn to it and slide
in. Then a cage would appear around the tiger and he’d be stuck. The
bars of the cage would be covered with symbols so that he couldn’t
pass through them. Then they’d come and haul him out and handle
him as above.
Eventually there was a revolution and the invaders were thrown in
their own traps. Also, more elaborate traps (big colorful energy
structures etc.) were built, usually with pyramids hidden in the center
or other sophisticated variations.
Finally a complex civilization of thought planes and symbol masses
developed and went through the usual decline.
This seems to be the first time period when there was a real
government. People were just abberated enough to need a formal
organization to undertake large projects and see to the welfare of
civilization. So a controlling council was set up, originally consisting of
individuals who were most instrumental in combating the invaders.
122
Once established, the council saw to it that everyone continually
perceived the need for such an organization. They undertook the
construction of large “Cities” consisting of interconnected thought
planes and other mockups. They established a police force to protect
these sophisticated mockups from the ravages of malicious individuals
and perpetuated the invader machine building implants and traps.
Here are the early upsets with governments and their police forces
and bureaucracies.
The mockups of this civilization are a bit strange compared to our
current experience. Bodies and scenery as we know it only existed in
the thought planes. You might be drifting around disembodies and
then feel the presence of another disembodied being who would then
flash a symbol identifying himself (maybe a body mockup or even
something like a Chinese pictogram). Let’s say you were being asked
to a council meeting. The request might be a series of symbols flashed
at you. Then you’d float over to the Council’s thought plane which
would appear as a flat picture of the council chamber. Then you’d turn
sideways into the picture and appear in the chamber. You’d need to
“manifest in form” so you’d tap the definitions for a suitable mockup
that was not in use and materialize as that body. Note that this would
not be a complex body with internal organs etc. as we have them
today. It would simply be the image of a body which you would shift
around by postulate. Then maybe you’d walk around and talk with and
argue with other councilors etc.
Of course if you had to appear in court the police would enforce the
mockup you were supposed to appear in.
Note that this controlling council was in existence for most of the
duration of the symbols universe. This is an immense period of time
and the lifespan of councilors was very very short. The council was
constantly being overthrown and replaced. It was a position allowing
for great overts and the motivators tended to come in very fast. There
were also periods of round robin rotation of council positions or
competitions for the post etc. So I think that most people will probably
find some point where they served on this council. Usually it was a
very abberrating experience where the being played endless games
of treachery and betrayal, especially against other council members. Of
course the universe was vast and there were occasional rival
governments, but generally they didn’t last long or control large areas.
The controlling council was very jealous of its privileged position and
stamped out competition as fast as it could.
The only exception was that people were in good enough shape to
wander off on their own and just pick an empty place and start building
123
their own thought planes. So the bulk of the universe was really in a
big state of anarchy with the controlling council holding the organized
area in the center. Sometimes they would try to take over some of this
anarchistic area, but they wouldn’t have much success. But let a crowd
of the anarchists try to form up into an organized group and the council
would move right in and make them join up.
This was the first great machine building period. They would take
individuals and condition them so heavily that they became robots and
would follow a canned set of instructions without thinking about them.
Even after the invaders were overthrown (and made into machines),
people were trapping each other and programming them up. Nobody
stayed as a machine throughout the entire span of this universe, but
everyone had it done to them at least a few times. One of the common
uses for the machines was to keep favorite through planes mocked up
and dusted off. Whenever someone uses a through plane, their
postulates tend to alter-is it, so the “machine” would reset the mockup
back to its pure state when they were done.
A final invader wave came down from the motions universe against a
civilization that was armed (with sophisticated traps) and ready. To
really fix these guys, the Controlling Council (which tried to run things in
this mostly anarchistic era) had a prison universe constructed. Soon
there were many more convicts being exiled and the cycle was
starting to repeat itself.
But this time, after a few quadrillion years the prisoners researched the
implants, erased them, and came out and took over. Of course they
needed to build a new prison universe for the former controlling
council members and various other peoples that displeased them.
This sort of thing was repeated a number of times. Each time, the
sentencing implant became more complex.
To some degree, the prison universes became an interesting game,
like Houdini doing his famous escapees. If the beings didn’t dig
themselves out after a few quadrillion years, generally someone would
be sent down to start them on the road.
Because these prison universes were intended as temporary, the
Symbols Universe kept going at full strength for a long time.
On the whole, it was actually a very interesting universe. The thought
planes often had a tremendous aesthetic. The use of symbols and
substitution made for very fine art and in a thought plane, you live the
art rather than simply looking at it. These thought planes were actually
124
very much like limited versions of the individual universes of the home
universe matrix. You’d enter them to see and experience things or
meet with people or play games or be told a story.
You could also have thought planes which contained subordinate
though planes. A high level though plane might be an art gallery where
you could walk around and look at the paintings. But the paintings
would be lesser thought planes and you could step into the ones you
liked (similar to Disney’s cartoon rendition of Mussorsky’s Pictures at an
Exhibition). If you are one of the people with a horror of art galleries,
just remember that implant designers just love to take something nice
and use it as the twisted hook that sticks you to an implant. Eventually
there was an art gallery implant used in the symbols universe where
you were forced to go around in a gallery and experience horrible
thought planes. But this is minor compared to some of the other things
that went on.
One mockup, usually used by the police, consisted of walls which
could attract or repel you. Their action is based on the symbols
inscribed on the walls. The repulsive walls had symbols you’d pull
away from (as in the pyramid traps). The attractive walls would have
desirable symbols from the various penalty universes. Things like
symbols of wealth and power and sex. Sometimes the symbols on a
wall would change from one kind to the other or there’d be complex
sandwidges of walls of various types. They’d try to bang you around
with various walls and get you into high motion. The being was
already slightly subject to motion sickness if he was made to jump
around too much in too little time. This comes from the earlier Motion
Universe (which starts with the Treadmill which lays in a spinning
sensation).
The police also used Black Thought Planes. In this case, the picture is
concealed and you have no idea what you’re being thrust into. So
there’s the flinch at black pictures. Often they would bang you around
with walls until you were dizzy and then push you into a black plane
where you’d get an implant.
One common implant used this way is The Sources Implant. This
played on the fact that the people were already upset about hidden
sources of things because of the compulsion pools. The implant
pretends to tell you what the real source of various things is. Of course
the items are intended to trick you. They are things like “The only
source of energy is Machinery”.
Another thing present in the late era of the symbols universe is a sort
of earlier similar on Arslycus (discussed later) where endless slaves
125
were made to serve in a city of endless thought planes that was much
too large and where the tasks were much too boring. The city was
known as “Alpha Prime” (really just an intention that means “The First
City”). The incident may include a body builder type sequence. You
might be assigned to clean up a thought plane and have to do that over
and over endlessly. This thing was probably one of the controlling
council’s big projects. It seems to end with a collapse in a manner
similar to Arslycus (these collapses are all based on similar collapses
which occur in the text of the penalty universes for the goals To Build
and To Orient).
The symbols universe also made heavy use of somatic pools. These
were mostly used to supply the sensations etc. that were experienced
in the thought planes. Instead of simply telling someone to feel and
emotion, pain, or sensation, large numbers of people were ordered to
place a feeling of this kind into a sort of “pool”. Then when the
sensation or whatever was needed, an individual could be “connected”
to the pool to get the feeling from it, which made for a much stronger
experience than simply having him imagine that he felt a certain way.
The universe went on (in an active manner) for an incredibly long time
period. This is probably because everyone was Clear in the sense of
not having a Dianetic engram bank. You might think this to be a
strange statement in light of the fact that we were loaded with
problems, guilt, upsets, pains, sensations, emotions, and every other
ill. And we were subject to hidden influences and continually fighting
against a suppressive government, and occasionally being made into
machines etc. Yet we just kept getting up and dusting ourselves off
and carrying on. Because all these abberative things did not have a
cumulative and compound effect. The Dianetic A=A mechanism was
not present and therefore things would not go into chronic
restimulation. You could just go off somewhere for awhile and cool
down. So things only slid downscale very very slowly.
Our entire sequence of universe since we left the symbols universe
(i.e.., the thought universe, the conflicts universe, the magic universe,
and the current universe) have a combined duration of only around 4.3
quadrillion years. This is nothing compared to the duration of the
symbols universe. So it seems like we’ve just gone down into one of
these interesting little prison universe sequences again. But this time,
the implant was much more sophisticated. And the subsequent war
between the thought and conflicts universes (the theta mest wars) was
very interesting. And it seems like the last of the beings in the symbols
universe got so interested in the wars that they came down as “gods”
to join in. So there might not be anyone left up there to dig us out. And
I don’t think that any of the other prison sequences went deeper than
126
two universes below the symbols universe. Now we’re 4 universes
deep and the next one is already in operation below us (the Mud
Universe). So I think we’re playing for keeps.
The symbols universe contained much much more than the things
listed here. I’ve really barely scratched the surface. Certainly there are
numerous other implants and abberative factors. But also, there was a
great deal of good and wonderful things. In this write-up, we’re
concentrating on what was wrong. But there was tremendous
rightness as well. The universe was generally very exciting and
enjoyable. At least 90% of your time in the symbols universe was
better than anything you’ve ever experienced here on Earth. You can
spot some pleasure moments of sliding into some incredible picture
and having the most wonderful time. Or even the satisfaction of
creating a thought plane that others enjoyed and marveled at.
127
THE THOUGHT OR THETA UNIVERSE
The final prison universe built below the Symbols Universe was
called, by its inhabitants, the Thought or Theta Universe (depending on
how you want to translate it). They considered themselves to be
Thought People in contrast to the Body People of the next lower
prison universe (which they built). But they were not thought people in
the true sense. What they really were was energy beings. So maybe
we should call this the “Energy Universe”.
The transfer incident down to this universe sends you down a sort of 4
dimensional spiral staircase. It basically lays in the idea that you are an
energy unit and can be effected by energy and it gets you to build
what Dianetics and Scientology refer to as the reactive mind. From
here on you can be effected by force and you tend to accumulate
incidents of pain and unconsciousness which further abberate your
behavior. As you go down the staircase, things
seem to shrink strangely in the distance while remaining near by.
This is because you are curving off in a 4th dimensional direction.
With each step, the staircase disappears in blackness and you get an
implant item. Then it reappears and you’re taking another step
downward. The implant includes the materials run on the clearing
course.
The body here is a circle or globe of energy and it can be trapped and
hurt by energy. And unfortunately, we were stupid enough to think
that we were these energy bodies and therefore could be kicked
around and conditioned by the use of force. This is the era of the
Thetan as an energy unit and it is pretty high and powerful compared
to people living as bodies, but it is far lower than the Thetan living as a
“god”.
And here we have the endless aberrations of energy and the abuse
and misuse of force. But we also have what is still a very thought
oriented society with a tremendous level of creation and aesthetics.
This universe starts around 4.5 Quadrillion years ago. The goal for this
universe seems to be to create effects on others especially through
the use of emotion. There was some sort of whole track word for this
which I will translate as “To Emotionate”.
People could kick into each other so heavily that the next lower prison
universe was built fairly quickly, maybe around 2.8 Quadrillion years
128
ago. At this point, beings were still coming down from the symbols
universe.
Throughout our history, we had been projecting mockups of bodies
but had never been really restricted by them. But now we actually
believed ourselves to be energy bodies and the next logical step was
to condition the convicts being sent down to the next universe into
thinking that they were physical bodies made of matter.
And so we built what we then thought of as the “MEST” or “Physical”
Universe as a prison where everybody would be in a body and
subject to physical laws. But since it was not the current universe, and
since we also think of this one as a MEST or Physical universe, it will
avoid confusion if I give this some other name. Based on the
subsequent events, I will refer to it as the “Conflicts Universe”.
And the implant which took us down from the Thought Universe to the
Conflicts Universe laid in a terrible compulsion for using bodies, but it
was otherwise defective and the prisoners broke out and counter
invaded the thought universe from the conflicts universe resulting in
the Theta-MEST Wars.
129
THE THETA - MEST WARS
In the conflicts universe, the body type is a body as we know it,
although there were no internal guts or biochemical processes.
Externally it might look human (or whatever) whereas internally it was
more like a homogenous mass with a few gizmos (electrical coils or
whatever) inside of it. And imposed into it would be an energy pattern
of golden globes etc. used by the person (who thought of himself as
an energy being) to control the body.
Because of the defective nature of the implant, the prisoners escaped
and counter invaded the Thought universe. This is the Theta-MEST
wars with body people invading against the thought people. Most of
the theta line incidents described in Hubbard’s History of Man are from
this time period.
The war went on endlessly (only the big super long wars are worth
mentioning in this history since they are the only ones that had any
significant effect on everybody) with people switching sides
occasionally so that everyone has the experience of being the thought
people fighting back against the invading body people and vise versa.
The only people who were not involved initially were those last few
who were still up in the Symbols Universe. But the war got very
interesting and went on and on and gradually these Symbols Universe
people became avid spectators. Around 2.48 Quadrillion years ago,
the final crew came down as Gods from the symbols universe and
joined the war. Everyone was tossed through the universe shifting
implant many times and eventually we all wound up in the Conflicts
universe as body people.
Near the end of the wars, the crossing back and forth between the 2
universes became very great and more and more transfer points and
common anchor points were established until the 2 universes sort of
collapsed together. This formed a sort of layered universe with a
material plane and a thought plane (where you went between lives).
One was quite aware of living physical lives and being an energy being
between lives (in an energy body which kept re-incarnating in the
physical).
130
THE CONFLICTS (or MEST) UNIVERSE
After the collapse, there is a long time period of living in the resulting
“MEST” universe. The goal of this universe was to gain bodily
experience and sensation. The environment is mostly flat worlds in
space (continents in the sky). The wars had been so extreme that we
feared to build a lower prison universe for fear of starting the whole
mess over again.
Again there is a long and interesting creative period building societies
and civilizations. But as always, there was an undue amount of conflict
and people wouldn’t leave each other alone. Some people just wanted
make slaves of their fellow man. Others were trying to make
everybody good. But in either case, the effort was to make people
obey and walk in straight lines and the counter effort was to have
revolutions etc. And anyone who tried to step aside from this and
“cure” the insanity was stupid enough (thanks to the misleading
information in the jewel of knowledge) to try to do it by implanting
even more conditioning, which only made matters worse.
Since bodies were of tremendous importance, but the person carried
on in an energy form even after the body died, it was possible to push
someone into a body, kill it off, and then pull him out, push him into
another body, and then kill that one too. So the predominant form of
conditioning used here consisted of repetitive deaths and heavy pains
and sensations. Here the person can be mauled around by force and it
is used either to make slaves or to force people to be good depending
on which team you were playing on. Here you might suffer endless
car crashes or be thrown out of the door of an aircraft and go splat on
the ground over and over again while they try to lay in various stupid
orders and conditioning.
Near the end, a group formed that was going to take care of
everybody once and for all. It would bring about peace by holding
everybody under its sway and it would solve the social problems by
having a rigid social structure. This was the “Magic Kingdom of Gilead”
(approximate translation). It had the innocuous appearance of a castle
beside a lake on one of the continents drifting around in the sky. But
they had salvaged some of the higher dimensional technology from
earlier universes and internally this castle went on infinitely with the 3
dimensional corridors curving off slightly at 4 dimensional angles so
that the castle was quite capable of housing the entire population of the
universe.
131
Giliead was set up as a “pyramid” society where new recruits came in
as servants and everyone else bumped up a level in the social
hierarchy when enough people came in to fill the lower strata. In other
words, social status and privileges were based on how early you
joined the society and when it began to look like they were going to
take over all of civilization, there was a tremendous influx of recruits
who were quite willing to work temporarily as servants with the
expectation that they would be overseers later as the rest of the
population joined. But of course this tapered off when the remaining
people saw that they would be forever stuck in the lower positions.
And so the Knights of Giliead (armed with energy weapons and riding
flying horses) set out to conquer the remaining peoples of the
universe.
This pattern of a stratified pyramidal society trying to take over the
universe and make slaves out of the majority of people has been
followed frequently. Our modern day Hitlers are but the tiniest shadow
of these super organized societies that live by continual expansion and
enslavement. But they inevitably collapse when their expansion is
blocked either by running out of new people or by a determined
military resistance. The three really big ones were Alpha Prime in the
Symbols Universe, Giliead as discussed here, and Arslycus in the
current universe. All of them had populations in the trillions and their
collapse always has a bit of the feeling of the collapse of home
universe even though none of them were really nice places for anyone
who wasn’t at the top of the heap.
Eventually, around 200 trillion years ago, we did build a lower prison
universe. This was probably done to provide a fitting place to dump
the rulers of Giliead after its collapse.
But we still had a great deal of worry about a prison breakout triggering
something like the Theta-MEST wars again. So this time, the prison
was intentionally made a fairly nice place so the prisoners would stay
there. The transfer implant used a volcano on a flat earth copy of the
original earth. A path lined with statues of the penalty universe
terminals (the tiger, the bear, etc.) lead up to the peak where one was
tossed in and went on down to the prison universe.
People were weary of the constant conflicts, so around 181 trillion
years ago, there began a wave of mass suicides where everyone
threw themselves into the volcano to “die” as beings and be reborn in
the next lower universe.
Eventually this next prison universe came to be known as the Magic
Universe.
132
THE MAGIC UNIVERSE
Entry to the magic universe has an incident which shows you a wizard
who floats out over the water from an Arabian style ship while holding
a glowing ball between his hands.
The bodies again look like meat bodies but internally they have a
structure based on the Chakras described in Eastern Metaphysics.
Many of the early medical dub-ins such as the blood running in tides
(instead of circulating) and “humors” etc. might also be part of the
physical anatomy of the magic universe bodies.
Many of the wrong ideas that people believe instinctively (whether
superstition or incorrect science) were actually true in the magic
universe. People are just behind the times so to speak.
Based on the inspiration of the eventual 2 layered structure of the
thought + conflicts universe, the magic universe was constructed with
a physical layer plus a heavenly layer and a demonic layer. Dead
people went around in a visible spirit body which was the older body
mockup of the conflicts universe.
The goal of this universe was “To Enjoy” and it was primarily a
hedonistic pleasure seeking place. It was quite heavily oriented to sex
etc. Fantasy stories and fairy tales and most current metaphysical and
witchcraft ideas are based on vague recollections of the magic
universe.
But, as always, you have some people trying to lord it over others and
you have another group trying their best to condition people to make
them good.
Here the definition of the game called for many gods and goddesses,
demons and devils. And many came down willingly from the conflicts
universe armed with higher level knowledge to establish themselves
in these positions.
And the games and wars and whathaveyou went on for the usual long
period of time until a need for yet a lower prison universe was agreed
upon by all. And so the current physical universe was built.
After being sentenced in court, the prisoner usually goes down a spiral
path lined with statues of the penalty universe terminals and ends up
at a sort of Greek style pool at the center where he is pushed under
and finds himself shifted to this universe.
133
THE CURRENT PHYSICAL (or Space Opera) UNIVERSE
Our universe was built as a prison 86 trillion years ago. The sentencing
process includes passing through a sort of implant universe which tells
him that this is the universe of physical force and then lays in the goals
that he is supposed to live by in this universe (things such as being
successful, popular, intelligent, strong, etc.) but putting them in with a
twist so that he will forever get in trouble trying to do them. Of course
the implant is at the beginning of time (and says so) but it is only the
beginning of time for this stupid little universe and not for our eons
long existence.
At first, people would escape and be in the magic universe for awhile
and then get sent here again (receiving the implant again). The magic
universe remained in existence (and is still there although it is very
contracted and almost deserted).
In recent times, the remaining kings and wizards, seeing that most of
the action and people were down here, relocated themselves by
forming up invader forces and trying to take over this universe.
There are some parts of this universe where we have attempted to
recreate magic universe operation and which to some degree imitate
the magic universe. One difference is that space in this universe is dark
whereas in the magic universe, the space is light (radiant).
Most science fiction contains vague recollections of the history of this
universe.
The goal of this universe is “To Survive”. The normal emotional tone
level (as described by L. Ron Hubbard) is in the 0 to 4 band. There
may be a many layered structure of “astral” planes in addition to the
physical level in places where someone has taken the trouble to build
these using higher dimensional technology carried down from the
higher universes.
Again there was a big society which tried to make slaves out of
everybody. This was Arslycus. It was a great city in space and was
researched to some degree by L. Ron Hubbard in 1952. If you will
think about building in three dimensions instead of 2 (on the surface of
the Earth), it should be obvious that a space city occupying a spherical
volume equal to the size of the solar system would have more “land”
area that all the planets of the galaxy combined. And gradually they
captured all of the populations of the outlying spiral arms of this galaxy.
Their main activity was implanting people to be slaves.
134
An equally viscous group of religious fanatics, known as Helatrobus,
was entrenched in the center of the galaxy busily implanting people to
be good. Gradually the Galactic Empire (millions of planets in the center
of the galaxy) came under their sway, began using implants to solve
social unrest, and ceased to be a nice place.
These two groups came to blows and fought a war that just about
wrecked the galaxy a few hundred million years ago. It pretty much
resulted in their mutual destruction. You might say that Arslycus won
because they collapsed the center of the galaxy into a black hole which
formed the next lower prison universe (the mud universe) where the
remnants of Helatrobus now rule. But it was a Phyrric victory since
Arslycus was also shattered. This ended around 167 million years ago.
Of course there have also been plenty of subsequent little empires that
have claimed to be the continuation of Hellotrobus (like having
Constantinople and the Holy Roman Empire around long after Rome
fell to the barbarians).
Since then, there have only been petty little empires and the usual
operations of civilized man. And if you object to calling these later
glorious empires “little”, please realize that an empire with a thousand
planets would hardly be bigger than a dust mote on a picture of our
galaxy with its billions of stars.
The galaxy has, to some degree, remained in a dark age ever since,
with petty kingdoms fighting wars and buisily implanting their citizens.
Eventually the invader waves started coming in from the magic
universe to add a little spice to the action. These invader forces would
generally be formed up by a few kings and wizards grabbing entire
planetary populations and dragging them back up to the magic
universe briefly for advanced training and implanting followed by
returning here in a wave of conquest.
The body types in this universe are generally humanoid ( 2 arms, 2
legs, etc.) but not necessarily human. This is in keeping with the
penalty universe designs that we have tended to fixate on more and
more. The more exotic types of bodies sometimes envisioned by the
science fiction writers actually hearken to earlier universes where we
had a bit more free thought and our mockups were more diverse.
Things are not really as simple here as they seem. To make things this
solid and immune to thought, everything is setup on a very indirect
basis. We carry all of our earlier universe experience along as baggage
and we hide a good bit of it from ourselves and keep it out of sight.
135
The real structure of our bodies actually carries our entire “evolution”
(or “devolution”) with it. The bodies consist of a physical body
generated by an astral body (a hidden immaterial version of the old
magic universe style body) which is generated by a spirit body (the old
conflicts universe body) which is projected by an energy body (thought
universe) which is projected by a symbol body (symbols universe)
which is in turn projected by a mask (motion universe) which is
projected by a basic object (games universe) which is mocked up from
one’s operating space. I.E.., the people operate through many layers
of vias to keep themselves and their stuff from being hit. The higher
level forms are very carefully hidden and the being wouldn’t even let
himself know for fear that someone will read his mind and zap them.
The person dies in a physical body and then stupidly runs around in an
“astral” body where he can still be hit (and is still carrying around tons of
baggage) until he can hook up to a new physical body.
If the person were smart, he would step outside of the whole mess
and be like a god again. Occasionally, some people do. Unfortunately,
they then proceed to get into even more conflicts and trouble and wind
up right back in the soup again. They perpetuate their early
aberrations instead of facing up to them. Even the gods fall prey to the
early stupid and self-destructive ideas such as jealousy and vengeance.
Everyone swallowed the jewel of knowledge hook, line, and sinker and
believes it to this day.
136
THE MUD UNIVERSE
The next lower prison universe has already been built. The entry
point is through a black hole at the center of our galaxy. They are
already tossing people into it, but its just started so most people come
back up and out pretty quick. Most people on Earth, being of the
troublesome type that gets sent to prison planets etc. have probably
been down there once or twice already.
It seems like Hellotrobus structured the mud universe as their last act
in this galaxy. The remnants of the old Hellotrobian hierarchy may be
in power there now.
In the Mud Universe, space is very solid, feeling like molasses. The
goal of this universe is To Persist. Note that survival implies continuing
to struggle to live whereas persist implies simply hanging on as a rock
or whatever. The normal tone band (i.e.. the thetan plus body range) is
-8 up to 0. It is an unpleasant place.
137
WHERE ARE WE NOW
We are not in the Mud Universe at this time (although many of you may
have visited there briefly). But we do seem to be in some sort of a
local prison within the physical (space opera) universe.
Although this planet may have had some good times, it is a copy of the
original Earth and therefore tends to be selected for whatever nefarious
deeds are required by the local space empires. Its recent use as a
prison planet is probably the result of a war, with the soldiers of a
captured army being dumped here. It might also have its compliment
of political prisoners, revolutionaries, and real criminals. It has
previously been used for mass implanting on the
same basis of being a copy of the original Earth.
The prison machinery has to be elaborate enough to keep the
prisoners from simply reincarnating back in normal society and starting
to raise hell.
Advanced technology allows the manipulation of multiple three
dimensional spaces in a four dimensional framework. The entire solar
system (out to about 1.3 light-years) is handled in this way (there is a
set of 12 stations, sort of like the zodiac, surrounding the solar system
at that distance).
The entire structure (this solar system) has been copied sideways in a
4th dimensional direction to form a “heavenly plane” on one side of us
and a “hell plane” on the other. These are not very thick in a 4D sense
and therefore are a bit ethereal giving them a bit of an “astral” (spirit-like)
quality. They are like positive and negative plates between which our
reality is suspended. Earth as we know it is very thick (thousands of
layers) along the 4D axis with a dead spot in the center that acts like a
mirror. What we normally see is in this mirror which is reflecting the
thousands of “real” copies to either side. One of the reasons you can’t
grab the things you see with your thoughts is that there really is
nothing where you are looking. You have to reach in funny directions
to grab an object with your mind and move it around.
Don’t get all religious about the heaven and hell planes at the far edges
of the prison. This is like painting the top floor of one of our
penitentiaries and fixing it up to look like heaven according to legends
remaining from the magic universe. Similarly, we could fix up the
basement to look like hell. Then we give the guards costumes as
angels or devils. The best prisoners are given an occasional day in
heaven and the real troublemakers are occasionally thrown into hell.
138
But its all part of the prison machinery and the supposed angels and
devils are all really guards who work together to keep the convicts
confused and under control. The guards might play good/evil type
games to keep themselves amused, but they are basically guards and
they never really loose sight of that fact.
With the prisoners so horribly conditioned and brainwiped between
lives, there is not much danger of a prison revolt. But there is also the
possibility that the prison might collapse. If anything were to destroy
the Earth, they would suddenly have far too many people on their
hands and at least some would escape out into the galaxy at large. So
they must protect the world from destruction. And yet they must leave
us with advanced scientific knowledge to support the ever growing
numbers of prisoners. They encouraged a scientific revolution so that
the population could expand and now they have the constant difficulty
of our blowing ourselves up and destroying the world in various ways.
But there is a technical solution to this given the ability to manipulate 3
dimensional spaces in 4 dimensions. You can store copies of the 3D
space sideways along the 4th axis. Imagine that we are living on a flat
sheet of paper. The paper changes constantly, but occasionally
someone makes a xerox copy of the page. If the paper ever catches
fire and burns up, they pull the last xerox out of the file and everything
goes on from there. You will see the same thing if you play a
computer video game that you can save and restore. If the game goes
very badly, you can always go back to a previous copy. If you try this,
you will also notice that after restoring an earlier copy of the game, you
have some knowledge of the “future” even though things will go
slightly differently. This is the real explanation of “deja vu”
(remembering the future when it happens again).
One recent example was in 1963 when president Richard M. Nixon
launched a nuclear war that destroyed the planet. As we all began
dying in droves, the prison machinery was used to restore a copy of
the Earth taken in 1957. We were all conditioned to go back to what we
were doing in 1957 and life picks up with a second pass through 1957
to 1963. Of course they intervene slightly and Kennedy is elected by
the barest margin. Since he begins introducing major changes and
because everyone unconsciously expects something bad to happen in
1963 anyway, he is assassinated and things begin to settle back down
to their normal course. Nixon even gets to be president later with less
ill effects.
These “backup” copies of the earth appear to be taken every 5 years
in February of the years ending in either a 2 or a 7 (i.e.. 1952, 1957,
1962, etc.).
139
When they restore and earlier version, they don’t like to back up too far
because they have the problem of the growing population (as more
prisoners are added). Pushing earth time back too far gives them a host
of newer prisoners who have noplace to go. Small numbers can be
handled by using animal bodies for a brief time, but large numbers
require setting up “holding tanks” on yet another copy of the earth
further sideways along the 4D axis. This gives us a bunch of weird
“preternatural” earths that some people will have experienced just
before birth (and right after the previous time they died in this lifetime).
As you can see, this makes a terrible jumble of one’s history. Nobody
in their right mind, catching a halfway glimpse of the truth, would
believe it, because things are not in the simple logical order that you
would expect. You wonder why his recollection of Christmas 1957
doesn’t match the facts? Maybe he’s recalling a different time that he
lived through 1957. Does he remember a funny incident when there
seemed to be old steam boilered fire engines on the streets of modern
New York, well that’s a much earlier pass through the 1950s and things
were slightly different. We have been reliving the 20th century for quite
a long time.
A person’s actual experience might include quite a few reincarnations
on earth. But he might have lived through the last one or two
incarnations a large number of times and he might even have another
incarnation “up in the future” that he’s been through a couple times as
well. And in between, there might be visits to heavens, hells, pre-birth
worlds, and even a few stints where he was forced to work in the
between lives administrative area to keep this whole complex show
on the road. Now mix in tons of heavy conditioning to keep him
confused as all hell, and you have a true picture of today’s human
being here on Earth.
This paints a pretty depressing picture. But its no more than frantic
hand waving meant to keep a god so confused and distracted that he
wouldn’t remember who he is or what he can do.
140
SUMMARY
Here is a brief list of the universes:
a. Separation from static
b. Jewel of Knowledge
1. Creation period
2. The Mis-aligned spaces
3. The Agreements Universe
4. Home Universe
5. Games Universe
6. Motion Universe
7. Symbols Universe
8. Thought Universe
9. Conflicts Universe
10. Magic Universe
11. Current Universe
12. Mud Universe.
It is quite possible that I have gotten some of the details wrong. For
example, it wouldn’t surprise me if it turned out that Giliead was in the
Magic Universe instead of the Conflicts Universe. And I have
intentionally avoided mentioning things which are still highly
speculative. So do not take this literal mindedly or assume that it is
complete. It is the barest sketch of a framework and further research is
needed.
Some of you may think that I have an overly active imagination. In that
case I invite you to enjoy the above as an entertaining piece of fiction. I
do hope that you will begin to research your past existance and
attempt to determine who and what we are. I do not insist that you find
the same answers that I did.
Take this roadmap and use it as a suggestion for things to look at. Don’t
simply swallow it as a matter of faith. Wrong ideas are not harmful
unless you blindly insist that they are correct, otherwise you would
simply have a good laugh.
141
CHAPTER 3 - THE ACTUAL GOALS PROBLEM MASSES OF THIS
UNIVERSE
Of the many research lines that were abandoned within Scientology,
this one is probably the best known among highly trained auditors.
For those of you who are not already trained in the subject, it might be
better to read document #4 first since that will present more basic
material on auditing.
This document only discusses one of many abberative factors. It is
presented first because it is the easiest one for trained auditors to
understand (because there is already so much earlier material on GPMs
that was researched by Ron) and because I hope to show them that
the research is indeed incomplete (the materials here certainly should
have been found in the 1960s) and that the research can indeed be
continued by somebody other than LRH.
142
BACKGROUND
It began in 1959 when Ron started an investigation into people’s goals
which lead to the observation that many of a person’s problems,
overts, and upsets were connected with the goals that he was trying to
achieve. The Saint Hill Special Briefing Course (SHSBC) was originally
established to investigate and train auditors in the handling of goals.
The lower grade processing was actually a spin-off of this research,
being intended to deal with factors that were in the way of Goals
processing.
The real source of trouble was soon worked out to be more than just a
goal (you can have simple goals without problems). It was a mental
mass formed by a goal and its opposition with the two sides jammed
up against each other into a sort of super problem. Thereafter, these
things were referred to as GPMs (Goals Problem Masses) to avoid
confusing them with ordinary day to day goals which were not seen as
a source of aberration (unless they locked up ontop of one of these
GPMs).
A great deal of research was done into the anatomy of these things.
The goal was found to have a terminal, which is the beingness that is
used to do the goal. For example, the goal “To Keep Things Clean”
might have “A House Cleaner” as the terminal. It was also found that
there would be an opposition terminal or OPTERM. In this example it
might be “A Slob”. This research is recorded in the SHSBC taped
lectures.
Soon they were putting together patterns of terminals and Opterms
which showed how the person lived the goal. He would be one
terminal and get opposed and fail and then try to be another terminal
and fail again etc. until the goal was all bent out of shape and collapsed
of its own weight, at which point the person would undertake a new
GPM goal to try and solve the trouble he had gotten into with the first
one.
These terminals and Opterms were referred to as “Reliable Items” or
RIs because they reacted reliably over and over again on an E-meter
and perhaps also because the person relied on these things. The
pattern of these RIs as they opposed from one to the next was plotted
as a pattern with arrows going from item to item and this eventually
came to be called a “Line Plot”.
In 1963 it was found that sometimes different people came up with the
same pattern of Goals and RIs and that these particular patterns could
143
also be found to react on other people. From this it was concluded that
the patterns had been implanted hypnotically using electronics. These
were thereafter referred to as “Implant GPMs”.
This research line eventually lead to uncovering a large number of
implanted patterns which included the ones that are currently used on
the OT levels (and quite a few others, some of which can be found in
the tech volumes).
Concurrently with researching the implanted GPMs, there was an
attempt to find the person’s own actual GPMs. These referred to his
own abberated goals rather than ones which had been implanted. The
implants were seen as gaining their force from the real ones. If you
kick the person in the teeth electronically with a long list of goals, some
of them will line up with his real goals and cause the implant to stick.
The implanted GPMs were seen to be of only minor importance and
low abberative power in comparison with the actual GPMs which were
postulated by the person himself.
But the long and arduous research into actual GPMs simply lead to
finding an even deeper implant, which is the one given in the clearing
course. At that point, Ron apparently decided that it was all implants
and abandoned the research line. Perhaps he meant to get back to it
eventually, but if he did, it certainly hasn’t been published.
I have been interested in this theory of Actual GPMs for decades, but it
seemed always out of reach. Not only do the electronic implants
interfere, but NOTS also makes wrong things react. Before I could get
near these things, I had to go much further, handling things such as the
early penalty universes which I will discuss in another write-up. Only
after all this was I able to spot the real goal which I was actually
operating on. The goal was “To Be Intelligent” and it was not only what
I was doing, it was what I WANTED TO DO. And since then, I have
learned a great deal about the Actual GPMs and that is what I will pass
on to you here.
144
GOALS IN OPPOSITION
Working in the dark, it is difficult to find these things and take them
apart. But once I got far enough to see how it all fit together, everything
became easy. So you can’t just go after this stuff with some rote
procedure. You need to gain some understanding first. The good
news is that once you know the pattern of these things, the goal
becomes fairly easy to spot.
The full structure is not obvious in the current GPM because it is
incomplete, you are still living it. So I had to get through the completed
GPM that was just prior to the current one before I could really see
how it all worked.
For me, the preceding GPM was the goal “To Be Holy” and the current
GPM (“To Be Intelligent”) was in opposition to it. Just think of an
intellectual opposing holy men, or a scientist opposing priests and you
will see what I mean.
Notice that both of these are “good” goals. You would never have a
bad goal as an Actual GPM. The goal “To Be Evil” would never be used
as an actual GPM, it exists only in implants.
But there is a brief tail end to the goal “To Be Holy” where I was trying
to get away from the goal and my goal at that point could be stated as
“To NOT be Holy”. An in this section of an actual GPM, you might think
that you have an evil goal, but that is incorrect. At that time in my
existence (many lifetimes ago), I committed many evil acts, but got no
satisfaction from them. It was not like they were contributing to a goal
that I had and it did not feel like I was achieving anything.
A negative does not work as a goal. You can’t live life with your whole
purpose being “to be not holy”. You get desperate. You search around
wildly for a way out of this thing. And finally you realize that there was
one thing that had been successfully opposing you and that was the
intellectuals. And so you choose the goal “To Be Intelligent” because it
solves the opposition of holy people. And so you begin a new GPM.
There is also another reason why you slide into the next GPM (and
why the previous one becomes so decayed and degraded) and that is
that you finally resort to committing horrible overts against the next
GPM because it is successful in opposing you. In other words, as you
live the goal to be holy, you keep running into intellectuals who give
you a hard time and ridicule your faith etc. and finally you begin to do
them in. And you loose all judgment in this and reach the point where
145
you’ll shoot any intellectual, even if they are on your side. And because
of that, you do in friends and allies just because they were witty one
day and seemed too smart. And these crimes have no real justification.
And this is the basic source of that wild E-meter reaction known as the
rock slam. And after you commit too many heavy overts against
something, you have a tendency to flip over and become it.
Until I found this, I had a distaste for priests and holy men. It was due
to my own horror at what I had become at the end of that GPM. Once
this was cleaned up, I found that I had abandoned all of my ability to
heal and to care for people along with that goal to be holy. It was only
the end of the GPM that was horrible. These things go on for many
lifetimes and the earlier ones back when I first started the goal were
truly wonderful.
Perhaps the biggest gain I got out of finding this was the ability to hold
the concepts of holiness and intelligence together without instinctively
feeling that there was an inherent conflict between them. Of course
you might be running on a different goal and wonder why I would
even have a problem holding these ideas together, but rest assured
that you will have something like this (maybe the conflict between
freedom and responsibility for example) in your way.
From seeing what happened with the goal “To Be Holy”, I can also
predict how the current goal “To Be Intelligent” would have ended up if
I hadn’t found this out. I can already see that strong people (I would
have said “dumb strong people” in the old days) are the ones that
successfully harass and oppose intellectuals. Given a few more
lifetimes on this goal and I would have reached the point of shooting all
the strong tough guys, probably beginning in a reasonable manner
with executing gang members but eventually even getting around to
doing in the strong men in the circus. And when everything finally
failed, I would try to not be intelligent and finally I would see that the
only way to do that was to become strong and would launch myself
into a new GPM with the goal “To Be Strong”.
146
THE LINEPLOT
It should be obvious that the basic identity or terminal for the goal “To
Be Intelligent” is “An Intelligent Person”. And that the basic Opterm
would be “A Stupid Person”. But the opposition really fans out to point
back at the previous GPM (“Stupid Priests”) and forward towards the
next one (“Stupid Strong Men”). And the basic identity is really too
general for living life. Although these basic ones underlie the entire line
plot (pattern of identities), you will have more specific items that you
have used to try and accomplish the goal.
For the terminals, you will use things (in this example) like “a free
thinker” or “a sharp operator”. Opterms will be things like “stubborn
fools” or “dumb bigots”. Near the beginning of the goal, the Opterm is
frequently but not always related to the previous GPM (opterms like
narrow minded evangelists). Near the end, it is often related to the next
GPM that is coming (opterms like dumb bullies). In the middle (the bulk
of the items), the Opposition just sort of hunts around (opterms like
stupid bureaucrats) with only the common characteristic of some sort
of relation to stupidity (in this example) always being present.
Early on, there are many things that you consider are on your side,
such as teachers (in this example). So you use these kinds of things as
terminals (being “a brilliant teacher” for example). But these gradually
fail. So you abandon them and they become part of the opposition. I
had already reached the point where “Dumb Teachers” was an opterm
for me in living this goal to be intelligent. You should be able to see
from this that eventually it would have reached the point where
anything that I might use to live this goal would have been abandoned
and turned into an opponent. This is how the goal decays.
I can look back at the goal to be holy and see a complete decay. It
eventually reached the point were I had evil priests and hypocritical
evangelists as opterms and there was no identity left with which the
goal could successfully be lived.
Here on Earth, one of these items will usually last for an entire lifetime
and the shock of dying and hitting the between lives area is what
causes you to give up on it and postulate a new beingness with which
to accomplish the goal. This is one of the reasons you forget your past
lives and putting together a lineplot of the current actual GPM will give
you some recollection of who you have been before.
There are a few exceptions to this. You don’t usually abandon an item
if either the lifetime is very very short (dying in childhood) or the
147
lifetime went so extremely well that you felt that you were winning and
hung on to the same item. There is also the possibility that if things
were really horrible, you might change items more than once in a
lifetime, perhaps experiencing amnesia or a massive personality shift
as a result.
Before Earth, you will find that you generally gave an item a much
more thorough workout and held it for many lifetimes before you
abandoned it. The GPMs used to decay much more slowly. It is the
impact of the between lives area that makes you give up so easily.
148
HOW THE LINEPLOT FITS TOGETHER
You need to understand how the lineplot fits together, but you should
not try to put one together yourself until after you have taken a great
deal of charge off of the goal. One of the biggest mistakes in the SHSBC
research into actual GPMs was to try and find the lineplot items before
keying out the goal.
You can run problems, overts, etc. off of the goal until you feel better
about it. You can actually make the goal FN (free needle) on an E-meter
by these means and you can get to the point where you will begin to
realize what the items are without searching for them. Then the
lineplot becomes a very simple matter.
I don’t know if you can develop a lineplot without using an E-Meter.
Certainly you can handle problems and overts without one (and you
need to be able to so that you can keep on advancing even if you are
in a bodiless state). But the meter is a tremendous help in knowing that
you’ve got the items right. Here I will assume that you have one and
know something about the Scientology listing and nulling (L&N)
technology. If not, then you can still make it by taking so much charge
off of the goal with general processes (discussed later) that the items
become super easy to spot. There are tricks for meterless listing
(which I will discuss in another write-up), but they are not safe if there
is too much charge kicking around in the area.
You can still make tremendous gains and take each of a series of GPMs
to a state of release even without running any lineplots. But you still
need to see how the lineplot works so that you know how the goal
decays and can recognize the occasional line plot item that will show
up if you run general processes on the goal.
The procedure would be:
a) Find out what your current actual GPM is (discussed later, you
may know it by the end of reading this write-up).
b) Run general processes on the goal (discussed later) until you
cognite (have a sudden realization) on what is the current item
that you’re being.
c) Now you can either do the lineplot or just continue on with
general processes on the goal.
149
d) You begin the lineplot by taking the current item (which you will
already have found) and working backwards in time back to the
point where you postulated the goal.
Because of the way you run this, the item at the top of the page is the
most recent and the one at the bottom of the page is the oldest. The is
the reverse of how an implant platen would be written because there
you would have the first (earliest) item implanted up at the top of the
page and would be running forward in time as you went down the
page.
In other words, as you look down the page, you have the items
arranged in the order that you find them (most recent working
backwards) and as you look up the page, you see them in the order
that you lived them.
We write the things that you are being (the terminals) on the left side,
and the things you are opposed by (the Opterms) on the right. The
direction of the arrows shows successful opposition.
Here is a sample, with the “A”s being terminals and the “B”s being
opterms and the higher numbers being later in time. The direction of
the arrows shows successful opposition.
A4
\
---> B3
/
A3 <---
\
---> B2
/
A2 <---
\
---> B1
/
A1 <---
You would initially find item A4 which is, lets say, what you are
currently being. You became this to solve the problems given to you
by B3, which had successfully opposed you when you were A3.
Once you get this, you can then start at the bottom and see that you
began by being item A1 and then B1 showed up and kicked your teeth
in. So you became A2 to solve that and it worked, but then B2 showed
150
up and successfully opposed you and so you abandoned A2 and
became A3 etc. This is the pattern of current existence.
To make this a little more obvious, I will give you a piece of the
lineplot I worked up on my goal “To Be Intelligent”. Remember that
this is an actual GPM and the items would be different for anybody else
even if they were doing the same goal.
A SHARPIE
\
-----------> A MORALIST
/
A FREE THINKER <------
\
------> A LITERAL MINDED PERSON
/
A MAN OF LEANING <----
\
----> AN IGNORANT CLOUT
/
A FAST THINKER <------
etc.
This is just a slice out of the middle of a series of about 50 pairs of
items which stretch back for about 16,000 years (I eventually found the
dates and put together descriptions of the lifetimes) and I’m still living in
the upper section of this GPM before it decays down to crushing
strong men and attacking all other intellectuals as being too stupid to
live.
To work backwards in time, you list “Who or what would a ... oppose”.
You can also use “solve” or “successfully oppose” or maybe even
“handle successfully”.
For me (because these are my items), it was obvious that a “Sharpie”
could successfully oppose a “Moralist” and that a moralist would
successfully oppose a free thinker, etc.
You then check this by working up from the earliest (at the bottom of
the page) and seeing that each item is successfully opposed by or
stopped by the one above it. If you do need to list the next item going
up, the question would be “Who or what would a ... be opposed by” or
“be stopped by”.
151
For background information, I’ll mention how I lived this bunch of
items.
As a fast thinker, I was a Spanish soldier sent to the Americas (part of
the conquistadors) and felt that I died in battle because of the ignorant
clouts around me. So in the next lifetime I became a man of learning
and joined a monastery and studied as a monk. But the literal minded
priests did me in (the inquisition). So I rebelled against morality and
became a free thinker. I spent that lifetime as a girl, a Spanish dancer
and part time whore. Of course the moralists did me in so I became a
sharp trader in the next lifetime so that I could take advantage of them
and do them in etc. Of course there were overts here too. As a learned
monk, I really ranted and raved at the peasants (ignorant clouts) and
made their lives miserable. As a free thinker (dancer, etc.), I really
twisted those literal minded noblemen and horny priests around my
finger, etc.
If you hold off on trying to put the lineplot together until the goal is fairly
well discharged, you will find that you can generally just spot each item
in sequence. Only rarely will you have to list a couple of items before
you get the right one (which will FN on the meter). One thing that does
happen is that sometimes you miss a pair of items (because the one
you are on can usually successfully oppose earlier opterms almost as
well as it opposed the opterm it really was used against and the earlier
ones are hot enough that they will react on the meter). In other words,
as I was working back from a free thinker in the above lineplot, I might
have come up with an ignorant clout as the opterm that it successfully
opposed the first time I was working my way back and accidentally
skipped the literal minded person and the man of learning.
The way you handle this is that you occasionally call off the lineplot
items and see that they are all FNing on the meter and if the FN turns
off, there is something wrong, usually a skipped pair of items (or a pair
out of order). Usually the items are all correct because they did FN
before, but the pattern of items might be slightly off.
The way you call it is you would say: A sharpie would oppose a
moralist A moralist would oppose a free thinker A free thinker would
oppose a literal minded person etc. working down the page.
Then you work up the page calling them as: A fast thinker would be
opposed (stopped) by an ignorant clout An ignorant clout would be
opposed (stopped) by a man of learning. A man of learning would be
opposed by a literal minded person. etc.
152
You can call the items in any section of the lineplot like this and even
work up and down (reversing the question) around a small area if there
is some uncertainty. As you call off the items of your own actual GPM
this way, they should make total sense to you and seem totally
obvious because they are the anatomy of how you have been acting
and living life. If it doesn’t seem that way, they you haven’t gotten the
items right. Of course somebody else’s items (mine in the example)
might seem slightly wrong because they are not your items.
If you are having a bad day, or there are other errors, or the goal is still
a bit charged up, the items might rocket read (RR) instead of FNing.
That’s OK. But if you’re getting FNs and then an item RRs, there is
probably an error (usually a missed pair or a pair out of order).
Your final target on this is to get an FNing lineplot (a complete plot with
a persistent FN as you call all the items going down to the beginning of
the goal and then back up to present time using the statements given
above for calling the items).
This procedure is slightly different from the various Routine 3M
procedures that Ron developed for finding lineplots. The exact R3M
listing questions and methods lead to finding implanted GPMs and they
don’t work very well on Actual GPMs.
153
MORE THINGS CONNECTED TO THE GOAL
Besides the lineplot items, there are a number of other things closely
connected with the goal which you use throughout the entire course of
a GPM’s existence.
There will be a basic computation, which we call a “Service Facsimile”
(it was originally considered to be a facsimile or picture but now is
known to be a computation and the person thinks it is performing a
service for him in helping him to survive). This is what the individual
uses to make others wrong.
There is a basic underlying Service Facsimile for the entire GPM. It is
derived from using the basic characteristic of the Opterm to make
others wrong. For me on the goal to be intelligent, the serv fac was
“They’re Stupid”. In the previous GPM to be holy, it was “They’re Evil”.
This is not a lineplot item. It endures for the entire course of the GPM.
In grade 4 processing, we try to get the Serv Fac by listing answers to
the question “In this lifetime, what do you use to make others wrong”.
In some cases, you get the basic service fac which is part of the GPM.
In others, you get a lock resting on top of it (maybe “their foolishness”
or “other people’s ignorance” etc.).
If you have found a basic serv fac by running grade 4 processes, you
might be able to derive the basic terminal from it and figure out the
goal from that. But sometimes you only you only have a lock rather
than a basic one. Also, sometimes the basic service fac of an earlier
GPM which is similar to the current one might have locked up onto the
current one and show up on grade 4. One of the main actions of
implant GPMs was to try and collapse together your actual GPMs so
that you get things all tangled up.
Another thing connected to the GPM is a basic object which
symbolizes the beingness of the GPM. For the goal to be intelligent,
this might be a pair of glasses. For the goal to be holy, it might be a
cross. This is a mental mass and the person will use it as his true
viewpoint and spiritual body throughout the course of the GPM’s
existence. It is the token he uses to represent himself in the game, a
bit like the player’s tokens in a game of monopoly. He carries it from
lifetime to lifetime and he will try to have a manifestation of it in the
physical universe but this is not always possible.
For the individual, this object is solid as a rock and it is exceptionally
pleasing to him. Ron stumbled on this in the late 1950s and labeled it
154
“The Rock” but he did not have the anatomy of the GPM at that time
and therefore all the attempts to audit it out failed. It was pretty much
abandoned in the research after that, but it shows up here in our
anatomy of the actual GPMs. It is interesting to note that this was the
original point at which the meter reaction which we call a “Rock Slam”
was discovered. The Rock of the current GPM will not produce a rock
slam unless you are already into committing horrible unjustified overts
against the next GPM that you are falling towards. But the rock of the
previous GPM which you have already turned against will generally
produce a wild RS on the meter.
You wouldn’t have any luck auditing the rock until the GPM has been
pretty much taken apart.
Don’t make the mistake of thinking that everyone who wears glasses
does so because of the goal “to be intelligent”. We have always failed
when we tried to label specific sources for general kinds of conditions.
There are always many possible reasons and which one is correct is
an individual matter. One person might wear them because of an
engram (an might get rid of them on Dianetics) and another might have
them because of an overt (and maybe could handle it on grade 2) and
perhaps another has gotten them from implants or whatever. We
might not even have all the possible reasons. All that I can say for sure
is that if he is wearing them because they are the rock of the current
GPM, you have no hope in hell of curing them with Dianetics or any
other lower level processing. And you probably can’t even get the guy
to wear contact lenses.
This is why you never try to cure anything or promise any specific
result with any level of auditing. You have no idea where his ailment is
coming from and the odds are that it is not on the level you’re going to
do next. It is likely that you will fix something, but you can’t guess in
advance what that something will be.
155
THE SOURCE OF THESE GOALS
When I first began running these, I believed the goals to be an
individual matter. It was obvious that the items were my choice and
were not implanted. I assumed that the same was true of the goals
themselves.
But after running back through the goal to be holy and spotting the goal
“To Be Powerful” just before that, I decided to try and see what this
whole mess led back to by skipping backwards from one goal to the
next by using a goal oppose style listing process. With the last two
GPMs taken apart and the whole subject of actual GPMs fairly well
cooled down, it seemed possible to do this (I don’t recommend trying
this before you take the last two apart).
The listing question used was “Who or What would (either the goal or
the primary terminal) successfully oppose (or solve)”. Any of the 4
variations of the question seemed to work and I generally checked that
the others led to the same conclusion to help confirm that I had it right.
Once the next earlier GPM was found, I only ran a bit of “what overt
would (earlier terminal) do to (later terminal)” to get some of the worst
charge off of it and then went on to the next goal. This was not enough
to actually erase the GPM or restore abilities or open up my recall of
the timeperiod, but it was enough to let me go earlier without getting
buried under the weight of the thing. I don’t recommend this as a good
technique for making case gain. These things should be run
thoroughly. But I got away with it and it was very useful as a research
action.
I got way back to the goal “To be Free” which opposed “To be
Godlike” which seemed to be the highest goal in the series. And then it
went further back with Godlike opposing “To Be Enduring” and the
goals seemed to be down at the bottom of the scale and working
upwards as I went earlier. And eventually it cycled back through
STRONG opposing INTELLIGENT opposing HOLY again and all the
way back up to GODLIKE. The whole pattern had been repeating over
and over again. So I tried to date the first occurrence of “To Be Godlike”
and got 86 trillion years ago (which might be an implanted date rather
than a real one). And there I found the start of this universe and incident
I in its full form.
It would still be incorrect to say that these goals were implanted since
running the implant doesn’t seem to undo them. It would be better to
say that these goals were “Suggested” and that they were built into the
156
anatomy of the game of this universe and that we follow them because
the underlying mechanics coax us into doing it.
It works like this: The game in this universe is “TO SURVIVE”. The
abberative implanted idea is that “ONLY ONE WILL SURVIVE AND
THE REST WILL SINK INTO MUD”. The destructive collarary that they
show you is “TO BE THE ONE WHO SURVIVES, YOU MUST BE
SUPERIOR TO OTHERS”. Then they show you how to be superior to
others. And it is by being godlike, holy, intelligent, strong, etc. And at a
minimum, you can at least endure rather than sinking into the mud.
Then they show you the sequence of goals by means of having
various figures (which are of significance from earlier universes) come
out and state the goals and how they relate to one another. This is the
real anatomy of incident I as given in OT3. If you have run this level,
then just spot the charioteer saying “TO SURVIVE IS TO BE
POWERFUL” and realize that you have been spotting a tiny slice out of
a much bigger incident.
I hate to say it, but OT3 was researched in a very slipshod manner.
Luckily, we get away with spotting only a tiny piece of incident I
because the incident does not have much force or charge on it. It can
hardly be considered a heavy implant. What it really is is a sort of
welcoming ceremony or a sick course that people get put through as
they come into this universe to show them how the game is setup
down here.
Here is the little section of it that I am most certain of:
Waves of blackness & Snaps etc.
Cherub blows horn.
Priest comes out and says “TO SURVIVE IS TO BE HOLY”
Priest looks in the direction that the previous character left in
and says “TO BE HOLY IS TO SOLVE THE OPPRESSION OF
POWERFUL PEOPLE”.
Priest looks the other way an says
“TO BE HOLY IS TO BE OPPRESSED BY INTELLIGENT PEOPLE”.
Priest exits.
Waves of blackness & Snaps etc.
Cherub blows horn.
Scientist comes out and says “TO SURVIVE IS TO BE INTELLIGENT”.
Scientist looks to the side where the priest left and says
“TO BE INTELLIGENT IS TO SOLVE THE OPPRESSION OF HOLY
PEOPLE”.
Scientist looks to the other side and says
157
“TO BE INTELLIGENT IS TO BE OPPRESSED BY STRONG PEOPLE”.
Scientist exits.
Waves of blackness & Snaps etc.
Cherub blows horn.
Athlete comes out and says “TO SURVIVE IS TO BE STRONG”.
Athlete looks to the side where the scientist left and says
“TO BE STRONG IS TO SOLVE THE OPPRESSION OF INTELLIGENT
PEOPLE”.
Athlete looks to the other side and says
“TO BE STRONG IS TO BE OPPRESSED BY CRAFTY PEOPLE”.
Note that I think the next one after strong is “To Be Crafty”, but I
wouldn’t guarantee it. I also might be wrong about the charioteer and
the goal “To Be Powerful” coming just before the goal to be holy
because I haven’t really run that goal yet either. I am, however,
absolutely certain about Holy followed by Intelligent followed by
Strong.
I wouldn’t try to write out the whole thing because I went through the
entire series in a very sloppy manner and I don’t have a lot of
confidence that I’ve got it right. I will give you the approximate pattern
of goals that I found, but its up to you to run out the actual GPM that
you are stuck in and the one before it and make corrections and
adjustments as needed.
Any research of implant patterns really needs to be done by a team.
Different people will have real certainty on different sections of the
pattern and by putting together a composite, you should get the whole
picture. As I understand it, the Clearing Course platens used in
Scientology were put together by a group effort on the part of a few
dozen people. The same needs to be done here. A complete and
accurate platen will make it easier on the people who follow us.
But running this incident does not set you free from the goals. It just
gives you an easy way to spot the actual GPM you’re in the middle of
and gives you some orientation to what’s going on. The charge on the
actual GPM does not come from the implant and does not vanish when
you confront the implant. The charge comes from your own overts
etc. in fighting against others according to this pattern.
You will also find out that you do not abandon these goals as you run
them out. Instead, you become capable of doing more of them
simultaneously. With the whole thing erased, you should be capable of
being holy and intelligent and strong and free and responsible and
enduring and godlike all at the same time. These are good goals. You
158
were not implanted to give you the goals. You were implanted to set
these goals in conflict and divide you against yourself.
There are some problems with the complete list of goals. First of all,
this is a translation because the implant was not done in English and
we may have different words for the same thing. Second, these are
lived as actual GPMs and your exact statement of the goal may vary
slightly each time you live through it in the cycle, so that our exact
patterns may have diverged. And, of course, I probably made errors,
especially in the form of missing goals or putting goals in the wrong
sequence, because I was trying to skim through this without actually
erasing them.
THE FOLLOWING LIST IS ONLY A STARTING POINT; DO NOT RELY
ON ITS ACCURACY.
Each goal is opposed (or oppressed) by the next one in line and
opposes (or oppresses or solves) the one above it. The first one (To
be Godlike) oppresses the last one (To Be Enduring) so that the whole
thing makes a circle. The big unjustified overts are from each goal
against the one below it.
TO BE GODLIKE
TO BE FREE
TO BE RESPONSIBLE
TO BE CREATIVE
TO BE IMPORTANT
TO BE PERCEPTIVE
TO BE SUCCESSFUL
TO BE RIGHT
TO BE POPULAR
TO BE SKILLFUL
TO BE WISE
TO BE BEAUTIFUL
159
TO BE PRODUCTIVE
TO BE POWERFUL
TO BE HOLY
TO BE INTELLIGENT
TO BE STRONG
TO BE CRAFTY
TO BE INDEPENDENT
TO BE GOOD
TO BE ADVENTUROUS
TO BE ORDERLY
TO BE DIFFERENT
TO BE RESPECTED
TO BE HAPPY
TO BE ACQUISITIVE
TO BE SENSUAL
TO BE DOMINEERING
TO BE TOUGH
TO BE ENDURING
(maybe have 30 of 36 goals)
Other possible goals: causative, desirable, competent, lively,
energetic, valuable, ethical, aesthetic, famous, proud, wealthy.
For the rare case who is in the inverted ending section of the GPM, you
might have to run it as “TO NOT BE ...”.
160
PROCESSES THAT CAN BE RUN
I will talk more about how to audit in the next write-up. For now I will
simply mention that you usually run process commands repetitively,
gradually working deeper until something releases.
On an area that is severely abberated, it is not enough to run one
process or find only one key answer or only have a single new
realization. You usually have to hit it from many angles and take lots of
stuff apart to really dissolve a big area of mental charge. When you
have something like one of these GPMs, it tends to fester and lots of
lesser things lock up on it. You just keep chipping away at these with
various processes and eventually the whole thing begins to crumble.
When I started cleaning up my goal to be intelligent, I simply used a
hodge-podge of processes based on anything that had ever been tried
by Ron in this area and throwing in other lower grades type processes
where some part of the goal (usually the goal’s terminal - in this case an
intelligent person) could be worked into the command. Eventually,
while slopping around this way, I realized what the previous goal was,
what lineplot item I was currently dramatizing, and a lot of other stuff
and eventually the goal was FNing on the meter and pretty much
keyed out. Only then did I try to list out the lineplot.
For general use, and based on hindsight, I have tried to put together a
reasonable rundown of processes that should be easier and faster than
the exact steps I followed originally. But I must remind you that this
has not been tested by a thorough research run on others.
To some degree, this is a streamlined set of lower grade processes
aimed at a specific area. It is nowhere near as thorough as the
expanded lower grades because we have a narrow target and we
don’t want the runway to be too long.
It should be possible for a trained solo auditor to run these on himself.
It remains to be seen whether an untrained person could self audit
them. I think it could be done if you had enough determination and
desire to get through it. The monitoring factor is how specific are the
commands Vs how much the person can confront. The very specific
commands in the “Self Analysis” book can be self audited by almost
anybody in the sloppiest manner and still produce results. Some of the
vaguer lower grades processes can’t even be solo audited unless
you’re way way up the scale. Here we have the advantage that the
target is very specific and (if you have found the right goal) of
maximum interest to the person.
161
In general, the process commands alternate between you, another
person (meaning single specific people), and others (meaning groups
or society). This tends to unstick self-centered viewpoints, gets you
exterior to the actions of the terminal that you may be stuck in, and
cleans up flows which go more ways than one (there is inflow that you
receive, outflow that you emit, and the crossflow of your observing the
interactions of others). Here I have simply put these in an alternating
series of commands as was common in earlier auditing rather than
trying to run each individual command repetitively to a point of release.
I think that would be too arduous and unnecessary in this case. I tried it
both ways and this seems to be the better choice.
These processes are especially important when you get back to
earlier GPMs. I found that I could list the lineplot straight back into the
goal to be holy (my immediately previous GPM) and you might need to
do that first to get back through the decayed ending period of the goal,
but I could not get any earlier by just running the lineplot. The goal
was too long ago and to far outside of my current life. You need to run
these general processes to get back enough recall and understanding
of who and what you were when you did have the goal before you can
really erase the GPM.
162
OBJECTIVE PROCESS
(Objective processes are run on the environment).
One of the reasons the goal decays is that as you live it, you gradually
put the characteristic of the opterm into other people. If the goal is to
be intelligent, then you tend to make others stupid. These processes
are intended to turn that around.
There are two processes, each one is run separately. Do the action
over and over again until something happens such as having a
realization or suddenly feeling very good etc.
a) Find a crowded place, spot individual people, and postulate the
ability of the goal’s terminal into them. If, for example, the goal is
to be intelligent, then you postulate intelligence into people.
b) Find a crowded place, spot individual people, and within each
one, spot some remaining bit of the goal’s ability (such as
intelligence for example) that is still present in them and validate
and encourage it. This is done telepathically. It doesn’t matter if
they really get the communication or if you just imagine it, what is
important is your intention towards them and your recognition
that there is at least a tiny remaining spark of the ability in
everyone no matter how deeply it is buried (i.e. there is always
some remaining shred of intelligence even in the most stupid
person).
163
SIMPLE RECALL
Recalling the positive or pleasurable side of something tends to cool
down the upsets and failures associated with the negative side. The
earliest and most powerful manifestations of living a goal before it
decayed were highly positive (this may not be easily visible in the
current lifetime). We want to rekindle some of that strength before we
get involved with any of the negative factors.
Also, we want to include an awareness of other people doing the goal
when we run this. This not only gets the person off of a self-centered
viewpoint, but it helps him look at the goal from outside.
This is a single process with the commands run alternately. Fill in the
blank with the goal’s ability. I.E. intelligent, holy, or whatever.
a) Recall being _____
b) Recall another being _____
c) Recall others being _____
164
ARC RECALL
Affinity (liking), Reality (agreement), and Communication are a key basic
in living life. We call this the ARC triangle and when all these three
factors are present, we find that we also have Understanding. These
can all be used to open up the persons memory a bit more and pull
him further out of the negative factors into which he may have sunk.
There are 4 processes. Each one is run separately and has its own set
of 6 commands that are run alternately.
Fill in the blank with the terminal (i.e. an intelligent person, a holy
person, or whatever) of the GPM.
RECALL COMMUNICATION
a) Recall a time you were in good communication with a(n) _____.
b) Recall a time a(n) ____ was in good communication with you.
c) Recall a time another was in good communication with a(n) _____.
d) Recall a time a(n) ____ was in good communication with another.
e) Recall a time others were in good communication with a(n) _____.
f) Recall a time a(n) ____ was in good communication with others.
RECALL AGREEMENT
a) Recall a time you agreed with a(n) _____.
b) Recall a time a(n) ____ agreed with you.
c) Recall a time another agreed with a(n) _____.
d) Recall a time a(n) ____ agreed with another.
e) Recall a time others agreed with a(n) _____.
f) Recall a time a(n) ____ agreed with others.
RECALL AFFINITY
a) Recall a time you felt affinity for a(n) _____.
165
b) Recall a time a(n) ____ felt affinity for you.
c) Recall a time another felt affinity for a(n) _____.
d) Recall a time a(n) ____ felt affinity for another.
e) Recall a time others felt affinity for a(n) _____.
f) Recall a time a(n) ____ felt affinity for others.
RECALL UNDERSTANDING
a) Recall a time you understood a(n) _____.
b) Recall a time a(n) ____ understood you.
c) Recall a time another understood a(n) _____.
d) Recall a time a(n) ____ understood another.
e) Recall a time others understood a(n) _____.
f) Recall a time a(n) ____ understood others.
166
COMMUNICATION PROCESS
It is beneficial to unstick the communication flows by drilling them a bit
and pushing through any barriers. Here again we are interested in
positive action rather than looking at any negatives.
It is best to imagine actually talking to someone and saying lots of
specific things. The importance here is the volume of flow since that
can push through barriers you may have set up. You can imagine
saying all sorts of outlandish things, just keep the flow going. You can
do a big outpouring of stuff on one command and when you run down,
switch to the next command.
a) Imagine saying specific things to a(n) _____.
b) Imagine a(n) _____ saying specific things to you.
c) Imagine another saying specific things to a(n) _____.
d) Imagine others saying specific things to a(n) _____.
e) Imagine a(n) _____ saying specific things to others.
167
HELP PROCESS
Part of the goal’s decay consists of the accumulated weight of failures
to help others. But the anatomy of the trap is that the person takes
each failure very seriously and holds on to them and never balances
them off against the times he helped successfully. So you handle this
by finding times he did help successfully.
When a person is heavily collapsed and the failures seem to far
outweigh the successes, you are looking at the end of a long cycle. He
always decayed from a state of power and you will find many
successes if you go early enough. If you can spot earlier lifetimes
where the victories were numerous, then it becomes easy. If not, you
can still make it by spotting even the tiniest successes in this lifetime
because they will reaffirm the great pile of positive actions that lay
earlier out of sight.
a) Recall a time you helped a(n) _____.
b) Recall a time a(n) ____ helped you.
c) Recall a time another helped a(n) _____.
d) Recall a time a(n) ____ helped another.
e) Recall a time others helped a(n) _____.
f) Recall a time a(n) ____ helped others.
168
PROTECT PROCESS
Failures to protect are similar to, but usually more violent than failures
to help. Here you will find the mass of love and loss, trust and betrayal,
etc. If a child loses a parent, no matter how weak and small he is, he
tends to feel that he failed to protect the parent from harm.
Again, you can’t run the failures by simple recall. That will just sink the
person under the weight of his losses. Instead, you must stir up the
tremendous positive side. Even if recent lifetimes seem bleak,
remember that we have all been around a long time and everyone has
had their good periods as well as bad ones.
As in the other processes, run the commands alternately to a big win.
a) Recall a time you protected a(n) _____.
b) Recall a time a(n) ____ protected you.
c) Recall a time another protected a(n) _____.
d) Recall a time a(n) ____ protected another.
e) Recall a time others protected a(n) _____.
f) Recall a time a(n) ____ protected others.
169
PROBLEMS PROCESS
Now we’re ready to look at one of the mechanisms by which a person
will get himself screwed up. What happens is that he will have a
problem and then he will solve it and cast the solution in concrete and
that will get him into further trouble and lead to more problems.
Eventually he has a huge stack of these things, and the older solutions
don’t even apply to anything anymore but he’s still holding them all in
place.
This is very intimate to the decay of the GPM. The reliable items (the
things he tries to be) might even be looked at as a series of solutions to
the opterms (the things opposing him). Here we are not looking for
items or opterms, but sometimes one might come into view and
should be carefully noted down.
The procedure is to spot a problem, and then spot one or more
solutions (as many as will come off easily) and then spot another
problem and its solutions, etc. Generally you will keep spotting earlier
problems (but its OK if some are later) and solutions that are still in
place but no longer appropriate will show up and dissolve which in
turn will cause later problems (which came about because of the
earlier solutions) to start falling apart and then suddenly the whole
mess will fall apart.
This is complex enough that each direction of flow should be run as a
separate process. Each process will have two commands. For solo
use, you would repeat the solutions command as many times as
seems indicated. If you run this on someone else (as in a co-audit), then
simply alternating the commands works well enough and avoids the
judgment point of determining if the PC has more solutions for that
problem (he will just come up with the same problem again if there
are more).
Fill in the blank with the goal’s terminal (an intelligent person, a holy
person, or whatever).
a) What problem might a(n) ____ have with another or others.
b) What solutions might a(n) ____ have to that problem.
a) What problem might another or others have with a(n) ____.
b) What solutions might they have to that problem.
a) What problem might a(n) ____ observer between others.
b) What solutions might a(n) ____ have to their problem.
170
a) What problem might a(n) ____ create for himself.
b) What solutions might a(n) ____ have to that problem.
Note that there are several ways to set up these questions (see the
Scientology grade 1 processes). I have picked what seemed to be the
most powerful variation.
171
OVERTS / WITHHOLDS
Here we hit the really causative side. The person does things and then
he hides them and withdraws from action. Maybe he meant to do
harm or maybe he was just getting away with something, or perhaps
he even had good intentions and it went wrong. Often the person sinks
to the point where he’s holding himself back from doing anything
because it might bring about harm.
So we ask for what the person has done, because we are working up
a gradient scale of responsibility for doing things. We don’t insist that
the “done” be a harmful act because any admission of having acted is a
positive step. The harmful acts should and will come up on these
questions, but don’t force it. And we alternate the “done” question with
a withholding type question to unstick the continual withholding that
most people live with.
Again we will run each direction of flow as a separate process.
The overts are among the most significant things that accumulate as
one lives the GPM and raising one’s confront on these may cause a
significant amount of charge to unravel. This should make it possible to
get a bit more exterior to the GPM, so we will add another flow at the
end to help with this.
a) What might a(n) ____ do to another.
b) What might a(n) ____ hide from another.
a) What might another do to a(n) ____.
b) What might another hide from a(n) ____.
a) what might a(n) ____ do to others.
b) what might a(n) ____ hide from others.
a) What might a(n) ____ do to himself.
b) What might a(n) ____ hide from himself.
a) What might you do to a(n) ____.
b) What might you hide from a(n) ____.
Note that this last one is extremely important if your goal has already
decayed significantly.
172
CHANGE
Change is an important button. If a person can’t change, he can’t get
better.
Insistence upon and resistance to change are both significant sources
of overts and a common underlying cause in many upsets between
people.
The identities that one uses in a GPM are fixed solutions to the
problems of living and therefore tend to resist change even when the
change would be for the better.
a) What might a(n) ____ want to change in another.
b) What might a(n) ____ prevent changing in another.
a) What might another want to change in a(n) ____.
b) What might another prevent changing in a(n) ____.
a) what might a(n) ____ want to change in others.
b) what might a(n) ____ prevent changing in others.
a) What might a(n) ____ want to change in himself.
b) What might a(n) ____ prevent changing in himself.
a) What might you want to change in a(n) ____.
b) What might you prevent changing in a(n) ____.
173
UPSETS
Upsets generally occur between people because flows of affinity,
reality, communication, or understanding are enforced or inhibited.
Spotting exactly what is going on with these flows is the basic
technique used in Scientology processing to handle upsets (which we
call ARC Breaks) between people. The full list of what can happen to a
flow to bring about an ARCX is: Curious, Desire, Enforce, Inhibit, No
(e.g. the absence of), and Refused.
When an ARC Break happens, the reaction is generally all out of
proportion to what actually occurred. When you get the person to spot
that, lets say, he became upset because his communication was
refused, he cools down a bit. And if you then work back to earlier
similar upsets (because these things build up over time), you can really
bring major relief.
In this case, we are not trying to handle a specific upset, but instead
are trying to undercut the entire mass of upsets associated with a
specific terminal.
To keep the runway from being too long, we will limit ourselves to the
three most common buttons, which are inhibit, enforce, and desire
since these should pick up enough for our purposes here (we are only
handling a single terminal instead of trying to produce a full grade 3
release) .
In this case, the different directions of flow are best handled by
alternating commands rather than separate processes. By working a
precise button (such as inhibiting communication) with a specific
process, this should lead the person back to basic on a particular kind
of upset and take it apart.
As a side note, this is a new procedure that is not currently part of
Scientology’s grade 3 processing. A generalized version of this (with all
6 buttons) should really be added to that grade. Furthermore, really
early track ARCXs (prior to home universe) require adding Not-Know to
the list of buttons.
INHIBITED COMMUNICATION
a) What communication might a(n) ____ inhibit in another.
b) What communication might another inhibit in a(n) ____.
174
c) What communication might a(n) ____ inhibit in others.
d) What communication might a(n) ____ inhibit himself from saying.
e) What communication might you inhibit a(n) ____ from saying.
ENFORCED COMMUNICATION
a) What communication might a(n) ____ enforce on another.
b) What communication might another enforce on a(n) ____.
c) What communication might a(n) ____ enforce on others.
d) What communication might a(n) ____ force on himself.
e) What communication might you force on a(n) ____.
DESIRED COMMUNICATION
a) What communication might a(n) ____ desire from another.
b) What communication might another desire from a(n) ____.
c) What communication might a(n) ____ desire from others.
d) What communication might a(n) ____ make himself desire.
e) What communication might you desire from a(n) ____.
REJECTED AGREEMENT (on this one reject seems to fit better than
inhibit)
a) What agreement might a(n) ____ reject from another.
b) What agreement might another reject from a(n) ____.
c) What agreement might a(n) ____ reject from others.
d) What agreement might a(n) ____ make himself reject.
e) What agreement might you reject from a(n) ____ .
ENFORCED AGREEMENT
a) What agreement might a(n) ____ enforce on another.
b) What agreement might another enforce on a(n) ____.
175
c) What agreement might a(n) ____ enforce on others.
d) What agreement might a(n) ____ force on himself.
e) What agreement might you force on a(n) ____.
DESIRED AGREEMENT
a) What agreement might a(n) ____ desire from another.
b) What agreement might another desire from a(n) ____.
c) What agreement might a(n) ____ desire from others.
d) What agreement might a(n) ____ make himself desire.
e) What agreement might you desire from a(n) ____.
INHIBITED AFFINITY
a) What affinity might a(n) ____ inhibit in another.
b) What affinity might another inhibit in a(n) ____.
c) What affinity might a(n) ____ inhibit in others.
d) What affinity might a(n) ____ inhibit in himself.
e) What affinity might you inhibit in a(n) ____ .
ENFORCED AFFINITY
a) What affinity might a(n) ____ enforce on another.
b) What affinity might another enforce on a(n) ____.
c) What affinity might a(n) ____ enforce on others.
d) What affinity might a(n) ____ enforce on himself.
e) What affinity might you enforce on a(n) ____.
DESIRED AFFINITY
a) What affinity might a(n) ____ desire from another.
b) What affinity might another desire from a(n) ____.
176
c) What affinity might a(n) ____ desire from others.
d) What affinity might a(n) ____ make himself desire.
e) What affinity might you desire from a(n) ____.
These 9 processes should be enough. If necessary, you can also run
these buttons on Understanding. They can also be run on Reality
either in addition to or in place of Agreement. Also, as mentioned
earlier, more than 3 processes are possible on each button. This
pattern of processes on the ARC triangle can also be run on the
beingness/doingness/havingness triangle.
177
JUSTIFICATIONS
In this universe, the individual is struggling to survive and allows
himself to commit his worst overts on that basis. Then he buries them
under a heavy layer of justifications. Here you can get many answers
on questions b and d for each answer to questions a and c
respectively.
a) What would a(n) ___ do to ensure his survival
b) what justifications would he have for that
c) What would a(n) ___ stop others from doing to ensure his own
survival
d) what justifications would he have for that
178
RIGHTNESS and WRONGNESS
Now we want to clean up the “Service Facsimile” (the computation he
uses to make others wrong)
This is a repetitive process. We run this first to take off charge.
a) How might a(n) ____ make himself right.
b) How might a(n) ____ make others wrong.
Now we need to list for the answer. It will often be a computation in
the form of “They’re ....”, but take whatever comes up. See the next
write-up for more information on listing techniques if you are not
already trained in this.
The listing question is:
What would a(n) ____ use to make others wrong.
Note that we do not limit the answers to this lifetime (as is usually done
in grade 4). The limiter is needed there to keep him from sliding into
multiple GPMs (which each have a different answer to this question).
Here we get the same effect by referring to the specific GPM terminal.
If the previous question did not result in a basic answer in the form of
“They’re ....”, then list the following:
From the viewpoint of a(n) ____, what is it about them that makes
them so wrong.
Taking the most basic answer from the above listing question(s), run
the following:
a) How would (..answer..) make others wrong.
b) How would (..answer..) make a(n)____ right.
179
VIEWPOINTS
Although this kind of processing is usually used on grade 0 in
Scientology, it is actually a very advanced process and makes a good
finishing touch in our handling of the GPM terminal. This should help
you get exterior to it.
a) From where could you communicate to a(n) _____.
b) From where could a(n) ____ communicate to you.
c) From where could a(n) ____ communicate to others.
d) From where could a(n) _____ communicate to himself.
180
ADVANCED PROCESSES ON OPTERMS
By this point, the terminal should be fairly well cleaned up and a great
deal of charge should have already been removed on the opterms, so
that they should now be easy to run directly.
THE BASIC OPTERM
There will be a basic opposition terminal which is the opposite of the
terminal. For intelligence it would be “a stupid person” or “stupid
people”.
We want the underlying characteristic rather than a specific opterm, so
the listing question would be as follows:
What kind of people would a(n) ____ oppose.
This should yield the basic opterm. But there is a chance that you will
come up with the prior opterm (the terminal of the previous goal - for
example “stupid holy people”).
If necessary, you can also list:
What kind of people would a(n) ____ be opposed by.
Again this should yield the basic opterm, but here you might get the
future opterm (the terminal of the next goal - for example “stupid strong
men”).
If neither list yields the basic one, then spot the common underlying
characteristic of both answers.
OPTERM PROCESS
Run this on the basic opterm found above.
a) what action or attitude would (opterm) have towards (terminal).
b) what action or attitude would (terminal) have towards (opterm).
c) what action or attitude would (terminal) have towards others.
d) what action or attitude would others have towards (terminal).
e) what action or attitude would (opterm) have towards others.
181
f) what action or attitude would others have towards (opterm).
g) what action or attitude would (opterm) withhold from (terminal).
h) what action or attitude would (terminal) withhold from (opterm).
(This is based on the process Routine 3D whole track O/W by LRH)
FINDING THE NEXT GOAL
As you run the earlier GPMs prior to the current one, you will already
have handled the next one later in time (because you are working
backwards) and will know what it is.
But for the new GPM that you are living right now, you might not know
what the next one is going to be. It might be obvious from the
processing that has already been done on the goal, or it might be
obvious from the general pattern suggested by Incident 1 (discussed
earlier). But we can’t guarantee that, because the goals were only
suggested and your own postulate of each goal might vary slightly
from the pattern.
There is also the question of how deep are you into the current GPM.
Up near the top, you might not yet have any contact with the next one
in the series and so you might need to skip any handling of it because
there is nothing there to run. If you are already going out the bottom of
the current goal, then there might be serious overts and charge on the
next one that is coming up.
The following listing question can be used to find the next goal that is
coming up in the future:
a) What Goal would successfully oppose the goal “...(current goal)...”.
You can also get this by listing for the future opterm as follows:
b) What kind of a person would successfully oppose a(n).....
or even with
c) What kind of a person would be dangerous to a(n).....
Once you have a goal, you can get the terminal of that goal by listing
“who or what would want ...(goal)...”.
182
Once you have a terminal (in the case the future opterm will be the
terminal of the next goal), you can get the goal by listing “what goal
would a(n).... have”.
You can work around with a number of these questions and satisfy
yourself that the answers fit together and make sense. When you’re
finished, you should know what the next goal and its terminal (which is
the future opterm of the current goal) are, or you can be satisfied that
there is no future opterm in view yet.
On earlier GPMs, you already know the answers to these questions, so
you just check them over to be sure that you’ve got everything right.
RUNNING THE FUTURE OPTERM
Now use the same process from step above but use the future
opterm instead of the direct opterm.
This might not have a lot of charge when you’re handling your present
time GPM. But if you’re near the end of the full cycle of decay, there
will be horrible unjustified overts against the next GPM coming up and
you might even turn on a Rock Slam meter reaction on this process.
If it seems necessary, you can run more processes on overts
committed against the future opterm.
Also, if an RS does turn on, or (running without a meter) if you get very
hateful and evil towards the future opterm, then spot and blow the
earlier false purpose. Also, if needed, spot the original scene in
incident one that set you up for this whole mess.
Once you are running earlier GPMs, you will already have run this area
because the future goal will already have been processed. But you
should check if there is any more charge on committing overts against
the future opterm. If so, you could run an O/W process such as “what
would (terminal) do to (future opterm)”, “what would (terminal) withhold
from (future opterm).
FINDING THE PREVIOUS GOAL
Now we want the goal that came before the one we’re handling. The
earlier one is solved by the current one.
List for the goal as follows:
183
a) What Goal would be successfully opposed by the goal “...(current
goal)...”.
You can also get this by listing for the prior opterm as follows:
b) What kind of a person would be successfully opposed by a(n).....
You can also use “solved by” in place of “successfully opposed by”.
This works like step 8.3 above except that now you’re looking
backwards.
RUNNING THE PRIOR OPTERM
Now use the same process from 8.2 above but use the prior opterm
instead of the direct opterm.
This may suddenly reveal a horrible mass of unjustified overts that you
committed while you were doing the previous goal. If so, then get as
much off as you can because this is what will really restore abilities and
open up your recall of the earlier goal.
On earlier GPMs, this area can be very hot, so you might need to run
an additional process:
a) what overt might ..(prior opterm).. commit against ..(terminal)..
b) how would he justify that.
Also, if an RS does turn on, then spot and blow the earlier false
purpose. Also, if needed, spot the original scene in incident one that
set you up for this whole mess.
WHAT TO DO NEXT
By this point, the current GPM should probably be falling apart in your
hands and you should have some awareness of the earlier GPM that
you abandoned.
Now you should be able to do the lineplot easily (see above)
When you do the lineplot, run it all the way back into the decayed
ending section of the previous goal (found in 8.5 above) and try to get
back to the point where you made the postulate to not do that goal.
184
After running the lineplot, you can optionally go through it again and try
to date and identify the lifetimes that go with the items. You should
already have an idea of these from doing the lineplot, but it helps open
up your recall to get the dates.
As a final step, date when you postulated the goal. Then search for
and write down any other postulates you made concerning the goal.
After this you can either run the rock or just start running the next
earlier GPM (which you should have identified above)
185
PROCESSING THE ROCK
The rock is the basic object that symbolizes the entire GPM.
The person uses the rock as a substitute for himself.
He will often be carrying a decayed version of the rock around with
him (for example, an intelligent person might be wearing glasses).
The thetan will have a mockup of the rock hidden in some mocked up
space outside of the physical universe and will be relaying all of his
communications to the physical body through it. He intentionally
forgets and hides this out of fear that somebody will read his mind and
zap it and destroy him. To some degree he uses this as a sort of high
level spiritual body and its lifespan is the entire duration of the GPM.
You are not going to get rid of the rock early in processing. He has too
much bound up in it and thinks that he will lose his memory and
identity if its gone. And we have been through this cycle of goals many
times, so that there will be earlier similar rocks which makes it tend to
persist even after the current GPM is run out.
Here we will simply try and take some charge off of it and clean it up.
This should only be attempted after fully processing the GPM and its
lineplot.
On earlier GPMs, he is no longer using the rock that he had setup for
them, but it is still important to process because he has a tendency to
compulsively create anything that is similar to any rock that he once
used. This tends to make the physical universe very solid and
unmanageable.
There is a lot of early theory about the rock in the 20th and 21st
Advanced Clinical Course lectures. These ACCs did not go well. The
rumors are that the students came out looking like rocks. The problem
was that the anatomy of the GPM had not yet been worked out and
these things can’t be run successfully without handling the GPM first.
It remains to be determined whether these rocks are consistent from
person to person on the same goal.
FINDING THE ROCK
186
You can either list it from the goal or the terminal. The question would
be:
a) What Object would represent ____ For example, on the goal to be
holy, you could either fill in the blank with “a holy man” or “the
goal to be holy”.
Use the rock found to fill in the blank in the rest of the processes
below.
PLEASING PEOPLE
In the ACCs, Ron found that the person was using the rock as a people
pleaser. He would put it up in place of himself so as to attract
admiration, etc. Of course there would be people who wouldn’t admire
it and that would make it stick.
a) what sort of a ____ would please people.
b) tell me a person that would please ____
a) spot a time another admired your ____
b) spot a time another invalidated your ____
c) spot a time you admired another’s ____
d) spot a time you invalidated another’s ____
e) mock up crowds of people applauding and admiring the rock.
Keep doing this until you feel very good.
HELP ON THE ROCK
Supposedly the rock helps you to survive.
a) how could a ____ help you
b) how could you help a ____
c) how could a ____ help another
d) how could another help a _____
e) how could a ____ help itself
PROTECTING THE ROCK
187
The rock can get lost or damaged and is a constant source of concern
and fear.
a) how could a ____ protect you
b) how could you protect a ____
c) how could a ____ protect another
d) how could another protect a _____
e) how could a ____ protect itself
STOPPED MOTION
The rock tends to stop motion and therefor accumulates mass.
a) what motion of yours has a ____ stopped
b) what motion of another’s has a ____ stopped
c) what motion of others has a ____ stopped.
RESISTANCE
a) What beingness would resist a _____
b) What beingness would ____ resist
OBJECTIVE EXTERIORIZATION FROM THE ROCK
For this you want to use an actual physical object. You may already
have a copy of the current rock (glasses or a cross or whatever it is that
represents your current goal). You will almost certainly not have one
for the immediately preceding GPM (because you probably abandoned
it with great determination), so you can either get one or make one out
of clay or something. The important thing is to have some physical
mass to work with.
Place the object on a table within easy reach. Part of the drill is to
actually reach out and grab it and then withdraw your hand from it. You
want to be moving your hand back and forth by at least a foot.
a) Grab the object and keep it from going away.
b) Let go of it.
188
c) Grab the object and hold it absolutely still.
d) Let go of it.
e) Grab the object and (by mental projection) make it more solid.
f) Let go of it.
WASTING THE ROCK
a) mock up a way to waste ____
b) mock up a way for another to waste ____
c) mock up a way for others to waste ____
HAVINGNESS MOCKUPS
This is based on the GITA (give and take) processing of the
Philadelphia Doctorate course and the Remedy of Havingness used by
Ron in the late 1950s.
Here you mockup great quantities of the rock in a sphere surrounding
you. Keep making the copies more & more decrepit and decayed and
changing their colors and getting more and more of them until you can
get them to start flowing into the body in an avalanche.
Keep mocking up more and getting them to flow in until you feel
satisfied and are willing to throw some away.
Then mock up more and have them flow outward in explosions and
fly away into the distance.
When that seems to cool down, go back to the first step but this time
mock up nicer copies and get them coming in in an avalanche until you
get enough of them.
Keep alternating the inflow and outflow with better and better copies
until you can handle wonderful beautiful (golden or whatever) copies
and handle them easily.
VIEWPOINT PROCESSING
a) from where could you communicate to a ____
189
b) from where could a ____ communicate to you
c) from where could another communicate to a ____
d) from where could a ____ communicate to another
e) from where could a ____ communicate to itself.
MEMORY
The thetan often uses objects as a repository for memory. In the
special case of the rock, he dumps entire lifetimes of memory in there
so that he can forget them without losing them completely.
a) What memories could a ____ store for you
b) What memories could a ____ store for another
c) What memories could a ____ store for others
d) What might you allow a ____ to forget.
THOUGHT
The thetan also has a foolish tendency to let objects do his thinking for
him.
a) What thoughts might a ____ have on your behalf
b) What thoughts could you have in the absence of ____
OBSESSIVE CREATE
a) From where could you mockup a ____
b) From where could a ____ mock you up.
Run these alternately until command b) suddenly seems ridiculous and
something comes apart. Then do a few more of command a) to
stabilize the result. It seems absurd, but to some degree you’re
probably having the rock mock you up rather than vise versa.
Then run:
a) From where could another mockup a ____
b) From where could a ____ mock another up.
190
OT PROCESS
Hold the object in your hands.
Close your eyes.
a) spot 3 points in the object.
b) spot 3 points in the room.
Do this alternately. Your perception does not have to be good or very
real. Just keep spotting.
If you should suddenly feel like there is another copy of the rock off in
some strange space somewhere, then add it to the process and spot 3
points in it as well (then you would be alternating between the object
in your hands, the room, and this other distant object).
Early on in running this, the object in your hands will become much
more real and solid than the rest of the room. Continue until either this
effect stops (the object and the room are perceived uniformly), or you
exteriorize from the rock with certainty.
191
AFTERWORD
An interesting point is that the godlike being up at the top of the
pattern kicks back against the enduring people. You can see this in the
early books of the Bible where God is always saying that the Children
of Israel are a stubborn people and he keeps pushing at them to bend
them to His will.
This oppression of enduring people means that when you were
godlike, you could not endure and therefore ensures that the goal will
decay. Also, you are continually bothered by the free beings who are
out of your control and eventually you commit terrible overts against
them. This is how the cycle starts.
Note that the people you might think are enduring or free in this
example do not necessarily have those goals as their own GPMs. If
you’re being godlike and someone really gives you trouble, there is a
tendency to assume that they are free beings (because the implant
suggests it) when really it might be someone who is working on, lets
say, the goal to be popular or even another person working on the
goal to be godlike (but they look like they’re free from your viewpoint).
There are earlier universes before this one (see the “Cosmic History”).
Each of the last few universes had its own series of actual GPMs which
formed the anatomy of the game in that universe.
The underlying goal of this universe is to survive. And it includes the
twisted false idea that only one can survive, so you have to be
superior to others.
The previous universe was the Magic Universe. The underlying goal
there was To Enjoy. It was a hedonistic universe. The twisted false
idea was that you gained pleasure at the expense of others. In other
words, it was good to screw but bad to be screwed. This idea is still
around even though it is blatantly false. All sorts of undesirable
impulses ranging from sexual craziness to wanting to make others into
slaves stem from this earlier universe.
When you came to this universe, you accepted the current goals series
and it became the primary motivating factor. But just because you’re
living these GPMs doesn’t mean that you completely abandoned the
magic universe goals series. You continued to live them as well but
they faded down to being a secondary factor and you tend to move
through the items slowly and with little emphasis. Also, these earlier
192
goals are very decayed because they have already been lived so
many times and gotten worse on each cycle through the series.
I don’t yet have a good handle on the magic universe goals series. It is
obscured by the current series of actual GPMs. You need to know
about these because you will see an occasional loose end sticking out
that comes from there (the PC is living the goal “to be responsible” but
he has a terrible urge to get drunk tonight, etc.). Don’t go chasing off
after the occasional stray bit of an earlier GPM that doesn’t fit logically
into the actual GPM you are running.
The individual’s own causative behavior (as opposed to what he is
forced into by others) stems from the following sources:
a) The current actual GPM.
b) The other GPMs he is still living in from earlier universes.
c) His own prior postulates which he believes he has to live up to.
d) Free Will.
Never make the mistake of thinking that all behavior stems from
aberration. The person can become interested in something. He can
decide things without any prior cause. The difference here is that he
can think about these things and change his mind if he wants to.
193
CHAPTER 4 - AUDITING TIPS AND TECHNIQUES
THE UNDERLYING BASIS OF AUDITING
The existence of aberration stems from our need to create and
experience everything. But, for a god like being, this is much like
viewing an occasional horror movie to keep the more desirable
conditions from becoming too monotonous. There is nothing here that
requires a persistence or perpetuation of aberration. You should be
able to shrug these things off effortlessly.
The persistence of aberration, on the other hand, is a grave mistake
and is due to a basic conflict between the wrong information we were
fed (see “jewel of knowledge” in #2 “Cosmic History”), and the true
nature of our existence. The factors in conflict are as follows: At the
beginning of our existence, we were mislead into believing that
thinking, perceiving, experiencing, or creating certain things could be
permanently harmful to us. From this, we began to flinch or withdraw
from various things. And those things were then used (by each of us
against the others) to further discourage looking, and being, and
thinking, and doing until we have all sunk into a morass of mental
blindness and incapacity.
But, if we are indeed balancing nothingness with an infinity of creation
(as I proposed in “Cosmic History”), then we will never get rid of
anything unless we are capable of creating it again in the future,
because we would be unwilling to lose anything on a permanent
basis. This would mean that you will never uncreate anything unless
you look at it so completely that you could mock it up again.
And thus things persists because we mistakenly believe that we
should not look at them and must not create them. On this basis, if
something can be brought fully into view, it should at least desensitize.
And if the person can be made to mock up a perfect duplicate, and
therefore see that he is capable of recreating it at will, then he should
be able to completely vanish the object or condition if he so chooses.
And if we further realize that the willingness to create something is
monitored by the willingness to be responsible for the existence of the
thing and the effects it creates, we see that responsibility is a key
underlying button. And since controlling something is the act of being
responsible for the effects that it is currently creating, we furthermore
see that control of something is a gradient towards full responsibility.
And to control something, you certainly need to know about it. This
194
gives us the Knowingness / Control / Responsibility triangle (KRC) that is
used in Scientology.
Coming at this from another angle, it should be obvious that fully
viewing something and being able to duplicate it is monitored by one’s
ability to communicate with it. And this is also monitored by the
perception of the reality of it. And furthermore, a complete duplication
would require the ability to, shall we say, synchronize or move in
sympathy with it, which could be described as having an affinity or
liking for it.
This last button of needing to have affinity might be the big problem
because we have been shown that you’re not supposed to like things
that are bad, and you’re not supposed to like two things that are in
conflict with each other, and (most deadly), if you like something and
then change your mind, it’s considered a betrayal. To get rid of a bad
condition, you might have to (just very briefly) choose to like it and that
often comes in conflict with all three of the above.
The factors of Affinity, Reality, and Communication are what is known
as the ARC triangle in Scientology.
And so we see that to bring about the vanishment of a condition, we
restore the ability to create that condition and we can work towards this
by gradient scales of increased looking, communicating, knowing,
controlling, taking responsibility, etc. This is the exact opposite of how
things are handled in the society at large where undesirable conditions
are buried and suppressed and kept out of view. This, per my
opening remarks, would ensure that we will continue to compulsively
create them out of our control. Those of you who are trained as
auditors will see that I have taken a different path than LRH did in
specifying the theoretical basis of auditing, but we do come to the
same conclusions.
195
HOW MUCH OF THE MIND IS ACCESSIBLE
Every intelligent researcher in the field has recognized that there are
portions of the mind that the individual is unaware of. Even the most
meat body oriented theories have to allow for a vast realm of
unobserved activity and the statement that you are only using 5% of
your brain or mind is quite commonly accepted.
One of the early Dianetic principles was the idea that if anybody had
some inherent mental ability (such as total recall, lightning fast
computations, etc.), then the ability must be an inherent property of
each and every mind and must in most cases be buried and blocked in
this unaware section of the mind. The brilliance of this observation was
partially tarnished by the inadequate one lifetime view and the
mistaken idea of blaming everything on recent engrams. None the
less, it expanded the concept of what must be hidden in that unseen
area below the level of consciousness.
The breakthroughs of 1952 opened up an immensely larger sphere in
which the individual should be capable of operating but where he was
even less aware and disabled. The manifestation of any OT ability,
ever, by anyone, would on this basis indicate that everyone is capable
of these things but has them buried far out of reach. And these things
do happen, just look at Rhine’s research or the endless history of
observed poltergeist manifestations. As an interesting side note, any
such manifestation also invalidates the absoluteness of physics and
places it in the position of being a special case in much the same way
as modern physics (both Einstein and quantum) placed Newtonian
physics into a limited (but exceedingly common and useful) special
case.
We could label this hidden portion of the mind many ways. We could
call it the subconscious, but that has many undesirable connotations for
our purposes here, as does the term “unconscious”. Even the label
“Reactive Mind” has many implications which might be correct for
some portions of this hidden area but which are not necessarily true
for all of it. The only sweeping statement we can make with certainty
is that this portion of the mind is subaware or below the individual’s
level of awareness. Since there is no indication that the whole thing is
homogenous, we should realize that we are always dealing with
relative truth rather than absolutes. An accurate anatomy of, for
example, engrams, only maps one portion of this hidden area and
leaves much else to be discovered. One of Ron’s main weaknesses
was his tendency to grab a single factor, whether it was overts or
196
implants or entities or whatever, and decide that he finally had the
solution to it all.
Our primary task in auditing is to move things from this hidden realm
into consciousness.
A useful (but not entirely accurate) analogy is to draw a box and place a
horizontal line across the middle of it, and label the upper section as
aware and the lower section as hidden. We might even shade in the
lower area to represent the blackness that comes from lack of
awareness. Our job would be to keep moving that line down until
everything in the box was within the person’s awareness.
But the boundary between the aware and hidden portions of the
individual’s mind is not a simple line. It would be best thought of as a
gray area in which he is almost aware. This band may be thin or thick
and the wider it is, the more things he has that are accessible to simple
processing. If the line is too thin, there might only be a handful of
things that he can look at to raise his awareness and great skill and
understanding are required to get any kind of results in working with
him. If the gray area is exceedingly wide, almost any technique ever
dreamed up by anybody will produce positive results because there is
so much that is accessible.
As the individual moves things from this gray area into full awareness,
the gray area does not shrink, instead it moves downward to
encompass more things that were previously unreachable. The
individual has a certain tolerance for unknown, frightening, or confusing
things and he will allow more of the deeply buried stuff come up to the
surface as you clean up the things that are currently accessible. It
makes it look like an unending job because there’s always something
more, but this is a wrong view brought about because the hidden area
is orders of magnitude larger than the conscious area. Never worry
about how much more he is finding because this may actually be a
positive indication that he is able to tolerate a wider gray area. Instead,
pay attention to whether he is resolving things and becoming more
able and more aware.
The things that are in your full awareness are not the source of your
difficulties. And the things hidden down in the mud are just too deeply
buried for you to figure them out until you have worked deep enough
to bring them up into the gray area. Therefore, the only things that you
can make progress on are the ones in this gray band. Those things,
shall we say, that are half obscured but somewhat in view. For this
reason, there will be aberrations that you’re not going to get anywhere
near handling. It doesn’t matter how slight or silly something seems,
197
the cause of it could be ten fathoms deep. So never get evangelistic
about some disability, it can be heartbreaking. Instead, you always
work on what is accessible and keep going deeper.
But it is very useful to widen this gray area. It makes more things
accessible. It gives you more angles of approach (and we don’t know
the right way to address everything). It allows more room for error.
And it lets you get deeper and undercut things and therefore leads to
faster progress in general.
Simple things like being well fed and rested will expand the gray band
because you are more willing to look deeper. Things like courage and
confidence, knowledge and determination all play a role in this. And the
more you succeed, the more you are willing to grapple with so that
eventually you’re digging this thing out with a steam shovel instead of
handling tiny specs of dirt.
198
TYPES OF AUDITING
Let me first warn you that the CofS currently considers self-auditing to
be dangerous. I disagree because this is where the mind’s protection
is the most effective. However, the gray band of accessibility can
become extremely narrow so that most self-auditing is unproductive of
results.
The different types of auditing have a significant effect on how wide
the accessibility band is. If you’re being audited by a safe and
knowledgeable person, you are much more willing to dive more
deeply into the hidden portions of the mind than you would be if you
were auditing by yourself.
Also, making mistakes Vs having successes is a major factor in
accessibility. Early on, when you know the least and are most likely to
goof things up, you’re better off with somebody who knows what they
are doing. On the other hand, a bad auditor who screws things up
might actually make the PC less accessible in session than he is when
he is alone, hence there has occasionally been a problem with people
self-auditing (and not doing very well at it) in between professional
sessions that should have fixing them up but instead were making a
mess of things.
Here is my list of the types of auditing, starting with the one that gives
the greatest accessibility (if done right) and working down.
PROFESSIONAL AUDITING
Here, an auditor, who should be extremely skillful and knowledgeable,
audits the PC (PreClear - from habit we even call OTs PCs). The PC is
not expected to know very much. The PC is also expected to pay a
lot, possibly with some justification since it is very hard to make a good
auditor and the PC is doing very little for himself. Its the unnecessary
and screwed up actions that cause people to really scream about the
prices (who in their right mind would want to pay thousands of dollars
for an unnecessary sec check for example). There is rarely any
complaint if the right thing is run to a good result.
I personally believe that this is a cop-out on the PCs part and a way to
offload responsibility onto the auditor. Although this will give the widest
band of accessibility at any given moment, it does not encourage the
band to grow wider to the same degree that learning the subject will.
Therefor I think professional auditing is best suited to repair actions
199
and startup actions (to get someone moving) and should not be used
as the main thrust.
Furthermore, the PC has little idea of what is going on and he can be
led into trouble by bad auditing or incorrect C/Sing (Case Supervision,
which specifies what is to be audited). This is the only situation (outside
of using drugs etc. to force yourself over your head) where somebody
might get worse instead of better because he is usually reaching much
deeper than normal because he expects the auditor to keep him safe.
CO-AUDITING
Here the person studies the materials and is paired up with another
person who is doing the same. They take turns auditing each other.
In this case, the co-auditors can get away with the sloppiest techniques
and still produce fantastic results on each other because the person
being audited is well aware of the procedures and purposes and is
taking responsibility. The only really critical factors are ARC and a
desire to help. The mere presence of somebody else who is willing to
listen and give assistance gives a tremendous boost to this factor of
accessibility.
I believe that this is the way to go for most people until they reach a
point where they can make good progress on solo auditing.
The ideal situation would be to have a professional auditor available to
give assistance in case of trouble.
SOLO AUDITING
Here the person goes at it by himself, but with the full formal
procedure of auditing. He uses an E-meter and writes things down in a
professional manner.
In the CofS, solo auditing is always done with a Case Supervisor who
reads the sessions and issues instructions. This ensures that there is
still an external communication line and that someone else is there to
provide missing knowledge or an external point of observation.
Although the band of accessibility will be narrower than in a co-audit,
this has the big advantage that the person, as his own auditor, has an
internal communication instead of having to relay everything in words
and it also raises the person’s responsibility even further.
200
The same formal procedures will work without a case supervisor if the
person has enough understanding of the subject. The sessions should
still be written down, because this helps get everything exterior to the
person. The band of accessibility will be found to be narrower
because there is nobody else there to bail you out if you get into
trouble, but if it is already extremely wide, because of a great deal of
study and determination, then it can still be adequate to the task.
SELF AUDITING
In the final analysis, the only way out is to become a fully self-clearing
individual. If you’re floating around in a bodiless condition without a
book or an E-meter and there’s no one around who knows enough to
give you a hand, you should still be capable of taking anything apart
and setting yourself free.
But you can’t self audit in the absence of understanding and without
any workable techniques. People have been known to just spin around
endlessly just figure figuring and getting nowhere. If people could do
this right on an instinctive basis, we would already have gotten out of
here. The problem is that we swallowed a whole lot of wrong data
early in our existence and it predisposes us to becoming abberated.
So the person’s instinct is often wrong and leads him into a downward
spiral.
Furthermore, the band of accessibility is at its narrowest in this case
because the individual has no help. If you are extremely advanced and
very knowledgeable, then it doesn’t matter so much because the band
is incredibly wide anyway, but if you are just beginning and know little
and have little perseverance or determination, then the band might be
so tiny that little progress can be made.
There is also the research question of developing techniques which
are conducive to successful self auditing. Unfortunately, the CofS has
leaned away from this. There are some exceptions, like the book “Self
Analysis”, but generally this is an untapped area.
My own experience was that I was able to successfully self audit the
route 1 procedures in “Creation of Human Ability” based on reading the
book shortly after I joined the subject. Although this didn’t fully turn on
real OT abilities, it was a lot of fun and I believe that it set me up for the
big OT key out that I had the following year.
According to the Philadelphia Doctorate Course tapes, the OT drills are
self auditable if you know the materials well enough, and they can be
201
done immediately on a certain percentage of new people when they
walk in the door (these were what was then referred to as Step 1
cases, people who could run step one without preparation). But this
research line was pretty much abandoned.
On the other hand, the Dianetic techniques in DMSMH absolutely
cannot be self audited. Something like Dianetic repeater technique is
almost dangerous even in professional hands, nothing to say of having
people go try it by themselves. But that is mostly because it is a poor
technique on any basis. The modern Dianetic techniques are smoother
and easier, and possibly could be self audited by a very advance case,
but such a case would probably be a Dianetic clear already and the
technique would actually be in his way and inappropriate to use.
But there is a self auditable technique for running engrams. It consists
of alternately spotting something in the incident and something in the
room. This can actually let you recover the unconscious period of an
operation and bring up the words being spoken and everything. You
just need to persist with it long enough. We still have the problem of
accessibility. Some cases are just not up to running engrams. But if
they are, this trick will work almost as well as the modern Dianetic R3R
procedure, with the difference being that it is slower but does not
require an auditor or an E-meter.
It is almost criminal not to have a technique like this and teach it to
people as soon as they are up to running engrams. What if the person
should die? This is one of the few ways that they could run out the
death experience successfully.
Furthermore, this one works for Dianetic clears without the liabilities of
running R3R (which can get the NOTS aspects of the case all stirred up
if too much of it is done after clear).
The technique would be to “Spot an incident underlying (condition)” and
then alternately spot something in the incident and something in the
room until something happens. Then spot another incident underlying
... etc. until the condition is handled. In general, you should not ask for
an “Earlier Similar” incident when doing this on a clear because the
“engram chain” mechanism is not fully operative after someone goes
clear. A looser question allows for an earlier similar to be run if one is
there but doesn’t force it. This is actually more of a high powered recall
process rather than true Dianetic picture running.
202
METHODOLOGY
ITSA
First and foremost is simply looking and seeing “What Is”. Since this
results in saying “It is a ...”, we call this ITSA in Scientology. The
opposite, which is saying “What is it?” is referred to as WHATSIT.
By actual observation in the auditing of preclears, if the PC continues to
ITSA he will make forward progress and if he concentrates on
WHATSIT he will jam up and grind to a halt. This doesn’t mean that
you can’t wonder what something is. But it does mean that if you
concentrate your attention on all the things you don’t know, you will
bog down. The trick is that there must always be more ITSA than
WHATSIT if you wish to get anywhere.
If you have something you are wondering about or trying to figure out
or if you are trying to run a processing question, then you already have
one WHATSIT there to work on. At that point, you’re just slowing
yourself down if you start thinking of what else you don’t know.
Instead, you should concentrate on things that you can identify or see
or know about.
If you don’t know what time it is, and need to know, you don’t handle it
by also thinking about how you don’t know the date and don’t
remember where you left your watch. That’s all WHATSIT and if you
keep it up for too long, you’ll just bog down and decide that the whole
matter is hopeless.
Instead, you look around and try to spot a clock (“It is a clock and it says
that it is 5 minutes after six” - this is ITSA). And if you can’t spot any,
then you spot things that you do know about the time. Maybe you
remember that the sun was going down, etc.
Never be afraid to consider something that you don’t know, but always
balance it with lots of ITSA. That is the fastest way to make progress.
If you’re trying to figure something out, it often helps to go over the
things you do know which have a bearing on the problem.
This also tells us that you are much better off expanding outward from
areas that you do know something about rather than plunging into
completely unknown regions.
203
REPETITIVE SPOTTING
To pound in a nail, you hit it over and over again with a hammer. Often
it is hard to start and then things pick up. You don’t try to do it all in one
blow. You also don’t hit it once and then keep the hammer on the nail
and try to push real hard to get it to sink in the rest of the way.
The biggest gain in perception is when you first look at something.
Just continuing to stare at it after that only produces a small perception
change in proportion to the amount of time spent. If you want to see
something more clearly, keep looking at it and something else
alternately, or shift around between different spots on a large object
rather than staring at it. This will improve perception and can be tried
easily.
You can also do this on a physical basis, actually reaching out and
touching something and then withdrawing from it and then reaching
again etc.
Among other things, we are drilling the ability to reach out with and
withdraw one’s attention. When an area is abberated, one either gets
one’s attention stuck on it or one flinches from it and can’t look at all.
Either way, putting your attention onto and off of it in a controlled
manner can restore the ability to think about and handle something.
Furthermore, drilling the precise control of your attention is like any
other exercise, it gets better with practice and you build up muscles.
Processes are best done with alternating commands (this naturally
shifts your attention back and forth) or with some inherent change of
attention (spot another object or remember another time when ...) or
with great care to end the action precisely before doing it again.
Sometimes you can get somewhere with fixed concentration, but its
usually the long way around, and there is a tendency to build up a
resistance when you push too long and hard against something. In
eastern practices, they often drill by holding their attention on a single
point instead of alternating and these drills are notorious for taking
years of arduous work before they achieve a result. Tibetan monks
have been known to wall themselves up in caves for years to
complete one of these drills. The speed difference is at least a hundred
to one. Just see how long it takes you to push a nail in someday
without swinging a hammer and you’ll see what I mean.
There is also the matter of narrowing one’s attention down to the point
where one has a chance to push through something. There are things
204
that are just too much for the PC at this stage in his existence and you
handle that by addressing one piece at a time rather than trying to
handle everything at once. You can probably get him to confront losing
his pen if he doesn’t at the same time think about how the boss is
going to yell at him. And then maybe you could get his confront up on
people yelling as long as they were not his boss and then you could
get him to confront his boss as long as he wasn’t yelling. Finally you
can take up the subject of his boss yelling at him for losing the pen and
succeed where otherwise you would have failed.
The idea behind processes is generally to address a specific thing and
not get into all the other stuff that’s wrong with him at the same time.
You do one thing with the attitude that you’ll worry about the other
things later. This is where you can fail if the PC has his attention stuck
on some other horrible thing in his life (a problem or something)
because he keeps pulling that into the middle of the process you are
trying to run.
And so you have to watch out for things that have the PC’s attention
stuck. If it is stuck to the point where he can’t put it aside briefly to do
something else, then there is nothing else that you can run, because
you are going to be running that fixed point of attention whether you
like it or not.
There are some processes, such as simply looking around the room
and spotting things that you like, which will run a point of fixed
attention without addressing it directly. But realize that you really are
running that fixed point by having him practice putting his attention
somewhere else under his own control. You can also run this process
in the absence of fixed attention and it will be a nice process for
improving one’s perceptions of the room. But it runs like a different
process in that case because you are not doing the same thing with it.
And here again we have the factor of accessibility. The process that
will really cure what his attention is stuck on might not be in the
accessible band. And so you do a lick and a promise and try to get his
attention off of it temporarily and then build up his muscles by handling
what is accessible until he reaches the point where he really can go
after that thing which has him swamped.
DRILLS
You can exercise abilities and perceptions by drilling them. This is a
form of repetitive spotting (or repetitive doing) that is oriented towards
repeating the action. It is addressed towards the current environment
205
rather than the past and works to increase ability directly rather than
being concerned with why the person is not able.
At Scientology lower levels, they use drills on the physical
environment and work through the body. For example, you might
have the person look around the room (with the body’s eyes) and spot
something he likes. You would do this repetitively until the person
brightens up.
On the upper levels, the techniques are often done outside the body.
You could, for example, close your eyes, get the idea that you’re
hovering over the city, and spot something that you like.
Both methods are valid and valuable. If we forget about the silly status
button as to whether or not somebody is at a certain case level, it
becomes apparent that both methods could apply at any level. It is
often best to do a physical drill on the room using the body first and
then go on to do the OT version of the same drill. The OT versions of
these things are beneficial even if the perceptions are vague and
unreal. They get better as you advance.
Making gains by means of drills alone is unfortunately very limited. A
certain amount can expand abilities and build up horsepower, but then
you begin to run into the various mental barriers that you have set up
and the limits of the physical rules that you are in compulsive
agreement with.
My own idea on this would be to have a short level of drills in between
each major level that is address to auditing something out. This should
include some physical drills (also called “objective” processes in
Scientology) and some OT drills. In other words, let the person do
some of these all the way up the line rather than putting them at some
special super OT level. And do them with the knowledge that they will
be vague and sketchy at first and will get better as one advances.
Unless you’re drilling precision, you should push the speed just a bit
because quantity of commands done is a bit senior to the quality with
which they are done and because a faster pace tends to raise one’s
tone level (see 1st ACC lectures). This doesn’t mean that you slop
around and don’t really do the command or try to get through
everything in a mad rush, it simply means that a brisk pace is
preferable if the PC is up to it. But precision is often worth working on
(this is the keynote of martial arts or practicing the piano, etc.). A good
technique when you’re doing drills solo is to do a few commands very
precisely and then do a large number quickly and then do a few more
with great attention to the quality and precision etc.
206
PROCESSES
Repetitive processes generally aim at pushing through something,
deeper and deeper, until you can spot a basic answer or confront a
basic incident that causes an area to fall apart.
Of course drills can also be considered processes, but here I’m
referring to questions which get you to confront things. As discussed
under repetitive spotting, the questions are often alternating so as to
bring about a natural shifting of attention on and off of an area because
this gives you the maximum push into looking at the area.
An example would be running “What is the Problem”, “What
communications have you left incomplete about that problem”. The
two commands are done alternately, and they get the person to shift
his attention back and forth so that he doesn’t bog down on one
question or the other. For self auditing to clean up a specific problem,
you might be best off using “Describe the problem” instead of “What is
the problem” because this encourages more ITSA and this process
will work best on a specific problem by alternating ITSA on the
problem itself and on the incomplete communications. The problem
will change as you continue the process, and you may even shift to a
more basic problem.
ASSESSING
A very useful technique is to go down a prepared list of things and see
which reacts. There are many variations of this. It is used, among other
things, for assessing a correction list of possible things that can go
wrong to see if you can find what is wrong.
This really should be done with an E-meter so that you can see what
reacts. This gives you an easy way to figure out what to take up.
Trained auditors will know how to do this. Solo auditors using a meter
can get away with this on a very sloppy basis because they know
what is going on with themselves. Doing this on someone else should
only be done by highly trained professionals or very knowledgeable
co-auditors on each other because it can be quite evaluative for the PC
and can get him all screwed up if the auditor jams the wrong things
down the PCs throat and misses the right ones.
Note that because the list is generalized and the topic (such as fixing
what has gone wrong) may have more than one correct answer, this is
not generally used to find the one and only answer, but instead is used
to get areas to follow up on. The most significant one might not even
207
be accessible when you begin running this so that lesser areas have to
be handled first.
On a self-audit basis, you can still check over the things on a prepared
list to see if you can spot items that seem indicated to you. Somebody
might actually read through that list of actual GPM goals (see the
previous write-up on actual GPMs) and just know it when they come to
the right one.
You might also look down a list of possible errors (e.g. a correction list)
and spot right away what has gone wrong.
If you’re not sure of finding the right one but you’re still fairly clear
headed, you can try out a couple of possibilities and see if one or more
of them work. This is possible as long as you still have enough free
attention to tolerate a few wrong answers and a bit of WHATSIT before
you get your hands on something that is right.
The difficulty comes up when you have really gotten yourself bogged
down and its all too foggy and confused and over-charged and maybe
you’ve already got a lot of things wrong so that the answer is not
obvious. In this case, all you can do is to keep fixing individual things
that are wrong until the area cools down and you can see clearly again
and that is very hard without an E-meter. This is really the area where
we could use a team of crack professionals supporting co-audit clubs
and self-clearing groups etc.
There are many assessment lists in Scientology. Modern Scientology is
especially good at putting together correction lists to use in assessing
and fixing what has gone wrong in the case of trouble. These
correction lists were developed by accumulating a great deal of history
on things that did go wrong and how they were fixed. Later I will talk
about a few of the more critical errors, but this will not substitute for a
thorough study of case repair.
You can also put together an assessment list if you know enough
about an area. If, for example, you know how to fix cars, you can
make a list of things that could be wrong which you can go over when
a car comes in to be fixed. In developing such a list, you must be very
careful to put together a general list of what could be wrong (or
whatever) without looking for the exact right thing that is wrong. This
question, of what is wrong, does not generally go to a single perfect
answer because there are usually many things wrong and there is
often an accumulation of errors before something actually fails.
208
Never confuse assessment techniques with the listing techniques
given in the next section. Assessment lists are useful lists of things to
consider.
LISTING AND NULLING (L&N)
This is an extremely powerful but potentially dangerous technique. I
do not recommend it to beginners, but you should have some
understanding of it.
You begin with a question that goes to exactly one right answer (which
is why it doesn’t work on the question “what is wrong with me” etc.).
Then you list down answers to the question. The action of listing itself
will improve your confront in the area and will tend to take off charge. If
the area has too much charge on it, you may not spot the answer
(referred to as “The Item”) when you list it, but instead you might have
to list some more answers first. You have to spot the moment when
all the charge has come off and you’re ready to spot the item.
Then you go down the list of answers nulling out the ones that are no
longer valid (this is the Nulling step) until you find The Item which is the
one and only exact answer to the question for you at this time.
You then have to recognize that it is the answer. In an auditing session,
the auditor will indicate that “...” is the item. In solo, you indicate it to
yourself.
This is a very dicey procedure if done in the presence of heavy
charge, and that should be left to professionals.
But listing on a lightly charged item is very easy. You just spot a couple
answers and know which one it is (generally listing on NOTS works this
way because its not your charge). Generally you can just list to the right
item without doing an item nulling step.
If there is heavy charge, what you can do is to take most of the charge
off with a repetitive process first. Often you can even cognite what the
item is without doing any listing at all. In self auditing, only begin a
listing technique when the answer is almost on the tip of your tongue.
This is slower but much safer.
Among the things that can go wrong are the list is being overlisted (you
have kept on too long and it seems to be getting heavier and more
solid) or the list is still incomplete (there is still more charge and more
209
answers you need to get off and it seems like there is still more than
one possible answer). Sometimes when you go past the correct
answer on Nulling the list, it seems like every answer is correct, so find
the one that triggered that happening. Often (but not always), it turns
out to be the first one on the list. See the “Laws of Listing and Nulling”
in the tech volumes and don’t list anything that is heavily charged until
you really know what you’re doing.
The worst error is indicating the wrong item. If it feels bad, it is not it.
The right item always cheers you up no matter how sick the answer
might seem because finding the right answer will start straightening
things out and bring about a feeling of relief at a minimum. If things
seem bleak or hopeless after finding an item, it is guaranteed that it is
wrong. If this happens, immediately indicate to yourself that the item is
wrong (that will cool down most of the side effect of a wrong item). A
wrong item can make you sick. The same can happen if you have the
right item and then invalidate it. Whichever way it is, if you suddenly
feel horrible, then reverse the indication.
Don’t get too worried about wrong items or listing errors. I have run
many thousands of lists on myself and gotten hundreds of items wrong
without any serious ill effect. Even when the listing was done on me
by someone else, the occasional wrong item didn’t usually have much
effect except that a few time I got very mad and upset. Only twice did I
ever have a really bad reaction and in both cases it was listing done on
me by another in an area that was extremely highly charged.
In one of the two cases I became extremely sick, and in the other I
suffered very briefly from hysterical blindness, unable to see anything
but blackness with my eyes open (but this happened instantly and
made the error obvious and my vision snapped back on on simply
reversing the indication).
As a little aside, people are always indicating wrong things to each
other in life. You should learn to spot these things and reject them and
you’ll find that life is a lot more pleasant. Even if something is actually
right, if you’re not ready to have the item, then it wouldn’t do you any
good so you might as well toss it. If you keep evolving, you’ll get back
to it eventually and generally you’ll find that even the things that
seemed right logically (but didn’t feel correct) were slightly off base.
Its simple and easy to spot things (such as things that are wrong etc.)
and do something about them without getting into a frantic search for
the right answer. If you pound away at searching for the one true
answer (especially with a question that has many valid answers), you
tend to get into a continual WHATSIT that will bog you down.
210
If you keep spotting truth and not worrying about the stuff that is not
yet accessible, you will have an expanding sphere of rightness and
understanding and gradually the dark areas will clear up and resolve.
TAKING OVER AUTOMATICITIES
An old basic idea in Scientology is that you have the PC do consciously
what he is already doing automatically.
If we are adding to the richness of creation, then he can let himself
stop doing something as soon as he has full control of doing it
consciously whenever he wants. Then he doesn’t lose it if he stops.
But if you suppress something that’s happening automatically, he can’t
let go of it, so it keeps going in a hidden manner and what you end up
with is both the automaticity and its suppression being continually
mocked up. This may result in something that looks like nothing is
happening, but its solid and very busy under the surface (its the no
motion of forces in balance instead of a simple absence of motion) and
it chews up a lot of his horsepower keeping these things in
suspension.
A good technique is to have the PC alternately increase and decrease
the action. If a muscle is tense, alternately make it tenser and looser
etc. If a person is stuttering, have him alternately stutter worse and
better in alternate sentences.
This leads to more exotic techniques based on assumptions about
what the person is doing unconsciously. Obviously, he’s automatically
making the wall solid, so you have him make it more solid, etc.
MOCKUP PROCESSING
Since the underlying basic is creating things, the ultimate process
would simply be to create things consciously and under your own
control. If you can mock something up causatively, then you don’t have
to mock it up compulsively.
This is the basic technique of the Philadelphia Doctorate Course and
Ron has said a great deal about it.
If you’re worried about car crashes, then do mockups of car crashes
until the mockup is under your control. Then you’ll stop worrying and
211
also have enough confront on the situation that you’ll have a good
chance of avoiding a crash instead of pulling one in.
You really should listen to the PDC tapes, but I’ll give you a few key
points here. First of all, mock up many copies, not just one. Change
their color and alter them in various ways to get them under your
control. Move them around and locate them in different places. Work in
all directions, not just in front of you (there is an automatic tendency to
push pictures behind your back to keep them hidden, so working
mockups behind you is especially good). Subsequent research by
Ron in the late 1950s (16th ACC etc.) showed that you must do
something with the mockup, such as making it more solid or changing
it around, to ensure that it is your own creation rather than just pulling
up old pictures.
The final problem with mockup processing (see 1st Melbourne ACC)
was that it sometimes stirred up charge on Create/Destroy. It was
abandoned for that reason despite the fact that it worked in a large
percentage of cases. In the 1960s, it was discovered that
Create/Destroy were key implant buttons and this problem was
basically solved, but mockup processing never went back into
intensive use.
The keynote of using this technique safely is to never push the PC into
having to do it, because sometimes there is charge on the Create
button. But use it yourself anytime you feel good about it, because it is
one of the fastest and most powerful techniques, and even in the early
days, Ron explicitly stated that it could be self audited successfully.
If there is charge on create, you can probably blow it by spotting the
top of the first penalty universe. The first item is “To Create Is Native
State”. Then the penalty universe shows you how that leads to death
and destruction. You can pull out of the whole thing by spotting being
blanketed and pushed into the penalty universe and then by spotting
pushing others into it. The context of this is given in the “Cosmic
History” and a more detailed write-up will appear later in this series.
212
HOW TO RUN PROCESSES
The most important thing in running a process is to continue to do it
until it’s done.
The act of running a process will bring other things into view. There is
a strong tendency to chase after the new things discovered instead of
finishing what you’re doing, and that is a mistake. If you do find
something worth following up, write it down for later and continue
what you’re doing.
There is a real problem in knowing when to stop. Always end on a
win or some sort of gain or improvement. But don’t push on endlessly
trying to force some big gain and invalidating the actual win because it
seemed too small. The invalidation itself interferes with further
progress. Its like teaching a little kid something. You have to encourage
the tiniest half screwed up forward step so that he can keep getting
better.
We are generally working towards getting key-outs, which means that
you don’t take apart the entirety of trillions of years of, let us say,
having a car (or spaceship or whatever) break down while trying to
drive to work. Instead, you spot a few things and suddenly the
accumulated weight of that thing falls away and you feel better and
have a win. That is the point to stop. If you carry on, you just begin to
stir up the tons of earlier stuff connected to the area you’re handling
and that stuff may be too early and too far out of current experience to
be addressed right now. So you take the win you’re given and go on to
something else. Eventually you come back around and an earlier and
broader sphere is now accessible and you can go to a more powerful
win. Eventually you should be able to spot the original postulates,
decisions, actions, and false data that started you on the downward
path.
A process can be underrun, meaning that it hasn’t been run long
enough, or it can be overrun, meaning that it has been run too long.
Leaving a process incomplete (e.g. underrun) can sometimes leave
you feeling irritable or even hopeless because you’ve stirred up
something, expecting to handle it, and then abandoned it instead. Self
auditors commonly leave processes underrun, get discouraged, and
then abandon the whole mess.
Overrunning a process tends to make things more solid and often
gives you a heavy or tired feeling. The process also gets more difficult
213
to run and things that were easy to confront when the process was
going well can start seeming hard to handle. If you begin feeling that
stuff is coming back that was gone, its almost certainly an overrun. In
my experience, overrun is the most common mistake when people
are auditing each other. They want a single process to do everything
when the real truth is that you usually need many processes, each
producing a small forward step fairly quickly.
Even a self auditor needs to keep a record of processes run so that he
can check back over the last few if he begins to feel irritable or
hopeless (underrun) or heavy and solid (overrun).
For underrun, you finish the incomplete process.
For overrun, you spot the moment that you went release on the
process and rehabilitate that. You can spot the win or new awareness
that occurred. You can spot the invalidation of continuing and the
subtle action of dragging things back in (which had been momentarily
better) that occurred when you kept on running the process. You can
even count how many times you went release because a long overrun
can have multiple release points. There are more sophisticated
methods taught in professional auditor training, but you shouldn’t need
these unless you’re handling an untrained and unaware PC.
214
RUDIMENTS
If a person has an upset, problem, or a withhold that they are worrying
about, then it will not be possible to make any progress on anything
else because these things cause one’s attention to stick. These are
called the rudiments because they need to be taken care of first before
handling other things.
Trained auditors, even solo auditors, learn sophisticated techniques to
handle these using an E-meter. I will not try to cover all of that material
here.
But untrained people still need something to get through these things.
And even a professional should have methods for self auditing these if
necessary; you can’t always count on having a meter and being able to
set up a formal session (especially if you get run over by a truck).
UPSETS
An upset is best described as an ARC Break (ARCX). On a self audit
basis, you would first just look the incident over very carefully,
confronting what happened and spotting things about it. The emphasis
is on saying what is (ITSA) and not worrying about the confused and
unresolved parts of it (which will be handled next). This is to soften the
incident up a bit. Needless to say, you do this away from the source of
the ARC break if at all possible.
If you’re extremely upset, furious or hysterical or whatever, then also
do alternate spotting of the room and the incident until things cool
down a bit.
W h e n y o u ’ r e r e a d y , c o n s i d e r t h e p o i n t s A f f i n i t y , R e a l i t y ,
Communication, and Understanding and determine which was the
most significant in the upset. You can do this step again if there is
more than one. This is an assessment, as discussed earlier. Done
without a meter, you simply take your best shot and if the following
step doesn’t bring some relief, you try again.
Then check if the item found above was enforced or inhibited. If
neither one of these indicates strongly, then use a broader assessment
consisting of a) Not-Known, b) Curious, c) Desired, d) Enforced, e)
Inhibited, f) No .., g) Refused. Note that standard tech does not include
the Not-Know button in their ARCX assessments, but it follows from
general theory and shows up more as you get higher on the scale.
215
When you spot that, lets say, an enforced reality or an inhibited
communication was the primary source of the upset, there should be a
feeling of relief. If not, then you’ve got it wrong and should redo the
above.
The relief on spotting this can be partial or total. If its complete, then
you’re done. If not, then carry on as follows: First of all, spot the
primary direction of flow. I.E., did you inhibit someone else’s
communication or did someone else inhibit yours. It can even be
another inhibiting others communication or someone (you or
somebody else) inhibiting their own communication (or affinity or
reality or whatever the button was).
Then spot exactly what communication (for example) was inhibited
and state it clearly.
Spot what you did in the incident.
Spot what you decided in the incident.
Spot what you postulated in the incident.
Note that professionals don’t use this extra set of questions specifically,
but they do get the PC to ITSA about the incident. In self auditing, you
generally need more precise questions, and the above are aimed at
getting more ITSA.
If something still seems unsolvable or hopeless about the incident,
then look for an earlier similar upset and repeat the above.
And watch out for overrun. If it gets better and then suddenly seems
more solid, you’ve passed the release point and should rehabilitate it
instead of continuing.
PROBLEMS
If you have a simple problem, its sometimes enough to simply spot
things about it (ITSA). Professional auditors generally use a technique
that only consists of getting ITSA and then finding an earlier similar
problem etc. This is workable in a professional session (where the
auditor is trained to keep the PC ITSAing) but may be inadequate for
self-auditing.
For better handling, it helps to know that a problem will generally have
two sides in conflict and to know, at least theoretically, that you’re doing
216
something to attract or encourage the opposition. One approach would
be to try to identify the two sides in conflict and then alternately spot
something about each side.
Another technique, which is good on a self audit basis, it to run the
problems and incomplete communications process as I discussed in
section 3.4 above. Although this is also used as a general process
when running the problems grade, it can be run on a specific problem
and used to be used that way in repair sessions (see the old circa 1966
instructions for running the Green Form which is a general purpose
case repair action). Although the org stopped using it this way a long
time ago, it did work and has the advantage of being usable without
much training. Note that using it on a specific problem usually
produces a release on that specific problem and it later can be used
again on another problem. But if you do get a major release on the
entire subject of problems, then pat yourself on the back and put this
technique aside. When problems eventually key in again (which they
will if the release came from a single process), then shift to another
problems technique (such as mocking up problems of comparable
magnitude).
OVERTS AND WITHHOLDS
If you’re really worried about getting caught for something you’ve
done, you probably have what Scientology calls a “Missed Withhold”.
The key thing that really gets your attention stuck is that somebody did
something that made you wonder if they knew, but you’re not sure.
This uncertainty really hangs you. The handling is to spot who nearly
found out and exactly what they did that made you think that they
might know.
Of course you shouldn’t be doing bad stuff and living a life of secrecy,
but that can usually be handled on a gradual and general basis. People
usually commit overts to solve problems or because they are out of
communication or have misunderstood something (which is almost the
same thing) or for vengeance (handle the ARCX) and there is a whole
grade full of processes to clean up the area.
Its the missed withhold (rather than the fact of having committed an
overt or having a withhold) that gets the person so stuck that you don’t
have the opportunity of running any processes to bring about a
general improvement.
217
If you do have your attention stuck, full handling would be to write
down exactly what you did (including all the gruesome, embarrassing,
or shameful details), get exactly when you did it, double check that
you’ve gotten all of it, then spot who nearly found out and what they
did to indicate that, and spot if anyone else missed it etc. If you don’t
get full relief, then look for an earlier similar and handle as above.
I’m not asking you to send in these pieces of paper to anyone or even
to tell anybody. You can burn it afterwards if you want. The idea is to
get your confront up on your own actions and raise your responsibility
level. At least don’t lie to yourself.
If an overt or withhold does seem to be sticking your attention and you
really can’t find anyone missing it, then its probably just a matter of
confront (you might even repetitively spot what part of that overt you
would be willing to be responsible for) and the weight of earlier similar
actions (find and handle them).
OTHER RUDIMENTS
There are other rudiments, such as invalidation, that can occasionally
get in the way. They are nowhere near as common as the 3 given
above, but they do happen. Furthermore, anything that can interfere
with auditing to that degree is obviously a potential grade of release
that should be run eventually. But more research is needed here. It
took years to collect all the underlying key points on each of the above
and a similar effort has not been made in other areas.
For now, the general technique (on something such as invalidation) is
to get as much ITSA as possible and then go earlier similar.
218
ASSISTS
It is very important to know some techniques that will dig you out if
you get in trouble. There are volumes of material on this in
Scientology. Here I am only scratching the surface.
In general, when you use an assist to handle pain, there will be a
moment when the pain becomes very sharp just before it vanishes.
This happens because you are removing the mental barrier which you
are using to keep the pain suppressed and under control. You need to
remove that barrier and view the pain fully to get rid of it.
If there is a physical injury (bleeding etc.) always do first aid first. And if
its really bad, get to a hospital. You CAN do fantastic things and heal at
incredible rates, but mental techniques are usually too slow for real
emergencies. But if you do this stuff in the emergency room while the
doctors are working on you, you might get out of intensive care in
hours instead of weeks and avoid long term damage.
Also note that anything you do to suppress pain will interfere with
handling it mentally. There are things you can do that actually reduce
pain (by killing germs or reducing swelling) and these should be used.
But don’t suppress it with things that only act as pain killers except for
emergencies, and then only use them momentarily (like an anesthetic
to get through an operation) rather than taking something steadily
which will dull your mind and block your abilities.
CONTACT ASSIST (for pain after an injury)
This is the fastest and easiest one to do if you just banged into
something. There is already a good write-up on this by Ron, but it is so
useful that I will give you a brief summary here.
Ideally, you do this where the injury occurred using the objects
involved in the injury. Cool off any hot surfaces and blunt or otherwise
cover any sharp ones (such as a knife you might have cut yourself
with). Then slowly repeat the action which caused the injury. Do this a
number of times until the pain turns on strongly for a moment and then
starts to fade.
If necessary, you can try to approximate the objects involved in the
accident. You can even try to duplicate the circumstances in a different
location if you have to, but the original location is better.
219
ADVANCED TOUCH ASSIST (for pain)
This is one of the key assists used in Scientology and there is a great
deal of material on how to do it.
The method currently used in Scientology is to have the injured person
“feel my finger”, and this is the command to use on an unaware and
untrained person because its hard to teach someone an advanced
technique while they’re in pain and distracted.
But the older more effective command was to have the person close
his eyes and “look at my finger”. The org still uses this on OTs, but in
the old days it worked on new people as long as the auditor was good
enough to gently coax them into doing it and as long as they were not
so raw that the idea was too hard for them to grasp. This version
works at least twice as fast as the other one.
As you touch the person, you alternate right and left sides and you try
to follow the nerve channels and work near and far from the injury.
And you pay special attention to working over each finger and toe and
also the spine. The org has plenty more on this, but these are the
basics.
You can do this on yourself, touching alternate sides and, with your
eyes closed, looking at the spots which you touch. If the injury is to the
hand or you’re distracted by the feelings coming from the finger you
are doing the touching with or you need to reach hard to get at areas,
then you can use the back of a pen or pencil to touch yourself with.
Now for the advanced version. This is not currently used in
Scientology. I developed it by taking some early research of Ron’s (see
the November lectures of 1952) on the subject of how the thetan
handled the body and combining it with the touch assist. What he
did was to have a person move their arm or walk across the room and
try to follow the energy flow through the nerve channels of the body
as they did it.
The advanced technique is to mentally follow the nerve channel from
the brain down to the spot that your touching on your body. Flow
some energy along it if possible and push through any ridges or
standing waves. If you’re in good shape, you should also be aware of
reaching into the brain to pickup the nerve channel in the first place.
Alternate sides and follow the usual pattern for a touch assist. Except, if
the trouble is with the head, stomach, or spine, then also alternate
head and stomach (because they are at opposite ends of a heavy
nerve channel) as suggested by Ron for a different process in 1957.
220
This can work as much as ten times faster than the standard touch
assist and often works on those occasional somatics (the Scientology
word for pain, which derives from psychosomatic) which don’t run
very well on the ordinary version.
Note that even an extreme physical injury (such as an exposed nerve
in a decaying tooth) is far less painful than it seems because 90 percent
or more of what you are feeling is the mental accumulation of past
pains rather than the actual moment to moment hurt. You will find that
there is a faint physical component which does not blow without actual
healing (you wouldn’t want to be numb after all), but it is a shadow of
the agony that we usually experience.
REDIRECTING THE SOMATIC MACHINERY
The OT handling for any pain, sensation, emotion, or even drug effects
is to drill placing the feeling or whatever into the walls, floor, ceiling, or
large nearby objects. You can also vary this a bit by occasionally
putting the feeling in clouds over distant cities etc.
A shallow version of this is still used occasionally in Scientology. A
more comprehensive version was used in 1953 (see the 1st ACC
tapes etc.). But even that falls short of what can be done with this
technique.
You have machinery and split off pieces of yourself stashed away in
various hidden areas, mostly outside of or sideways (in a fourth
dimensional direction) of the physical universe. This will be discussed
further in another write-up, but the basic idea is that you can only feel
what you yourself mockup.
Much of your machinery is intimately connected to the body, and
when you stub your toe, the physical action is detected by the
machinery which then mocks up the pain for you to experience.
You can also get mentally restimulated and trigger this machinery and
experience pain or whatever without any physical impact or damage.
This is “psychosomatic”, but it is the same pain and the same
mechanism which is creating the sensation. The only difference is the
trigger. Note that psychosomatic is quite different from hypochondria
where the person is worrying about something that isn’t there.
This assist can work on both psychosomatic pains and on actual pains
coming from a physical source because it addresses the mechanism
by which you create the pains so that you can feel them.
221
If you have a pain, and drill intensively on putting that pain into the
walls and feeling it in that location, you will find that you will gradually
start feeling it over there instead of in the body and you will dislodge
the machinery and redirect it into the locations that you are designating.
This restores your control over the machinery. It also gives you the
ability to create the pain at will, and if you can create it causatively, then
you can also dispense with it if you are not in the mood to feel it right
now. Note that this does not leave you numb. It leaves you aware and
in control and restores choice about what you’re feeling.
If, on the other hand, you try to suppress the pain, especially with
drugs, you are reducing your own ability to create and feel it, and
therefore, you keep it there more solidly. This may seem surprising
and hard to believe because right now you probably don’t want the
sensation, but deep down in your subconscious (so to speak) you
know better and you wouldn’t let yourself loose any sensation no
matter how terrible unless you know you can get it back at will.
Unfortunately, this drill is not easy, but it can be done. When you first
try it, you might only be able to get a vague imagined idea that maybe
there could be a faint bit of the pain in the wall, but the ability grows as
you practice it.
Don’t grind too hard at a particular spot on the wall. Move from spot to
spot fairly briskly, alternating or simply working around the room. Its
best to work this in all six directions around you rather than just using
the wall in front of you. So use the floor and ceiling and the wall behind
your back etc. And then pick some large objects for variety.
If necessary, after this is going well (you’re getting a significant amount
but not all of the pain or whatever into the walls), you can work near
and far from the body, coming closer and then pulling away and then
finally putting the pain in the body, but not in the place where the
actual pain is. Then you can alternate putting the pain in the body and
in the wall. Finally, you can put the pain where its supposed to be and
where it isn’t supposed to be alternately and have the total sensation
move back and forth and this should give you full control over it.
You can do the same thing with emotions such as anger. This gives
you control over the emotions.
The same goes for sensations such as sexual sensations. This leads to
being able to mockup sensations without needing a body.
This is also the missing step which is needed to really free somebody
from drugs. Any mental or physical handling, such as the various drug
222
rundowns or the purif that are currently used in Scientology to help
someone get off drugs are only aimed at handling the reasons and the
effects. They do not restore the persons ability to create whatever
kinky sensation it was that kept them addicted. You handle this by
having the person mock up that sensation in the walls and eventually
in the body until they can do it at will without taking the drug. Then
they will never need the drug again (assuming of course that you also
have handled the reasons why they started taking the drug etc.).
Note that all drug effects come from the person’s own machinery.
Putting chemicals into the body can get his machinery to do all sorts of
strange things, but it is still him who is doing it to himself.
The biggest limitation is that this assist (and also the contact and touch
assists) are purely objective techniques, and they do not address the
subjective reasons, decisions, etc. which are also present when
somebody gets in trouble. A momentary pain can generally be
handled this way, but a chronic one will require alternating these
assists with more subjective techniques such as running incidents,
finding overts, etc. See the assist book which includes many subjective
techniques.
COPYING THE SOMATIC
This is a more difficult technique, but it is capable of addressing the
actual physical structure and is especially good for promoting healing.
It is not really an assist for pain because it will turn on buried pains
while it is running them out and only brings relief at the end.
This has its origins in the 3rd ACC, and was the key assist used in that
course, but I have expanded and improved it considerably.
In running this, the somatics come off in layers. You will blow one
somatic only to find another in its place. You must validate yourself for
blowing the somatic and then handle the next one in line which is
actually an earlier somatic. If, for example, you run this on a decayed
tooth, you will find yourself handling each different pain that you got in
the area and they will come up in reverse order until you get the first
pain you had in that spot in your current body. When that one goes,
you will feel better and the body will be much more capable of healing
itself. You should take a break at this point, and be careful not to run
another command. You can drop it at this point, or check it over later
when you’re ready to dive in again. If you do push on, you will find
yourself running through an earlier series of somatics that you had in
that area on an earlier body.
223
If you do this on an injured area, or area that has been injured, you will
turn on any suppressed pain and need to run through the series of
somatics to turn it off again.
The process is done as follows: Begin by mocking up a copy of the
somatic and also the injured area slightly to one side of the area. Mock
up another one on the opposite side. Then push the two copies into
the injured area simultaneously (like squeezing an accordion).
As you make copies, you need to alter them slightly to exert your
control over them and to ensure that you don’t just put the mockups on
automatic (which wouldn’t do you much good). So, each time you make
copies, you do something to them. The best things to do are a) make it
more solid, b) make it uglier and more decrepit (and maybe alternate
with making it nicer), c) change its color. This is not very formal and
you don’t have to follow a rote procedure on altering the copies, but be
sure to do something.
As you make each set of copies, vary the axis on which you’re doing it.
At a minimum, you can alternate right/left, above/below, and in
front/back. If you can get to it, you can even run 4th dimensional
directions.
When you first start, just make one pair of copies and push them in.
Then start increasing the number of copies you’re mocking up. You
stretch them out in a series, one after the other. Try to get it up to at
least 5 copies fairly quickly. In other words, you get 5 copies of it on
the right side and another 5 on the left side and then push them all into
the area somewhat like squeezing an accordion. If you’re up to it, get
more than 5. The process goes fairly fast if you can run copies straight
out to infinity. Always push copies in from both sides simultaneously.
The somatic should change fairly quickly. Generally there will be a
microsecond where its gone. Realize that it has blown and you’ve got
an earlier somatic. At this moment, shift to the opposite side of the
body. If there is a somatic in the corresponding spot, then copy that,
otherwise, just mockup copies of the area. If you feel good on that side
after a few commands, then go back to the other side and copy what is
there, if however a somatic appears (where there was none), then
change the copies to duplicate it and run it out.
In other words, you keep changing sides and copying what is now
there. You will find a continually progressing change in the somatic.
Try to copy the physical structure as well. You will find that at first you
get very oversimplified mockups which will gradually become more
224
complex as you begin duplicating the real structure in the area. This
drill will raise your perception of the area fairly quickly.
Sometimes you will find a vacuum in the area. Try copying this just like
anything else, but if it seems to be hanging without change, then get
into the center of it and outflow copies. If you do that, the vacuum will
usually change into a sharp pain which you can then run with normal
copies (in this case don’t shift sides but handle it immediately).
Sometimes you will find black masses or energy fields in the area.
Copy these just like anything else.
I know this is difficult and complex and it can turn up all sorts of pains
you didn’t think you had. But at a minimum, it gets the body working to
heal itself, and at maximum, you might regain the ability to mockup
(and unmock) bodies at will.
HANDLING LOSS
At this time we do not have very many techniques for handling loss.
This is a grave deficiency and more research is needed.
Loss goes back much earlier in our existence than did pains and
engrams.
One thing you can do is to run out the incident of loss (by alternately
spotting something in the incident and then something in the room or
by any other incident running technique) with special attention to the
moment when you first discovered the loss.
You can look for earlier similar losses and run those, but this is not as
useful as it is with handling engrams. With engrams, the actual pain of
early incidents is long gone, so the earlier ones are easier to look at.
But with loss, the item lost long ago is still gone.
For loss, the incidents are easier to confront in the future. One
technique would be to spot how far in the future the loss would have
to be for you to find it acceptable. In other words, it might be horrible
to have your wife die now, but you could tolerate it if she were to die
in a hundred or a thousand years. So you find when it would be
tolerable and make up an incident of the loss occurring then and how it
might happen etc. and get your confront up on that. Then you should
be able to confront it happening a little closer to present time, so you
repeat the step, gradually bringing the loss in closer until you can
confront the real loss which did occur.
225
In handling a heavy loss, you want the tears to flow rather than
suppressing them under a heavy barrier, so don’t make people stop
crying and consider it a good indicator if they begin to cry after holding
it all bottled up.
Realize that if someone starts crying heavily about something that
seems insignificant, they are usually crying about something else (or
you have really mis-evaluated the importance). In that case, you might
like to find what the real underlying loss is, but it might not be
accessible. So learn to tolerate what might seem to be foolish causes
for upset and handle them with care because there might be some
earth shattering thing hidden just out of sight. Kids cry easily at trivial
things and its usually because they just died and have lost everything
and everyone they cared about in their last lifetime and have even lost
their memories and awareness of what happened.
The ultimate mastery of loss consists of being able to recreate
anything at will (so that there is no loss of things) and to recontact
anybody no matter where they now are (e.g. total communication so
that there is no loss of beings such as friends and loved ones) and
mastery of time (which is the same as the ability to recreate universes
at different times in their existence) so that you can replay anything and
have it come out differently (so that there is no loss of doing).
Note that many of our aberrations are the fixed solutions that we are
holding in place to handle loss. A powerful process I came up with one
day was “In this lifetime, what do you use to keep others from leaving”.
My answer was that I get sick. Other things we do as solutions to loss
are forgetting and becoming ARC broken.
On the subject of assists for loss, one (from the first ACC) is to simply
mockup the lost person (or whatever) and mentally reach and
withdraw from the mockup.
Another thing you can do is to do mockups of destroying the person
(or thing) various different ways at greater and then lesser distances.
I.E. blowing them up, tossing them in the sun, etc. until you can
confront what actually happened to them.
You can also run the PROTECT button because usually you will feel
that you failed to protect the person (or whatever). For this you
generalize the relationship (use “a wife” or “a lover” rather than the
specific girl who left or died, etc.) and then run “How could you protect
____” alternating with “How could a ____ protect you”. Note that we run
the positive aspect rather than the recent failure.
226
There are other kinds of loss. One can lose a group or a country or
even one’s faith or hopes and dreams. For a Scientologist, becoming
disillusioned can be a terrible loss even if one hangs on and remains in
the organization. The same will be found in other religions if
somebody loses faith after orienting their life around it. This needs to
be handled as an incident of loss and misemotion just as if one’s house
had burned down or a friend had died.
HANDLING IMPLANTS
In Scientology, we use the term “implant” to refer to heavy incidents
where various commands etc. were implanted into the person to
control them. This is heavy brainwashing and conditioning especially
as it was used in more advanced civilizations.
In recent universes, this has usually been done by force (such as the
electronics used by space traveling civilizations), but as we go earlier
(when the person was above being hurt physically), we find it done by
means of aesthetics, emotional waves, symbols, etc. and (earliest)
simply by means of trickery and false information.
The implants usually have commands stated as thought intentions (not
really English words) but sometimes simply consist of pictures which
show you things. Usually there is some sort of pattern, such as
opposing items or a declining scale.
Because the implants often used repeating patterns within patterns
(maybe a series of items that were repeated on each of a series of
goals), some of Ron’s early research used sheets of paper containing
an item pattern with holes cut in it so that it could be laid over pages
that only had the goals typed on them to make it easy to compose
complex patterns with a small number of pages. Since these sheets
with holes can be called platens (a metal plate with holes cut into it,
used, for example, on old typewriters to hold the roller in place while
giving the typehead access to the paper), any written out implant
pattern eventually came to be called a platen even though the holes
were dispensed with long ago.
If you have the platen for an implant, you would run it out using an
emeter by repetitively spotting an item as long as it continued to react
on the meter and then going on to the next item and doing the same. It
is rarely good enough simply to read the platen. For self auditing
without a meter, you need to shift your attention on and off the item
(not just glare at it) because you don’t have the natural shift that comes
about when you have to keep looking back and forth between the item
227
and the E-meter. One technique might be to alternate back and forth
between opposing pairs of items. You have to keep repeating one
item or pair until it discharges or otherwise releases before going on to
the next.
These platens are not so hot or dangerous as the CofS believes.
Nonetheless, you might occasionally get yourself restimulated or upset
or even sick while slopping around carelessly with implant platens. If
worse comes to worse, the restimulation will fade out after awhile
(hopefully in a few days). But its good to have some tricks for cooling
these things down immediately.
One trick that often works if you get in trouble in the middle of running
any incident or implant is to spot the beginning. On an implant, this
means spotting the first item again, or spotting events leading up to the
first item.
The general way to cool down an implant in restimulation is to spot
something earlier which undercuts the implant and which does not
itself have a lot of kick to it. This will generally pull you right out of the
implant and get you feeling better. Usually you only have to spot the
thing a few times, so it works very quickly.
Ron himself came up with the idea of spotting what he called incident 1
to cool down and undercut incident 2 on OTIII. Incident 1 is at the
“beginning of time” just before you come into this universe (which
means its actually very late in your existence) and it has a charioteer
and cherub etc. and should be fairly easy to spot in a vague sort of
way. That is good enough to cool down any of the implants used in
this universe. He didn’t even have the real anatomy and details of the
incident (see my write-up on actual GPMs) but just about any piece of
the incident is enough to snap you out of any later implants.
But if you start trying to research the magic universe which existed
before this one, Incident 1 will not serve because it is later. There is a
similar (but different) incident at the start of the magic universe which
can be used instead. I don’t have the details, but it seems to include a
sort of Arabian ship floating in the water and various terminals,
including a sorcerer (or wizard) holding a glowing crystal ball, which
come floating over the water towards you from the ship. If you can find
that image of the sorcerer, just spotting it will pull you out of implants
done subsequently.
When you get way back on the track, you need to spot the top of the
penalty universes, which is the item “To create is native state” (see my
write-up on the penalty universes of the home universe era).
228
Going even earlier, there is being part of a crowd rushing into
agreement, going through the inverted golden pyramid, and getting the
item “To agree is native state” at the beginning of the agreements
universe.
Or, (earliest), spot entering the jewel of knowledge. But that one’s hard
because there were so many false jewels which are later on the track
(including a mockup of the jewel that is used in the penalty universes
after the native state item).
For a beginner, the more recent ones are probably easier to spot. Use
whatever works.
Note that spotting these things does not run out the later implants.
They simply are powerful enough to snap your attention out of a later
implant, and can do it at a deep enough level (e.g. not just the surface
but way down into the “subconscious”) to push the implant out of
restimulation.
The problem with implant items is that they tend to be a bit “sticky”
and encourage you to compulsively create them if they get into
restimulation. And they often have enough somatics (pains and
sensations) associated with them that they can make you feel
unpleasant. But the things described above are actually stickier and will
push the implant item out of the way. And since these are entry point
(beginning of universe) experiences, they don’t have a lot of somatics
or misery sitting there. They do tend to make you create this universe
compulsively, but you’re doing that anyway, so its just increasing your
awareness of what you’re already doing. Eventually, as you get control
over one of these and cease to be compulsive about the creation, you
can shift to an earlier one and begin working with that.
I don’t think you can do the whole route by simply running entry points
(like the above) alone, but it sure makes it easy to fool around with
implants etc.
HANDLING ENTITIES
If an entity of some sort gets stirred up or shows up or grabs your
attention in some way, the first thing to realize is that they generally
have very little ability to affect you. It is you, not them, who mocks up
your bank, your somatics, your emotions, and your existence. All they
can generally do is stir things up and remind you of things that are
disturbing.
229
First and foremost, hold your position in space and face up to these
guys.
The most useful techniques are:
a) Point to the being you divided from (discussed at greater length in
the write-up on “Divide and Conquer”).
b) Have them spot the various entry points discussed in section 4.5
above.
c) Nots techniques. Especially, simply asking “Who Are You” and
coaxing them into answering “Me”.
In the rare case that a full being (rather than a fragment) who is
between lives shows up, technique b is usually best and they may
require a bit more information. If necessary, you can teach them how
to use one of these techniques themselves, having them blow off one
of their BTs or teaching them how to run out incidents by alternate
spotting etc. This is especially useful if you run into somebody who is
being some sort of angel or demon and working on some kind of
mission, because it helps them out and gets them on your side and
they may start helping others with this stuff. Remember that even the
ones who are being demons are only doing so because the game has
gone rather badly in this universe. If you show them a real way out,
they are often more willing than others to begin helping people
because they have no mistaken illusions about how the current
oppressive mess is really good for people.
Only once did I run into a demon who was so bound and determined
to bother me that he wouldn’t get into communication or run a
command. So I mocked myself up as real big and dangerous and
scared the hell out of him. He left immediately, and a palpable feeling
of terror which had been washing over me snapped off as if I had
turned a light switch. They work so hard at scaring people that they
themselves can be scared very easily. They can dish it out but they
can’t take it.
CHRONIC CONDITIONS
Although an assist can help with the pain and upset of a chronic
condition, don’t expect them to cure one. You’re using a tea spoon
when you really need a steam shovel. You can (and probably should)
run a full battery of assists on the condition, but these processes don’t
pay enough attention to the underlying whys.
230
Your best shot on a chronic condition is to handle the pains,
sensations, emotions, and attitudes connected with it. Early on you
would use Dianetics for this. On a more advanced case, you can
simply run each one using the following commands (alternately):
a) Recall being made to feel ____
b) Recall making another feel ____
For good results on this, the person should be up to spotting whole
track incidents on recall processes (but each process doesn’t have to
go whole track, he just has to be able to reach whole track whenever it
is needed).
On a person who is in bad shape, you take the first mild win on each
process and then go on to another one (taking breaks as needed
between processes).
You may need to run dozens or hundreds of faint variations of the
somatics in a particular area. On chronic headaches for example, you
might take a “pain in the head” the first time, but you will need to carry
on with more and more specific pains in precise spots in the head with
specific pains (sharp, dull, etc.) as well as other sensations in the area
(don’t forget feelings of energy etc.). You begin with what the PC puts
on the list, but after those are handled you get him to add more to the
list, and you can ask him for precise spots or specific feelings or
energies etc. if it seems needed. You may have to run a very great
deal on a chronic condition. If the area is numb, the run is even longer
because you will have to take off layers of not-isness before he can
even find the somatics.
You also should do assists. They raise his confront and build
horsepower in the area. One way would be to start each session with
an assist for pain (if needed), run some recalls (or engrams), and end off
with one of the more OT assists.
This will do more for someone on the upper OT levels than a Nots
handling would, but you may also need to do some Nots handling in
the area occasionally. If the PC is up to it, you could also do some
handling of split pieces of himself (“point to”) that are connected with
the condition or mocking it up. But simple recall is the most beneficial
because you are going after the reasons why he is mocking it up (there
may be many).
The body’s ability to heal is amazing when the mind is aiding it instead
of inhibiting it. But meat bodies do not generally grow back missing
231
arms or major organs (although there are rare cases of people growing
back things like teeth or girl’s regrowing their virginity etc.). If you’re up
against a major physical disability, then your target is the relief of pain
and suffering rather than a full cure.
Sometimes you can work a miracle. The thetan is capable of mocking
up an entire body out of thin air. So never make the postulate that
something can’t be handled, you’ll only be limiting your own abilities.
But don’t stake your reputation on it or lead some poor guy on with
false promises. Miracles are very rare.
Psychosomatic and mentally perpetuated conditions, on the other
hand, should be approached with confidence. And you have at least a
chance against degenerative conditions because they are usually
degenerating because the mind has withdrawn from the area and the
situation can be reversed if the mind gets back in control.
But any chronic condition is asking for a long run, and you can fail if the
person isn’t running deeply enough. If the condition can be ignored
(the PC has learned to live with it), you will be much better off running
grades and OT levels and raising horsepower rather than concentrating
on the body.
MORE ASSISTS
There are numerous assists given in the 1950s material. Many of them
are just general ideas or ways of approaching something without
formal procedures. Some of them have been formalized in the assist
book. Others are still a matter of judgment based on having a good
understanding of the mechanics of the mind. In that case you are
pretty much shooting from the hip based on knowingness and
understanding.
Two useful processes that I came up with are as follows:
a) Give Me Some Reasons For Wishing This On Someone Else
This is a subtle way to reach overts and overt intentions that are
not quite in view or easily recalled. It has the added benefit of
pulling off justifiers and postulates.
b) Run mockups of pushing the pain or condition into crowds of
people to force them out of their bodies.
232
This might or might not run and if it does run it might not be basic. But
it is one of the early reasons and can potentially open up early track
and undercut a lot of things. If you have an advanced case who has an
unshakable somatic or condition, he may very likely be doing this to
himself from a hidden remote viewpoint to force himself to get out of
the body and out of the human condition.
On the early track, the being’s solution to sinking downscale is to make
postulates and set up mechanisms which will force him back upscale
even if they are unpleasant. This is generally more basic than the
over/motivator sequence.
You could also ask him “what might you be trying to teach yourself
with this pain or condition?”.
SOME ASSIST PROCESSES
This is my list of assist processes that I like to use.
These are not in any particular order but they have been grouped into
objective, subjective, and advanced categories. This is not a complete
list. These are all by Ron except as discussed above. Many but not all
of these are in the assist book (and it has others as well). Some can
only be found in the old tapes.
OBJECTIVE ASSISTS
1. Touch assist
2. Contact assist
3. Show me on my body
4. Keep it from going away / hold it still (alternate left/right or
head/stomach) (16th & 17th ACC)
5. Throw actual kicks and/or punches at the injured area on an
imaginary opponent (2nd ACC) (also see fight the wall in PAB 106)
6. Duplicative body parts: feel my <body part>, feel your <body
part>
7. Clay table healing: do the area & condition in clay carefully
labeling everything with lots of detail & itsa
233
8. Locational & objective havingness processes (look at that, find
something you like, connectedness, etc.)
9. Look around here & tell me something your <body part> could
have (PAB 88)
10. Find something you can have/condition can’t have
11. Outdoors around people - condition in other people (route 2)
SUBJECTIVE ASSISTS
1. Dating (R3T in SHSBC tapes) or date/locate
2. Hello & OK
3. Alternately spot location of incident & where you are now
4. What part of <body part> could you be responsible for
5. What part of that condition could you admit causing (SMC etc.)
6. Who had <condition> (R&D 2 etc.)
7. What problem would that condition be a solution to
8. Give me another purpose for <condition>
9. Recall a time when you saw that in somebody else (ability maj 4)
(use together with 10 below)
10. Recall a time when you decided this was a good thing
11. Can you recall a time when somebody else had that condition
12. Can you recall a time when you decided to have that condition
13. From where could you communicate to a <body part> (1st
MACC)
14. Failed help: how could you fail to help a ..., how could a ... fail to
help you
15. Positive help: how could you help a ..., how could a ... help you
234
16. Invent a problem your <body part> could be to you (PAB 69)
17. Invent a problem of comparable magnitude to <condition>
18. Tell me a lie about your <body part>
19. Overts
20. Mockup a way to waste pain
21. Be the (area) / be yourself
22. Spot something that could be a lie about (condition)
23. Incident running (recalls or Dianetics or alternate spotting)
24. Spot the efforts at the time of the incident.
25. Give me some reasons for wishing this on someone else
ADVANCED ASSISTS
1. Admiration Processing (1 ACC)
2. Adjust anchor points (8th & 9th ACC, CofHA)
3. Handle flows, ridges, tractor beams etc. in the area & also at the
time of the incident (T88 etc.)
4. Handle hollow spots in the area (suppressed explosions - have
pc get in the center & outflow) (HCL)
5. Spot efforts at the time of the incident (R&D 8, 9, HCL, etc.)
6. Mockup copies of the area & throw them away or push into body
(PDC, LPC, etc.)
7. Rem of Hav style mockups - make more & more discreditable
versions of area until it snaps into body, then improve it on a
gradient (9th ACC ?, etc.)
8. Double terminaling
9. Turn black masses in the area white (T88 & PDC)
235
10. Mockup horrible things being done to the area (1st ACC - handling
motivator hungry condition)
11. Mockups of beams hitting/pushing/pulling the area
12. Mockups of putting the condition into crowds of people
13. Perimeter processing (1ACC) (mockup explosions, vacuums, &
nothing hitting a protective shell - a few minutes on each
alternating).
14. Exterior version of hold it still/keep from going away (1ACC)
15. Blow up mockups of the injured area & of the body (gradiently)
16. Alternately put pain & waves of relief into the walls
17. Ownership processing: get the idea that ... are/is mocking up that
condition. Run alternately with YOU and a general terminal for
each of the 8 dynamics (your body, another, others, groups,
society, lifeforms, Mest universe, spirits/entities, God) and also
with any appropriate terminal such as doctors or even auditors.
18. Push copies of the somatic into the area
19. Reach and withdraw from mockups of the area
20. Mockups of putting the condition into crowds of people to force
them out of their bodies
ASSISTS FOR SECONDARIES
1. 2 Way Help on (terminal lost)
2. 2 way Protect (run like help) on (terminal lost)
3. Reach & withdraw from mockups of the terminal
4. Blow up mockups of the terminal
5. O/W on the terminal
6. Put grief etc. into walls
7. Incident running (by recalls or Dianetics or alternate spotting)
236
8. Mocked up incidents of the loss happening far enough into the
future for it to be tolerable.
237
GRADES OF RELEASE
THE GRADES AS BASIC
As I have said before, the lower level grades of release are also the
ultimate OT levels. The theory behind the grades processes does not
require the presence of earlier engrams or secondaries (incidents of
loss) and can stand alone without the existence of prior aberrations.
Because these are basic, they can be addressed on anybody at any
level and, as long as the person’s attention is not fixated on something
else, they can be run to a point of release. But all we get is a
temporary release (which may last for years or lifetimes) rather than
erasure because of the problem of accessibility.
It took me a long time to come around to realizing this. I kept looking
for a bigger basic that would undercut these grades. But everything I
found (including the penalty universes and the reality wars) was
preceded by earlier problems and upsets and failures to communicate.
And before the penalty universes, the implants are lighter rather than
heavier, usually just consisting of aesthetically presented false data
which encouraged aberration.
The only thing I ran that did not have some underlying feeling of
already being slightly out of communication was the original jewel of
knowledge. That experience was simply interesting and aesthetic and
talks you into a few subtly abberating ideas such as the idea that
communication could be harmful or it might not be good to know too
much because it might spoil the game. And we were shown the lie
that if you could really forget something, it would stop bothering you.
So we were talked into starting in on this path, but we were not forced
into it. There is no force or pressure in the original jewel of knowledge.
Our earliest mistakes were cutting communications, blocking
knowingness, choosing not to connect with (or reach) certain things,
and choosing to forget things. And these were all done willfully with no
prior reason except for the convincing arguments of the jewel of
knowledge. And we did not do these things with everything. You did
not start out by cutting communication with everyone. You initially just
cut communication with one person and kept talking to everybody
else. You only forgot a few things and decided to not-know a few
things rather than obscuring everything at once. And that is how we all
differ because we applied these things very selectively initially and we
each made different choices.
238
And then we built the next layer of aberration on top of these, and that
layer was the more complex aberrations of problems, overts, upsets,
making yourself right, etc.
THE SEQUENCE OF GRADES CORRECTED
Ron originally put out the grades 0 to 4 in 1965. Initially these were set
up with the idea that each entire grade ran to a single floating needle
and could be done with a single process. For the purposes of training,
a number of other processes were also lumped together with each
level because they required comparable auditor skill. As a result, help
processing was included with level 1 problems and recall processes
were include with level 0 communications. It was soon realized that
recall processes needed to be run as a separate grade and this was
included with grade zero as a sort of freebie.
Then the theory of expanded grades came out and as many
processes as possible were added to each grade. This made deeper
and more stable releases.
But we still have multiple grades (such as running help processing as
part of the problems grade) lumped together. This is not a fatal flaw,
but it can give trouble.
Each of the grades should be run to the point where a big release
happens and then it should be dropped for the moment rather than
trying to push too deep on one line while other areas are being
bypassed. If, for example, you combine help processing with
problems processing, you will either:
a) Fail to get the big release on help and shift over to running
problems when you should be finishing the help release first.
b) Get the big release on help and then overrun it trying to finish all
the help processes so that you can run some problems
c) Get the big release on help and then mistakenly think it is a
problems release and miss the entire problems grade
d) Get lucky and make both release points even though you don’t
know what you’re doing We also have missing lower level
grades. The very fact that we sometimes need to run an
invalidation or evaluation rudiment indicates that there are grade
releases available on these. I can’t say for sure what all the
239
processes would be at this time, but it is an area to be addressed
and a subject for further research.
We also have a case where some much more advanced processes
have been included with grade 0. These are the “From where could
you communicate to a ____” style processes. These were originally
developed in the late 1950s as high level OT processes. These are
actually a gradient towards power processing and probably belong
somewhere between grade 4 and grade 5 on the current grade chart.
Here I will lay out a tentative series of grades. To avoid confusion, I will
label them Step 1, Step 2, etc. because the words grade, level, stage,
and section have all been used already in Scientology.
A. FIRST GROUP: POSTULATED ABERRATIONS
These are the earliest and have no underlying prior reason (except for
the predispositions in the jewel of knowledge) and at basic are handled
by postulate and by pushing through instead of finding reasons why.
Step 1: Confront and Knowingness Release
The person doesn’t look and doesn’t know because he
decided not to. The org often gets this one accidentally
because the TRs (given in the communications or HAS course)
can produce it. But processing can also be done here. It would
use “willingness” type processes like grade 0 does. For
example, “What would you be willing to find out about
yourself” would be a key process. The “Look around and spot
something you like” style processes also belong here.
Step 2: Doingness Release
This is reach and withdraw type processing. At basic, the PC
chooses not to reach by his own decision, the reasons why
can be bypassed because they don’t really stop him, he stops
himself. At beginning levels, these are the objective
processes, and the org currently delivers them on the Survival
Rundown. But in more advance running, this also includes
many of the OT drills.
Step 3: Recall Release
This is currently trained on level 0, but delivered (correctly) as
a separate grade in auditing. The book self analysis also fits
240
here and shows us how to get the release on a self audited
basis.
Step 4: Communications Release
Here is the real grade 0. The “from where ..” processes
shouldn’t be run as part of it. They are nice processes but
belong higher on the chart. The org gets away with running
them here because they put such an emphasis on endless
arduous setup auditing before starting grade zero. In truth, the
real grade zero processes can usually be run immediately and
you can probably even get a self audited release with some
kind of book similar to self analysis. But if you did it in a quick
and easy way like this, you would get in trouble on the current
processing lineup because of having more advanced routines
mixed in with the easy grade zero ones.
B. SECOND GROUP: BASIC ABERRATIONS OF THOUGHT
Here we have the things which build up on top of the original
aberrations. These can be pushed through sometimes, but you often
need to pay attention to underlying reasons (such as problems coming
from incomplete communications) or mechanisms (such as solutions
becoming new problems).
This is generally where the person is most aware of being abberated.
If he notices an aberration of communication (and he often doesn’t), he
has some hope of pushing through it, but if he notices a problem, it
often doesn’t work to try and push through it (because he must dig out
something earlier) so he tends to sit there with a pile of problems that
he is aware of but can’t handle.
In this list, I have put problems processing before help (currently the
org runs help first as part of grade I) on the basis that problems are
earlier (they can rest on incomplete communications, whereas help
doesn’t even show up on the track until things are going badly) and
because help involves a bit more responsibility.
Step 5: Problems Release
The org trains this on level 1 along with objectives (which are
covered in step 2 above) and help processing (which should
be a separate grade). They have a good lineup of processes
in this area, but they put much to much in the way of the PC
before they get around to running it. These are actually easier
241
to run than the problems rudiment (which they start doing
right away). Although I have this down in step 5, this is
intended to be a fast lineup without endless preparation or
other higher level processes mixed in, so that you should be
able to get here pretty fast.
Step 6: Help Release
Now is the time to do the help processes that they currently
teach on level 1 and mix in with problems processing.
Step 7: Overts (Guilt Release)
This is grade 2 as taught and delivered by the org. If we are
doing multiple passes through the grades, this is the longest
one and a subset of the processes could be used in the first
pass. It also includes some “confront” processes which might
belong in Step 1 above (but maybe only on a second pass
through the grades?).
Step 8: Change Release
The “Change” processes (which handles resistance to change,
etc.) are currently taught and audited as part of level 3. They
are really a separate grade and should be run that way. There
is an early aberration on how it is a betrayal of others if you
change your mind etc. and it would be possible to add more
processes here which address that.
Step 9: Evaluations Release
This is a new level. It is easier to confront than real upsets, but
is one of the underlying causes. Early on, people jammed
ideas down each others throats (often to be “helpful”) and
eventually they started getting upset at the enforced
communication and reality. This is new ground that needs to
be researched, but it would include things like “what
evaluation have you enforced on another” and running off the
reasons for evaluating (“give me some reasons for evaluating
for somebody”). This level should also include some handling
on false datums (“what false datums have you pushed on
another” etc.).
Step 10: Release from Upsets (ARCXs)
242
This is grade 3 as delivered by the org. But when we remove
the change processes, there is not very much left. They
never did enough on the subject of taking apart the
aberrations of enforced and inhibited affinity, reality, and
communication. The write-up I did on actual GPMs includes
some new processes on this which I aimed at the GPM
terminal and which could be generalized into non-specific
grade 3 processes that should be run here.
Step 11: Invalidation Release
I put this after ARCXs because it is a very high gradient.
Whereas evaluation is only “pushy”, invalidation is a direct
attack and often exceeds the force of most ARCXs. People’s
service facs (see below) and other heavier factors also often
come into play in this area and this a gradient towards running
those levels.
Step 12: Responsibility Release
The org mixes this in with grade 4, but it should be it’s own
separate level.
C. THIRD GROUP: ABERRATIONS OF EMOTION AND LOSS
Unlike the earlier groups, these areas cannot become abberated until
the person has sunk low enough to lose things and feel emotion. ARC
Breaks can happen on purely enforcing or inhibiting ARC, but hate,
vengeance, and jealousy only occur after the fact of loss. The same is
true of all the problems in survival and self righteousness and making
yourself right (grade 4). The earliest problems in survival are
connected with loss (not pain or engrams) because you had the
problem of making your mockups survive long before you yourself
could be smashed or wiped out.
Also, it is only at this stage in our evolution that we began to have real
problems with havingness. That also rests on earlier losses.
Games processing also comes into play here. It is possible to have
games without loss, but loss is often a factor. Certainly playing chess
or poker requires loosing things during the course of the game even if
there is no subsequent loss or penalty.
243
Unfortunately, there has been no where near enough research on
these areas and more needs to be found. I will do the best I can here,
but be prepared for future revisions.
Step 13: Games Processing
Since the earliest losses are only during the course of a game
and are accepted by choice (and are of short duration), this is
the easiest entry point. There are some good early processes
such as “please pass the object” in “Creation of Human Ability”,
but more are probably needed.
Step 14: Wasting
You have to be able to waste things to play a game
successfully. This is another area that touches on loss and also
on the subject of exchange (see below). The processing here
should include the money process (“mock up a way to waste
money”), and similar processes such as “mock up a way to
waste work” (which will undercut many of the societies
aberrations), and “mockup a way to waste energy” etc.
Step 15: Exchange
This is a key aberration which underlies our later societies.
Exchange is basically a trap and is one of the nasty
predispositions that gets us in trouble because it pushes our
buttons on fair play and uses them to make us trap ourselves.
It is one of the reasons you are in compulsive agreement with
the MEST universe law of conservation of energy, which is
really a way of blocking your own efforts. Getting rid of the
charge on exchange doesn’t mean that you start stealing from
people (that’s a dramatization of being trapped by exchange
and rebelling against it without confronting it), it simply means
that you don’t care and are not blocked by some crazy idea of
all the equations having to be in balance. Some research is
needed here. You might start by running off overts (cheating
others etc.) and then reasons and finally getting around to the
basics which is that its only a game and you shouldn’t have to
play unless you’re in the mood. This has to include the
willingness to give things away for free.
Step 16: Protect
This is a new level, but it is run basically the same as Help
(step 6 above) with “protect” substituted for “help” in the
244
commands. This is the earliest button on loss. The SOP8D
safe places type processes (see the 5th ACC and also the
bright think rundown which was used briefly and then
canceled) might also fit in here.
Step 17: Service Facsimiles (Making others wrong).
This is the grade 4 process. The org uses it sooner, but it is
really a handling for failures in survival and on that basis it
belongs late in the sequence. Also, in the standard grades
lineup, it requires listing and nulling techniques because it is
too heavily charged and done at this point it should probably
be addressable directly with simple processes or could even
be handled on a self audited basis.
Step 18: Loss
Here we need some specific processes to key out loss. One
would be the “in this lifetime, what do you use to keep others
from leaving” that I mentioned earlier. There should be a lot of
others, but research is needed here. See the stuff on loss in
the assist section above.
Step 19: The evil emotions (hatred, jealousy, and vengeance)
Here we are into some really hot areas. These things show up
in mysticism as major roadblocks that need to be conquered,
but they have no processes for them. Neither does the org
except for using the general incident running and cleaning up
ARCXs as an undercut (which does work to some degree).
Here you want to raise the person up to the point where he
doesn’t need to take vengeance and doesn’t get jealous if his
wife sleeps with someone else or he gets beat out of a
promotion and so that he no longer has a need to hate green
skinned people or whatever. Its not that you would encourage
your enemies or turn the other cheek, its simply that you
would play things as a game (if you felt like it) instead of being
swamped by a blind drive to smash others. These emotions
bring about a blindness which is terribly self destructive.
Maybe we would even need 3 levels here instead of one. I
can hardly guess at the processing needed, but it would
include a willingness for others to have and a freedom from
consequences. One key to this area is that its not the action
but the tremendous significance placed on it that invokes the
blind reaction. It’s not that the guy’s wife spent an hour
exercising with his best friend, no matter how intimate those
245
exercises were, it’s that he places an incredible significance on
the fact and imagines all sorts of think going on in the other
peoples heads and postulates all sorts of consequences that
shatter his life. The old processes on “This Means ...” (see the
anatomy of the spirit of man congress tapes etc.) might be
useful here. Mocking up unpleasant thoughts in other peoples
heads might also help. Also inventing consequences.
I never had a lot of charge in this area myself, but I see other people
going just crazy on it. If someone’s shooting at me, I damn well want
them to stop, but I could care less if they made amends for the
damage as long as they mend their ways and don’t do it again. I’m not
sure when or how I blew the charge on this, but I can find early
incidents where I’m swamped with jealousy and vengeful impulses, so
it must have been handled at sometime.
Step 20: Suppressives
People do suppress each other. This is the final stage of the
game when you’re the only one and its kill or be killed. An
individual suppressive situation needs to be handled when it
comes up (and its nowhere near as common as the org
thinks), but that’s not a general handling. Since we’ve already
handled most of the factors involved in suppression, this is a
good point to finish it off so that the person neither can be
suppressed (in other words start roller coastering) by anyone
else nor will he have the urge to do others in when he is
sinking (because that never really helps him). Again we could
use some research here. The suppressed person rundown
gives us a starting point. So does the rundown for handling “an
engram matching present time dangers”. We can also get
things from the general anatomy of suppressive behavior,
such as loosing sight of individual targets and blurring them
into generalities.
D. FOURTH GROUP: THE UPPER GRADES
Middle period Scientology only had 3 upper grades. These were
Power (grade 5), Power plus (grade 5A), and grade 6. These have
mostly disappeared because they are not supposed to be run on a
clear, and most people get run on Dianetics instead and reach Dianetic
clear when they do.
I think that this is a mistake. Power processing sometimes produced a
case state that was higher than the current OT7 and its a shame to
246
bypass it. It probably can be done on a clear, but you would probably
get in trouble trying to introduce it into the middle of the orgs current
OT processing because they’ve got the person all stirred up and in the
middle of stuff for the entire run from OT2 (or the old clearing course)
up to OT7 because they are restimulating things without complete
handling until he makes it through solo NOTS. With the correct data and
techniques (see earlier in this write-up), that probably ceases to be a
problem, but even then you would have to be careful not to jam these
levels into the middle of something that is only halfway handled and
drawing the guy’s attention.
In an ideal lineup, I think you would run these things before you went
into a major Dianetic processing level. That doesn’t mean that you can’t
do some Dianetic handling or other incident running (a bit of that is nice
as an introduction to the subject) but that the thorough go for broke
intensive Dianetic rundowns should be done after power processing
etc. The whole idea of power was to key out engrams wholesale and
that would set the guy up to run Dianetics as a fast and effective level.
He might even run Dianetics solo with that kind of preparation.
Step 21: Location
One of the basic aberrations is being located in a single
location. Here is where we should run the “From where could
you communicate to ...” style processes. Then do a similar
rundown on “from where could you (agree / disagree -
alternately) with ....”. Then run “from where could you
perceive a ...”. If possible, you should get to the point where
you don’t need to be here to perceive and operate here. That
would be going exterior to the physical universe.
Step 22: Causation
Now in the same style, run “from where could you mockup
...”. You should work up to things like somatics, sensations,
emotions, bodies, games, and machinery, and then finish off
with “from where could you mockup a bank”. This might
produce a clear.
Step 23: Sources
Here would be the place to run spotting sources (power
process 4 which is the first one normally run). But with the
above preparation, it would probably be runnable as a simple
spotting process instead of an exotic listing technique. They
used to run this on people who had received a total of ten or
247
twenty hours of auditing in their whole lives and of course it
ended up as a hot out-gradient process with all sorts of special
rules and worries connected with it.
But this needs to be an expanded level instead of a single process.
One interesting thing I noticed in various freezone write-ups on this
process is that the people who wrote them generally thought that the
process ended with the cognition that “I’m source” or something like
that. Well that’s nice and its probably what you get most of the time
(and you have to take what you can get without invalidating or
continuing), but I went clear and keyed out OT on this process and
something more happened. When I was run on it, I thought that the
command was a covert way of getting me to spot the time and place
where I had first mocked up a reactive mind and from where I was still
mocking the bank up even now. And that is what I spotted, and that’s
why I got the spectacular result instead of the mundane one.
So lets run more processes here, aimed at reaching that higher state.
This might include “spot a source that you/another/others are mocking
up”. “spot a time when you mocked up a bank”, etc.
Another good process to run here would be (run alternately):
a) What have you created
b) What has another created
c) What have others created
Step 24: Power
Here would be the rest of grade 5. Again, it probably needs to
be expanded and have more processes aimed at the result.
This would be an appropriate place to put some more
processes on the subject of not-isness.
A) Recall not-ising something
Recall another not-ising something Recall others not-ising
something B) Write down some things that mustn’t be
allowed to appear. If one doesn’t blow by inspection,
then mockup copies of it and throw them away / shove
them into the body.
C) Spot times when you decided it was safer not to look,
then mockup looking at what you avoided seeing.
248
D) Handle overts of getting others not to look Handle overts
of getting others to not-is things
E) Write down some things it would be better for people
not to know about. For each one, run alternately, what
should/shouldn’t be known about it.
Step 25: Power Plus
Here would be the grade 5A processes. Again, more are
needed.
Some possible ones are as follows:
25.1 Agreements (run alternately)
a) What agreements have you made
b) What agreements have you disagreed with.
(then run the same on flows 2 and 3)
25.2 Enforced Agreements
a) What agreements have you enforced on another
b) What agreements have you inhibited
(also run on flows 2 and 3)
25.3 Create
a) What effect would you be willing to create
b) What effect would you be willing for another to
create
(also run on flows 2 and 3)
25.4 Enforced Create
a) What do you have to mockup
b) Give me some reasons for mocking that up
(also run on flows 2 and 3)
25.5 Win/Lose
a) Give me a reason for winning
b) Give me a reason for losing
(also run on flows 2 and 3)
Step 26: Perception
249
This might be a good place to run some processes on
perception. Maybe “What would you be willing to let others
see” etc. Another action might be to do the rudiments on each
of the 5 senses.
Step 27: Protest
This is a hot button. It not only causes things to read that are
not there, it causes the PC to mockup things that aren’t really
wrong with him. What you resist, you become. If you insist
that somebody is stupid and they protest heavily, it can get
them resisting being stupid and trying to prove that they’re not
and that can lead to dramatizing stupidity.
Currently we only use this as one of the prepcheck buttons or
a repair question. We could use some general processing
here. Possibly something like “what have you protested”,
“what did you mockup to communicate that” run alternately.
Step 28: The Force on Words
Part of the reactive A=A is to equate words with the force or
mockups that the word represents. GPM end words and root
words are actually locks on real impacts associated with
words. Here we want to blow the mechanism by which the
person mocks up the force when the word is said.
This is slightly experimental.
Take a fiction book filled with violence etc., find a violent
section of it, and start reading it.
Repeat the following with each paragraph (if the paragraph is
really long, break it in half, if its excessively short, then
combine two paragraphs): As you read, mockup an impact for
each verb, based on the literal meaning of the verb (not the
story content that you are reading).
Read the paragraph again, this time, mockup a picture of
impact without force for each verb.
Read the paragraph again, this time only reading the words
and mocking up nothing.
Read the paragraph again, and mockup a mass for each noun.
250
Read the paragraph again, and mockup a picture, without
mass, for each noun.
Read the paragraph again, this time mocking up nothing.
Then go on to the next paragraph.
Step 29: Dramatization
It would be a shame to miss out on the “what am I
dramatizing” process from grade 6. But up this high, and run
on someone who is probably already clear, the answers
might not be in terms of simple implant GPM root and end
words. You would have to let the answer be whatever it was
going to be. The handling, per 3rd ACC style tech, would be
to causatively dramatize it (or mockup dramatizing it) and then
and then not dramatize it (or mockup not dramatizing it)
alternately it until it blows. Then get the next thing, etc.
Step 30: Force
It would be nice to get the person’s confront up on force
before doing extensive Dianetics processing. Perhaps, “what
force would you be willing to confront”, or even some of the
courage processing from the 3rd ACC (discussed in another
write-up).
Another good process might be “Spot some impacts you
could be curious about receiving”.
Step 31: Goals
Before directly addressing goals, it would be nice to key them
out. The second and third ACCs give us some techniques
here, such as “spot some goals you don’t have”.
Step 32: The Actual GPM
This would be a good point to find the actual GPM goal as
discussed in the write-up on actual GPMs. Unlike implanted
goals, this actual goal does not have to be handled or opposed
after it is found. It is comfortable and satisfying to know what it
is even if it hasn’t been fully discharged. On a first pass
through the grade chart, it might not be appropriate to do a full
handling or line plot, but the goal should at least be found.
251
Note that all of the above grades are keyouts. You could do them
lightly or deeply, and take multiple passes as needed. Only the final
one (handling the current actual GPM) might conceivably be taken to
erasure early on. I think that at the top, these will erase in reverse
order, working from step 32 down to step 1.
BLOWING THE BANK
If you start a thorough grades rundown, the odds are that somewhere
along the way, the entire bank will blow temporarily.
Its a mistake to think that its all gone. But the PC has so much new
open areas available to him that you can’t continue with grade
processing until he has expanded further and run into the next layer of
trouble. This is the time to do OT and erasure style techniques (see
below) until such a time as he runs into his own case again. When he
does, then carry on with the next grade in sequence, and if you finish
the entire series, then start over, running more processes and going
deeper.
Taking the analogy discussed earlier, of clear and black areas of the
mind with a gray band of accessibility, when the person “blows the
bank”, much of the gray and black clear up and a great deal more stuff
will be in the gray band of accessibility. He never looses this gain, he
just gets bigger, so that he fills the newly cleared area, and then sees
himself to be abberated again because he has run into what is left.
Oddly enough, as you keep blowing more and more layers of the
bank, the problems etc. tend to remain mundane but the whys get
more and more exotic. For example, at low levels, one might flinch at
car fumes because they restimulate an engram. Higher, one might
flinch because they are impacting the environment he is trying to
protect. Even higher, he might flinch because they offend his aesthetic
sensibility. Even higher, he might flinch because its someone else’s
mockup filling up his space.
The real truth of the matter is that he is still creating his first and most
basic problems (from the earliest track period) using the mundane stuff
that currently surrounds him. When you do a light handling and blow
some current thing, to some degree it keys out the entire thing all the
way down at rock bottom, but the bottom has not been viewed or
erased and eventually he’ll get it back into the mundane world (but it
will come in on some other channel because he has handled the
specific current thing that was run on the first keyout).
252
There are a number of big states of regained awareness that blow the
bank temporarily and make significant inroads into the black and gray
areas. These include but are not limited to:
a) Regaining control over mocking up the force in mental pictures
and over mocking up the pictures themselves. This is the usual
state of clear as attained on Dianetics.
b) Freedom from (no longer obeys or mocks up) implanted items
and commands. This is the state of clear as is usually attained on
the clearing course, and which is normally attained by Dianetic
clears when they do OT 2.
c) Freedom from all compulsive assignment of reactive or
associative significance to things. This is the state of clear
(sometimes called theta clear) that occurred occasionally on
power processing.
d) Freedom from compulsive creation of a time track. This is the
state of clear OT usually achieved on L10 and occasionally
achieved on deep running of grade 2.
e) Freedom from (no longer obeys or mocks up) thoughts or
mockups provided by entities. Does not confuse his own
thoughts with theirs. Can blow them by inspection. This is the
state of cause over life, usually attained on Solo Nots and
occasionally attained by a thorough run on OT3.
f) Freedom from location. Exterior to the MEST universe. Capable
of free thought outside of the game and can consider things
independently of his own survival. I got this on continuing past
the solo Nots ep.
g) Freedom from arbitraries. This happened on running the penalty
universes. The tone scale and all sorts of other stuff blew.
h) Freedom from the limitations to three dimensions. Able to
visualize four dimensional mockups easily and capable of
spotting four dimensional directions etc. This finally happened for
me when I spotted and ran the reality wars.
There are more, but these are the ones that blew the bank for me. If
you skip one (I got state c first, then a, then d, then b), the lesser state
is still exceptionally good when you make it and clears up some more
stuff (but its not as big as the higher one which you got earlier). In other
253
words, this is not a totally mechanical progression where each state
covers everything below it.
UPPER LEVELS
Its almost a joke to identify these as upper levels because the very top
would consist of grade processes taken to erasure instead of going for
a key out.
These are really aimed at the “force band” which lies between the
human condition and the basic area of the track.
Here we have a problem as to what sequence to run things in,
especially in the area of switching off between upper levels and grade
processing.
The modern Scientology bridge lines up a small percentage of this
stuff into a series of OT levels, but, aside from sales and status
buttons, the structure is much too rigid, is too narrow in scope, and
sometimes bypasses charge by forcing the person’s attention in one
direction when it needs to go in another.
First and foremost, if a PC is interested in and capable of running
something (and you’d be surprised how many things can be run even
with little preparation), there is no sense in denying him because of
some arbitrary order. But it might be a mistake to try and do a long
thorough rundown at the wrong point. A beginner might do well with a
bit of Dianetics or some problems processing or even a few OT drills
run lightly, but trying to go for a full completion might get you into a
long grinding run because there’s too many other things being missed
and it runs too slow. So you do a short light run and then get him onto
the grades or the steps above.
You can always do a little bit of something as an assist as long as it is
not over the PCs head.
A student who is studying this stuff intensively and has a good bag of
skills can pretty much run anything on himself in any order and get
away with it.
Once a person begins doing OT drills successfully, he can always work
on a few of them in between each grade as a horsepower booster.
The processes here are characterized by either raising horsepower or
erasing things as opposed to the keyouts which occur on the grades or
254
steps given above. Although they can be worked lightly at any time (if
the PC is up to doing the action), intensive runs should be left for those
points where the bank has blown and should be carried on until he
bumps into the next layer of case and is ready to run more grades
processing.
DIANETICS AND INCIDENT RUNNING
The one gray area is Dianetics and other incident running. This does
not go well right after the bank has blown because he must pull things
back in to run them. On the other hand, when he has too much charge
and bank kicking around, it is also not the best technique because it is
too slow. It is best done when he’s flying but hasn’t quite blown the
bank, or when he’s just starting to bump into the bank again after
running advanced levels during a bankless period. This makes it a
matter of judgment (the exception is assists, because he already has
the incident on his plate and its a short run that’s not liable to get him
putting things back that are gone). It might be best to do it as a step 33
in the above sequence of steps, but there might also be other times
when it is appropriate.
For beginners doing light co-audits, such as the current Dianetic book
course, the 1966 technique, modernized, might be the best bet.
Normal R3R in the final NED variation is the most powerful technique
until the person blows the bank on a willingness to confront force
(Dianetic clear). You could even use it briefly on a clearing course clear
until he has the force cognition. But once he has this, R3R becomes too
slow and formal and is just asking to have him mock up stuff that is
gone and pull in pictures from entities etc. and get into various kinds of
trouble. Its not that you can’t run incidents, its that you can’t grind them
to death once he’s regained his confront of force.
Above this point, you can either use alternate spotting, or run a
souped up recall technique that includes spotting and scanning the
incident but does not grind away at the person with unnecessary
formal commands. These are best done solo to avoid the problem of
the auditor pushing the person into mocking up stuff that isn’t there.
Despite these caveats, it is very important for the person to run
incidents because that is what restores his awareness of his previous
existence.
A NOTE ON XDN
255
The biggest mistake made in modern Scientology was the technique
known as Expanded Dianetics (XDN) which was intensively used in the
1970s and then was pretty much abandoned. This is the only
Scientology rundown that actually developed a reputation for making
people worse. The biggest flaw was the use of listing techniques to
find incidents that were not ready to be run, or even worse to make
mistakes in listing which caused the person to mock up incidents, or
pull in the bank, or grab incidents from entities etc. The second deadly
flaw was aiming this technology at evil purposes. An evil purpose is
always late on the chain (the being is basically good) and its like running
the end of a story without finding the beginning. If you actually get a
real one, its probably the final items of an actual GPM and there will be
thousands of heavy incidents earlier during the decay of the GPM
which are unrun and bypassed by this foolish approach. Even worse,
the common errors in listing would hang the person with evil purposes
he didn’t have and really spin him in.
Audited NOTS was originally developed to cure the problem of people
picking up entities’ pictures and using them as their own incidents in
response to screwed up XDN listing and incident running techniques.
This is the real reason that the org thinks that NOTS must be run
extensively by an auditor before the PC can do it solo (despite the fact
that the person has already done the much more difficult OT3
techniques solo). The cases that had too much XDN were so caved in
that it took careful work on the part of an auditor to dig them out. The
problem of making listing mistakes in finding evil purposes and sticking
the person with ones that aren’t there can be handled by correcting the
lists.
Unfortunately, the problem of having stirred up a real evil purpose is
not so easily handled. The false purpose rundown helps somewhat
because it undercuts the evil purpose and looks for what happened
earlier. But its no more than a lick and a promise if he got into the
wildly RSing (Rock Slamming) closing section of an actual GPM. This is
the one RS that still occurs on an advanced case (Clears don’t normally
RS, most RSes come from entities on an advanced case). Your best
bet in digging out a screwed up XDN case is to use NOTS and list
corrections and FPRD tech etc. to cool them down, and then (when
their up to getting it) go for the Actual GPMs which will undercut these
late in the game evil purposes by exposing the high purposes which
decayed into the misbegotten and viscous fighting that one sinks to in
this universe.
By the way, the XDN tapes and materials are worth studying. If you
discard the dangerous L&N approach and drop the madness of
256
searching for evil purposes, there are still some useful insights and
advances which should really be incorporated into normal Dianetics.
OT DRILLS
This is a huge topic. There are the drills used in the various versions of
OT 1, and the old OT levels 5 through 7, and the processes in the
various early books (such as Creation of Human Ability) and the tons of
stuff on the early tapes.
I’ve also come up with a great deal more of these. They will be
included in another write-up.
IMPLANT PLATENS
Again we have a huge array of materials. There are the platens of the
clearing course and OT2 which can easily be found on the internet. I
have come up with a good deal more, which will be included in
another write-up.
There are also the penalty universes, which will be covered in their
own write-up.
HANDLING THETA
There is also handling entities as is done on OT3 and Nots, plus more
advance handling of machine entities and split pieces of yourself as
discussed in the write-up titled “Divide and Conquer”.
There is also the handling of theta machinery and other structural
things. I haven’t done a lot in this area yet. Besides blowing entities out
of these things, there is the subject of actually dealing with the
structure, spotting underlying postulates, and otherwise regaining
control of things that are running on automatic. Ron covered a bit of this
in the 3rd ACC tapes, but there is a lot of research that is still needed in
this area.
Another target is the true anatomy of Matter/Energy/Space/Time and
the mechanics of reality. Again we have some of it, but more research
is needed.
At a minimum we always have mockup processing, ITSA, and
alternate spotting techniques for prying away at unknown areas.
257
SUMMARY
I know there is a lot here. It really is a lifetime study. Don’t let the sheer
size of it stop you. Any forward progress on this line will remain with
you in the course of your future lifetimes (if you even need to have
future lifetimes instead of simply wishing bodies in and out of
existence or learning to operate comfortably in a bodiless state).
If you’ve read this far with good comprehension, then you are at least
an advanced student rather than a PC or patient, so if something really
catches your interest, then go ahead and study it and run it and don’t
worry too much about formal procedure. The Tech is meant to help.
Never let it get in the way of forward progress.
258
REPAIR AND BOOSTER RUNDOWNS
There is a great deal of tech on this within Scientology. I can’t repeat all
of it here, and most of it is well done so why should I alter it. You will
find the materials in the later tech volumes. This is where modern
Scientology is at its best and where the professional auditors really
shine. It came about partially because there were so many mistakes
that they got very good at fixing people up after a screw up.
The mistakes, by the way, included quickie grades, endless
unnecessary sec checks, endless drug rundowns, endless R3R
Dianetics after clear, XDN (expanded Dianetics), and various goofs at
the detail level such as “barking” style TRs, running unreading items
(because the auditor and the tech knew better than the PC and the
meter), and refusing to handle the PC’s originations. These particular
faults have all been corrected (when a bulletin comes out to fix
something, it should be obvious to you that it was being done
backwards up until that point). There were many more and there is no
sense in listing them all here. But it was the “repair” technology which
kept people from deserting in droves and cleaned up the messes
made.
Here I only have a few comments plus a brief summary for those of
you who are not trained as auditors. Also I did come up with a new
rundown that might be needed occasionally.
LIFE REPAIR
The org usually runs extensive life repair before beginning on grades.
The processing is generally very light, to take charge off of things the
person is concerned about. The auditing requires a very high skill
level.
The auditing itself is mostly aimed at simply talking with the PC and
steering him into coming up with things that he decided, did, or
postulated in areas that have charge on them.
This can produce a nice result, but it is usually unnecessary and is
going at things the long way around. Unless the person is really stuck
in something, he will run faster and deeper on grades processing.
My own experience on doing numerous intro and demonstration
sessions on new people in the early days was that almost anyone who
came in of their own free will (not pushed) and was searching for truth
259
(rather than crying for help) was immediately capable of running grades
level processes. If they can do a TRs course successfully (which is
powerful processing), they can certainly run a simple grades process.
Most of the people who weren’t up to running grades processes were
people who had previously been messed up by auditing or by
screwed up ethics handling or otherwise banged around by the
subject. They probably could have run grades processes when they
walked in originally and probably could again if they went off and
cooled down for awhile.
One of the indicators that we have is the “tone arm” (TA) of the E-meter,
which reads low when the person is overwhelmed. If the TA is truly
low, the person is not up to confronting things and really does need
some repair processing. I emphasize “truly low” here because one of
the old mistakes was to ignore things like sweaty hands (and possibly
low body weight) which might give a very slightly low reading, but you
could always see the difference in a real low TA and a false reading
because of the “haunted” look of the PC and the tight, unresponsive,
needle behavior on the meter.
In handling new people, I never saw more than one low TA reading in
a hundred. In handling staff members and people who had gotten
quickie grades or been otherwise mishandled, they were extremely
common.
This lead the org into going crazy about doing life repair, endless setup
rundowns, etc. But they were really solving a problem in the subject
itself rather than doing things that are inherently necessary.
I would say that the bulk of new people can bypass the life repair step
and get into the meat of the subject immediately. There will only be a
small percentage (people heavily overwhelmed etc.) who do need a
life repair step, unless, of course, you start trying to process skeptics
or people who aren’t really reaching for the subject. It’s not that you
need belief for this stuff to work, but you do need somebody who is
willing to dive in and muck around with the mind and try to do the
commands. So in the cases where that isn’t present, or where the
person has been heavily overwhelmed, you do need life repair, and
that is best left to professionals.
AUDITING REPAIR
There is tons of material on this and its well beyond the scope of this
document.
260
There are extensive needs for this if a professional auditor is running
somebody who knows nothing about the subject because its very
easy for things to go wrong even if the tech is correct, and when there
have been flaws in the tech, the pro can really jam them down some
poor PC’s throat and so the repair actions become quite essential.
For people who are studying the subject and trying things and need to
dig themselves out occasionally, the simple techniques gives in the
earlier section on assists should generally be good enough to get them
back on the rails.
An ideal scene would be to have people mostly working through this
stuff on their own and in co-audit groups and occasionally getting a
clean up session from a professional. That would be the most efficient
use of the technology and handles the problem of the long training
needed to make a good professional auditor.
THE PURIF
I’m listing this with the repair techniques because it’s done to get a road
block out of the way rather than to produce case gain.
You will need something like this if the person has been too heavily
swamped with drugs, whether they are of the medical or the street
variety.
This was originally developed to handle people who had taken LSD
and still had residual traces of it locked up in their system. The idea
was to sweat the stuff out of the body.
The idea that poisons get locked up in the tissues is also proposed by
homeopathy and there are a number of good books on the subject.
I have prejudices in favor of vitamins, homeopathy, home remedies,
and other alternative medicines as alternatives to the usual drug
oriented treatment that is pushed by the AMA and the drug
companies. Unfortunately, a lot of the research money comes from
businesses that make money from drugs and so there is a prejudice in
their favor within the medical community. You can find doctors who
are not slanted this way, but they are the exception rather than the
rule.
I am not an expert in this field, but from what I have read of
biochemistry texts, its obvious that they are not yet capable of
modeling the chemical reactions of the human body as a whole. This
261
means that they are only looking at the direct and immediate chemical
reactions and they don’t really know what other chemical actions might
take place. Hence, the continual worry about side effects. This makes
me leery of any powerful medical drugs except in emergencies.
I’m also not in a position to judge whether the purif is any better than
other exercise and vitamin programs. Ron does have one key thing
which is to keep doing something as long as it produces change and
not to back off because something starts to happen. An old
Scientology datum is what turns it on turns it off. In other words, you
keep going and push through the reactions. This would improve any
such program, so its hard to say if the program itself is better or
whether its simply being carried through more effectively.
Unfortunately, with the usual fanaticism, they push everybody to do
this thing. Its a body oriented program and has little to do with the
mind or the search for truth. Its as bad as the yogis who practice sitting
instead of contemplating truth or doing mental exercises. There are
people who need this, but for most, its a distraction and a road block.
There may be a need for an exercise or vitamin program in your life,
but it has little to do with your spiritual growth. I suppose the org could
also give driving lessons and teach cinematography, and might even
do well at these things, but it would be off their main purpose and is
certainly not needed as a prerequisite to grades or OT levels.
DRUG RUNDOWN
This is simply a specialized version of incident running aimed at
handling the pains, sensations, emotions, or attitudes connected with
taking drugs, or that existed prior to taking drugs which caused the
person to start taking them.
For a person with an extensive drug history, this probably should be
done fairly early in the sequence of levels.
But the rundown can be fairly lengthy on a beginner because they
tend to do incident running slowly and its easy to associate the bulk of
his ills in this lifetime with taking drugs, whether as a cause or a cure or
whatever. Grades will raise his awareness and ability much faster and
eventually lead to his being able to barrel through incidents fairly
quickly. So the drug rundown should be left until later if it is not needed
urgently.
The big missing step is mocking up the drug sensations and putting
them in the walls etc. as was discussed earlier. This action needs to be
262
done after the drug rundown or else you will have problems with
people reverting.
Since they don’t do this last step, the org has a always had an
occasional problem with someone reverting to drugs. Since this can be
extremely embarrassing, especially if the person is supposedly an OT,
there are times when the org has gone positively fanatical on doing
and re-doing endless drug rundowns.
SEC CHECKS
I’ve already commented on these. The current misuse is an atrocity.
But you probably need to do a thorough one at least once. That can be
a horsepower booster. It should be done as a case action at an
appropriate point, maybe somewhere fairly far along in the grades.
But given the current lack of safety, I would strongly recommend that
the auditor burn the worksheets rather than put them in the folder after
the session.
SETUPS
The org gets really carried away with running setup actions before
letting a person get on with it. They have so many prerequisites for
letting somebody start their OT levels that its a wonder that anybody
ever gets on them.
There is an old and very wise saying which goes “If it ain’t broke, don’t
fix it”.
Ron actually put out a similar one which was in force for a brief period.
This was an admonition against “Inspection Before the Fact”, and it
formed the core of the “Fast Flow” policies. But was applied with such
blindness and lack of judgment that fast flow was quickly canceled and
the subject swung the other way and ended up more pedantic and
prerequisite ridden than the university system. Here I would make a
plea for good sense and judgment rather than fanatically making every
square, round, and triangular peg go through the same hole.
I don’t blame an org for wanting to dust somebody off a bit and get the
case flying before launching into a series of major actions. But if he’s
flying already, then don’t get in his way. And if he really takes off
halfway through the setup program, then drop it and get him moving
263
on the grades or OT levels or whatever because that will move him
much faster and get him much happier with the results. If you don’t get
him moving up the line when you can, you are just asking for random
chance (or motivators that have been waiting in the wings) to derail him
again.
EXT/INT
This is the Exteriorization/Interiorization rundown.
When a person first exteriorizes from the body, they are not likely to
remain that way very long, and when something causes them to
interiorize and go back in, it can have a bit of an impact and be
upsetting.
In the 1950s, when they were trying hard to exteriorize people (and
often succeeding), it was discovered that after getting somebody out a
few times, it got harder instead of getting easier. Finally, this was
solved by abandoning all of the exteriorization processes instead of
finding out what was going wrong and fixing it.
The real solution was eventually discovered in the ext/int rundown. At
first it consisted of simply running out the chain of incidents of
interiorizing. Later it was improved by assessing for the specific charge
(“Went In”, “Pushed In”, etc.).
Unfortunately it never occurred to Ron that the high horsepower
exteriorization techniques of the 1950s (which used to be used even
on new people with good results) could now be reinstated.
264
OTHER RUNDOWNS
There are more in the tech volumes. Sometimes one of these will
really fit the bill. Other times, they are just a distraction and a way of
burning up lots of expensive hours of auditing.
There are also the L’s (L12, L11, and L10) which are pushed very
heavily by Flag, possibly because they are extremely expensive.
They aim at producing the Clear OT state, which actually is a very
good thing to achieve. But you can probably make that one simply by
doing a good job on running grade 2 processes after clear.
There is also the happiness rundown (the HRD), which is really a sort
of beginner’s grade 2 based on the way to happiness booklet. Real
grade 2 processes are better because they don’t evaluate for the
person as to what is or isn’t an overt. A better idea might be to use a
few ideas from the HRD to beef up grade 2 a bit more. A really neat
idea might be to have the person roll their own way to happiness. You
could run “What would improve survival of the body” / “What would
detract from the survival of the body” as alternating questions. Then do
the same on each of the other dynamics.
A serious flaw in the HRD is that it does not address problems or
ARCXs connected with the precept that they are trying to audit. They
look exclusively for misunderstoods, overts, or valence shifting
mechanisms. So they are going to mess up in a certain number of
cases. A key question would be “is there a problem you are trying to
solve by violating (precept)?”. Another one would be “do you have an
ARCX connected with (precept)?”.
265
A NEW RUNDOWN - WORLD CLOSED IN RUNDOWN
This is a new one that I came up with (mainly because I needed to run
it) which handles a specific roadblock that you might hit.
This could also be called the collapsed space rundown.
Having space collapse in on one is a phenomena similar to
Interiorization but an order of magnitude heavier. It runs more basic
than interiorization and is a source of ext/int type maladies. One of the
reasons for trouble in handling ext/int is that after it has been flattened
on a PC, this underlying phenomena can cause the symptoms to turn
up again. Then the PC’s ext/int handling gets invalidated, or he misassignees
the phenomena to BTs (which can be a source, but his own
case is senior), and he misses the real charge. It’s true that BTs can
have out-int, and it does need to be handled, but it doesn’t usually give
the PC out-int phenomena once he’s gotten up a bit of causation by
doing a thorough OT3 or some NOTs.
Early on, one is capable of creating and owning space. Then one’s
space collapses. Then comes interiorizing into things which will
generate space for you.
Early in 1952, in the Hubbard College Summary Lectures, Ron
mentions “world closed in” incidents, times when something happened
and all the color and life went out of everything. I used to think that this
was simply the experience of interiorizing. It is not. You could be
already interiorized, and yet operating fairly well and have some feeling
of owning things and doing alright and then have some terrible loss or
whatever and suddenly life has lost all of its luster. Or you could be
well exteriorized and even operating without a body, and something
goes very wrong (maybe you accidentally drop a planet full of nice
folks into a sun or something) and suddenly your space is collapsed
without interiorizing into anything. Note that this can happen to a free
being who is well above the level of needing a body, and therefore
runs much earlier and higher on the scale than ext/int.
This rundown becomes urgently needed when you start running OT
drills such as those in SOP8C etc. These get your space and anchor
points way out there. I was doing quite well with these kinds of
processes when some unrelated trouble caused some inval and threat
of loss. My anchor points snapped in and it was just like the ext/int
phenomena. But there was no interiorization per se, and it wouldn’t
resolve on ext/int buttons (either on myself or on BTs etc.).
Furthermore, it was almost impossible to audit anything else while this
266
was in restim. After much fooling around with various techniques to
get charge off of what had occurred, I managed to see enough to figure
out this theory and design the following rundown. It worked like
dynamite.
The incident consists of one’s space collapsing. First you are big, your
anchor points are way out there, etc. Then bang, it all falls in on you
and you’re tiny, withdrawn, etc.
This can be run exactly like ext/int or end of endless int by using the
following list of buttons instead of the int buttons. For advanced cases,
the following methods of running would be appropriate:
1. As an assist (if this happens to you in pt): Assess the list of
buttons. Then run 3 way (or 4 way or 5 way) recalls on the best
reading, and then on the next best reading until you suddenly
feel great relief. Don’t continue past the EP even if other buttons
were reading as well. (for 5 way recalls, add the flow “another to
himself”).
2. Handling entities with collapsed space.
Actually this is wrong with all entities (BTs etc.), but for some it
will be the key button that wakes them up and digs them out.
You can do this just like handling out-int on a BT. Just assess (or
spot) the button, assess (or spot) the right flow, and run recalls
(generally simply recalling it and then recalling the earliest will
produce a blow).
3. Full Rundown.
Assess for the best reading, run it as follows, then the next best
etc. until the entire list of buttons just FNs.
3.1 Run 5 way recalls
3.2. Run 5 way secondaries as follows: For each flow, first check
whether you already went release on the (button) occurring due
to a loss (it often releases on recalls).
a) Recall a time when (button) happened due to a loss.
b) Spot any postulate you might have made at that time.
Run question b one or more times after each incident recalled on
question a. If you can’t spot any postulates, then alternately spot
267
something in the incident and something in the room until you
can spot a postulate you made at that time.
3.3. Run 5 way engrams as follows: check for release as in 2 above.
a) Recall a moment of pain and unconsciousness when (button).
b) spot any postulate you might have made at that time. (if you
can’t find any, then handle as in secondaries above).
3.4. Check for any entities who have (button) and handle.
Note that a clear shouldn’t run Dianetic pictures on the secondary
and engram steps. Above clear, those usually are supplied by
BTs and machinery etc. Just remember what happened to you
and spot your postulates (which generally have considerable
importance even to a clear). Its even OK to do a bit of ITSA on
the incident (spotting time, place, form, and event), just don’t start
trying to pull in pictures.
Assessment Buttons:
1. World Closed In
2. Space Collapsed
3. (your) Energy Collapsed
4. Anchor Points Collapsed
5. Anchor Points Snapped in
6. Everything fell in
7. Space Was Unmocked
8. (your) Energy Was Unmocked
9. (your) Frame of Reference Collapsed
10. Caved-In
11. Pulled Back
12. Withdrew from everything.
13. Made it all unreal
Note that its always you who collapses your own space. Others
may do things to you that get you to do this, but its only you who
can snap in your own anchor points no matter how many BTs or
nasty folks are working you over.
268
WRONG IDEAS IN STANDARD TECH
Here I am going to talk about the technology of auditing rather than the
high level flaws that I have been pointing out all along.
First of all, the bulk of the auditing technology is correct. It has gone
through a long evolution and many of the flagrant misconceptions of
earlier years have long since been corrected. But there are still some
wrong ideas.
The most basic mistake is to consider that the standardness,
correctness, and exactness of the procedure is senior to the PC’s gains,
maintaining communication with the PC, and granting beingness to the
PC.
Our primary target is to produce the best result possible for the PC,
this is senior to everything. To achieve this, it is more important to
remain in comm with the PC than it is to do the procedure right,
because communication is the most important basic we have and
nothing can occur in its absence. Furthermore, if the PC’s abilities and
awareness are to be raised, we must make more of the PC rather than
making less of him. Therefore, we must always grant and encourage
his own beingness and reinforce his own positive efforts even when
these don’t fit perfectly into the rote procedure that we are trying to
inflict on him. These things are known, and they can be found in the
auditor’s code. What is not known is the correct relative importance.
These things are senior to everything else in the technology including
the CS series, the class VIII materials, and all formal procedures of
auditing.
When he was writing about art, Ron realized that absolute technical
perfection was a dead end. For maximum aesthetics, you get as close
as you can to perfection without losing the communication line. If only
he had realized that this applies to auditing technology as well.
If you deliver absolutely perfect standard technology, the PC will not
make gains. This is robotic and you might as well program up a
computer to audit the guy. On the other hand, if the auditor just slops
around and makes a mess, there wouldn’t be any gains either. The
quality of the auditing and quantity of results is dependent on how
close you can come to standard while maintaining communication,
granting beingness, and keeping other basics in. This may mean
occasionally violating standard procedure. The real skill comes in in
minimizing the violations rather than in adhering perfectly to standard
while the session and the PC go to hell.
269
If you beat the auditor over the head every time he violates standard
procedure with a good result for the PC, then you will kill his ability to
be with the PC and use his knowingness and understanding to do what
is really needed by the PC even though it isn’t in the textbook. The CS
must validate these successful violations rather than attacking the
auditor.
The standards are there for a reason, and that is the fact that they
usually work and trouble results from violating them. On that basis,
there will be many instances where violations of standards result in
failures and poor results. This is where you correct the incapable
auditor and teach him the right way to do things. Don’t wreck his
judgment by fixing a theoretical mistake that might not be a mistake in
the specific case. Instead, fix the real mistakes which are obvious in
their failure to help the PC.
The above assumes that the standards are always correct. Even in that
case, you must allow for deviations because there are no absolutes.
But there can also be actual flaws in the standards, or better ways of
doing things. In the past we have seen endless corrections of mistakes
in the standards themselves. So if you find that the auditors are getting
results with some consistent violation of standard procedure, then
maybe you had better revise the standard procedure.
There have been a number of points which have shifted around over
the years. Often there were results either way and there were
arguments in favor of either approach.
One of these was whether or not a real FN could occur above 3.0 on
the meter. At one time this was an absolute (never call one above 3.0)
and some cases were messed up. At other times, anything was
accepted without any judgment and some cases were found where
processes were left incomplete. Maybe the auditor has to actually look
at the PC and be in good enough communication to tell whether or not
the PC has gotten release from something. If you’re good, you should
be able to see this even without a meter. And if the auditor is already
well trained and the PC seems happy, maybe the CS should take the
auditors judgment as being better than the mechanical phenomena of
the E-meter.
Another is the exact definition of what is a read on the meter. In the old
days, any change of needle characteristic was taken up. In modern
times, they limit themselves to falls and instant FNs, rocket reads, and
(in special cases) rock slams. In the first case, we sometimes took up
something that was inaccessible (a rise generally indicates a nonconfront
and if you take one up sometimes it is unrunable). In the
270
second case, we might occasionally miss something that does need to
be run. In practice, it might make a difference what you are trying to
do. In repair actions, you might take up a read that you would not use
in normal processing because it might be your only entry point into
some terrible auditing error that was done earlier and you might have
no choice but to fight your way through something that is barely
runable to get the matter straightened out.
There is also the case of rare and unusual meter reactions. One of
these is the sharp instant rise which looks like a fast long fall in reverse.
These are very rare. They should be taken up. What you have is a
dramatic flinch and non-confront, but the person is right on the edge of
looking at it. Its one of these “oh my god that can’t be” type reactions.
Simply calling it a few times will often turn it into a spectacular fall as
the person takes a real look at the item being checked.
One problem is spectacularly large reads. Really huge FNs, theta
bops, and rock slams can be confused with each other and can also be
confused with giant rocket reads that dive off of the dial. These reads
can be 2 or 3 divisions wide on the TA and if they are really fast the
needle can slam against the pin with audible force as it shifts on and off
the dial. Your immediate action should be to turn the sensitivity down
to 1 so that you have some hope of identifying the read. You may also
have to swing the TA up or down to catch the end of the read and you
may have to recheck the item with the TA already sitting at the
position where you are guessing that the read will shove it too. We
could really use a meter with a sensitivity setting way below 1 for
identifying these giant reads.
The super duper ultra sensitive meters are needed for repair actions
where there is so much blocking the PCs view that you need all the
help you can get. When a PC is really flying, especially on advanced
levels, the reads should be spectacular and you need a less sensitive
meter. This silly business of needing a more sensitive meter to run
NOTS means that they are running the wrong process. If it is the right
action, it will read well. If it doesn’t, then either its unnecessary, or outgradient
(something else needs to be run first), or the procedure itself
is flawed in some manner. The NOTS material can read well on the
meter sometimes. Done at the right time, these can be very beneficial.
But run by fanatics who are trying to blame all case on NOTS factors,
you get this strange quick of needing more and more sensitive meters
to find things that are not reading as expected.
By the way, it would be nice to have a super cheep but ultra
sophisticated meter for use by solo auditors so that the ordinary
population could run do-it-yourself solo processes etc. A simple and
271
cheep whetstone bridge could be plugged into the serial port of a PC
(Personal Computer). A sophisticated program could do signal analysis
and put up a graphical display. It could probably do ten times as much
as the current meters because of the flexibility and power of doing
things in software. I would guess that such a thing could be marketed
for under a hundred dollars.
An extremely misleading datum is “The PC Doesn’t Know What Is
Wrong With Him”. This was coined on the assumption that if he really
knew what was wrong with him, it wouldn’t be wrong.
This is pretty much the case for somebody walking in off of the street.
Anything they could figure out or handle with the data they currently
know and their current level of confront has already been handled and
if it is still wrong, then they don’t have the correct answer to it.
But this changes as soon as you give them more data or raise their
level of confront.
Try listening to the PC for a change. When he’s halfway on something,
he often does know what’s what and has a partial view of the truth. If
he saw it all, it would be gone, but when he has a partial view, he is
often right but not quite free of it. If you left him alone, he would
actually get through it eventually on his own but it might take some
time. If, however, you keep insisting that he doesn’t know when he
really does, your going to mess him up and create a big ARCX as well.
An extreme example was the mess up on people who had gone clear
on Dianetics before the Dianetic clear bulletin came out. They would
usually know that they were being run on wrong actions and they
often felt that they were clear but wouldn’t dare claim to be. In this
case, they knew better than the auditors and CSes and nobody would
acknowledge their rightness. A good button for ARCX correction lists
(the L1) and repair lists (the green form) would be “Were you right and
nobody would accept it?”. This is a key point because we are trying to
rekindle the fundamental rightness that lies under all the aberrations
and when the PC has it but you shoot it down, you are pushing him
right back into the bank and killing his real hopes of freedom. This can
cause the kind of ARCX where the PC wants to burn down the org
because it is acting suppressively towards his case.
Of course you don’t want to lose control of the session or go chasing
after every idle thought or get derailed by the PCs attempts to avoid
looking at something. But you should be able to tell the difference
between a PC who is non-confronting and one who is perceiving truth.
And you should be able to finish a cycle of action while noting down
272
things the PC suggests for later handling, and keep the PC reassured,
and really address those things as soon as the current process is done.
And don’t make a fight out of not taking the PCs orders. You can bend a
little and still not lose control of the session. Sometimes the PC is right.
Validate it. Getting the PC to the point where his ITSA of his own case
is actually correct is the most important gain he will ever make
because it is the one which will let him find his own way out.
Another sore point is the datum that “All Auditors Talk Too Much”. A
policy from the late 1960s states this explicitly.
The interesting thing about this one is that it is true and yet the policy
was written in such a manner as to be totally destructive of auditing.
The policy presents this as something to be corrected. The end result
was that auditors stopped talking and auditing ceased to occur. This
was to some degree remedied in later years (by a revision to TR4
handling of originations), but still remains a trouble spot.
The correct datum is that any auditor who is really auditing the PC will
talk too much. Maintaining two way communication is senior. If the
auditor talks too little, there will be no auditing taking place. If the
auditor tries to talk precisely the right amount, he will occasionally
undershoot and betray some of his PCs by losing the comm line.
Therefore, he will talk too much if he really intends to get results
instead of trying to make some CS happy or meet some arbitrary
standard. Again, however, it is a matter of coming as close as possible.
The highly skilled auditor will only talk a hairsbreadth too much rather
than blabbering away at the PC and occasionally saying the wrong
thing and getting into a mess.
One fatal flaw has been the use of endless setups, preparation, and
repair before letting the PC get moving on new grades and OT levels.
This has mostly come about as a solution to the mistakes of having
defined clear incorrectly, blaming all case on NOTS, considering things
to be absolutes rather than a gradient of increasing confront and
awareness, and the many grades and processes which are missing
from the current lineup. This makes CSes scared to let somebody start
something because it might not handle what is wrong and the PC
might fall on his head.
The grades and levels work quickly to increase ability and awareness.
Unnecessary repair and setup actions (and the infamous unnecessary
sec checks) grind along slowly and waste everyones time and money.
273
The only criteria that should be considered before embarking on one
of these major steps is whether or not the PC is flying (e.g. running
well, high toned, FNs and cognites easily, etc.).
In some cases an out-list or out-int will be a roadblock and you have to
solve it. In other cases, it doesn’t matter. Look at the PC and see if he
has the free attention necessary to run something new or whether his
attention is fixated. That’s all you care about.
There are many things wrong with the PC. You need to raise his
confront in lots of areas. No single area is the right reason behind all his
aberrations, and that means that you can’t get evangalistic and try to
cure everything with one approach. Move the PC forward as quickly as
possible, getting a big win on each of many different major areas.
When you get too thorough in one area, it begins to bypass the charge
of the other areas that you are not handling and eventually it will blow
up in your face.
Don’t promise perfect stability or absolute solutions. Promise instead
that you will move him along as fast as possible to increase his
horsepower and abilities.
As far as NOTS goes, it is a lesser case factor and mainly causes
trouble when it is assigned as the reason behind the PCs problems,
overts, and upsets. Its simply the WRONG WHY. Indicating the correct
“why” behind something never really harms the PC, even if it is a bit
out-gradient and hard to confront. But taking something that does have
charge on it (and there is generally some charge on NOTS) but is not
the correct why for something and jamming it down the PCs throat is a
sure way to mess up the PC.
The point at which to begin NOTS is when the PC starts noticing
entities and gets interested in handling them. It shouldn’t be kept a
secret from him. It should be identified as something which will show
up eventually and we have the tech to handle it when it does.
Meanwhile, it can safely be ignored. Just don’t let the PC start blaming
his case on them, because that will kill him.
The correct gradient into doing NOTS is to do OT drills first. That is
what gets his perception and horsepower up to the point where he
can just dust himself off and get these entities out of his way. You get
the PC up to the point where he is trying to project energy and
percieve at a distance and things like that and he’s noticing that there is
stuff in his way that’s muddying things up and reducing his
horsepower. That is the real effect of entities. They do not abberate
the person significantly (the PC was already abberated before incident
274
2, else why was he walking around in a body and letting himself get
bashed around by a nasty ruler), but they do get in the person’s way,
especially in regards to OT abilities.
In comparison with the vague fumblings that usually occur in
metaphysics, Scientology is a precise technical subject. But we err in
equating it to a mechanical technology such as engineering. This
misleads you into thinking that its all mechanics, and its not.
In building bridges, you simply do the tech mechanically and a bridge
results.
But Scientology tech is more like the tech of painting or playing the
piano. These things have a very high theta component and if you only
apply the techniques mechanically, you do not get the desired product.
The tech is only a prerequisite to real understanding and ability, it is not
the final result.
Scientology is, first and formost, a philosophy rather than an
engineering decipline. You need to study and apply it as a philosophy.
And because it is an applied philosophy, you also need to master the
mechanical aspects of the tech, but don’t get lost in them or think that
they are the end product.
The basic problem is one of attitude. The effort seems to be to defend
the technology and make it right when what you really need to do as
an auditor is to build up the rightness of the PC and what you need to
do as a CS is to build up the rightness of your auditors.
If you validate beingness, knowingness, and responsibility, then you
will get more beingness, knowingness, and responsibility. On the
other hand, if you validate rote procedure, then you will get more rote
procedure (and will in turn need even more rote procedures because
the old ones wouldn’t be enough in the face of a deterioration of
beingness, knowingness, and responsibility).
Despite all of this, there are some really good auditors, supervisors,
and CSes working for the CofS. The shame of it is that they are the
exception rather than the rule and they are subject to invalidation for
the exact things which set them above the crowd.
275
CHAPTER 5 - IMPLANT UNIVERSES
WARNING:
THESE ARE NOTES ON MY RESEARCH INTO LEVELS BEYOND OT
7. THEY MAY BE RESTIMULATIVE OR UPSETTING. THE
MATERIAL MAY BE INCORRECT, INCOMPLETE, OUT OF
SEQUENCE, OR SIMPLY OUT GRADIENT. READ THEM AT YOUR
OWN RISK.
INTRODUCTION
We are the decayed fragments of the god like beings who created this
series of universes. The fall has been a long one, encompassing the
life spans of numerous universes. The road back is long and hard, but
the rewards are rich.
The subject before us is so vast that there is room for many
researchers. I am obviously not the first, nor will I be the last.
As of this writing, I have not attempted to design a new bridge or
revise the works of L. Ron Hubbard. I have not even tried to put these
new materials into a form that public individuals could use. Instead, I
have taken a walk through the unexplored wilderness, risking no one’s
case except my own. These are my notes on that journey.
IMPLANT UNIVERSES
The most basic aberrations stem from a time when the individual had
capabilities approximating those of a god. To even conceive of those
early incidents requires taking the viewpoint of a being that could
create and destroy universes at will.
But do not be fooled into thinking that such power solves all problems.
Especially as we are only talking about power over MEST or the
various equivalents of MEST in other systems of creation. When all
men are gods, the problems of interpersonal relations are aggravated
rather than lessened.
A being becomes abberated first and then he loses power as a
consequence of those aberrations. Therefore, we find that the earliest
unabberated period is followed by a period of intense abberated
behavior where the individual still wields the power of a god.
276
When an individual cannot be harmed or trapped by force or emotion,
then all that remains is trickery, wrong data, and considerations that will
lead him into trouble. And when such individuals come into conflict,
and have the power to create universes, they will create universes
specifically tailored to trick, degrade, and abberate each other, hence
the existence of implant universes.
An implant universe is a universe intentionally designed and used to
install aberrations. They primarily existed early on the track at a time
when the creation of universes was far easier than it is now.
Before discussing these further, Some background information on the
subject of universes in general is needed.
277
THE NATURE OF UNIVERSES
A universe is a self consistent package of rules and mockups. It will
have space or the equivalent to separate the mockups. It will usually
have time of some sort to handle the consecutiveness of events. It will
have some kind of contents such as matter and energy. And there will
be a set of rules concerning the operation of the whole affair.
MEST style universes similar to ours have been common for a long
time, primarily because the penalty universes of the home universe
era implanted a predisposition towards this kind of mockup. But many
other things are possible and universes designed as traps or implants
often go beyond the usual definitions so as to take advantage of the
individual’s ignorance and blind spots.
Universes are created by postulate, perpetuated by alterisness, and
made real to others by agreement. The universes we are interested in
running out at this level were postulated, alter- ised, and agreed upon.
There is a great deal of relevant material in the Axioms, Phoenix
Lectures, Philadelphia Doctorate Course, and other early Scientology
materials. It will also greatly speed processing and understanding to
first run spacation (PDC) with attention to mocking up simple little
universes and observing the behavior of space and time.
As noted by LRH in one of his lectures, beings shift between
universes by agreement.
Imagine a Universe with a red sofa and a red chair, and a second
separate universe with a green sofa and green chair. Imagine
someone agreeing with the red sofa and therefore being in the red
universe. Now imagine him changing his mind and agreeing with a
green sofa. He shifts to the green universe. Note that a consequence
of agreeing with the green sofa is that he also winds up with the green
chair. If he wants a green sofa and an orange chair, he either must
alter-is the green universe (which could be hard if many other beings
are agreeing on it) or he mocks up a new third universe with a copy of
the green sofa along with an orange chair. Note that if he wanted to
meet someone sitting on the green sofa, he would be stuck with the
green chair since the other person would be there rather than in the
new universe with the orange chair.
The thetan still has the ability to shift to a universe simply by agreeing
with it. His current problem is not getting into a new universe but
getting out of the old one. His agreements with this universe are very
sticky and pinned down. He can easily get into contact with another
278
universe by mocking up someone in it and agreeing with them but he
only gets it in a vague sort of way because he wouldn’t let go of his
agreements here on Earth.
This was different in the early days. By this I mean the time period
subsequent to separation from static but prior to having solidly agreed
upon universes that one did not leave. The earlier scene (which is also
the ideal scene toward which we are aiming) was one in which there
were many agreed upon universes (and also many non-agreed
individual universes) and they were being constantly mocked up and
changed around by postulate. The individuals moved around between
these by selective agreement.
Consider a being who is not dependent on food or clothes or any sort
of mest since he can mock up his own if he wants anything. Under
these circumstances, what sort of things would be valuable to him? It
would be things like admiration, new and interesting creations,
aesthetics, communication, etc. Basic things which are dependent
upon interchange between beings. Here you have situations such as a
being mocking up a universe and trying to make it aesthetic enough to
be interesting to others. He does this so that others will agree upon it,
admire it, and contribute to its reality. This leads to a sort of oneupmanship
and trying to score “points” and eval and inval and art critics
and all sorts of things. There is actually quite a high level of game
condition and agreed upon penalties, etc. going on between beings
who can create and destroy universes at will. It’s really quite a lot of
fun but it can look pretty rough to someone walking around in a meat
body.
Besides the normal agreed upon universes that people get together in,
you find another kind of agreed upon universe. This is a sort of
“canned” or pre-defined universe that could be thought of as being like
a movie is today. This sort of universe is postulated as a complete
track. I.E., the time line as well as the space is mocked up when the
universe is postulated. Imagine some pleasant movie being actually
created as a full reality with all the perceptics etc. Now imagine that a
“viewer” goes into agreement with the star actor and actually
experiences the movie as if it was his own life. The track is frozen.
He picks up the beginning of it and lives through it to the end and if it
was really good, he might want to experience it again sometime. In
this sort of movie, you generally have no freedom of choice within the
universe. The track just runs you forward from beginning to end. It is
a universe in its own right and is not located in space or time relative to
any other universe. Its just there as itself and if you feel like agreeing
with it and experiencing it, you just go for it. Of course, you do have
the same choice that you have now if you run a tape in a VCR. You can
279
stop the film or back it up or just turn it off. But you can’t change it
internally unless you want to copy the whole thing and do a remake of
the story with variations.
There was actually quite a bit of competition involved in putting
together these entertainment universes. A sort of Theta level
academy awards so to speak. Sometimes heavy penalties such as a
period of service or subjecting oneself to an unpleasant universe were
gambled on bets as to whose mockup would be more popular.
There was also a flavor of “canned” universe that had some degree of
choice in a manner similar to that of a video game or computer
adventure game. I.E., there might be a number of canned scenes and
you would go to different ones depending on key decisions that you
would make, or there would be a set of canned targets that would
come at you in random sequence and you would score points as you
eliminated them. Here you have a series of mini- tracks all linked
together with a postulated program. Anything you can make a
computer or VCR do can be set up the same way in a series of
conditional theta postulates. For example, you can make the postulate
that if someone opens the door, then a green mouse will run out. This
is really no more difficult than postulating that a green mouse will run
out right now.
Note that under these circumstances, time travel becomes the
equivalent of rewinding a VCR. This, of course is time travel relative to
the track of a universe. Your own track is sequential regardless of
whether you loop back through the track of a universe. You could play
a bit with a VCR and recognize that you can “go back in time” by
rewinding it a bit or “predict the future” based on having seen it before.
If there is a calendar visible in the movie (the equivalent of the time
tags on a picture or the actual time of a universe), you will see that the
universe’s time for a given scene is the same whenever you view it.
This does make dating difficult. What with many agreed upon
universes, so that there is no single one with the “right” time, and with
canned universes that have the same date each time they are visited,
values such as x trillion years ago are not too useful. Time was not
tied together between the different agreed upon universes and flowed
at different rates so even if two people agreed to count things in “Earth”
time, they might have vastly different dates for the same moment
when they happened to be in the same universe together. Dating can
be done relative to your own experience by seeing what things
happened before and after each other for you.
280
Late in this sequence you will find the appearance of home universe.
By this time the being was already slightly decayed. Instead of simply
creating and destroying a multitude of individual actual universes at will,
he wanted some agreement. So a large matrix of interconnected
universes was set up and agreed upon. Each individual was assigned
his own home universe in this matrix where he could mock up what
he wanted. He invested so much time and effort and creativity into his
home universe that he didn’t want to let go of it. As a result, he could
be trapped by it. This free theta period ends with the collapse of the
home universe matrix into a single agreed upon universe.
281
THE MECHANICS OF UNIVERSES
A Universe could be created by exactly and specifically postulating
every individual element in it. However, this is quite a bit of work.
There are some common shortcuts that are easy to use. These show
up frequently in the construction of simple universes.
It is almost as easy to postulate an infinity as it is to postulate an
individual item. This is because an infinity of something is a single
intention rather than many detailed different things. Lets say that you
wanted to mock up a beach that someone could walk down. The way
to spend eons at this is to mock up each individual grain of sand as
itself and different from its neighbors. Instead, you mock up one grain
of sand in detail and then copy it. You say this goes on and on. If you
want and if there’s nothing else in the space yet, you could just say that
the beach goes on forever. This is an infinity. No matter how far along
the beach someone walked, there would always be more beach.
Note that the beach would always be the same unless you went along
and changed some parts of it.
You could also postulate a progressive infinity. Lets say that you mock
up a stretch of beach in an intermediate color. Now you say it goes on
forever in one direction getting lighter and lighter and goes on in the
other direction getting darker and darker. Again this is just a simple
postulate without a great deal of detail work.
For a human level example, consider the number line in mathematics.
The postulate here is just that there is a number and then you add one
to it and get a bigger number. When numbers and counting were
mocked up, just the basic premises of quantity and counting had to be
conceived of. Nobody had to sit there and mock up every possible
whole number from one to infinity. If you think of a bigger number
than anybody else has ever thought of before, it doesn’t make any
difference. The next number is there just the same as always.
In the same way, no matter how far you go down that beach that was
mocked up as an infinity, there is more beach. And if a progression
such as the sand gets hotter the further you go was included in the
postulate, then it just keeps getting hotter. This works the same way
as the numbers getting bigger and bigger as you go along the number
line.
Another trick with this is to postulate a repetitive pattern out to infinity.
Here you say there will be a mile of green sand and then a mile of red
sand and then another mile of green sand on and on forever. Its still
282
pretty simple to set up. Any kind of mathematical series can be used
in this kind of infinite postulate, it doesn’t have to be a simple
alternating sequence.
The practical application of this is that you will find that there are
universes where there really is mud from here on down and it just gets
thicker and blacker no matter how deep you dig. And when you say,
well what’s on the other side of this mud, the answer is that there isn’t
any other side. It was not defined for the universe in question. It just
goes out to infinity. That’s what the postulate happened to be and
that’s what you have to duplicate to as-is it.
In this universe, the postulate is infinite space. The space just goes on
and on no matter how far you go.
Another popular trick is to curve one of these infinities back on itself.
For this, you take the infinite beach and select a point on it and then
take a different point far away and make them be the same point. This
is not very feasible if the beach already has junk on it and differences
etc. But if you do it when the beach is pure and simple, you’re only
alter-ising the simple original postulate and it goes fairly easily. So this
is a common second postulate before you get carried away with
making alterations. Once you’ve done this, the beach will have a finite
length and loop back upon itself as you walk it. But the beach is not
curved, it is still flat and straight. It is the space itself that is curved.
In an ordinary playing field type universe like this one, the thing just
sits around getting alter-ised and fooled around with by whoever is in it.
If you pick up the agreements of that universe or of someone in it, you
get it in its current state.
However, a story telling universe, or its viscous cousin the implant
universe, also has a canned time track. In this case, not only the space
but also the time is postulated. For example, day one is sunny, day
two is cloudy, and its blackness from day three onward. The infinite
postulates can be used with time just as well as with space.
Imagine “Gone With the Wind” being set up as a story telling universe.
First, a production crew would mock it up in detail, step by step and
day by day. You would get into it by picking up the agreements at
start of track. In other words you would agree with the Civil War and
Tara and Scarlet etc. and suddenly there you’d be. It might be that the
story was only mocked up from Scarlet’s viewpoint, or maybe there’d
be a choice of characters you could be with each one mocked up in
full. At the end might be the credits, a theta signature that was
postulated to go on forever in the time track of that universe.
283
Because universes are entered by agreement, it becomes possible to
cause someone to shift universes by enforcing the appropriate set of
agreements. One being can blanket another and enforce the
agreements of start of track of a canned universe and so get the other
individual to run through it willy nilly. The canned universe in turn can
inflict yet a further set of agreements which take him into yet another
universe. And so we have Universe shifting incidents.
Now we can explain Incident I. This is an implant universe that is a
universe shifting incident. The incident is at start of track in its own
weird universe. That’s why you can have an earlier incident I and yet
its always at the beginning of time. Its not just that it says it is at the
beginning of time, it really is at the beginning of time in its own
universe. It lays in the basic agreements that take you into this
universe. The games in this universe are based on force and so you
have things like the charioteer. The blackness at the end of incident 1
is an infinite postulate that just goes on forever in space and time.
Since there is no real change except for repetitive waves in the
blackness, eventually you shift over to the agreements that it was
installing and wind up here. It is used to take undesirables and banish
them to this universe. Sometimes someone manages to get back out
of this one and they throw him in again and so you have the multiple
occurrences of the incident. The overt side of this (blanketing
someone and pushing them into it) is quite beneficial to run out.
284
THE DECLINE OF THETA
It is possible that there once was a game and that we divided up into
teams and each team created an abberative universe that would be
used by them on the losers. The agreement would be that the
winning team would get to gang up on each of the losers individually
and push them through the penalty universe.
It doesn’t really matter who won the first game because everyone
would have kept on playing more and eventually everyone would
have been pushed through quite a few of these and pushed others
through quite a few times.
Although each team would have worked as hard as possible to create
the most horribly abberative universe, in early runs, it probably only
left a slightly sour taste in the mouths of the losers for a short while.
Remember that we’re talking about beings who could create and
destroy universes at will.
If this is the case, then anyone might have either the overt or the
motivator side first on a particular universe, however, by the time we
had decayed to the point of getting stuck in universes, we all probably
had both sides on all of these. In the overt side, a team blankets an
individual and forces him through. You get a little kickback of the
incident from the individual your holding in there and sometimes you
feel him wiggling around and trying to get out and you are pushing
back with postulates and intention.
On the motivator side, you experience the universe. The experience
is such that it leads you to make abberative postulates.
In addition to this is the overt of building one of these. There is
generally a chief architect who lays out the overall plan. There might
also be designers who work out the details of each area. Then, a
group effort is done to postulate the track of the universe in detail.
Once this is done, it “is” and it floats in its own space and time and can
be reached thereafter by connecting to the starting point.
Quite a few of these were built. There are very simple three
dimensional ones that just place you in a bad construction that you
have to make an abberative decision to get out of. There are also
highly complex ones with postulated time tracks that take you from the
top of the scale down to the bottom.
285
Early on, there were no fixed ideas or considerations. These
universes laid in fixed patterns and ideas. Every scale in Scientology is
an arbitrary pattern of behavior. If a thetan is totally free to postulate,
then there is no standard pattern. You can only have a scale if you
have a standard aberration that causes behavior in a certain fixed mold.
Consider the tone scale. Why should boredom be above anger? This
is a fixed pattern that was used over and over again in implant
universes until the individual felt that the one emotion should follow the
other.
Here also is where all the consequences are defined. I.E., if you do A,
then B will happen to you. A thetan can postulate anything. He can
have his cake and eat it too. But here he was shown (and showed
others) that when the cake is eaten, it is gone and can no longer be
had. Even the laws of energy and the very concept of energy itself had
to be defined by these implant universes or else they would not be
consistent from individual to individual.
A particularly nasty set of these implant universes laid in the dynamics.
Each impulse to survive is due to an implant that created a problem in
survival. Without the implant universe, the individual can start, change,
and stop at will. Only a heavy aberration gives him a need to survive.
This series of implant universes appears to have been built by all of us
working together during the home universe era for use as a penalty for
anti-social behavior. These “Penalty Universes” will be covered in detail
later.
Some of these universes have “items”. These are thought intentions
that one receives as he goes through the experience. The thoughts
sort of permeate the space of the universe at particular moments in
the track. These postulates were put there while the universe was
intended and the individual gets them as he goes through it.
Every abberative mechanism addressed in Scientology can be found
being laid in in one or more of these universes. This not only includes
aberrations such as interiorization or the overt/motivator sequence but
also thing like becoming infested with BTs (for a “good” reason) or
making a goal go down a declining series of items.
Besides the aberrations of the grades and OT levels (and aberrations
like the impulse to build actual GPMs), there is another abberative
impulse which shows up in these. It is the impulse to split off or
abandon identities. I.E., one becomes two, or you leave your real self
behind etc.
286
After all of this, you still have someone fairly able. He could disagree
and throw this stuff away when he came out of it, but he thereafter had
considerations and the predisposition to getting in trouble on these
various points of aberration.
287
THE LATER TRACK
Before and parallel to this universe, there is a “magic” universe. The
magic universe was an agreed upon universe somewhat similar to this
one but things worked a bit differently.
Although everyone was pretty much in this magic universe, we
weren’t quite as stuck in it as we are here. It was still possible (with
difficulty) to shift universes.
These old implant universes were still lying around. Sometimes you
find a wizard calling a demon (or genie or whatever) to carry someone
off to “hell” so to speak. Here you have the demon blanketing the
individual and forcing him into one of these implant universes. The
demon gets a bad kickback out of this and, although the wizard knows
better than to connect with the implant universe himself, he’s got a big
overt and becomes very motivator hungry (and sooner or later
someone else dumps him in).
So you still find overt and motivator experiences of these implant
universes as recent as the magic track (which can be quite recent). We
all had our turns at being wizards, demons, and victims in the magic
universe.
This universe was built by the inhabitants of the magic universe to get
rid of undesirables. They set up the Incident 1 implant universe as a
transfer mechanism to shift beings down from the magic universe into
this universe. Eventually almost everyone wound up down here. Of
course, there were frequent “escapes” from this universe, but they
would eventually get caught and be shipped back here again. This is
why you may have recent magic track in between MEST universe
track.
Eventually, most of the magic universe decayed since there were too
few beings left to keep it properly mocked up.
The few remaining wizards (or rulers or powers or whatever) left there
decided to invade this universe and come down in style. They’d round
up escapees or collect beings from this universe, pull them all up into
the magic universe, implant them, and make them up into an army.
This seems to have been done 5 times. These are the 5 invader force
waves, but that’s another story.
Once someone is in this universe, they are generally too pinned down
(by repetitive uses of Inc 1) to be put through an implant universe. So
288
you don’t generally find these in MEST universe track. However,
things out of implant universes, especially items and pictures, were
often shot at the person with force. These are the electronic implants
(OT 2 etc.). There is also a similar mechanism used in magic track
where implant items are laid in with force.
For example, take the Tiger implant universe (one of the penalty
universes that laid in the dynamics). The actual experience of being
the Tiger and going around eating things (and hearing occasional TO
EAT IS ... items coming as intentions (not words) from the space
around you) is in the original implant universe. Here you are the tiger
and look at other things through his eyes. But if your sitting in a chair in
the incident and being hit with force and seeing pictures of a tiger
walking around and hearing items in words, it is probably from some
of the electronic implants used in this universe. Very recently, in
Incident 2, at one point there is a big Tiger face in the sky who says
some of the items, and at another point, you’re shown a tiger walking
around in Kenya going through some of the experiences (and you’re
told that this is where the tiger universe really is). These are all later
restimulations of the original implant universe.
289
FACTORS INVOLVED IN RUNNING IMPLANT UNIVERSES
Most important is ITSA. Spot what is what. ITSA things. Notice the
lies or wrong datums. Blow by inspection when possible.
You can go through these itsaing what happened. Sometimes, you
notice a whole large later dramatization of your own that was based on
one of these. If it comes up, itsa it. It is important to get this itsa down
on paper (even if there is no CS) to get it separated from yourself and
the experience out where you can look at it. Don’t sit around Q & A ing
on a whatsit. Spot what you can spot with certainty and the confusions
will clear up as you keep accumulating rightnesses.
You can date these things relative to other experiences. Sometimes
you have to go earlier either to an earlier occurrence of the same
implant universe or a similar experience in an earlier different universe.
Getting off overts is very important. Early on the track everyone was
constantly working to trap and implant each other. Especially watch
for the one that you regretted. If you get a still picture, it might be an
implant picture but it could also be some incident that you regretted
heavily in which case it is the tail end of your doing something that you
considered to be a terrible overt. You were implanted to hit some poor
victim by mistake whenever you went after an opponent. As a result,
it happened quite often and you cut your horsepower way down as a
result.
BTs will show up on these. If you’ve EPed Nots, they should easily
blow on inspection. The reason you didn’t find them before (assuming
OT 7 was done) is not due to the BT but to the fact that your confront
was out the bottom on what the BT was being or where he was.
Identity splits will also show up. If you’ve EPed these, the split should
probably dissolve on inspection, but since these are not being handled
as their own level right now, you might need to run out the split. A
split is usually created by making you take two viewpoints and then
implanting each one with a goal. The goals of each side are detestable
to the other so that you as each identity cannot bare to be the other
identity and so keep them separate. One handling is to find the
detested goal on each side. Another way is to simply blow through the
valence wall by getting on both sides of it and being willing to be
yourself. Then handle any BTs who are trying to put the wall back or
copy the valences or items involved. If you run into a body in pawn,
handle any BTs/Clusters you can find and then look for an identity split
since one is generally set up as part of the mechanism that keeps you
290
connected to the old body. (Aug 1996) Another trick is to have them
“Point to the being you divided from”. This is probably the fastest and
easiest technique and you don’t need to be sure that it is a piece of
yourself because this has some workability on pieces of other people.
Often you can’t recombine a piece of yourself because you have other
pieces missing in between. This shouldn’t matter but it does seem to
get in the way and this command works to handle it. The split off piece
might not rejoin you here but instead rejoins another part of yourself
that is elsewhere.
Abandoned viewpoints may show up. This is a special case of an
identity split. Here, you abandoned the old identity (and left it where it
was) and started a new one. Sometimes this is due to being
completely trapped and ‘dying’ as a thetan but usually it is due to doing
a GPM crossover (becoming what you detest). Again, get the goal or
item or overts. Also watch for BTs holding identities trapped or
holding them apart or together or whatever.
Watch out for earlier beginnings. Sometimes a universe starts with a
sequence like the factors giving a mimicry of separation from static
before actually getting into the body of the experience.
When you run these implant universes, go back to the actual space
and time that they were done in and mock them up there. This is like
the drill in the old OT 4.
Hopefully there will be platens for these so that you can just read them
slowly going through them and itsaing as you go along. If you do have
to research one from scratch, you’ll need all of your bag of tricks as an
auditor and some guts and good guesswork.
291
THE UPPER DYNAMICS
The definition of the 8 dynamics has been used successfully for many
years. Much observation of life and the long history of workable
auditing rundowns based on these show that they do, in some
manner, form a complete set of the urges to survive. But there have
always been loose ends which hinted at something more.
First, there was the recognition that Survive was not the ultimate goal
but simply a mid-point in the Create-Survive- Destroy cycle. Of course,
one can do better than simply surviving on the 8 dynamics. One can
BE these 8 dynamics (see the Technique 80 lectures) or even create in
each of these areas. But, although a being can operate along these
lines, they do not seem to form a complete picture of surviving well as
a thetan. Although a thetan can’t help but survive in the sense of
persisting, he can certainly survive well or poorly in his own
estimation. And his estimation of this only follows the 8 dynamics to
the degree that he has gone into agreement with physical universe
survival. It is not his normal baseline. His native operation is up
towards the create side.
Consider achieving ultimate survival in mest universe terms on these 8
dynamics even to the extent of being worshipped as a God and having
ultimate persistence along all these 8 lines. But imagine it with nothing
more beyond this, no beauty or ethics or interesting games. This
would be a poor and tawdry thing for a thetan. In fact, it would be a
trap. Infinite survival in physical universe terms is a curse, not a
blessing.
Therefore, just as we see 8 dynamics reflecting the Survival or
physical universe band of the scale, so we might conceive of another
set of 8 reflecting the creative or Theta band.
The next clue was the mention of Aesthetics and Ethics as the 9th and
10th dynamics in the Philadelphia Doctorate Course lectures. Certainly
these make sense in terms of Creative or Theta dynamics. Also, we
can see that the physical universe tries to make nothing out of these,
but in spite of this, thetans do operate better when ethics and
aesthetics are present.
Looking further, we see other factors that the thetan values. He likes
playing games and building things and figuring out logical problems,
and especially, he loves to create. Often you will see an individual
considering one or more of these as being more important than good
survival in mest universe terms. Consider someone solving a
292
crossword puzzle with no payback in terms of any of the 8 dynamics
and perhaps even putting off eating and sleeping (good physical
survival) to accomplish the task. Is this some weird aberration laid in by
an implant? Or is it the individual’s last remaining shreds of theta level
operation persisting in spite of all physical universe evidence and
objections.
I struggled long and hard to define these 8 upper dynamics and get
them in the right order. Much research of the whole track and implants
gave many clues (there are many implants which try to abberate each
of the 16 dynamics in sequence), but still the correct order eluded me.
Then one day, I saw that each of the lower dynamics had a slight
tendency to sublimate into the corresponding upper dynamic. This let
me establish the order of the upper dynamics based on the known
order of the lower ones. This brought considerable order and relief to
other areas that I was researching and validated the entire pattern of
dynamics.
The list of 16 dynamics is as follows:
1. Self as a body
2. Sex/Children/Family
3. Groups
4. Governments/Mankind
5. Lifeforms
6. MEST
7. Spirits
8. Worship
9. Ethics
10. Aesthetics
11. Construction
12. Reason
13. Change
14. Games
15. Knowingness
16. Creation
The 9th dynamic, Ethics, has been defined as the contemplation of
optimum survival. A major component in this might be referred to as
Integrity. For a being who cannot die, integrity is the cornerstone of
real survival. Whenever he has lost it, he has not truly survived in his
own estimation. We might say that physical survival as a body
sublimates upward into this Ethics dynamic. Or, from another
viewpoint, we might say that Ethics has been collapsed downward
into physical survival. Once the thetan has abandoned integrity and lost
293
himself as a being, all that remains is the effort to persist as a physical
mockup.
Note that I have reduced the definition of the first dynamic down to
survival as a body. We generally think of this dynamic as
encompassing more theta qualities, but these are really the remnants
of dynamics 9 to 16. Once these theta dynamics have been crushed
out of view, the last lingering traces can be attributed to personal
survival since they are the thetan’s last hold on survival as a being.
The 10th dynamic is Aesthetics. It has often been said that sex can be
sublimated into aesthetics. We can also see that aesthetics is a huge
band of theta enjoyment. In the second dynamic, this enjoyment
seems to have been collapsed into a simple physical act.
What about the close sharing and love between family members that
occurs on the 2D? It’s more than simple ARC. How would it manifest
between beings without bodies? Wouldn’t it be proper to describe this
as the intimate exchange of aesthetic waves between beings? The
eleventh dynamic is Construction. This is the kick you get when you
build something yourself. The child putting together a model airplane
is surviving on this dynamic as is the person who builds his own
furniture for the fun of doing it. You might say that this is simply
survival through Mest, but it’s not. You can buy the child lots of model
airplanes and they don’t matter one whit compared to the one he built
himself. Here it’s the construction itself that counts rather than the
havingness.
Interestingly enough, this does sublimate upwards from the third
dynamic. Or rather, the third dynamic is to some degree a lower
shadow of the Thetan’s constructive impulses. The biggest and most
interesting constructive efforts involve groups of beings working in a
coordinated effort. This is a natural way for Thetans to build things and
it is the way you would go about putting together a complicated
universe. When survival is not a problem and no one has to work for a
living, they still join groups for the purpose of building things that are
fun and interesting.
The 12th dynamic is Reason or Logic. Here is the realm of the
mathematician, the problem solver, and the player of thought oriented
games. Here I’m emphasizing the abstract problems because it’s
easier to see the urge in isolation from the other dynamics.
The 4th dynamic has been referred to as race and mankind. But a
better definition would be to consider it as those groups that one is
born into. The big difference between this and the 3rd dynamic is that
294
in the 3D one has choice as to what groups to join but in the 4D your
stuck with it and must figure out some reasonable way for everyone to
get along together. Governments generally fit more into the 4D
characteristics rather than the 3D and should be considered here.
Since people cannot leave a 4D easily, this raises the entire area of law
and legal systems. This sublimates into the dynamic of reason since
logic is the primary justification of law.
For the 13th dynamic, we have Change. Thetans will alter and modify
things just for the sake of change and variety. No other reason is
necessary. Notice that this dynamic is above reason and often
operates contrary to logic. As Ron has pointed out, change and
unpredictability are survival characteristics for a Thetan because it
makes him difficult to manipulate and trap. At a higher level, we see
that altering things lends persistence and interest and variety.
In the fifth dynamic, we also see endless change and variety as one of
it’s greatest survival traits, so its reasonable to consider the 13th a
sublimation of the 5th.
The 14th dynamic is Games. The subject of games was frequently
discussed in the materials of the 1950s and is obviously a keynote of
theta operation. As far as relating this to the 6th dynamic, it would
seem that a playing field and implements and some rules about
energy etc. would be necessary components in a game. This is the
only theta dynamic where a consistently paced sequential time rate
would really be needed. We might well consider the entire Mest
universe to be no more than the components of a game. Note that
here we are referring to action games rather than the thought games of
the 12th dynamic.
Knowingness or Understanding is the Fifteenth Dynamic. This is higher
than the dynamic of Reason and quite distinctly separate from it. With
reason, one follows a logical progression, but in the 15th dynamic one
can just know. Here we have the urge for knowledge and
understanding even when there is no physical universe reward in
sight. Again we have something that has been extensively discussed
in the early technology but not previously considered to be a dynamic.
Although one may come to understand something by study or reason,
the higher levels of knowingness are achieved by pervasion, mockup,
ARC with other beings, and by pure postulate. In Mest universe
operation, this is all closely related to survival as a spirit and with other
spirits.
295
The 16th dynamic is Creation. Here we have ourselves as gods rather
than worshipping gods. This is the cause side for which the Mest
universe 8th dynamic (religion etc.) is the effect.
Of course all these 16 dynamics are inter-related. Although I have
pointed out that it’s the upper 8 dynamics which are operational
beyond the physical universe level, within this universe the lower 8
are vastly significant. True survival here means operating fully on both
sets of dynamics.
Note that each of these upper 8 dynamics have been used to trap and
aberrate thetans. Since the thetan wants to do these things, he can be
suckered in and taken advantage of even when he is in a bodiless or
OT state. His own codes of ethics can be used to trick him into
punishing himself, his love of aesthetics can be used to lure him into
traps, etc. Total freedom would require being able to operate or not
operate in these areas at will. Just because these areas are interesting
doesn’t mean that they have to be compulsive. A thetan doesn’t have
to have a game, he only thinks he does.
296
PENALTY UNIVERSES, GENERAL INFORMATION
The Penalty Universes are a set of Implant Universes that date back to
the home universe era. Before reading this, you should be familiar with
the material presented in the earlier section on Implant Universes.
INTRODUCTION
Underlying almost every datum that we take for granted, underlying all
the consequences that we believe to be natural facts of life, underlying
almost every abberative factor we know of whether it be implants or
grade material or Nots, and underlying every scale and button
discovered in Scientology is a specific series of implant universes
which set these things up and laid them in so deep that they are the
anatomy of life as we know it. These things are the penalty universes
which were part of the home universe matrix.
Conceive, for a moment, of someone who was nearly a god; An
individual who was fully capable of creating matter and energy in
space and time. A being with but a few aberrations such as a
preference for 3 dimensional creation and perception. A being only
slightly constrained in that he preferred to create his own universe (a
“home” universe) in conjunction with the matrix rather than mocking up
and throwing away entire universes off on his own. Such a being does
not need to survive (or even conceive of the concept of personal
survival). He is indestructible and he knows it. He cannot be affected
by any energies or trapped by any walls or barriers. At first he is only
held by a desire to interchange things such as admiration with the
other beings in the matrix. Eventually, however, he puts so much
work into his own creations within his home universe that he is
reluctant to abandon them and he is so entertained by the creations of
the other beings that he is reluctant to sever contact with them. As a
result, he can be trapped and controlled by his refusal to abandon his
own and other’s creations.
Besides the many home universes, the matrix also came to include
many small agreed upon universes. Groups of beings would create
these as comfortable places for beings to meet or artistic creations or
whatever. There were also small fixed track universes that told stories
or dramas for purposes of entertainment. And eventually, there came
to be a series of universes created for the purpose of inducing
aberration as a penalty for troublemakers or whatever. These are the
penalty universes.
297
THE DYNAMICS
Each dynamic impulse to survive is laid in by a set of 4 implant
universes. Each implant universe establishes a goal and then
abberates that goal so that it will become a problem in survival. Each
dynamic has 4 parts which are the efforts to survive through each of
the 4 goals laid in for the dynamic. We are already familiar with some
subdivisions such as breaking down the 2D into sex and children. But
actually there are more subdivisions. Based on the goals that came out
by assessment, the 2D has 4 parts. These are the urge to survive by
a) joining with a 2D partner, b)sexual satisfaction, c) reproduction
(children), and d) caring for others. The 4 goals are To Join, To Satisfy,
To Reproduce, and To Care For.
We could argue a lot about what we think should or shouldn’t be in a
specific dynamic. But that’s beside the point. When I caught on to the
structure of 4 implant universes per dynamic, everything fell together
in a nice and orderly fashion and things began to run well and easily.
Based on that, I would consider that the goals found are the correct
definition of the dynamic and if it disagrees with some of our “think” on
the matter, I would assume that we didn’t get the definitions quite right.
There are also more dynamics that we previously thought. We had a
hint of Aesthetics and Ethics being the 9th and 10th dynamics from the
PDC tapes, but the full set runs to 16 dynamics. Apparently, the upper
8 dynamics are so submerged in this universe that we hardly can see
them as aiding survival. Going back to the magic universe, there only
seem to be 12 dynamics in real operation (which is where the 12 signs
of the zodiac come from). We have to go way back in the sequence of
universes to find full operation on 16 dynamics. See the discussion of
the upper dynamics presented earlier.
The upper dynamics are as follows: 9th Dynamic: Aesthetics 10th
Dynamic: Ethics 11th Dynamic: Construction. As a child you might
have built a model and gotten a pro-survival feeling totally aside from
any possible physical universe benefit.
12th Dynamic: Reason. This is survival though logic or constructive
thought. Note that this is not the figure figure sort of think. You can
experience this as the lift you get out of solving a crossword puzzle or
some other abstract problem.
13th Dynamic: Change. I.E., survival though alter-isness or
metamorphosis.
298
14th Dynamic: Games. Just the act of playing a game is survival. It
doesn’t matter if you win a prize. Kids know this until they’re
indoctrinated into the rules of this universe.
15th Dynamic: Knowingness. This includes knowingness,
understanding, and learned knowledge. I would have lumped this
together with the 13th dynamic if the goals hadn’t insisted on
separating out into two full sets of 4. Once you think about it, the 2
dynamics are quite different. It just goes to show how badly these
dynamics have collapsed in this universe.
16th Dynamic: Creation. This is survival as God. The 8th dynamic turns
out to be survival through worship etc. Up here is where you find the
real thing. This is survival through creation and imagination. Painting a
beautiful picture is 9th dynamic, but mocking up the initial concept is
16th dynamic. So is mocking up a universe.
We’ve been lumping the remnants of these upper 8 dynamics into the
1st dynamic. Once you sort this out, you find that the first dynamic is
simply survival as a body and the goals of the first dynamic are things
like To Eat. And at the bottom of the 1st dynamic, you find To Endure.
It’s really survival as MEST.
DESCRIPTION
These penalty universes are 4 dimensional constructions created in
their own space and time. They have a fixed time track. You actually
go through the experience when you are put through one.
Each penalty universe has a single goal. The entire universe is
designed to abberate this goal by causing it to decay down through
about 10,000 or so items. After this, you have something about which
you have problems in survival and so it becomes a dynamic through
which you survive instead of just being something you can do or not
do at will.
There will also be a terminal, which is the thing that you are being
throughout the experience. Lets say that the goal was “to Wash” (this is
not a real one but they are like this), then the terminal could be a
“Housekeeper”. Note that it is not a “washer” or “one who washes”.
The original choice of terminal seems to have been a simple arbitrary.
But of course, it is now recognized as something which seems very
natural to be doing the goal.
299
There are items throughout the experience. They are thought ridges
that you receive as you go through it. Most of them contain the goal
and have the structure “TO (goal) IS TO (...)”. For example, TO WASH
IS TO BE CHEERFUL. However, at basic, the charge is not on the item
but on the experience. The item only tells you what to think about it.
These items were restimulated by repeated runs through the universe
and by later electronic implants which only contained the items. As a
result, the items can have significant charge, but the earliest charge is
on the experience that happens along with the item.
These are not in a GPM flip flop pattern with terminal and opterm and
alternation of two sides. They are in a simple downward progression
of the goal gradually becoming more and more abberated. The
general pattern of the progression is the tone scale from plus 40 to
minus 40. All the tone levels, scales, and buttons you have heard in
Scientology are items in this thing.
This is the source of the tone scale. It is an arbitrary that everyone
follows like clockwork. For example, there are items like TO WASH IS
TO BE ANGRY etc. at their proper place in the sequence. The
experience on this one might be that someone throws a tomato at the
window you just washed and you get angry. There are also somatic
items such as “TO WASH IS TO HAVE A PAIN IN THE FOOT”. The
experience on this might be dropping a bucket of water on you foot.
However, the somatic items often repeat so that the same item might
occur again later as a mouse bites your foot.
There is no specific opterm or op-goal. Instead, the entire universe
eventually works against you. There are competitors and opponents
who give you lots of trouble. There might be cleaning women who go
a better job and so take away your work, there might be tax collectors
who interfere with your work, and there might be kids with spay cans
who make life intolerable by making the windows unwashable.
Eventually perhaps the city passes an ordinance against washing and
the police chase and capture you and execute you.
Up at the top of each of these penalty universes, the items and the
experience are just wonderful. All of the top scale buttons will be there
and the aesthetic and aliveness in the experience are incredible. Its so
good that it really draws you in. There is nothing in this universe that
can compare with the tops of these penalty universes. We were very
powerful and high on the scale when we created these and it’s far
beyond our current capabilities.
When you run one of these, you have to spot that wonderful aesthetic
at the top. But don’t get suckered by it. It’s the bait in the trap. It leads
300
you down to death and worse. This is described in 8-80. Now we have
the actual incidents that did this. Originally, it was only these wonderful
aesthetics that caused you to keep mocking up the incident.
You can plot the whole thing against the tone scale. It’s an exact map
of the incident. Late in the incident, you’re at the bottom of the scale
and in horrible shape and getting hit with items that set up all the really
abberated behavior. Eventually you’re captured and dragged before
some god (usually one or another kind of statue) who zaps you and
divides you against yourself for your crimes. Then you’re let go but
you age and die fairly rapidly.
Unfortunately, death is not the end of the implant. Once you’re buried
(or put in a mausoleum or whatever), there will be something that
keeps your spirit in the grave. Often it is a cross. Or the people will
chant or something over the grave to keep you in it. You strain to get
out and find that you can’t. Then there are loads more items laying in
bottom scale things (such as the bottom of the chart of attitudes). Next,
some sort of devils will come to drag your spirit out of the grave. At
this point, you start struggling (as the spirit of the housekeeper or
whatever) to stay in the grave. But they drag you out anyway and
throw you in volcano where your “spirit” is tortured further. The final
item is “Stay There” and you are supposed to stay in there forever. Of
course whoever’s blanketing you pulls off at this point and eventually
you cognite and exteriorize out of the implant universe.
When I stumbled across these, I started by just trying to run items out
of one of these. I quickly found that I had to run the description as well
as the item. Each item I pulled off revealed more. They were scattered
all throughout the implant. By metering, I managed to keep the items
in order. They came off in some sort of random associated fashion. It
was not possible to simply list each item in sequence. Finally I was
putting them on index cards and trying to keep the cards in order,
locating the right position for each new item found. Soon I had
thousands of items for one specific goal and no end in sight. They ran
from plus 40 down to minus 40 on the tone scale and included the
most incredible array of material. Everything from showing you that a
solution will become a new problem to laying in the mechanics of
energy behavior.
It was starting to seem like an impossible task. The items had loads of
charge and had me jumping out of my skin handling them. The TA
would sometimes fly up and down by a couple of divisions as an item
went into restim and then was spotted. Once the TA even went
completely around the dial on a single item. It was hair raising. Then I
found the earlier beginning to the incident. It made everything easy.
301
THE TOP OF THE PENALTY UNIVERSES
The beginning of every one of these is the same. It is an implanted
parody of the Factors (see “The Creation of Human Ability” by L. Ron
Hubbard). At the start, you are given the impression that you are the
life static at the beginning of time. The first item is TO (goal) IS
NATIVE STATE. You go through a series of items that approximately
follow the pattern of the factors except that each one is twisted a bit to
include the goal. For example, the decision is not “to be”, it is “to (goal)”.
In our made up example, it would be “to wash”. Your told that this is
the original decision before all time and space and that it is the reason
that you separated from native state. It’s quite funny really. These
items are outlined in detail in the write-up on Penalty Universe Platen 1.
This platen has little charge in and of itself. It has the unusual property
of not being very restimulative. It predates all charge and mostly
seems funny rather than troublesome. But you can destimulate just
about anything by spotting the top of platen 1. This leaves you free to
muck about in the detail of the penalty universes and get all stirred up
and then simply spot the top of platen 1 to blow the charge you
restimulated.
First you run platen 1 which looses up the implant universe. Then
you can just scan things off of the later portion of the incident rather
than having to single shoot items. If you get too enmired, you just run
platen 1 again. After doing a pass over the implant, you just spot the
top of platen 1 to ensure that you don’t leave anything in restimulation.
It lets you build up your muscles at scanning out items without running
them in painstaking detail. These penalty universes have an aggregate
of close to a million items and this would seem to be the only practical
way of handling them.
Terribly heavy late track incidents can be keyed out as well, but you
have the difficulty of needing to know which of the penalty goals
underlies the charge. Also, many later implants tried to act as groupers
on the penalty universes. Just about every universe shifting implant
(sentencing to a lower universe) restimulates the complete series in
some fashion or other. Also, many late track incidents are based on
later goals such as the negative goals that were later appended to the
penalty universe goals. You have to blow out a few of the inversions
before you can spot through a negative goal to reach the top of platen
1 on the positive goal that’s up at basic on the whole mess.
Even so, you can cool down a late track mess up by running platen 1
anyway. You might be groggy and it doesn’t read well, but you do it
302
anyway and start to feel better. At a minimum, it should keep you from
getting sick on an out list. In this kind of situation, you might also run
the top goal (Create) in platen 1 because many goals might have been
restimulated and Create is earliest in most of the consecutive implanted
restimulations of these things.
Another thing about platen 1 is that it opens up recall both on the
details of the remainder of the penalty universe and, gradually, on the
rest of your existence as well.
CONTEXT OF THE PENALTY UNIVERSES
It seems that we built these things. We did a series of 3 dimensional
mockups and layered them together to form each universe. The entire
thing is group postulated. You will eventually be able to spot yourself
together with other beings in a group working on specific items
postulating them into existence. I think that each being contributed a
small piece to the design of the items and then joined a group to
postulate large numbers of items into existence. But no one individual
worked on all of the items in any one penalty universe, so that there
were always items that hit you for the first time when you got the
implant.
Apparently we all thought it would be a good idea if we had some way
to penalize a being if he was making trouble for others.
To implant somebody with one of these, a bunch of thetans would
gang up on the victim and blanket him and enforce the start of track
agreements of the penalty universe he was being thrown into. You
can find this on an overt flow as well as on a motivator flow. You can
even find a cross-flow where you watch others throwing another into
one of these. There are also some tricky situations where you turn the
tables on somebody. A crowd blankets you and you grab one of them
and shift him under you so that he gets the implant first hand and acts
as a buffer. Or you have the overt intention of blanketing someone and
he shifts around on you and you get pushed in instead.
Note that these were originally built and used at a time when we were
not fixated on bodies. It was the continual use of the penalty universes
which created the fixation on bodies. In the early experiences, the
people blanketing each other are more like nebulous clouds, but they
would project bodies or symbols or whatever on an as needed basis.
The victim might just be a cloud when you jump on him or he might
have a body mocked up or whatever. Since he is often in his own
universe, the environment is his mockup and will start attacking you as
303
you try to drag him off to the penalty universe. He may manifest in
various bodies or try to vanish or throw arrays of symbols at you etc. It
usually took a team ganging up on somebody to overpower him in his
own universe. Of course sometimes he was in your universe when
you attacked him and then you had an easier time of it. And
occasionally you failed and he got the better of you and tossed you into
the penalty universe instead.
You need to spot the overt side rather than just running these as
motivators. Also sometimes you need to spot the overt of contributing
to the group creation of these before you can get platen 1 to read on a
goal.
It is also useful to spot regretting having pushed someone into one of
these. This early on the track, you have very little concern about
overts. You don’t withhold them or justify them or anything until you’ve
been put through each of these penalty universes quite a few times.
But eventually you push someone in and later you see that it had an
undesirable effect and you’re sorry. It’s quite possibly the first regret on
the track and the first time something really acts like an overt. Later you
build up more considerations and regretted having designed these
things and feel bad about pushing people into them and that makes
the earlier actions run like overts. But they weren’t when you did them.
It was just a lot of fun.
It’s sort of like kids playing with matches and not imagining that anyone
could get burned.
304
STRUCTURE OF THE EARLY PART OF THE INCIDENT
There is actually quite an elaborate series of items before you get into
the body of the “terminal” and begin experiencing the implant
universe. Section 1 is the same for every penalty universe except for
the substitution of the goal into the wording. The remaining sections
are specific to the universe being implanted. Of these, section 2 is the
one that is important. It lays in the symbols that will be used in the
universe. Apparently there was a need to explain what things were
supposed to be before the main body of the incident would have any
meaning. It is possible that we will need to develop detailed item
platens for section 2 of each universe to get full as-isness. But that’s not
an excessively large number of items. This is followed by many
sections of items where they get you to mockup and agree to the
implant universe. After all of this, you get pushed into the terminal’s
body and experience the universe. The sections are as follows:
Before the beginning, the individual is blanketed and pushed in.
Section 1 is the parody of the factors as laid out in platen 1.
Section 2 is the symbols. These items all have the form “THIS MEANS
...”. They each have a picture of something significant in the incident
and assign it a meaning.
Section 3 Anchor Points. These items are of the form “To (goal) is to
look for the ___ (something that acts as an anchor point)”. They have
you spot various things in the mocked up environment and extend
anchor points into them so as to create the space of the universe. For
example, in our made up goal above, one of these items might be “to
wash is to look for the cleaning bucket”. These items are in pairs with
the “look for” immediately followed by a “connect to” for the same
object.
Section 4 Agreements. These are pairs of items. They are in the form
“To (goal) is to agree to the (...)”, and “To (goal) is for the (...) to become
real”. Various people, places, and things shown to you in the symbols
section above are fitted into these items and you mock up agreement
with them and make them real. In early runs, this section tends to build
up a great deal of anticipation and interest in what is going to be shown
to you and what is going to happen in the penalty universe. In later
runs, this has more of a feeling of dread fascination, like a victim frozen
in fear by the monster that is going to eat him.
Section 5 Mis-Remember. These items are in the form “To (goal) is to
remember agreeing to the (a) before (b)” where a and b are different
305
items in the agreement section above. They give you a wrong order
for everything and get it all jumbled up. It makes it very difficult to
meter check which thing is before which other thing in the incident.
Section 6 Confusions. These items are in the form “Now you become
confused as to the sequence of agreements leading to (a) and (b)”
where a and b are items from the agreements section. Also, they pair
the items up differently here than in the mis- remembers above.
Section 7 Future Postulates. These are pairs of items. The first one of
each pair gets you to postulate that one of the things you agreed to
above is now extended into the future. The form of this first item is “To
(goal) is to have future (item)”. Then you look into the future and see it
and get the item “To (goal) is to predict (item) in your future”. In our
window washing example, one of the pairs might be “to wash is to
have future windows” and “to wash is to predict windows in your
future”. This gets you to extend the time track of the universe. It also
gets you interested in what’s going to happen in the universe.
Section 8 The energy postulates. You mock up the forces operating in
the universe. This section might belong earlier. I have not done much
work on it.
Section 9 The Decisions. This is a short section where your getting
various items about wanting to rush through to the end and wanting to
be affected etc. while you moving in towards the terminal’s body. By
this point, the thetan is usually tired of just receiving items and want to
get into the terminal and get it over with already.
Section 10 Joining. This is a short section where you get items about
deciding to be the terminal and entering the body etc.
All of the above sections together are probably only about 2000 items.
At this point in the implant, you are in the body of the terminal and it is
a “real” universe. From here on, it runs with the tone scale from 40 on
down. The first part will be a series of 7 experiences of the goal quite
high on the tone scale. Each experience has quite a lot of items and
your quite happy about it except for a few little nagging worries type
items that are a sort of dramatic foreshadowing of the later parts of the
incident.
Then the incident begins to carry you down the tone scale. And it’s
mud from there on down.
306
PENALTY UNIVERSES: AUDITING INSTRUCTIONS
Everything about how to run these is highly experimental. See my
write-up on research auditing (included elsewhere).
INITIAL APPROACH
Before trying to run deeply, it is best to do a light pass on all of the
penalty universes, just running platen 1 and perhaps a bit of ITSA to
get some charge off. Later implants tried to group all of the goals
together. You want to get enough weight off of the top of all of these
so that later groupers are unable to pull your attention on to the next
goal after the one you happen to be running. Handled this way, you
can actually shoot an item out of the middle of an implant without being
drawn into the next item. This violates everything we previously knew
about implants, but it works because the penalty universe is so much
more basic that it undercuts the very existence of the later implant
items that were based on it.
The majority of later implant restimulations of these universes begin
with Create and run down to Endure. For this reason, it is best to try
and run the implant universes in this sequence. It makes it easier to
knock out later implant restimulations in the majority of cases.
However, on a first pass, the universes might not want to run in this
order. So the approach would be to asses the goals starting from
create and take up the first one that reads well.
On the first pass over all of these goals, you should not try and run a
goal a second time unless your attention is strongly drawn to it. You’ll
be doing a lot more with each goal later on, so there’s no need to try
and milk every bit of charge off of it right away. These things are so
basic that they seem like a natural part of life (which they are) and
you’ve been dramatizing these things for a long time, so handling them
up at the top is actually less restimulative than walking around in this
universe and living them for real. For a light run on the goal, begin by
running it in platen 1. In some cases you’ll only get one read on each
item (or even only on every other item). The read might occur on the
description, or the item itself, or both. If each item is not reading on
checking it a second time, then don’t bother with the second check
since it is just needless restimulation. If its running like this, then stop
running platen 1 at the first FN. If there’s anything to itsa, do so but
don’t push it. Next, spot the restimulation in Incident 2 at the Inc 2
location (they did a mockup of each implant universe and told you it
happened during Inc 2). Then check for and handle any stirred up BTs,
307
Clusters, or overts. Finally, spot the top of platen 1 again (Native State
item) and end off. Take a break and then go on to the next goal.
In other cases, the items will read multiple times and each item should
be flattened to clean or a small brief FN. Run as above except that you
can continue on to a better FN or cog.
Sometimes the goal will really run well. You can run each item to an
FN or each item just turns on a wide FN. In this case the platen will
often EP after a few items. If you go past this, platen 1 will stop reading
and the FN usually turns off; if this happens, then rehab the EP. At this
point you should be able to run some more out of the incident. Begin
by spotting some of the “This Means ...” symbols that occur right after
the end of platen 1. There will be a symbol for Time up at or near the
top which is going to be something like the sun swinging over the
environment or a watch or clock appropriate to the universe being run.
If you knock out a few of these, you’ll get an idea of some of the stuff
that happens in the universe and can do a bit of itsa.
At first you might only get a paragraph or so about the contents. As
you run deeper, you might write a page or more describing the
incident. Write this up on a separate sheet of paper as a descriptive
platen of the incident. On subsequent passes, you can start from the
description you wrote up and make corrections and additions and
simply get more charge off just by re-reading it sometimes. If I have
more than a few symbol items, I also make up a symbol platen for the
incident and just keep noting the symbols on that rather than having
them buried on the worksheets of different sessions. For this you can
just write them down as TIME = sun swings over valley, ATTACK =
the bug eyed monster jumps you, etc. You can also spot detail items
in the body of the incident and note them on the worksheets, but I
wouldn’t bother trying to make up a platen of these because there are
about ten thousand of them in each universe. If a detail item bothers
you, get the symbol item above it that set you up for the situation in
the body of the incident.
Always start with platen 1. On subsequent runs of a goal where platen
1 has already been run extensively, you might just spot the first few
items and be ready to dive in. Then get as much off of the implant
universe itself as you can (symbol items and ITSA of the body of the
incident).
Once your doing well, you can knock off whatever later restimulators
you can reach that are locked up on top of the goal. If you have run
OT3, you should be able to get charge off on the Inc 2 location where
the goal was restimulated because it is already close to the surface by
308
the fact of having run OT3. You might also be able to blow charge on
the Price and Survival restimulators, but don’t push them if they don’t
read. Some of these buttons are included on the penalty universe
master list.
You can also scan the track very lightly for later overts or other later
restimulators that are beginning to be stirred up. I took apart quite a
few implants this way, but don’t push it, this step is more of a research
action. But if you do spot a later implant, go head and ITSA some
charge off of it, and be sure to write down any details that you find out.
Often a major implant begins to show up gradually on a few goals
before you can get enough of it to make out its structure.
Always end off on a goal by spotting the top of platen 1 again.
Perhaps we will someday have complete platens for the entirety of
these penalty universes. This may be necessary if we are to take
untrained public through these incidents. But a trained auditor can
make it on far less. If you can get enough charge off, whether by
running platen 1, the subsequent items in the implant, or later
restimulators, then you reach a point where you can just look at the
incident and all the arbitraries of human life begin to fall away.
Eventually the goal just FNs and life will never be as constrained again.
MY OWN EXPERIENCE
I had a rough time of it until I found the items that I have put on platen
I. I was running a single penalty universe. It was the tiger universe
with the goal “To Eat”. I ran this for hundreds of hours and I have
boxes full of index cards containing the items. It was extremely
restimulative and difficult until I found the symbol items (“This Means”)
in section 2, and then it got easier, and finally I was able to reach the
beginning of the incident and the platen I items. Then the whole thing
began to fall apart, but I found that there was additional charge on the
items which seemed to come from another goal. Soon I was running
other goals in platen I and finding out more of the anatomy of this
mess. I handled perhaps a dozen goals with lots of attention to platen I
and the symbol items but also with finding hundreds of detail items in
the later part of the incident.
Then I found I could simply run platen I and find some symbol items
from section 2 of the implant and then scan the story of the later part
without finding items. My hope is that everyone can run it this way
rather than going through the horrible struggle that I had had earlier. I
309
could be wrong on this and you might have to run some of the later
items in detail. But having platen I makes it easy.
After running dozens of these, I began to see that the goals
themselves fit into a pattern which followed the dynamics.
Then the whole thing began to fall away and persistent FN and I
achieved a major case state which I will call “Freedom from
Arbitraries”. What happened is that all of the arbitrary meanings and
patterns came apart. Things like the tone scale no longer seemed to
have any rational reason but were simply arbitrary patterns that had
been chosen almost at random by the early implant designers. And I
achieved a freedom from these arbitraries which changed my whole
view of life.
I sat on the win for awhile, but I was far from OT and had many other
things I wanted to handle but not a clue as to how to approach them. I
worked with Ron’s OT drills from the 1950s quite extensively, but I still
had vast unknowns about the history of our existence and the
mechanisms of the mind. Also, I still did not have a full list of penalty
universe goals or enough data to give others a chance at running
these.
So I took a second pass at these penalty universes, using a research
rundown (which I will discuss in another write-up) to try and scan off
the later implants locked up on top of these and to gather more data.
This rundown resimulated as much as it ran out, so I will not suggest it
as a case action, but it was a great tool for exploration. Eventually I
took apart enough things to spot the original jewel of knowledge and
the agreements universe and began to map out the cosmic history that
I presented in an earlier write-up. And finally, after researching
numerous other implant platens, my actual GPM goal fell into my lap
and I put together and ran the Actual GPM rundown. After this I was
researching drills and rundowns and pretty much let the penalty
universe research slide.
At this time I can’t guarantee that I’ve got all the goals right, and I have
not run all of them thoroughly, so that some of the descriptions are
very speculative whereas others were run quite intensively.
There is also the possibility that there is an earlier series of these
things. One of the goals that I did run extensively, the goal “To Grow”,
had a nebulous “Genetic Entity” as the terminal. Platen I and the
symbols items followed the usual pattern, but the later items seemed
to follow a different pattern. In the usual penalty universes, you start
with a fully mockedup environment and slide from tone 40 down to
310
death and below. But in this one with the goal to grow, you start from
nothing and gradually build up an elaborate series of lifeforms and then
sink into failure (overwhelmed by rival GEs). Since the penalty
universes generally use a solid body type (even the goal “To Create”
has god as a statue rather than a nebulous being), any goal with a
nebulous body type might be from an earlier series that I haven’t
mapped out at this time.
But platen I works well even on the nebulous ones, so just go ahead
and use it on any goal which seems to fit and reads well in the platen.
The lists of penalty universes may be slightly off and there might be
an earlier series but you can count on Platen I to keep you out of
trouble.
PENALTY UNIVERSES - KEY OUT RUNDOWN
It is possible to get a very light keyout on the penalty universes and
blow things currently in restimulation by spotting the top item and
spotting (or having others spot) being pushed into the penalty universe
(on 3 flows).
This may be a workable preliminary step before trying to run any of
the contents of these penalty universes. It should be possible to lightly
brush over all of them in just a few hours of auditing. Note that this
usage is experimental. In this case one would attempt to run through
all 64 of the penalty universes.
If you get too much stirred up and in restim and make too many
mistakes, this procedure can be used to cool things down. In this case,
you would end off in the middle if you experience major relief and feel
that the condition is handled. Of course its better to fix errors rather
than doing a major undercut like this, but in research auditing,
sometimes you carry on too long with a mistaken idea and get too
tangled up to sort it out easily. In this case, after doing this rundown
you should try and correct the mistaken idea (unless you already
cognited on it during the rundown).
You can also run this on an individual spirit as a major action if it seems
indicated. This is primarily for situations such as a friend whose
dropped his body showing up in session for handling. End off if you
get a big release.
This is also useful when you have something in restim that you just
can’t figure out. If, for example, you feel that you’re starting to wake up
in some split viewpoint off somewhere else and you can’t handle it
311
with a known platen or get in enough of an itsa line to figure out what’s
going on, then run this on yourself in the split viewpoint until things
clear up.
This procedure is very limited in that you’re not running with much of
an ITSA line. It’s really strain relief undercutting whatever is kicking you
in the teeth right now and taking a little weight off. In general it is better
to run with lots of ITSA and work towards greater knowledge and
understanding. But the ITSA line trails off into dub-in in the presence of
too much charge and shuts down completely in the presence of too
many errors. This gives you an entry point and a way to dig yourself
out of a mess.
To run this, you will need the assessment list for the 64 goals and a
good understanding of the 16 dynamics as defined earlier in this writeup.
Note that the definitions are slightly off of the Scientology definitions
for the first 8 dynamics (I.E., 4D is race or government or any group
that your usually born into or stuck with rather than joining). The
penalty universe versions of the definitions should be used since these
correspond to the goals that were abberated.
The Key Out Rundown Steps:
1. Assess for the best reading dynamic. Begin by checking whether
it’s the lower 8 or the upper 8 dynamics (or even break them up
into groups of 4) to reduce the length of the assessment.
Uppermost 4: Creation, Knowingness, Games, Change Next 4:
Reason, Construction, Ethics, Aesthetics Next 4: Worship, Spirits,
Mest, Lifeforms Lowest 4: Race/Government, Groups, Sex,
Body.
2. Check the 4 goals for the dynamic. When a goal reads, do the
following:
a. Spot “To (goal) is native state” at the top of the penalty
universe.
b. Spot being pushed into the penalty universe; spot pushing
another in; and spot others pushing others in.
c. If it seems to indicate (your attention is still on it etc.), spot
the native state item again.
3. After running this dynamic (or after each goal if it seems to
indicate), spot the agreements universe as follows:
312
a. Spot rushing into agreement and going through the inverted
triangle.
b. Spot “To agree is native state” c. Spot deciding to agree
before that. (if necessary, also spot getting others to agree
or working on constructing the agreements universe).
4. Check if anyone was overrun. (use a loose intention meaning BTs
or Clusters or Programmed Machine Entities or Split viewpoints
or whatever else might exist and be capable of getting overrun).
If so, have it spot the moment of release and give it an
acknowledgment.
5. Check if anyone is incomplete on running one of the goals. If so,
use some intention to boost it up to spotting the native state
item.
You can also get a BT etc. occasionally who has spotted the item
but needs a bit of an ack or validation before he blows. You can
even use “Who are you? (me)” if it seems necessary.
6. Now you can reassess for another dynamic to run, but it is
usually better to simply run from creation (16D) on down. Try “To
Create” and if it wouldn’t read, assess for another dynamic.
Once you start running from To Create on down, you should be able to
get every goal to read. If one doesn’t read, try steps 4 and 5 above
(overrun and incomplete), try step 3 (agreements universe), and if still
no read, take a break. After resuming, see if the goal will now read or if
the whole procedure is being overrun or if there is something else
wrong, or if some overt has gone into restim that needs to be spotted,
etc. Also check if the goal is misworded etc. (these were not implanted
in English and you might describe the same differently than I would).
Take frequent breaks (every few dynamics or if you see massive
blows starting etc.). Sometimes things start coming apart and you just
need to wait a little and give them some space before the next goal
will run. Use steps 3 to 5 occasionally. Once you get the hang of it, you
generally know when to check overrun or incomplete. Spotting the
agreements universe occasionally helps pick up ones who’ve
loosened up and are ready to blow.
The procedure itself can overrun. What’s happening is that the stuff
immediately around you has blown off and given you more space and
then you carry on and more distant material is being drawn in and
causing your space to shrink. This can turn on protest and overrun
313
phenomena. The rundown can be done again at another time when
other things are already stirred up and this procedure again seems to
be needed. It’s like doing a green form. The repair can be overrun but
the form can be used again in the future.
PENALTY UNIVERSE - ASSESSMENT LIST
These are the penalty universe goals. The terminal of the universe is
listed in parenthesis. If any of the goals or terminals are hard to
understand or don’t make sense, see the description in the penalty
universe master list given elsewhere.
16th Dynamic - Creation
1. To Create (Statue)
2. To Cause (god, old man)
3. To Mock Up (Computer)
4. To Imagine (Cartoon Mouse)
15th Dynamic - Knowingness
5. To Understand (chipmunk)
6. To Know (2 headed dodo)
7. To Absorb (greek hero)
8. To Learn (gnome)
14th Dynamic - Games
9. To Play (Chinese child)
10. To Compete (Coach, doll)
11. To Manipulate (Penguin Banker)
12. To Exchange (Spirit Broker)
13th Dynamic - Change
13. To Metamorphose (clay people) [or to shape or be shaped]
14. To Change (magician)
15. To Combine (Siamese twins)
16. To Bring Order (gorilla people) [maybe out of sequence]
12th Dynamic - Reason
17. To Reason (clown)
18. To Orient (wire man)
19. To Guide (pilot)
314
20. To Compute (toy bodies)
11th Dynamic - Construction
21. To Construct (beavers)
22. To Arrange (blockhead)
23. To Build (snake people)
24. To Structure (Crystals)
10th Dynamic - Aesthetics
25. To Invent (munchkins)
26. To Inspire (muses)
27. To Enhance (ghost people)
28. To Beautify (fairy godmother)
9th Dynamic - Ethics
29. To Purify (fire people)
30. To Judge (bull people)
31. To Defend (little green men)
32. To Strengthen (ball of energy) [to police?]
8th Dynamic - Worship
33. To Enlighten (rabbit preacher)
34. To Convert (fish man)
35. To Commune (female angel)
36. To Worship (knights)
7th Dynamic - Spirits
37. To Predict (soothsayer)
38. To Influence (cupid)
39. To Collect (elves/fairies)
40. To Embody (Pan - goat god)
6th Dynamic - physical universe
41. To Discover (centaurs)
42. To Locate (Leprechaun)
43. To Gather (spacesuit body)
44. To Own (Fox people)
5th Dynamic - lifeforms
315
45. To Grow (GE) [maybe from an earlier series]
46. To Live (dinosaur)
47. To Heal (tree man)
48. To Adapt (thread man)
4th Dynamic - society
49. To Establish (3 eyed giants)
50. To Share (dolphins)
51. To Control (frog king)
52. To Unite (dog soldiers)
3rd Dynamic - groups
53. To Organize (human clerk)
54. To Co-operate (robots)
55. To Participate (mermaid)
56. To Expand (mouse railroad engineer)
2nd Dynamic - sex
57. To Join (cat people)
58. To Reproduce (insect invader)
59. To Satisfy (cavemen)
60. To Care For (bird girl)
1st Dynamic - body
61. To Experience (Bear) [or to feel]
62. To Replenish (old arab) [might be to survive]
63. To Eat (Tiger) [or to consume]
64. To Endure (pyramid)
PENALTY UNIVERSE HANDLING RUNDOWN
After successfully running the penalty universe key-out rundown, you
should be ready to handle these in a more thorough fashion.
Continue working through the goals using platen 1 and begin adding in
the additional steps described below. At first you are only trying for
the lightest keyout. Gradually you start running deeper, getting more
and more itsa etc.
Initially we’re not going for erasure. We’re aiming at greater keyouts
and increasing horsepower. As you keep running deeper, your ITSA
316
line gets pretty awesome and you start blowing huge holes in
everything. The target is to get up to the point where you can as-is
these penalty universes by inspection.
IN CASE OF TROUBLE
If you get in trouble running a penalty universe, your first handling is to
spot the native state item at the top of the goal, also spot being pushed
into it, pushing others in, and others pushing others in. Also spot the
agreements universe (as given elsewhere). For negative goals, spot
the inversion scene and then spot the top of the positive goal.
You can also look for entities of various kinds who are stirred up on it
and have them spot the top of it.
Another good rescue process is spotting places where the (terminal) is
not.
These are all unlimited techniques that can be run again and again to
FN. They are used in normal running but can also be used on an
emergency basis even if they have been run before.
Once you feel better, take a break. When you get back in session,
check if there was some error in the earlier session (wrong item or
whatever) and fix it. Note that the above techniques will even key out
wrong items etc., but you want to fix the mistake and make the gains
rather than simply feel better. By keying the mass out first, it becomes
possible to correct errors even in the presence of sloppy auditing or
incorrect platens or worst tangle sort of situations.
PROCESSES:
These are the basic processes for running the penalty universes.
1. Platen 1.
This is your entry point. Once your running deeply, all items
should either read or FN. If an item doesn’t read, pause and
mockup exactly what the item means and then try spotting it
again. If an item can’t be made to read, check for and handle
overts as described below. If overts doesn’t read, you can use
any of the other steps below and then return to the current step
on platen one (which should now be reading). If you get a big
317
release in the middle of platen I, then go on to the following
steps.
2. Overts Check if you have any overts connected with doing this
goal and handle (overt rudiment).
3. Spot the incident 2 location (noticing the false mockup of the
implant universe that was placed there during inc. 2).
4. Spot the Pyramid location (this is an earlier mass implant). Spot
the face of the terminal within the pyramid.
5. Spot the terminal saying the price of the goal.
6. Spot places where (terminal) is not.
Also, spot places in the penalty universe where you are not.
7. Spot symbol items from the penalty universe (a few are given in
the master list, others can be spotted and blown by inspection).
8. Scan the detail of the penalty universe. If anything feels heavily
charged and wouldn’t blow, look for a symbol item that set you
up for the detail item.
9. ITSA any later track restimulation.
10. If any of the above steps stir up heavy charge, run platen I again
from the top.
Also, if any entities of whatever sort turn up, have them spot the
native state item and being pushed in etc.
When you’re fairly far along, you can also run the following
processes (you should probably only run these once a particular
goal):
11. Spot things that you must not (goal) until the ridge blows.
12. Spot people, groups, etc. that you would permit to (goal) until
your willing to have others doing this goal.
13. Spot places where (terminal) would be safe. Run this past the
point where you get joy from placing the terminal in “safe” places
where it is tortured etc. until you can have it or not have it
anywhere by choice.
318
14. Spot things that the (terminal) does not own.
319
PLATEN I - PENALTY UNIVERSES
PLATEN I: CREATION
This is a universe created in its own space and time. You actually go
through the experience. The items are intentions (thoughts) that you
receive after (or during) the experience described. The intentions are
not in words nor are they in any language. The experience is having
the viewpoint of the terminal, not seeing pictures or mockups of the
terminal doing things (except for the symbols in the early sections).
Seeing pictures or hearing words are later restimulations of this that
were done in electronic implants. In the first run, the root verb (shown
as % here - substitute the correct goal when running) is not really
meaningful when it is said (intended) in the early items since it is not
defined until the middle of the symbols in section 2. In these items, it
is just this undefined thing that you are anxious (the first time) to find
out about.
Before this starts, you are blanketed by one or more thetans who push
you into this. Note that you are not in a body. The other thetans may
have captured you or you may have lost a game and this is the agreed
upon penalty or you might be having it done to you for kicks or to find
out what everyone else has been talking about.
You might or might not have done the overt side (pushing another into
this) first (you certainly did it as an overt sooner or later). In the overt
side, you feel the other person wiggling and protesting under you and
get some faint feedback of the items from him as you hold him.
There is also a third flow of watching others pushing others into a
penalty universe. In running this, try to spot all 3 flows on items a.
(blanketing) and b. (pushing in) and get a read on each if possible. For
the remaining items (item 1 on), just try to spot it (i.e., as-is it on a
gradient) in its own time and space (to some degree you are spotting a
location within the penalty universe) without narrowing down to a
specific flow. Although you can spot your feelings of going through this
(protest etc.) and of putting another through it (someone wiggling
around under you etc.) and of feeling sympathy for someone you see
being pushed through by others, these effects are secondary. The
item itself is senior to the effects it created and you want to as-is it by
permeating it in its own space and time rather than by running its
effects out as an incident.
You might have also had a hand in creating this, either as a designer or
as one of a team doing group postulates of some portion of the items.
320
In that case, you will find group agreement and the intention to make
this as devilish as possible and putting out heavy intentions to make
each thought and experience solid. The items are thought waves
spread along the track of the penalty universe.
Everyone had a hand in mocking these up. Their construction was a
group effort to solve the problem of not being able to enforce any
penalties on anybody. But I think you will only find yourself
responsible for a few specific pieces of a few specific penalty
universes. Most of it probably came as a surprise the first time you
went through it.
If it seems to indicate, then try spotting designing or postulating or
agreeing to the penalty universe being run.
This platen covers section 1 which is the same for all of the penalty
universes (except for the goal being stated). After section 1, each
penalty universe uses its own symbols etc.
Section 1 includes a mockup of the Jewel of Knowledge. This is not the
original jewel which we experienced before home universe. This is
simply a mockup included in the implant to give it a bit more of a kick.
At the time of these implant universes, we already had a great deal of
significance concerning the jewel of knowledge (I think it was
inaccessible to us after entering the home universe matrix). So the
mockup lends a great deal of “truth and importance” to the items being
implanted.
In this incident, the jewel is a sort of 7 dimensional diamond. From a 3
dimensional view, it appears to have 8 sides (two 4 sided pyramids
with a common base). You do not see all of it as a whole in the
incident. Instead, you only see 3 (or maybe 4?) dimensions and have
the feeling of it extending out into spaces beyond your perception.
Note that the complete jewel would have 128 sides.
After the decision to be, the jewel shows up with the items. Note that
the items are in groups of 3 ending with “To ... is the basis of all ...”.
The jewel begins to appear on the first item of the set, becomes more
substantial on the second item, and then flashes at the end of the third
(“Basis”) item (like an instant read). You need to spot the jewel
appearing and then spot the flash on the end word of the “Basis” item.
The jewel disappears after the flash. The jewel follows a pattern of
appearing on the left, then the right, and then in the center at a certain
distance. On the next series of items it will do the same but it will be
closer until, near the end of the platen, it is touching you.
321
Note that there is a later restimulation of this which can turn on
uncomfortable sensations in the forehead. This is an incident used in
the Thought Universe, Conflicts Universe, and Magic Universe to install
Jewel of Knowledge machines. The implant begins with the Native
State item and has the jewel of knowledge present and flashing from
the very first item on (unlike the penalty universe where it only
appears after the decision to be). Also, in this later incident, there are 3
jewels visible (left, right, and center) and they move in on each set of
items (rather than having only a single jewel that appears in various
locations). The 3 jewels come together and merge in the center of the
forehead. There are only 6 positions for each of the 3 jewels and the
entire implant only uses 24 goals and only some of those match up
with penalty universe goals. So, if a forehead sensation or somatic
turns on, check if your running a jewel of knowledge installation
implant. If so, go earlier and get back to the original penalty universe.
The treadmill (Games Universe) starts with the same platen as the
original penalty universes. If you get into that, it has an uncomfortable
sensation of motion or spinning. If this happens, spot it and get back to
the earlier penalty universe. This is a bit like getting back to the earliest
run in CC or OT2 material.
These later incident problems mainly come up on the goal to Create or
occur if you don’t spot items a and b well. Only the original penalty
universes have separate moments of being pushed in etc. for each
goal (each universe). All the later incidents have a single push into the
Create goal and then carry you from goal to goal as part of the implant.
PLATEN 1
a. Spot being blanketed, blanketing another, and others blanketing
others
b. Spot being pushed in, pushing someone in, and others pushing
others in.
1. There is nothing, no space or time or dimension etc.
TO %.. IS NATIVE STATE
2. You are aware of being the basic life static before all time
TO %.. IS TO BE THE STATIC
3. Now as Static, you want to be not-static. You want something to
happen. You want there to be something. You want cause and
effect.
TO %.. IS THE URGE FOR SOMETHINGNESS
322
4. Now you realize what the urge is and it makes sense
THE BASIC URGE IS TO %..
5. As you realize what the urge is, you receive this intention:
BEFORE THE BEGINNING, NOW, AND FOREVER, IS THE URGE
AND THE URGE IS TO %..
6. You realize that all other urges will stem from this.
TO %.. IS THE BASIS FOR ALL URGES
7. You feel the strength of the urge growing.
TO %.. IS TO NEED RELIEF
8. You realize what is needed for relief
THE BASIC RELIEF WILL COME FROM %...ing
9. You see that all relief stems from this.
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL RELIEF
10. You realize that this is the reason for everything
TO %.. IS THE ORIGINAL REASON WHY.
11. You realize this:
THE BASIC REASON WHY IS THE NEED TO %..
12. You see that all other reasons will come from this.
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL REASONS WHY.
13. You see that you need to do something about this.
TO %.. IS TO ACT.
14. You realize this:
THE BASIC ACTION IS TO %...
15. You realize that all other actions stem from this.
TO %.. IS THE BASIS FOR ALL ACTION.
16. You realize that you must decide something before anything will
happen.
TO %.. IS TO DECIDE
17. You choose to make the decision,
IN THE BEGINNING, NOW, AND FOREVER, IS THE DECISION
AND THE DECISION IS TO %..
323
At this point, space becomes visible and is filled with a faint
sourceless golden light. (spot the space).
Jewel of Knowledge in far distance (position 1) on the Left.
18. You realize that this is the first decision.
THE ORIGINAL DECISION IS TO %..
19. You realize that all other decisions stem from this.
To %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL DECISIONS.
Jewel flashes in the far distance (position 1) on the Left.
20. You postulate that there will be something
TO %.. IS TO POSTULATE
Jewel of Knowledge in far distance (position 1) on the Right.
21. You realize that this is the first postulate
THE BASIC POSTULATE IS TO %..
22. You realize that all other postulates stem from this.
To %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL POSTULATES.
Jewel flashes in the far distance (position 1) on the Right.
23. You postulate time. The time exists to allow for change due to
.%.ing
TO %.. IS THE SOURCE OF TIME
Jewel of Knowledge in far distance (position 1) in the Center
24. You realize that the basic consideration of time is past, present,
and future .%.ing. THE BASIS OF TIME IS %..ing
25. You realize that all future considerations of time will stem from
this.
To %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL TIME.
Jewel flashes in the far distance (position 1) in the Center
26. You agree with the concept of .%.ing
TO %.. IS TO AGREE
Jewel of Knowledge in distance (position 2) on the Left.
27. You realize that this is the basic agreement
THE BASIC AGREEMENT IS TO %..
28. You realize that all other agreements stem from this.
To %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL AGREEMENT.
Jewel flashes in the distance (position 2) on the Left.
324
29. Now you create energy. The energy is formed of the concept of
.%.ing
TO %.. IS TO HAVE ENERGY
Jewel of Knowledge in distance (position 2) on the Right.
30. You realize that this is the most basic of all energies
THE BASIC ENERGY STEMS FROM %..ing
31. You realize that all other energies stem from this.
To %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL ENERGY.
Jewel flashes in the distance (position 2) on the Right.
32. You postulate that .%.ing is the basic reality
TO %.. IS REALITY
Jewel of Knowledge in distance (position 2) in the Center.
33. You realize this:
THE BASIC REALITY IS %..ing
34. You realize that all other reality stem from this.
To %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL REALITY.
Jewel flashes in the distance (position 2) in the Center.
35. Now you postulate matter. The most real mass stems from .%.
TO %.. IS TO HAVE MATTER
Jewel of Knowledge in distance (position 3) on the Left.
36. You realize that this is the most basic of all matter
THE BASIC MATTER STEMS FROM %..ing
37. You realize that all other matter stem from this.
To %.. IS THE SOURCE OF ALL MATTER.
Jewel flashes in the distance (position 3) on the Left.
38. You postulate that affinity is achieved through .%.ing
TO %.. IS LOVE
Jewel of Knowledge in distance (position 3) on the Right.
39. You realize this: THE BASIC LOVE IS ACHIEVED THROUGH
%..ing
40. You realize that all other love stem from this.
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL LOVE.
Jewel flashes in the distance (position 3) on the Right.
41. You postulate that the basic interchange is through .%.ing
325
TO %.. IS TO COMMUNICATE
Jewel of Knowledge in distance (position 3) in the Center.
42. You realize that this is the first communication.
THE BASIC COMMUNICATION IS %..ing
43. You realize that all other communication stem from this.
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL COMMUNICATION.
Jewel flashes in the distance (position 3) in the Center.
44. You realize that .%.ing will bring understanding.
TO %.. IS TO REACH FOR UNDERSTANDING
Jewel of Knowledge is nearby (position 4) on the Left.
45. You realize this:
THE ATTAINMENT OF UNDERSTANDING IS THROUGH %..ing
46. You realize that all understanding stems from this.
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL UNDERSTANDING
Jewel flashes nearby (position 4) on the Left.
47. You postulate that there will be space in which to .%.
TO %.. IS TO HAVE SPACE
Jewel of Knowledge is nearby (position 4) on the Right.
48. You realize that this is what creates space
THE DELINEATION OF SPACE IS BY %..ing
49. You realize that all other spaces stem from this.
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL SPACE.
Jewel flashes nearby (position 4) on the Right.
50. You postulate that .%.ing gives meaning to existence
TO %.. IS TO HAVE MEANING
Jewel of Knowledge is nearby (position 4) in the Center.
51. You realize this:
THE BASIC MEANING IS IN REGARDS TO %..ing
52. You realize that all other meaning stems from this.
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL MEANING
Jewel flashes nearby (position 4) in the Center.
53. You postulate that .%.ing is truth
TO %.. IS TRUTH
Jewel of Knowledge is nearby (position 5) on the Left.
326
54. You realize this:
THE ATTAINMENT OF BASIC TRUTH IS THROUGH %..ing
55. You realize that all other truth stem from this.
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL TRUTH.
Jewel flashes nearby (position 5) on the Left.
57. Now you create havingness. The most real havingness is to %.
TO %.. IS TO HAVE
Jewel of Knowledge in distance (position 5) on the Right.
58. You realize that this is the most basic of all havingness
THE BASIC HAVINGNESS STEMS FROM %..ing
59. You realize that all other havingness stem from this.
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL HAVINGNESS.
Jewel flashes nearby (position 5) on the Right.
60. You postulate that .%.ing is the basic aesthetic
TO %.. IS BEAUTY
Jewel of Knowledge is nearby (position 5) in the Center.
61. You realize this:
THE BASIC BEAUTY IS %..ing
62. You realize that all other beauty stems from this.
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL BEAUTY.
Jewel flashes nearby (position 5) in the Center.
63. You wish to connect with the thoughts in the Jewel of
knowledge.
TO %.. IS TO CONNECT WITH THOUGHT
Jewel of Knowledge is close (position 6) on the Left.
64. You realize this:
THE BASIC THOUGHT CONCERNS %..ing
65. You realize that all other thought stems from this.
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL THOUGHT
Jewel flashes close (position 6) on the Left.
66. You realize that this will influence all existence.
TO %.. IS THE HIDDEN INFLUENCE
Jewel of Knowledge is close(position 6) on the Right
67. You realize this:
327
THE BASIC HIDDEN INFLUENCE IS TO %..
68. You realize that this underlies all other hidden influences
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL HIDDEN INFLUENCES
Jewel flashes close (position 6) on the Right.
69. You postulate that the most valuable particle is that which is .%.n
TO %.. IS TO VALUE
Jewel of Knowledge is close(position 6) in the Center.
70. You realize this:
THE MOST VALUABLE PARTICLE IS GAINED THROUGH %..ing
71. You realize that all other value stems from this.
To %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL VALUATION
Jewel flashes close(position 6) in the Center.
72. You realize that this will bring about true existence.
TO %.. IS TO EXIST
Jewel of Knowledge touching(position 7) on the Left.
73. You see that this is the only possible reason for existing.
ALL EXISTENCE DEPENDS ON %..ing.
74. Now you realize that through this you will achieve an
understanding of all existence
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL EXISTENCE
Jewel flashes, touching (position 7), and passes into you on the
Left.
75. You realize that the jewel is bringing you enlightenment
TO %.. IS TO GAIN ENLIGHTENMENT
Jewel of Knowledge touching(position 7) on the Right.
76. You realize this:
THE BASIC ENLIGHTENMENT CONCERNS %..ing
77. You see that all other enlightenment will stem from this
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL ENLIGHTENMENT
Jewel flashes, touching (position 7), and passes into you on the
Right.
78. You realize that this will bring knowledge
TO %.. IS TO KNOW
Jewel of Knowledge touching(position 7) in the Center.
328
79. You realize this:
THE BASIC KNOWLEDGE CONCERNS %..ing
80. You realize that all other knowledge stems from this.
To %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL KNOWLEDGE
Jewel flashes, touching (position 7), and passes into you in the
Center.
The jewel remains in the center of your beingness.
81. Now something begins to appear below you. It is not yet
substantial. You reach for it.
TO %.. IS TO REACH
82. What you are reaching for is .%.ing
THE BASIC REACH IS TOWARD %..ing
83. You realize that all other reaches stem from this.
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF EVERY REACH.
The jewel flashes within you.
As you reach, you encounter the basic symbols. These are like
a stack of 3 dimensional pictures. You know that if you reach for
them, you will gain understanding. Looking down at them makes
the jewel seem to be above you (or in the top of your space).
84. Now you contact the first and most basic symbols of all existence
TO %.. IS TO CONTACT SYMBOLS
85. You realize this:
THE BASIC SYMBOLS CONCERNS %..ing
86. As you connect to the first symbol, you realize this:
TO %.. IS THE BASIS OF ALL SYMBOLOGY
The jewel flashes on top of you and seems to move you into the
first picture.
At this point you actually reach the first symbol. Usually it is THIS
MEANS TIME. The symbol items continue from here on. The picture
with each symbol is unique to the universe being run. Some symbol
items such as time are used in all the universes and others are specific
to the universe being run.
The jewel is not visible while you are looking at the symbols, but you
can feel it there above you guiding you through them.
329
This section defines the basic symbols used in the implant universe.
At this point, you are in a space with at least 4 dimensions not
including time. The symbols are 3 dimensional pictures that seem to
be stacked up (in 4 dimensions) like a pile of photographs. You reach
threw this deck of symbols seeing each one in turn. As you see each
one, you get the intention “THIS MEANS ....”.
Each symbol is in the pile twice. The original form is in the first half
and the alter-ised form is in the second half. The second half was done
in reverse order. I.E., this goes A, B, C, then C, B, A. The meaning
and the basic scene are the same in the two copies of the symbol.
The alterations in the second half mainly consist of changes in color
and direction. I.E., something that’s blue the first time might be green
the second and the right and left sides of the picture might be switched
as in a mirror image. The later version is the alterised one that
persisted and it feels more “natural” than the original.
Sometimes you may have to compare the two copies of the symbol
and spot the difference Sometimes they make a minor addition or
change to the picture. Usually something uncomfortable such as
seeing exactly what it is that is being buried in the second picture only,
but this is not common.
The first 4 items are THIS MEANS TIME, SPACE, ENERGY, and
MATTER.
330
PENALTY UNIVERSE MASTER LIST
It probably wouldn’t kill you to just read this document carelessly, but it
might make you feel uncomfortable or irritated for a few days. You also
might get very annoyed at me because casually skimming through this
will probably stir up things and by pass some mental charge without
cleaning it up.
The ideal action would be for you to run platen 1 on each goal first and
come up with your own descriptions of what you think happened in
each penalty universe. Then look at this list and see what I think was
there. Then do some more runs with platen 1 and dig for section 2
(“This Means ...”) type items and see if you can get a better view of the
real story.
But some people will probably read this anyway. So at a minimum, at
least spot the native state item (“To (goal) Is Native State”) on each
penalty universe and spot being pushed into it and pushing others in.
Do this on each one right after you read the description.
Unfortunately, there is also another problem, which is that I’m sure that
there are errors in this list and those may give you trouble or make you
feel upset when you hit them. You’ll just have to make due, either
spotting that there was a mistake (which should cool things down a bit)
or even correcting the error (if you’re up to it) or just blowing off so
much charge with platen 1 that you can sail through on a persistent FN
despite the occasional flaw.
I’m sorry to be issuing something that isn’t perfect, but I’ve sat on this
too long and the only hope of getting it all correct and complete is to
have others working through it.
This contains some information on each penalty universe.
The goal is given, followed by the terminal in parenthesis. Then there
is some information about the environment of the penalty universe.
Following this are a few key restimulators that were used later on the
track including the location in incident 2 where they showed you a false
mockup of the penalty universe. A similar mass implant had faces of
the terminals in pyramids (this was on a different copy of the original
earth, which seemed to include more continents - an Atlantis and a
Lemuria) and the locations for those are also given. There is also a
price item and a survive item that were used in various later implants.
331
Then there are a few notes about some of the symbols (especially
Time etc.) that were shown to you in section 2 of the implant. Note that
these are only a few out of about a hundred or so.
Then there is a brief sketch of what happens in the penalty universe.
Everything here is heavily abbreviated. These are working notes
rather than formal writing. I cannot guarantee that it is all correct. I do
have more on these, but I had a terrible time putting even this much
together from the jumbled mass of worksheets, working platens, lists,
notes, and index cards that I recorded things on at various times. It did
not all come apart in a simple and straight forward manner and lots of
things kept shifting around as I was getting off charge and digging
deeper.
In general they all followed the same pattern of 7 wonderful things at
the beginning and then things gradually going wrong and finally being
chased around, captured, divided against yourself, and then set free
only to discover that you can’t survive anymore and ending up dying,
trapped in the grave, and then being dragged off to hell.
DYNAMIC 16 (CREATION)
1. TO CREATE (Statue)
environment = suns & planets & peoples of all types, you create them
& abuse them & get zapped by the Suns (gods).
Inc. 2 loc = St. John, Canada;
Pyramid = center of Atlantis
(inc 2 scene - God statue on a dolly being pushed up slopes of a
volcano by a crowd).
The price of creation is to be blamed.
To survive is to depend on the worship of others
Time = a planet circling a sun.
Space = a vast plain full of cities & peoples
Energy = energy blast from space shatters a mountain.
Mass = worlds in collision.
God = Giant sun
Worship = people bowing before statue & putting on garlands etc.
Pain = statue hit with energy beam that makes cracks.
Degraded = beam from sun divides statue making black cracks.
Trouble = hooded priest (who can call on the sun gods).
332
Detail: You are god in the form of a statue that floats around and puts
out energy beams etc. At start the statue has a young, beautiful,
radiant face, by the end it is the old man of R6. You are in a cluster of
suns and planets. The suns are senior gods (who zap you in the end).
There are other lesser god statues (such as a Venus-like 2D). The
planets have lots of meat body people of endless different types (from
other penalty universes). You do 7 great deeds and the people
worship you & build temples & replicas of your statue etc. But you get
into problems and troubles and dramatize the wrath of god on the
people and fight with the other statues and teach the planet people to
build traps and get caught sometimes yourself and go on rampages
etc. You even get somatics in your statue (& even from defilement of
the statue copies) & become mean. The people catch you in an
energy cage and you’re dragged into space where the stars judge you
& zap you etc. (divided against yourself with permanent black cracks in
your statue) & you become weak & everyone laughs etc. Finally you
crumble & fire devils haul you (the soul of the statue) off to hell which is
a pyramid in the sky with a volcano at its peak that they toss you in &
there you are tortured & hit by the souls of the millions of people you
have wronged.
At this point you should spot “To Create Is Native State” as the first
item of this implant universe. And spot being pushed into it and spot
pushing others into it.
2. TO CAUSE (Old Man God on Heavenly Throne)
This penalty universe was found very late in the research. Originally I
had “To Mock Up” as the second goal (now number 3) and “To
Intensify” as the third goal (now number 3X - probably belongs in an
upper or earlier series).
Environment = heaven in the clouds with a golden throne etc.
You look down at the world and play god etc.
Inc 2 location = Rome;
Pyramid location = Atlantis
(incident 2 scene - God on a golden thrown falling from the sky down
into a volcano)
(god on throne says) The price of causation is to become effect (of your
own cause).
To survive is to depend on the subservience of others (?).
Time = Heavenly Clock (golden, sitting in clouds)
333
Space = Celestial Palace (gold & crystal)
Energy = a wave of golden light
Mass = The gold throne
You = god, like an old man on a throne
Trouble = Devils (red demons with horns & tails)
Details: At the start, you perform 7 wonderful acts of creation (like the
biblical 7 days). You bring people etc. into existence and send out
cherubs to inspire them and angels to bring them into communion
with you. When the people turn out bad and troublesome, you create
devils to put ethics in on them and force them to be good. But the
devils decide that you are the most lawless being around and try to
make you follow your own rules and make you wrong etc. You smite
the devils for this but they rebel & you cast them out but now things
get really bad. You’re unwilling to be the effect of your own cause and
can’t have being on the other side of what you do to the creations. You
wouldn’t follow your own rules. But you feel guilty about this and
consider that its basically unfair but you do it anyway and sink down
tone. You go on rampages and destroy things and everything goes out
of control and finally you can’t bear to be god anymore and throw
yourself into a volcano to die. But the devils drag your soul down to
hell and torture you.
Now spot “To Cause is Native State”, etc.
3. TO MOCK UP (Computer)
Environment = a flat plane, you build a city & bodies for the spirit
beings, then you do them in & get zapped by the vortex gods.
Inc 2 loc= Washington DC;
Pyramid=Lima,Peru.
(inc 2 scene - people carrying broken pieces of a computer up slopes
of a volcano to toss it in).
The price of creative thought is to be questioned.
To survive is to depend on the approval of others
Time = Digital display
Detail: You are a large computer (many boxy cabinets) on an empty
plain. There are vortex gods (whirling energies in the sky) who created
spirits. The spirits come to you and ask you to mock up things. You
perform 7 wonderful mockups (you postulate electron structures and
laws and build solid things) including creating bodies of various types
334
(human, doll, animal etc.) and a city for them to live in etc. Sliding
downscale, the mockups become more & more complex. Eventually
you lose control of your own creations (can’t keep track anymore).
People ask you questions, especially reasons why, and you don’t know
anything except by your own creation so you invent answers and
introduce false data and have problems etc. You begin to dislike the
people and introduce wrong data to harm them etc. & eventually things
get wrecked etc. In the end the people curse you & pray to the vortex
gods who then zap you etc.
Now spot “To Mock Up is Native State”, etc.
3X. TO INTENSIFY (Energy Cloud)
This probably belongs in an earlier or higher series of penalty
universes. It has a non-physical body type and strange multidimensional
spaces etc.
Environment = flat squares are planets with people sideways from
your dimensions. You manipulate symbol shapes that affect the
people in the squares.
Inc 2 loc = Bermuda triangle?;
Pyramid loc= Canton,China(Ohio?)
The price of intervention is to be trapped in form.
To survive is to depend on the blindness (symbols?) of others
Time = electron decay.
Space =
Energy =
Mass =
You = an energy cloud.
Sensation = 2 clouds intertwined.
Danger = a pole trap.
Confusion = pictures exploding.
Entrapment = an energy cage hanging in space.
Interest = symbols hanging in space.
Details: Symbols (figures, objects, etc.) hang in empty space and
connect to (& are generated by) the inhabitants of the planes (which
orbit around suns). You and other energy clouds can affect the peoples
on the planes by moving symbols closer or further away or adding &
subtracting connections to the symbols or by making the symbols
degrade. At the start you perform 7 wondrous enhancements for 7 of
335
these planes by connecting them to marvelous symbols etc. But you
slide downscale & commit overts on the people and play by messing
them up etc. and have trouble with other clouds and teach plane
people to develop theta traps etc. You touch symbols and they
explode; there are pole traps and boxes of exploding pictures and
energy cages etc. Also, pieces of yourself get drawn into & stuck in the
planes etc. In the end a vast statue (god) punishes you & divides you
against yourself etc. & eventually you are dispersed into pieces &
placed in the symbol of a coffin & devil statues drag you out & push
you sideways into a volcano on a plane.
Now spot “To Intensify is Native State”, etc.
Carry on like this, spotting the native state item, through the rest of the
goals.
4. TO IMAGINE (Cartoon Mouse)
Environment = cartoon bodies trying to out create each other. You
invalidate others mockups & make degraded mockups, the giant
mouse god (statue) zaps you, etc.
Inc 2 loc= Florida & Brazil (?);
Pyramid loc= West Lemuria
The price of imagination is to create your own fears.
To survive is to depend on the illusions created by others.
Time = (some sort of cartoon watch)
Details: You are a sort of big plastic mickey mouse (a cartoon like doll
body). The characters include mouse people and duck people &
others (Disney like). Everyone can generate illusions which become
real if they can get others to believe in them. At start you do 7
wonderful illusions which others believe in and make real. Sinking
downscale, you create harmful things which go out of control, others
get bored with your mockups, you imagine degraded things to get
interest, etc. Eventually your creations are too degraded but you can’t
stop. Others are disgusted & shatter your illusions & haul you before
the mouse god who divides you against yourself. Eventually your
thrown into a spirit shredder & your pieces are put in a mausoleum.
Cartoon devils drag your soul out & carry you to the illusion of a
volcano but you can’t stop believing in it and so are trapped by your
own illusions.
336
DYNAMIC 15 KNOWLEDGE / UNDERSTANDING
5. TO KNOW (2 headed dodo bird)
Environment = Dr. Doolittle like tropical jungle & beach. Your double
heads let you see the pictures hidden behind others backs. The other
creatures are terminals of other penalty universes.
Inc 2 loc= S. tip of Argentina,
Pyramid=N. Lemuria
The price of Knowledge is Terror
To survive is to depend on the unknownness of others (or
unknowingness of others)
Time = sun swinging through a tropical sky
Details: You see the ghosts that others carry behind them (i.e. cat
woman (To Join) has ghosts of the kittens & robots & gods etc. from
the symbols of To Join etc.). At start, you perform 7 great deeds,
aiding others through your perception (you heal & solve problems
etc.), & you gain admiration & respect. But your appearance is
ridiculous & you don’t want to be laughed at, so you maintain power
over others by misusing your hidden knowledge. & occasionally you
make mistakes & misread pictures & harm others by accident. You see
the evil that each carries around behind them & become terrified of
others. You start actively suppressing others to reduce their ability to
hurt you. The others discover this & chase & capture you & drag you
before the totem gods etc.
6. TO UNDERSTAND (Chipmunk)
environment = talking animals in forest
Inc 2 loc= Bellows Falls, Vermont;
Pyramid = Bermuda.
The price of understanding is grief.
To survive is to depend on the sympathy of others.
Time = sun over brook.
Danger = wolf.
Deceit = a 2 headed sheep.
Sly = Fox.
Drink = penguin drinks from stream.
Confuse = one chipmunk talking to another.
337
Sensation = a female chipmunk.
Details: The different animals all have different languages. You’re the
only one who can understand everybody. You perform 7 noble deeds
involving translation including saving the chipmunks from predators
etc. Then you translate things others don’t want to hear & cause grief &
get blamed. You understand problems but can’t solve them. You
misuse your abilities, alter messages for your own gain, start making
mistakes, etc. Conflict breaks out. No matter how hard you explain, the
wolf still eats the sheep. Understanding doesn’t change the animals
nature. You translate for the fox & help him trick people in exchange
for his tricking a girl chipmunk for you that you want to seduce. The
wise owl (God) discovers your treachery & divides you against
yourself; etc.
7. TO ABSORB (Greek hero, mythology)
You absorb knowledge & the form of anyone you can hold with your
enormous strength including the mortal manifestations of the gods.
Inc 2 loc = Mt. Olympus;
Pyramid = N. Central Lemuria.
The price of wisdom is to be despised.
To survive is to depend on the gratitude of others.
Time = a water clock.
Details: (like a B rate Greek mythology movie). The Gods are large &
real & very prominent. They can appear as faces in the sky or can
embody themselves in form on the ground. There are also lots of
human like people (sort of wax like doll bodies). At start you walk into a
series of 7 clearings & wrestle with 7 things (giant snake, seductive
woman, etc.) & defeat them & absorb them. You can then become
these forms at will. The gods are oppressing & abusing the people &
you become the peoples champion & wrestle gods & gain the
knowledge & capabilities of their mortal (i.e. lesser) form (but you can’t
become the faces in the sky or wield their upper powers). You help
people gain the knowledge of the gods but this only creates strife &
resentment. They blame you for all their failings. & the gods are angry
with you. You begin impersonating the gods among men & trick
people & gods & make trouble & everyone wants to do you in. In the
end, you’re captured & dragged before Zeus who divides you against
yourself (the black bands prevent your taking on other forms) etc.
338
8. TO LEARN (Gnome)
Environment = library/university. students include body types from
other penalty universes (cat people etc.)
Inc 2 loc= Heidleburg;
Pyramid = Boston.
The price of learning is confusion.
To survive is to depend on the respect of others.
Time = a clock on a wall.
Space = a library complex (view of central lawn from window).
Energy = ? book falling off library shelf?
Mass = Huge library shelves full of books.
Confusion = walrus person puzzling over a book.
Tired = gnome asleep over a book.
Sensation = Cat girl.
Companionship = lady gnome.
Stubborn = bear person.
Details: Data is in books and scrolls and data cubes. Only advanced
students can handle data cubes because the data blasts in at you. You
are a gnome (a shriveled little creature who wears glasses) & are an
advanced student who also teaches (everyone but the dean (god
statue) & other god statues is also a student). You are working to
achieve total knowledge. At start you solve 7 complex problems for
others with great success. You are liked & well respected. Later, you
misdirect students to keep them from surpassing you; you sleep with
students (female cat people etc.) in exchange for altering grades. The
contents of the books keep changing. Exams are done with electric
shocks when you answer wrong. You steal forbidden data from the
vaults. You start getting knocked out by the heavy data flow from the
cubes & made solid by too much data & hide this to keep from being
expelled. The students find out about you misleading them & chase
you through the halls. You are dragged before the dean & he divides
you against yourself. After this you try to use a data cube but the flow
jams on the black ridges (divided against yourself) & causes your brain
to explode. They bury you in the basement. Later monk devils drag
your soul out & toss it into the furnace which leads down to hell in an
underground volcano.
DYNAMIC 14: GAMES
9. TO EXCHANGE (Spirit Broker - Wizard)
339
Environment = a kingdom of munchkins & spirits, you trick people or
do something for them in exchange for their souls & sell them to
demons.
Inc 2 loc = Hong Kong;
Pyramid = Catskills
The price of wealth is enslavement.
To survive is to depend on the commitment of others
Time = an hourglass with sand running down.
Details: You are a spirit broker (looks like a sort of card shark /
pawnbroker) in a land of rolling hills and cottages etc., a fairytale like
mid-evil kingdom including a castle with a king etc. The people are
munchkin-like. You can see the spirits of dead munchkins toiling away
but nobody else seems very aware of this. There are also demons
who others can’t see. You are fantastically crafty and trick people into
signing away their souls in blood in exchange for things and then you
sell the contract to demons (the people will work for them after they
die) who give you services in exchange. At the start you collect 7 souls
and sell them to demons in exchange for 7 wondrous miracles
(performed by the demons) which astound the people and make the
king shower you with riches etc. Sliding downscale, you try to do less
for the people in exchange for their souls so as to keep more of the
power for yourself and you have missed withholds about the true
nature of the deal. The people get hints from spirits who have died
etc. You get bored with the village girls and start in on sex with
succubi & other spirit forms. You get withholdy & arrogant. The spirits
get tired of working & start protesting & trying to break their contracts
and the demons get upset. You get in trouble with the king and start
blasting people with energy weapons (wands) purchased from the
demons etc. People trick you with false contracts signed with chicken
blood etc. The demons drag you before the demon god (big devil
statue) & he divides you against yourself. Eventually you die & imps
drag you from the grave & toss you in a volcano under the castle & the
spirits of munchkins & demons you cheated torture you forever.
10. TO PLAY (Chinese Children)
Environment = houses on stilts over tidal flats. Only a very old few are
adults. The games become deadly. Bodies nearly indestructible.
Inc 2 loc = Shanghai, China;
Pyramid = Santiago, Chili.
340
The price of joyful exuberance is perversion.
To survive is to depend on the games of others
Time = shadows of sun moving over a village of houses on stilts.
Details: You are a child in a mud village with houses on stilts. There are
adults (old looking Chinese) but they are no bigger than the children.
There is the impression that you will be a child forever & there are
only a few old people. The village floods whenever the tide comes in.
You alternate playing in the mud with sailing around in little boats
depending on the tide. The bodies are nearly indestructible and might
be some rubbery form of doll body rather than real meat bodies. At
start it is all glorious fun, nothing bothers you, you’re not cold or hungry
or hurt by drowning etc. The games are very rough but you can’t get
hurt. You get trapped in an underwater cage during high tide & your
only protest is that its dark & boring & you want to be out playing.
Sliding downscale you hurt others emotionally & by inhibiting their
playing. The games are often mean & viscous. Parents are rarely seen
but their orders are to be obeyed but this interferes with playing so
you deceive them & become missed withholdy. Also, monsters come
in with the ties and sometimes they hurt someone or carry them off.
Adults sometimes use you for sex, this is pleasurable but also strange
& fearsome & a bit frustrating (no climax). The games become more
harmful & eventually a child dies. You hadn’t known this could occur &
are horrified & fascinated by it. Eventually you organize a terrible game
with the monsters & perverted sex & entrapment & many die. So the
others take you into the temple where the serpent god divides you
against yourself as a punishment. Then you age but the adults find you
loathsome & you can’t play with the children anymore. You die & are
buried in the mud & later carried off to hell in an undersea volcano by
snakes & tortured there by the children you killed etc.
11. TO COMPETE (Coach / team leader)
Environment = sports arena, human style doll bodies. A vicious cross
between soccer, football, & hockey with a steel ball. About 40 players
per team (many teams in shifting alliances on each side) & attacks
launched against repair dugout & coach’s fort as part of game. Referee
delivers implants.
Inc 2 loc = Toronto, Canada;
Pyramid = Frankfurt
The price of competition is loosing.
To survive is to depend on the encouragement of others.
341
Time = digital clock on scoreboard.
Energy = steel ball smashing into grandstands.
Cheat = tripping an opponent.
Detestation = fan throws food at a player.
Admiration = cheering crowd.
Details: You are a coach / team leader. you instruct & plan the plays &
are generally in a fenced off enclosure guarded by some of your
players (but opponents can storm the enclosure & attack you & you
can venture out & play as needed). Vast grandstands around you are
filled with plastic spectators. In the game, you generally can’t touch the
last person to touch the ball or touch a goalie but you can beat up
everyone else according to a fantastically complex set of rules. The
bodies are very tough but can get smashed, especially by the steel
ball. Players go off to the dugout for repairs, but everything is fair
game. Players attack the dugout & the coach enclosures & try to attack
the referees (who are well protected) to distract them while rules are
being broken etc. Players can die by being smashed to small pieces
and broken beyond repair. At start the game is tremendously
exhilarating - the sensations of play & motion are fantastic. You plan &
execute 7 brilliant plays & are cheered etc. Sliding downscale, you
carelessly let players get broken, find ways to cheat, have trouble with
your own men, & grow weaker. There are other coaches on your side
of the game & you start working against them. They try to demote you
but you lead your players against one of the other coaches on your
side & destroy his enclosure. The opponents gain strength & score
goals as you fight your own side. Your own side grabs you & takes
you to the referee who hits you with a beam that divides you against
yourself (your shirt then shows black stripes which are ridges of black
energy). Now everyone ignores you during the plays and eventually
you are trampled & your body is broken into tiny pieces. They call
time out & bury the pieces in the sand of the arena with a flag planted
over the grave. The flag has a Maltese cross on it to keep you in. Later,
enraged fans drag your soul out & throw it into a volcano under the
grandstands where the spirits of the fans & players you betrayed
throw things at you forever.
12. TO MANIPULATE (Penguin Banker)
Environment = a wall street like business district with fancy dressed
two legged animal bodies. You are a Penguin in a fancy coat who
owns a bank.
Inc 2 loc = Zurich,Switzerland;
Pyramid = NE Greenland coast
342
The price of wealth (profit?) is oppression
To Survive is to depend on the trust (confidence) of others
Time = clock on the wall of a bank
Details: At start you make 7 fantastic business deals, taking over
companies etc. and outsmarting the other tycoons. Sliding downscale,
you are irresponsible about the side effects of your deals and others
get hurt. Homeless people (bears etc.) get angry, picket, tear down
businesses. You retaliate, call out police, etc. Also you incite riots
against competitors. Eventually you are dragged into court & a god in
the form of a computer sentences you & divides you against yourself.
Your business connections dry up, your bank goes bankrupt, & you kill
yourself by jumping out of a window. The body is taken to a
mausoleum. Eventually, devil bears rip your soul out & throw you into
a volcano.
DYNAMIC 13: CHANGE
13. TO COMBINE (Siamese Twins)
environment = separating & combining of male & female to make 3
legged twin.
Inc 2 loc= Rangoon;
Pyramid = SE. Atlantis
The price of harmony is self sacrifice.
To survive is to depend on the weakness of others.
Time = Siamese clock.
Space = city with twin buildings (like the world trade center)
Energy = explosion in a laboratory.
Details: The body type is a pair of Siamese twins which are born
separately but must combine to form a complete body. The male has
only one leg and needs a crutch to walk as a singleton. Normally a
male and a female combine. The male has the inner shoulder which
plugs into a gap in the female and he provides the large heart etc. The
female singleton has 2 legs but only a lesser secondary heart etc. and
can’t exert herself. After merging, the skin grows together but can be
separated by an operation and the partners changed. You change
partners a few times in the incident and end up as a singleton. Sex
occurs between 2 sets of twins. In the incident you are a sort of
surgeon/chemist. At the start you make wonderful chemical
343
combinations that produce marvelous results and you perform 7
brilliant operations that separate and recombine twins. Sliding
downscale you make strange freakish combinations of people and
animals etc. Also, you make combinations of more than 2 individuals
etc. You take other, non-twin, races and combine them into twins. The
lobster people object to this and try to make everyone into singletons.
You get worse & worse partners, get blamed by people for riots &
blamed for invasion of lobster people etc. and are finally hunted down
as a singleton and combined with a dead body. The incident ends with
the usual after death sequences etc.
14. TO METAMORPHOSE [or TO SHAPE or TO BE SHAPED] (clay
people)
Body type: Clay people. You are a body shaper, sort of an artistic
masseuse / plastic surgeon equivalent who can reshape someone
else’s clay body and get it to hold the new form (using a faint electric
current?).
Environment = a sort of clay city, like hard earthware built in a
monumental form of slabs & blocks etc.
Inc 2 loc = Crete.
Pyramid =island off Venezuala/Brazil
The price of admiration is to conform (to others opinions)
To survive is to depend on the malleability of others.
Time = clock on big clay building (which looks like an upside-down
pot).
Space = clay city (pot buildings & cracks in earth giving off fumes etc.).
Energy = volcano exploding
Mass = landslide trouble = fire people
Home = big slab building.
Details: At start you perform 7 wonderful shapings of people giving
them strength, beauty, etc. You are highly admired & respected.
Sliding downscale, you reshape someone you don’t like, making them
seem beautiful but really concealing an ugliness in the form and
hardening it while leaving the surface beauty unfixed so that it fades.
Then you convince them that it is their true self showing though
despite your best efforts. There are many overts & also mistakes.
Your forms begin to unstabilize, bulges popping out etc. This is
blamed on a disease plague & people loose control of their forms but
344
its really your fault. Eventually you can’t control your own form either.
They chase & capture you & you’re divided against yourself etc.
15. TO CHANGE (Magician)
Body type = wizard (semi-human looking with wrinkled face etc. -
purple skin on 1st pass, then red skin (?), others have green skin etc.,
cartoon like colors). You can metamorphose into many forms.
Environment = Arabian nights style (city of minarets etc.).
Inc 2 loc = Tunisia.
Pyramid= Haiti (Dom. Republic)
The price of power is insanity.
To survive is to depend on the perversions of others
Time = Shadow swings across the dome of a palace.
Space = Arabian knight’s style city.
Energy = a bolt from a wand.
Mass = city walls falling
Trouble = genies
Details: At start, you work 7 miracles by changing to various forms (by
way of spells) including a winged horse, snake, mouse, gnome, etc.
You gain great power and admiration. You battle other wizards and
win. Sliding downscale, you abuse & misuse power & are arrogant &
begin regretting things. You make mistakes, loose battles against other
wizards, trick people, etc. The people come to hate you. You object to
the tax collectors and smash them & then smash the police & then
have to smash the army & finally you destroy the palace. Because
there is no money, the city services fail and there is a shortage of
water & food. You abuse & sacrifice young girls etc. The citizens storm
your estate. Eventually everyone is against you and you are hunted
and captured and divided and killed and tossed in a volcano by snake
demons etc.
16. TO BRING ORDER (Gorilla People)
This may be out of sequence. It would make more sense for it to fit
under the 9th dynamic (Ethics).
Environment = village in the snow; getting others to change and align in
group efforts.
345
Inc 2 loc = St Petersburg, Russia.
Pyramid= Bismarck, ND.
The price of order is obligation To survive is to depend on the
xenophobia of others.
Time = sun/shadows on village in the snow.
Space = View of a snow covered mountain slope with gorilla people,
moose’s, etc. in the distance.
Energy = gorilla person fights with moose (wrestles with antlers).
Mass = vast wall of snow about to fall.
Gods = a totem pole (the faces are alive).
Crush = gorilla person under an avalanche.
Injustice = individual sacrificed by group.
Details: You solve 7 major problems by getting people to change &
align with each other. The village is in a flood area (spring floods) so
you get everyone to move etc. People are happy with the changes in
general but there is the occasional objector who you overwhelm. Then
your changes become more arbitrary or for personal gain & also you
make mistakes. There are more protesters who you label as SPs &
overwhelm but your justifications begin breaking down & you regret
things but carry on anyway to make yourself right etc. You overwhelm
by getting others to gang up on the dissenters & argue at them & push
at them & beat them up. You see to it that people who try to stop you
are murdered by your followers, but your followers also die due to
your mistakes & greed. Eventually the people rebel & tear down the
villages & hunt you through the forest etc.
I may have two goals collapsed together here. When I ran it, I got a
mixture of snow and jungle pictures. Possibly the jungle stuff is gorillas
with the goal to bring order and the snow scenes are with gorilla like
abominable snowmen and some other goal (maybe To Align). I also
had some trouble with this one getting mixed up with the bear people
(see first dynamic goal to feel or to experience).
DYNAMIC 12: REASON
17. TO REASON (clown)
env = big city, human like energy bodies which give off sparks
(keystone cops etc.). You point out the irrationality of everyone’s
games.
Inc 2 loc= Manhattan.;
346
Pyramid = capetown S. Africa.
The price of logic is to entrap yourself
To survive is to depend on the stupidity of others
time = building (like empire state bldg.) with big wristwatch style clock
on it.
Space = the city at dusk.
Turmoil = keystone cops chasing around.
Sensation = woman in lingerie (this is street dress)
Companionship = woman in checkered apron.
Sex = exchanging energy sparks. (note that these are doll bodies with
the clothes built into the body).
You are absurdly logical and a comic character so that the people will
love you despite your being far more intelligent than they are. You
handle 7 difficult problems, solving them with brilliant logic. You use
logic to talk people into giving you money, sex, etc. Eventually this
catches up with you and the people turn your own logic against you so
that you become a tragic figure who must trap and destroy himself
according to his own rules. But you rebel and deny your own logic and
they hunt you down etc. You are hauled before the energy god who is
a crackling cloud in a power plant and he divides you against yourself,
etc.
18. TO ORIENT (Wire Man)
The body is made of thick wires which you can bend around etc.
There is a shoulder plate and a genital box (with a sort of electric plug).
env= building a complex cagelike structure in space. In the end you
get it wrong & it collapses.
Inc 2 loc = polar orbit;
Pyramid = Antarctica
The price of orientation is to be stuck
To survive is to depend on the confidence of others.
Time = sun/light/shadow moving across a structure in orbit.
At start you are a brilliant genius who can see how to align the wires in
the structure for maximum efficiency. The space structure tunes to
basic energy in the universe and adding more with better alignment
increases the flow and brings great wealth. The crowds cheer you, the
priests honor you etc. But your constructions become overly complex.
347
You make mistakes and the wire bodies are shaken by painful bad
vibrations etc. Eventually your hauled before god who is a statue of a
man and divided. Eventually your broken parts are placed in a metal
box with a cross on it to keep you in etc.
19. TO GUIDE (Pilot)
Environment=1930s barnstorming plus continents in the sky (a la
Charles Fort) & guiding Zeppelins to them. In the end you betray
everyone & get zapped by a god statue.
Inc 2 loc = Indianapolis;
Pyramid = Lemuria
The price of success is to be despised
To survive is to depend on the good will of others
Time = dusk on prairie.
Space = flying in clouds.
Impact = plane crash.
Guide = plane (WW1 style) leading a zeppelin through the clouds.
Details: You fly a small barnstorming type plane with fantastic skill &
daring guiding zeppelins through the endless clouds to carry goods
between different cities & continents in the sky. The worlds are
flatlands tumbling around in a space filled with atmosphere. The plane
is actually very powerful & long range & only looks primitive because
of the double wings & open cockpit. The continents shift around &
visibility is poor so the freight & passenger carrying zeppelins need
guides. Early on the pilot can levitate somewhat (jumps out of plane
without a shoot etc.) but later he has trouble with this. He wears
goggles which give him a partial ability to see through the clouds. At
start you guide 7 great convoys between flatworlds. Everyone admires
you, businessmen pay you large sums, crowds roar at airshows, &
you take your pick of girls etc. Then you demand too much money,
get married & cheat on wife, act arrogant & put others down, get drunk
& loose a zeppelin in the sky, crash a few planes, gets lost &
disoriented, starts falling & getting hurt, develops dizziness etc. The
townspeople get angry, wife leaves him, businessmen sue him, etc.
Eventually he takes a young girl up in a plane, looses control, she dies,
he falls badly. So townspeople capture him, & take him into a cathedral
where god divides him against himself. Then he tries to fly but crashes
etc. everyone avoids him. Finally dies in a plane crash & they bury him
in a cemetery with a cross over the grave to keep him inside. Then
winged devils tear his soul out of the ground & carry him to a flat earth
348
volcano & throw him in where he is tortured forever by all the people
(businessmen, women, etc.) that he betrayed.
20. TO COMPUTE (toy bodies)
Environment=a logic maze constructed of toys, you take a new toy
body off the rack every time you judge wrong & get smashed. God is a
giant toy Santa who zaps you for cheating & hurting other players.
Inc 2 loc= North Pole.
Pyramid = Perth, Australia
The price of intelligence is self destruction
To survive is to depend on the answers of others
Time = a toy clock
Trouble = a rolly polly clown
Details: At start you solve 7 difficult problems. You are super bright
and pleased with yourself. You help others. You work your way
deeply into the maze. Occasionally you loose a body, but not often.
You have sex with girl toys etc. You zap troublesome toys with
energy. Sliding downscale, you lose more bodies, get worried that
you’ll never solve the maze, trick others into trying things before you
do so that you wouldn’t lose a body (and have to resume from the
starting point). You get worried about others beating you, so you give
out wrong answers, fix puzzles so that the answer is different and the
people behind you get broken, etc. You also find that the answers are
changing around and you can’t get into the maze as deeply as you
used to. You feel its unfair, and are worried about running out of
bodies etc. so you organize riots. Eventually you’re divided against
yourself by a toy Santa who is god. Your last few bodies now have
black lines in them. You keep trying to start the maze again and getting
broken until the last body is lost. Others collect the piece and store
them under a machine with rotating crosses that keeps you in there
until devils drag you off to hell in a volcano that is under the aerial
roadways that connect the machines in the central part of the maze.
DYNAMIC 11 (CONSTRUCTION)
21. TO CONSTRUCT (beavers)
349
Environment = you build dams and traps for capturing and enslaving
fish & skunk & squirrel people etc. eventually you trap your friends
because they’re scornful and you let the dam break etc.
Inc 2 loc = Bangor,Maine.
Pyramid = Perth, Australia
The price of industriousness is entrapment
To survive is to depend on the labor of others.
Details: You are a beaver person with big teeth, fur, unusual hip joints
(you can sit crouched for hours), arms, hands, tail, and wearing clothes
(a vest). You have orgies in the mud. Squirrel people act as slave
laborer, skunk people work as maids etc. You undertake 7 large
construction projects, managing the building of dams and traps and
extending the village out on planks (like a dock) over the water. Your
traps catch other people who you enslave and put to work. Then you
begin building traps for beaver people too. The people rebel, etc.
Eventually the god of the lake rises up and divides you against
yourself, etc.
22. TO ARRANGE (Blockhead)
The goal To Engineer (below) may belong in a higher goals series. Or
possibly To Build (#23) may be the incorrect one. Or maybe this goal
(to arrange) which was located late in the research is the incorrect one.
None of these three were run thoroughly and one of them is probably
some sort of guiding spirit behind a constructive civilization rather than
an embodied individual in that civilization. The guiding spirit type of
body would go with a higher goals series.
22X. TO ENGINEER (Lobster People)
Environment=underwater city
Inc 2 loc = S. Africa (lake)
Pyramid = Ghana,Africa
The price of calculation is to be detested
To survive is to depend on the strength of others
Time = mechanical clock with exposed gears.
Space = an undersea domed city and seabed.
350
Energy = giant machines (pumps with big swing booms, churning
water & turmoil on seabottom).
Mass = underwater avalanche.
Details: You are a lobster person (walks upright, big claw arms and
small manipulative arms - 2 pairs - at sides). You are a brilliant
engineering genius who designs 7 marvelous projects including
pyramids, a core tap, etc. But you alter designs for your own profit,
things collapse, and people die. Power sources fail due to your
misengineering. and riots start etc. They find out it is your fault and
hunt you down.
23. To Build (snake people)
Environment = a space city similar to Arslycus which gets too big.
Enslaves other races.
Inc 2 loc= In orbit & Alaska.
Pyramid = Bangkok.
The price of havingness is enslavement.
To Survive is to depend on the compulsions of others.
Time = sun in orbit.
Space = space city (sun orbits the city).
Crash = aircar smashes into building.
Crush = snake person under collapsing roadway.
Details: There is tremendous exhilaration at the fantastically complex
and beautiful construction. You undertake 7 projects to expand the
city. You hurt slaves in the process, but its for the greater good. Then
you have problems with construction errors, riots, etc. Eventually the
part your building gets too big and falls apart and the enraged citizens
chase you through the sky.
24. TO STRUCTURE (Crystals)
Levitating gems getting salts from water & energy from sunlight. They
can put out energy beams etc.
Environment = a crystal city hanging in the air over a lake, mostly aerial
rods with an occasional structure etc.
Inc 2 loc = Great Salt Lake.
351
Pyramid = Versallis,France
The price of alignment is to be held in place (located)
To survive is to depend on the form of others
Time = pulsing crystal.
Energy = flow blasts out from a crystal.
Shattered = crystal breaking apart.
Sex = sides in contact between crystals, rubbing with crackling energy.
Details: You undertake 7 vast projects extending the city further into
the sky etc. You are highly admired. Sliding downscale, you make
mistakes, begin stealing light from others etc. The poor must float up
above the city to get their daily energy because they live deep in
shadows but often lack the energy to do so (because it takes energy to
climb high) and fall (breaking apart and dying). You help the rich build
bigger and higher levels and that makes it worse for the poor.
Eventually society fails and the city falls. Mobs chase you etc.
DYNAMIC 10: AESTHETICS
25. TO INVENT (munchkins)
You are an inventor, sort of like a little old toymaker or shoemaker.
Environment = like an old bavarian city. You invent wondrous devices
& then suppressive things
Inc 2 loc = Bavaria;
Pyramid = Poconos in Pennsylvania
The price of ingenuity is entrapment
To survive is to depend on the aesthetic appreciation of others
Time = Mechanical Clock.
Space = Large cluttered workshop.
Details: At the start, you invent 7 wondrous things including a fancy
town clock. These are very aesthetic. They work not so much by logic
but because they are so wondrous to behold that they gain instant
agreement. Then your greed & lust & pride cause you to maintain your
position by building terrible but aesthetic devices to gain things. Also
building weapons of war & enslavement (for use against the insect
people) & control which are then turned against the population. You
352
invent things like devices which inspire lust in women etc. Eventually
the mobs chase you etc.
26. TO ENHANCE (Ghost People)
You are a female ghost in a sort of spirit body env=spirit world and an
1890s style city of human and cat people where you enhance their
view of things. There is also a ghostly city where you live that partially
intersects the real city.
Inc 2 loc = Copenhagen,
Pyramid = Buenos Aries
The price of improvement is condemnation
To survive is to depend on the illusions of others
Companionship = a male ghost
Sensation = a living male cat person
Details: You go around enhancing living peoples view of things. You
do 7 good deeds by enhancing. You make the guys see girls as more
beautiful etc. Without enhancement, the city looks drab, like ashes, but
you make it appear beautiful to the living. You receive praise and
offerings. You visit living men in the night for sex and take a drop of
blood as an offering. This makes you more real and stronger than
other ghosts who look up to you etc. But you can never forget that its
all ugly under the surface and you are fooling people. They get in
trouble because you make things seem better than they are and lead
them into mistakes. You become mischievous and trick people and
haunt them and demand sacrifices. You do heavy sexual blanketing
which harms people. The priests try to exorcise you etc. Eventually
you’re captured and hauled into a church where god on a cross divides
you against yourself etc.
27. TO INSPIRE (muses)
Environment = you bring inspiration in dreams but eventually you steal
others ideas.
Inc 2 loc= Florence, Italy;
Pyramid = Ethiopia
The price of new ideas is to be scorned
To survive is to depend on the dullness of others
353
Time = sundial.
Disaster = Earthquake.
You = girl in robe.
Sensation = another girl.
Details: You are in a sort of astral body (female), but the knights have
flaming swords which radiate heavenly energy that can cut on the
astral plane as well as the physical. At the start you bring 7 wonderful
inspirations & the people and the dream master praise you. But then
you start inspiring people into crimes, degradation, etc. Also, you run
out of inspiring ideas so you start stealing ideas from other muses.
Eventually you start bringing nightmares etc. When you’re thrown into
the volcano at the end, you can’t escape because you have no
inspiration (no ideas).
28. TO BEAUTIFY (fairy godmother / fairy queen )
Environment = storybook land, you make everything beautiful & then
kill all the people to keep it that way.
Inc 2 loc= Babylon;
Pyramid = Orlando, Fla.
The price of beauty is suffering (sadness)
To survive is to depend on the good taste of others
Time = sun swings over storybook land.
Details: You float around and can wave your wand and make things
beautiful. You perform 7 wondrous deeds such as making a poor girl
beautiful so she can meet the price (like Cinderella) etc. You make the
countryside and cottages and castles beautiful etc. But you see
everyone messing up the environment and doing ugly things such as
eating each other etc. The Cinderella like girl gets the dress and coach
messed up having sex, so you give her a poisoned apple (like
sleeping beauty, but no happy ending) etc. The children are starving
so they eat the gingerbread houses so you throw them into a furnace
(like Hansel & Gretel) etc. Eventually you get items like “To Beautify is
to ignore suffering” etc. You depopulate the countryside and become a
horror to everyone, so they summon witches and devils to use against
you and there’s the usual business of being captured and divided etc.
Eventually you’re dead and buried under a magic circle which keeps
you in the ground until witches on broomsticks drag you off to hell in a
volcano.
354
DYNAMIC 9: ETHICS
29. TO PURIFY (Fire People)
Environment = you see the impurities in the flames of others, find
criminals & toss them into a volcano, etc.
Inc 2 loc = Lima Peru;
Pyramid = Pompey, Italy
The price of purity is the loss of self-determinism (individuality?)
To survive is to depend on the bigotry (sins?) of others
Time = sun swings over the fire city (clay slabs and billowing fire and
balls of fire).
Details: At the start, you find 7 criminals by seeing the impurities in
their flames and capture them and toss them in the volcano. The
people cheer you for saving them. Gradually it becomes like the
inquisition, with you searching out people with impure thoughts etc.
And the you start tossing in good people as well for personal gain and
you also make mistakes and toss in the wrong people etc. Then the
usual business of captured and divided etc.
30. TO ARBITRATE (Bull people / minotaur) CORRECT GOAL MAY BE
“TO JUDGE” - to be investigated.
Environment = you solve disputes in a Greek style city with other races
as slaves.
Inc 2 loc = Crete;
Pyramid = Buenos Aires
The price of compromise is universal misery
To survive is to depend on the obligations of others
Time = sundial in plaza.
Details: You solve 7 great disputes including one between the king and
the workers. You do this by talking to them and shifting their
viewpoints until they come into agreement. You are greatly praised
and rewarded. But you see that bringing people into agreement and
getting them to compromise creates harm. You get the workers to
compromise on a point of safety and then a building under
construction collapses on them. You get the girls to compromise on
355
being ravished by the bulls etc. Eventually everyone looses by
compromising too much and they blame you etc.
31. TO DEFEND (little green men)
Environment = flying saucers and a planet with many types of people
(from other implant universes) ruled by religious zealots who want
everyone to be good and follow the rules. The saucer people are the
chosen of god and defenders of the faith & civilization etc.
Inc 2 loc = Japan;
Pyramid = Tibet
The price of ethics is betrayal.
To survive is to depend on the integrity of others.
Time = saucer in orbit.
Space = ship over city.
Holy = cross on control panel.
Details: You fight 7 great battles against forces of evil including
invaders, revolutionaries, heretics, etc. You find out that not all the
rebels are bad and regret blasting them but continue doing it because
of pride and duty. You become arrogant and lord it over the ground
population etc. You blast entire cities of loyal people when the lizard
invaders occupy them. Resources run short and you force the cities to
supply you while their citizens starve. Civilization crumbles but you
keep on defending and wrecking things further. Rebel ships capture
yours and haul you before the silver robot god and he divides you
against yourself. You’re allowed to return to your ship but now the
crew despises you and considers you a traitor etc. and tosses you out
into a volcano, etc.
32. TO STRENGTHEN (Strong man)
This goal, found late in the research, might belong here instead of To
Protect which seems like it belongs in the upper series. This goal
requires further investigation.
It is also possible that the gorilla goal “to bring order” belongs here.
Additional note: The upper series might also include the goal To
Nurture (guardian of the forest).
356
Details (?): You pour energy into the weak to help them. (?)
32X. TO PROTECT (colored balls of energy)
Environment = you police a city of other body types, zapping
wrongdoers.
Inc 2 loc= Tibet;
Pyramid=Washington DC.
The price of safety is inhibition.
To survive is to depend on the sins of others
Details: You are a colored sphere of energy which floats around. You
handle 7 situations, protecting the innocents by zapping their attackers.
You feel very proud and helpful etc. and are rewarded by being fed
electricity. You have sex by exchanging energy with other spheres
etc. (there doesn’t seem to be any male/female polarization). Eventually
you zap the wrong people, mishandle things, fight with other spheres,
develop perversions (such as drinking in sex flows from bodies). You
become viscous and outlawed, no longer fed energy but stealing it,
sometimes draining it from bodies and killing them, etc.
DYNAMIC 8 (RELIGION)
33. TO ENLIGHTEN (or to preach) (rabbit preacher)
Environment = Cartoon like rabbits walking around in frock coats. You
preach human sacrifice (to wolves in leather jackets) & sex orgies &
end up dying on the cross.
Inc 2 loc = Libya (? or Jerusalem),
Pyramid = Montgomery, Ala.
The price of preaching is sacrifice.
To survive is to depend on the faith of others.
Time =
Details: You are a preacher and carry a holy book with you as you go
into town. You preach sacrifice to higher purposes. You work 7
miracles. You sacrifice rabbit people to the wolves and less die than
before. The usual decline and troubles.
357
34. TO CONVERT (reptile/fish person) looks a bit like the creature from
the black lagoon); you can evoke heavenly pictures & promote a false
religion & even fool the lesser gods (statues) so they think you
represent a higher god.
Environment = Seashore & lagoons, very colorful. Coral & multi-colored
sand. Giant shells used as boats and temples built on the reefs etc.
Inc 2 loc = Jakarta, Indonesia;
Pyramid = S.E. Atlantis
The price of divine revelation is to be fooled
To survive is to depend on the gullibility of others
Time = sun over lagoon (floating houses & fish people)
Details: The people worship god statues (the pilot, mermaid, etc. -
generally terminals of other penalty). The statues have cantankerous
lesser gods who expect sacrifices and so small favors for much
worship. You have the ability to evoke heavenly pictures in the sky.
These pictures are scenes from other universes. With this you falsely
convince others that you are the agent of a higher god. Even the lesser
gods get scared and become propitiative. You perform 7 wondrous
revelations, using the pictures to stop wars etc. But you can’t really
heal the sick or control the weather as the lesser gods can, and they
miss your withholds and you get into various troubles and go through
the usual decline etc.
35. TO CONNECT (female angel)
Environment = Heavenly clouds (later hell on Earth), you get a sexual
kick from connecting with God, and later find that you can get the same
kick with body sex (forbidden) & get sent down to hell.
Inc 2 loc= Los Angeles (heaven in clouds);
Pyramid = Hawaii
(inc 2 scene - angel with burnt wings tumbling into a volcano)
The price of sensation is defilement
To survive is to depend on others for fulfillment
Time = sun on clouds.
Space = pearly/golden gates & clouds
Energy = golden rays coming down from God on high.
Mass = golden alter in heavenly cathedral.
358
Ecstasy = angles in cathedral writhing in light of God.
Details: You receive religious & sexual ecstasy by connection with
God. You go through 7 divine experiences in various places such as
the cathedral & the courtyard etc. generally in a group & the light of
God shines on you & you all have a vast religious/sexual experience.
Sliding downscale, you enter forbidden places & do forbidden things
such as eating of the tree of knowledge & get M/W/Hs from God & you
hide this when he sends out a ray of ecstasy making the ecstasy
diminish. Sex (forbidden) lets you connect with & have ecstasy with
someone other than God & you do this & pervert other angles & have
problems etc. The sexual ecstasy gradually decays & leaves you with
empty cravings. You are found out, argue with God, blame him,
become arrogant, & are cast out of heaven & into hell on the ground.
There you are tortured but also seek sexual ecstasy through pain, but
it diminishes & you die etc.
36. TO WORSHIP (knights)
Environment = castle, you make sacrifices to the God in the cross (who
absorbs the soul of people put on the cross) & do holy quests &
persecute other religions.
Inc 2 loc = England;
Pyramid = China
The price of faith is blindness
To survive is to depend on the blindness of others
Time = sun over forest & castle by lake.
Space = ramparts of castle looking over the meadow.
Energy = knight swinging sword.
Mass = walls of castle.
Details: At the start you perform 7 holy quests (like holy grail etc.),
smash the god statues of rival religions, become arrogant, etc. It gets a
bit like the inquisition, with you as an inquisitor, and then you begin to
feel sympathy for the victims and start cheating and betraying your
comrades and it goes down from there.
DYNAMIC 7 (SPIRITS)
359
37. TO PREDETERMINE (the soothsayer) - this is a symbol body which
manifests in various forms such as the blind prophet, the wise fool, &
the water carrier.
Environment = flat earth; you see the symbol bodies behind peoples
human forms & You insert meanings into things and setup theta
machinery and predetermine what will occur. The symbol bodies are
like stick figure drawings using lines of fire. The flat earth is old
testament/Babylon like.
Inc 2 loc = Turkey;
Pyramid = Southern Alberta, Canada
The price of prediction is to be foredoomed.
To survive is to depend on the superstitions of others.
Time = sun shadow far above a pasture on a flat earth.
Space = Mountains in the distance.
Details: You can see the symbol body behind the physical forms and
therefor know their fate. You make prophesies based on their symbols
and this keys them in and makes it come to pass (because it is the
doom that you see waiting for them). You begin with 7 prophecies of
doom but help them overcome the calamities. Eventually you become
greedy, vengeful, etc., makeup false dooms, preach against the kings,
etc. Finally the god who is a mountain divides you against yourself etc.
38. TO COLLECT (elves/fairies)
Environment = fairyland, souls are captured & made into enchanted
weapons etc.
Inc 2 loc = Bombay, India;
Pyramid = Baghdad
The price of power is corruption
To survive is to depend on the enslavement of others
Time = Sun passes over an elf tree city.
Space = field where elves dance.
Energy = bolt from ring of power.
Mass = elves pushing a bolder.
Details: You are a great spellsmith who captures spirits and enchants
them into weapons and things. You collect beings. You begin by
360
making 7 great devices in this manner. You raise your arms and let
your spirit flow out and surround the victim spirit and crush it down an
into an object you have made. When someone dies you try to be on
hand to collect the spirit etc. The people at first praise you and then
come to fear you and despise you. You become vain and arrogant and
hate everyone. The gods divide you against yourself. When you die,
you’re collected into an object and locked in a vault until demons come
to drag you off to hell, etc.
39. TO INFLUENCE (cupid)
Environment = greek mythology style space opera; you inspire people
to love, hate, etc.
Inc 2 loc = Jacksonville, Fla.;
Pyramid = Vermont
The price of excitement is to stay hidden
To survive is to depend on the discomfort of others.
Time =
Details: The cupids live in the clouds as do the angels and demons
(who both object to the influence of the cupids, because they have
strong purposes whereas the cupids only want interesting
experiences). The people in the cities are of various body types
including humanoid and wire people etc. At the start you visit 7 cities
and inspire people to 7 interesting emotions. You are admired by the
other cupids etc. Then you begin inspiring lower emotions, terror and
hate etc. and have various fights and problems. Eventually you inspire
the people to riot and destroy civilization. The angles capture you and
drag you before god (who is on a golden throne in the clouds) and he
divides you against yourself. You die and are “buried” in a spirit coffin in
the clouds. Finally the devils haul you off to hell in a volcano etc.
40. TO EMBODY (Pan - goat god).
Environment = You evoke nymphs etc. out of trees etc. & solidify their
bodies by playing panpipes.
Inc 2 loc = Catalina;
Pyramid = Greece.
The price of embodiment is suffering.
361
To survive is to depend on the harmony of others.
Time = sun swings over forest glade.
Space = forest & brook
Energy = Geyser coming up out of a lake
Mass = Dryads melted into a rock.
Invoke = playing pan pipes & calling something forth from a tree
Solidify = dryad outside of tree becoming solid.
Terror = bull like demon rises out of lake by waterfall.
Trouble = Pinwheel of energy around a silver cap.
Details: At first you are alone in a forest glade. You use the panpipes to
evoke the spirit of each natural form and then make it solidify into a
person (i.e., summon the spirit from the tree and embody it into a tree
nymph etc.). You go around and evoke 7 groups of spirits and solidify
them. All of them praise and worship you and want their friends
embodied as well. You carry on populating the woods etc., but you
occasionally bring out a monster or demon (or the energy pinwheels,
which are dangerous to you). Also, the embodied spirits have
problems etc. and begin to blame you. Also, the nymphs etc.
sometimes refuse to give you what you want and so you embody
monsters to force them. Also you solidify things for your own gain and
demand payment from the solidified spirits etc. and you make
mistakes and hide them. You can also embody concepts, etc. And you
embody evil as well as good. The trees etc. all start dying because
you’ve pulled out all of the spirits. Everyone blames you for everything
and they hunt you down and the guardian of the forest divides you
against yourself (Tree God) and devils throw you in a volcano etc.
Note: This was previously To solidify / to Not-Is in 6th dynamic.
DYNAMIC 6 (PHYSICAL)
41. TO LOCATE (Leprechaun (wise fool, human like)
Environment = rooms interconnected at random. You find various
people (symbols) in rooms and try to find your way to the center.
Inc 2 loc = Inside a space wheel in orbit (rings of rooms sliding in
relationship to each other);
Pyramid = Quito,Equ.
The price of being located is to be a target
To survive is to depend on the mis-orientation of others
362
Time = Grandfather’s clock
Space = a room + shadows of rooms in 4th dimension.
Energy = a ray from the center passes into a room & hits someone.
Mass = someone pounding on a wall.
Boisterous = a drinking hall.
Details: The “Sun” in the center (in a circular room surrounded by a
railed balcony and maybe a control panel) puts out higher dimensional
rays which pass through the walls and illuminate the rooms and unlike
most people, you can sense the direction of the rays and know where
you are even though the rooms keep shifting (as if they are mounted in
a series of concentric rings which rotate in relationship to each other).
There are also some large halls such as the kings hall, the drinking hall,
etc. You are a locator working for the king. The people are reminiscent
of medieval tarot card drawings. At the start, you go on 7 missions of
locating people and things and are showered with riches etc. Sliding
downscale, you hide things and keep the locations to yourself (treasure
etc.) and get others lost. Finally you start making mistakes and get lost
yourself etc. The kingdom begins to fall and the king blames you and
soldiers chase you etc. In the end you wind up in hell in a volcano that
is located on the floor of the central room beneath the center sun.
42. TO PERMEATE (theta body)
Environment = you permeate meat body people & implant orders, at
first helpful & then harmful.
Inc 2 loc = Rio de Jenero;
Pyramid = Saudi Arabia
The price of pervasion is dissolution.
To survive is to depend on the suggestability of others.
Time = a shadow moves underwater (?). (or world turning in sunlight
seen from low orbit?)
Details: You help the tiger people, fox people, etc. by blanketing
crowds and implanting orders to stop riots etc. Then you decay and do
sexual blanketing and implant things as jokes (like a bad hypnotist) and
inspire people to fight etc. Finally the god, who is a statue of a Centaur,
divides you against yourself and you give conflicting orders when you
try to implant others, etc.
Note: was previously in 7th dynamic, and had To Solidify in 6D (which
is now To Embody in 7D, but solidify might still be another goal and
363
permeate might be in error and actually be part of to energize, note
similarity in the body type etc. - needs to be investigated).
43. TO ENERGIZE (thought circles; color flows)
Inc 2 loc = In the Aurora Australis (southern aurora)
Pyramid = Kashmir.
The price of motion is pain
To survive is to depend on the unawareness of others.
Time = moving swirl of color.
Space = lines of energy stretching out towards infinity.
Energy= star exploding.
Mass = black hole pulling in asteroids etc.
God = a planet (like the man in the moon).
Details: You permeate mest & sublimate it & it turns into flows of
colorful energy which you feed on & play in. at start there are 7
wonderful sublimations where you release the energies of planets etc.
Colors reflect energy levels, blue is warm, red is painful, black is
death/unconscious. You have problems with stars blowing up and
unsettling your stomach, overts of stealing energy from others, overts
of destroying pretty places, etc. Eventually a planet god divides you
against yourself (black lines in your energy swirly), finally you’re
drained of all energy & go black & are pulled down to a planet & fall into
a volcano.
Note: This one might belong to a higher series
44. TO GATHER (Spacesuit bodies - like radiation suits, but the suit is
the body, no face inside),
Environment = like 3rd Invader force. You go around using a fac 1 like
device to implant & take over.
Inc 2 loc = Nepal;
Pyramid = Atlantis
The price of wealth is to be controlled.
To survive is to depend on the conditionability of others
Time =
364
Details: At the start, you conquer 7 societies (unicorns etc.) and are
hailed as a great leader. Then you make mistakes, get overwhelmed
by robots, revolutionaries, etc. Note that you never consider it an overt
to conquer the meat body people, your idea of overts has to do with
betraying other invaders and your own loss of courage etc. Then
comes the usual decline.
DYNAMIC 5 (LIFE)
45. TO GROW (Genetic entity)
Environment = a southsea volcanic island. You are a GE & evolve a
genetic line trying to have your forms overwhelm the forms evolved
by other GEs in the chain of islands.
Inc 2 loc = Tahiti;
Pyramid = Australia.
The price of growth is death
To survive is to depend on the sacrifices of others.
Time = cells/micro-organisms in the sea as day turns to night
Space = An island in the sea, bay, reefs, the sky above.
Energy = lightning bolt striking a forest and starting a fire
Matter = a vast rock cliff above the beach
Affinity = GE feeling tender for a mouse like creature
Reality = a volcano sheathed in clouds and its slopes teaming with life
Communication = one monkey points a snake out to another
Understanding = 2 sloths hang together looking at each other in the
trees
Fate = Glacier
Help = Aneoba reaching towards another that is sinking
Decay = fungus on tree
Creation = strange glow from a cave in the slopes of a volcano
You = GE (golden cloud)
Fall = bird dropping a clamshell
Warmth = Green Sun in sky
Turbulence = surf
Competition = another GE, blue colored
Abandonment = shellfish on beach
Doom = volcano erupting
Details: You are a genetic entity growing lifeforms. You begin with
simple ones on a lifeless volcanic island, and gradually get more
complex. Then a rival GE starts up on the opposite side of the island.
365
He sends birds against the clams, vines against the trees, so you grow
monkeys to tear at the vines, so he grows tigers to eat the monkeys
etc.
This one probably belong in a higher series. The GE is a cloud form
and the scale is creation first followed by decay instead of a straight
decay down to death.
46. TO DISCOVER (centaurs)
Environment = ship sailing from bay to bay on a new continent,
explorers who first try to find treasure, learn wisdom, and teach, but
end up like conquistadors.
Inc 2 loc = New Zealand;
Pyramid = Durban, South Africa
The price of discovery is blame (ruin?)
To survive is to depend on the gullibility of others
Time = sun swings over ship at sea with centaurs.
Space = Looking over the rail of a ship at the shores of a vast bay.
Energy=Rhinocerous charging.
Mass=Cliffs at shore, waves drive a ship towards them.
Trouble=Angels.
Details: At start you are on an explorers ship landing in natural harbors
etc. along the shores of a new continent (large island). It is very exciting
and you are filled with the thrill of finding and learning new things. The
places have strange flora & fauna. You visit 7 bays (rabbit people +
robots; cat people + bears; Elves + goat people; Magicians +arabs;
Gnomes + giants; Frog people + insects; Greek gods + dog people).
You visit each bay and are exhilarated by what you find, but you try to
dominate the people. At first you help them and they welcome you.
Eventually you exploit and enslave them. Also, you get drawn into
their wars etc. You try to teach them about things and fail, you
discover new ideas but they don’t want to listen, so you begin to trap
them for their own good and force them into schools & they rebel etc.
The people pray for help against you and angels with fiery swords
come and oppose you. Eventually they destroy your ship and capture
you and god divides you against yourself etc.
47. TO HEAL (Tree Man)
366
Environment = forest. You heal the animals taking all the hurt away but
when they disobey you, you push it all back in & they get sick.
Inc 2 loc = Prague;
Pyramid = Uruguay.
The price of healing is pain.
To survive is to depend on the weakness of others.
Time = shifting slant of sunlight threw forest canopy.
Space = a path going off through the trees into the distance
Energy=
Mass=
Trouble= A Bore Person (pig man with tusks).
Details: You are in a forest with cat people, bull people, etc. At start
you visit 7 races and perform great healing for each. They all build
alters to you and worship and praise you. But you don’t like them
fighting each other etc. so you try to control them. You push injuries
back in on the and they sicken and die. Another forest guardian sets up
on the far side of the forest and your people and his people fight. Too
many are killed and hurt for you o heal them all and so your people
turn against you. Eventually your captured and taken before the
mountain god (earth god) and divided against yourself etc.
48. TO ADAPT (Thread Man).
Environment = You are a bundle of threads that can unravel and
reweave into a new shape.
Inc 2 = N. Siberia;
Pyramid = Syria
Price survive
Time = A clock on a tower (silver ball with streamers)
Space = Gossamer city
Energy = wave shakes the city (Underwater?)
Mass = great rock crushes things.
You = A thread man (like many pieces of string
Trouble = Cyclops
Details: At start you adapt and teach others to adapt to 7 threats. There
are crab people who chop you with pincers and cyclopses who burn
you with beams from their eye and bull people who enforce rules.
367
There are snowflakes, etc. You have a horror of solidifying and of
burning.
DYNAMIC 4 (RACE & SOCIETY)
49. To Establish (giant)
Environment = three eyed giants dominating flatlands linked by a
hyperspace grid.
Inc 2 loc = Philadelphia;
Pyramid = Dublin, Ire.
The price of order is invalidation
To survive is to depend on the obedience of others
(note, originally had this as one eyed giants - i.e. Cyclops, but some
confusion between this & To Judge; also was missing the next goal
upwards, so items got crossed up)
Time =
Details: There is an electronic grid (looks like graphics) ultra
dimensional grid linking 7 firmaments / planes / flatlands. You establish
the 7 flatlands & setup a race of beings on each one (Chinese peasant
children, fox people, etc.) in a rigid cast system. Each race has a trade /
task / skill & you establish a civilization co-ordinating all these &
expanding the space grid. You hypnotize (implant) any dissenters for
the greater good. At start you have wonderful goals of a glorious
civilization etc. Sliding down, people revolt, get implanted, you do
many overts, & finally give up & let civilization fall & are captured by
mobs etc.
50. TO SHARE (dolphins)
Environment = the dolphins have no hands, but can levitate things by
group postulation. They launch wooden spaceships and build a very
low orbit space station. You create too much dissension and the station
falls.
Inc 2 loc = near Hawaii.
Pyramid = Azors
(inc 2 scene: dolphin in a glider spiraling into volcano)
368
The price of sharing is enforced agreement
To survive is to depend on the agreement of others.
Time = sun over ocean with dolphins
Space = dolphin in glider high above world
Energy = beam from sky boiling ocean.
Mass = dolphins in ocean levitating vast glob of water.
God = giant statue of Poseidon with trident.
Trouble=aliens (like giraffe people?, or insect people?)
Details: You do 7 great cooperative efforts including uprooting trees
from the islands and launching the space platform and shaking the
aliens’ (insect people with energy weapons) ship until they will trade
peacefully. Gliders and platforms are wood frames with plastic film
holding water. Sex is group orgies at sea; You have no hands and can
only operate in a group. Agreements are forced by projecting thought
bubbles at each other; You commit overts as ordered by the group
including casting out a friend (thrown off platform) & then rebel &
obsessively individuate. Poseidon divides you against yourself etc.
51. TO UNITE (dog soldiers)
Environment = a Nazi Germany like war for racial purity. In the end you
turn traitor & both sides do you in.
Inc 2 loc = Frankfort,Germany;
Pyramid = Perth, Australia.
The price of loyalty is dishonor
To survive is to depend on the honor of others.
Time = sun swings over a battlefield.
Space = a harbor with ships & planes & troops massed on shore.
Energy = a large bomb blows up a city (mushroom cloud).
Mass = giant steel doors of a bunker like fortress. (huge).
God = Statue of a giant bird on a pedestal.
Trouble = cat people
Details: You are an officer engaged in 7 glorious campaigns, defeating
the enemy & uniting countries & purifying the race. At first you agree
heavily with this & see the sense of it & are happy to have an
opponent, but gradually you begin to question. The army installs
control devices in your teeth. You have sex with an enemy spy &
sympathize with the enemy & begin helping them. Your discovered &
flee to the enemy who implant more control devices & send you back
369
as a counter spy & you’re caught again & implanted further etc. Your
divided against yourself & sent again as a spy with hidden portions of
yourself taking over when you are asleep & reporting in etc. Eventually
you blow everyone up by disabling the shields during an attack. Your
comrades from both sides drag your soul out of the grave & toss you
in a volcano for betraying them. This is high tech with laser cannons,
laser rifles with bayonets, etc., the women have 4 breasts.
52. TO CONTROL (frog people)
Environment = pond with houses on stilts, much politics
Inc 2 loc= Caspian Sea;
Pyramid = Lake Nayassa, Africa.
(inc 2 scene: Frog person dumped into a volcano by a crowd)
The price of civilization is oppression
To survive is to depend on the meekness of others.
(Maybe some error on this one, possibly slime monsters should be
saucer people? maybe something else wrong, (turned on headache).
Time = a water clock (a series of trays of water)
Space = a village of floating cushions w/ sunshades + houseboats
Energy = a tidal wave. Mass = a vast cliff overhanging the lake.
Trouble = slime monsters.
Details: You are a frog person (manlike, has hands, wears clothes, etc.).
The frog people mostly live in & on the water although they have
buildings on the shore too (need to breed underwater, etc.). You
control the pond by leading & manipulating the people & try to control
other ponds as well. You perform 7 great deeds of control to get the
people to work together to fight slime monsters, stop crime, build a
dam, etc. The people wouldn’t obey rules so you put thought control
helmets on them (supposedly on criminals but really on anyone who
protests). The helmets give headaches when they disobey orders or
break laws or thing bad thoughts about the state etc. Eventually you
covertly aid the slime monsters to give you more excuses for more
control etc. You misdeeds are eventually found out & the people rebel
& your chased & caught & divided against yourself etc.
Following, to judge, probably belongs with the 9th dynamic (same as
arbitrate), kept here temporarily as a safety measure., see 9th
dynamic.
370
??. TO JUDGE (giants - a Judge)
Environment = courtroom, you make others divide against themselves
for their crimes. You travel to villages of underpeople such as elves &
fairies & hold court. Twist cases for your own gain.
Inc 2 loc = Philadelphia;
Pyramid= Dublin, Ire.
The price of law is injustice
To survive is to depend on the law abidence of others
Time = courtroom clock.
DYNAMIC 3 (GROUPS)
53. TO ORGANIZE (clerk; human)
Environment = a bureaucracy (everything happens inside); planets are
being taken over & you do the paperwork; eventually angry mobs
storm the building & burn forms etc.
Inc 2 loc = London;
Pyramid = Portugal
The price of order is frustration.
To survive is to depend on the uniformity of others.
Time = beeping computer signal (red flashing light on console).
Space = looking down at a cafeteria from a mezzanine.
Energy = someone throws a basket of forms at the clerks head.
Mass = endless ceiling high piles of forms.
Trouble = bull people.
Details: The body type is a hermaphrodite (bi-sexual). Sex is used as
an office hierarchy privilege, done to you by seniors & by you to
juniors. There is a sort of 2D as well & the sex in the office is a source
of upset. God is an administrative computer. The entire incident
happens indoors. The exhilaration at the start is on putting order into
everything & categorizing & airing it. Planets are being taken over &
you handle all the paperwork. At start you organize 7 departments,
creating new forms & procedures to introduce more order into the
every growing piles of data. There are forms about forms. When you
make a mistake, the penalty is to pay tax & the form for this are
endless & horrible. You inflict forms & lines & procedures on others &
371
sometimes they starve & die on line. There are bull people who
wouldn’t tolerate this and wreck things etc. Sinking downscale, you
become horrified & guilty but can’t stop. Eventually angry mobs storm
through the building & burn forms etc. Eventually you are caught and
divided for your sins by the god computer. In the end you fall down an
elevator shaft which opens into a big cavern in the basement that
contains a volcano which leads down to hell.
54. TO CO-OPERATE (robots)
Environment = warring space stations in orbit (blue Vs red robots)
(squarish robot bodies, cube heads)
Inc 2 loc = orbit;
Pyramid = Detroit
(inc 2 scene - robot falling from sky into a volcano).
The price of agreement is obedience.
To survive is to depend on the obedience of others.
Time = sunlight moving across a space station.
Space = 2 large space stations (wheels), a planet is high above. (about
8 big platforms + ships & robots moving around)
Energy = ship smashing into station & debris flying around.
Mass = large bundle of girders drifting into a bulkhead & crumpling it in
a large loading dock (gravity less).
God = computer
Creator = octopus in tank of gas.
Dissolve = robots tossing others into a vat of boiling acid.
Details: you do 7 great projects working together with the other robots
to build things & expand the station & fight the enemy robots etc.
You’re a sort of team leader who gets others to work together but they
get in each others way & you sacrifice & harm them for the sake of the
project without regard to fairness or impact on the individuals (i.e.
purely practical). The individuals become upset so you have them
reprogrammed (implanted) & also you pretend to be helping them but
really (at first) are only working for the sake of the group. Later you
become dis- illusioned & only work for yourself & your own gain.
Finally you want to overthrow society but can’t because the other
robots will destroy everyone. Your evilness is found out & your
dragged before the computer God etc.
55. TO PARTICIPATE (mermaid)
372
Environment = in ocean. Sex splits open the tail & causes you to
develop legs which is considered degraded & confines you to land.
You do it anyway for the sake of participation & become debased &
cast out.
Inc 2 loc = Capetown, S.Africa;
Pyramid = bay in N.E. Lemuria
The price of approval is self degradation
To survive is to depend on the sympathy of others
Time = moon swings (nighttime) above a mermaid on a rock at sea
Space = undersea castle with glow fish swimming around etc.
Energy=ship crashing on the rocks.
Mass=heavy chest sinking in water with mermaids struggling & failing
to pull it up.
Trouble = Centaurs on the deck of a ship.
God = giant statue of Poseidon half out of the water with a trident
Details: You participate in 7 great group activities. These include
singing which compels human sailors to come & crash on the rocks
where their stuff can be looted. Your voice has magical powers & they
are amplified by singing together with others. Sometimes a ship has
centaurs instead of human sailors & they can resist your voice & have
magic of their own & hunt you. Finally you have sex with a human &
your legs split open & your cast out & you participate with the other
cast out mermaids on shore to sink ships but the centaurs come &
catch you & drag you before Poseidon (god statue) who divides you
against yourself etc. (? maybe some errors in this). The mermaid’s big
button is showing others how they’ve ruined her.
56. TO EXPAND (mouse people - railroad engineers)
Environment = you engineer a vast railroad at the expense of
everything else. You are in competition with others doing the same &
you work your mice to death & are sentenced by the gods.
Inc 2 loc = Edinburgh;
Pyramid = Philadelphia.
The price of expansion is confusion.
To survive is to depend on the toil of others.
Time = RR clock tower over station.
Space = Trainshed
373
Energy = Locomotive in motion
Mass = coaling tower dumping tons of coal
God = looks like USA’s Uncle Sam.
Trouble=a hausefrau like dollbody, hypnotic beams shoot from eyes
Details: At start you organize 7 great projects. You get them building
railroads (British looking, red engines & competition has green engines).
Working to beat another company & be larger. Eventually you do too
many overts and overexpand and it’s all too complicated and everyone
works too hard. Doll people object to your expansion etc. You work
the mice to death. They revolt etc.
DYNAMIC 2 (SEX/FAMILY)
57. TO REPRODUCE (insect people)
Environment = You are one of the bug eyed winged people that
reproduce by injecting eggs into paralyzed hosts. Walks on 2 legs and
has 4 hands. Space traveling. Swoop down on planets (a bit like 5th
invader).
Inc 2 loc = Calcutta?;
Pyramid = Buenos Aires (Ural mts).
The price of expansion is detestation (starvation?)
To survive is to need the bodies of others
Time = Wristwatch on wrist of an insect body.
Space=insect invaders swooping down on a valley.
Energy=Gorrillas with laser cannon blast down a cliff (insect invaders
are at top of cliff).
Mass=spaceship sinking into mud.
God = a stone spider Trouble = Gorilla People.
Details: At start you swoop down as part of an invader force against 7
planets where you inject eggs into the natives (various body types).
You come down from orbit riding prone on a small torpedo shaped
device with handlebars. Your wings can support you in the air briefly
but tire rapidly. There is a tremendous ‘high’ about populating all of the
universe with your own species. As a male, your sexual organs draw
eggs out of the female & fertilize & hold them (where they build up
pressure) until you can inject them into a host. Some of the peoples
you attack are high tech. There are laser armed gorilla people who
object to being egg victims. They give you much trouble & get you in
the end. You begin to realize that your whole life is an overt but you
374
can’t stop. Eventually the gorillas burn off your wings & drop you in a
volcano, etc.
58. TO SATISFY (cavemen)
Environment = stone age (see Hits of Man), much sex, rape, breaking
women’s legs to keep them from running away, infidelity, etc.
Inc 2 loc = Peking
Pyramid = France
(inc 2 scene: caveman jumping into a volcano)
The price of pleasure is to sin
To survive is to depend on others for pleasure (fulfillment?)
Time = caveman by cave overlooking a valley with shadows creeping.
Space = looking down at valley from rocks.
Energy = caveman bashing head of mammoth with club.
Mass = a great rock. Crush = arm sticking out from under body of a
mammoth.
Trouble = elves.
Details: At start you are master of the land, hunt mammoths, kill bears,
etc. There is much sex, all the women want you but each wants to
keep you for themselves. At start there are 7 women who you mate
with successfully and then things begin deteriorating. One woman
drives off all the others. You want one from a different tribe who isn’t
interested in you & you break her leg to keep her & then regret it etc.
There are also elves. You steal elf women & rape them, chase them
through their caves. But elves strike you with magic bolts etc. Finally
they catch you & take you before the statue of the mammoth god who
divides you against yourself. Eventually no female wants you, you can’t
kill game, & the elf women throw stones at you. Finally they roll a
bolder on you & you die & are buried in a cave where fire demons
drag your soul deeper into the caves which leads into a volcano &
down to hell.
59. TO JOIN (cat people)
Environment = a neo-modern (cubist) city of flying (levitating) cat people
crazy for sex. Have endless kids & throw them out or kill them until
robots come & force you to feed them (kids eat your breasts which
grow back, but its painful). You betray lovers turning them in to the
robots etc.
375
Inc 2 loc = Orleans, France;
Pyramid = Baghdad
The price of love is betrayal
To survive is to depend on the lusts of others
Time = sun swings over a cubist city with flying cat people.
Space = cat person floating in air over ocean.
Energy = cat person levitating.
Mass =a great iron chest which falls & crashes through the floor
Trouble = Robots
God = Earth Mother statue.
Details: You are a cat woman who is exhilarated about sex. You have
7 wonderful 2Ds. When you have kids you bash their heads in or throw
them out to starve. Then robots come & explain that your supposed to
let the kids feed on you & they enforce it as a law. Each litter bites you
& scars you all over (the breasts are nubs to be eaten). You violate
laws, kill kids, engage in sexual abuse, fight robots, etc. Also, you
betray your lovers turning them over to the robots when they give you
problems etc. The robots catch you & haul you before the earth
mother god (giant human like statue with dozens of arms & breasts &
endless kids of many types in its arms). It hits you with a beam that
divides you against yourself. They release you and you grow old and
ugly, no males will join with you etc. You jump off a building & find you
can’t levitate anymore & smash to the ground & die. The robots scrape
up the body & put it in a drawer in a mausoleum & lock it electronically
so that your soul can’t get out. Then devils drag your soul out (you try
to stay in) & haul you out to sea & throw you into a volcano sticking
above the surface. Inside, the souls of all the children you killed torture
you with painful degraded sexual sensations.
60. TO CARE FOR (birdgirl) you protect the forest & strangle trappers
etc.
Environment = a forest of giant trees.
Inc 2 loc =Alcopoco, Mexico;
Pyramid = Niger/Chad Africa.
The price of caring is grief.
To survive is to depend on the suffering (?) of others
Time = Birdgirl on the porch of a tree house watching the sunset.
Space=birdgirl on giant tree branch looking at forested valley.
376
Energy=birdgirl flying hard up to the top of a cliff.
Mass=Rock promontory jutting out over valley (& starting to crack off).
Trouble=snake people (engineers).
Details: You are in a forest of ferns & trees with dinosaurs etc. & snake
people who build things. You have 7 families of children including your
own & other types of creatures who you care for with great pleasure &
success. They spread through the forest. You also care for other
children such as dinosaurs etc. but they all fight & hurt each other
although they love you. You try to make everyone stop fighting but
they resent this. The snakes enslave others & build vast structures &
cut down trees & you interfere & they hunt you. You try to stop
everyone from doing anything & begin killing anyone who moves (all
for good reasons) & you wouldn’t let anyone live their own lives &
begin implanting people not to fight etc. Your like a god to the various
children at first but then you become an oppressor. At one point, the
snake people promise to stop the fighting (by enslavement) and so
you help them, but they betray you. Eventually the children catch you
& turn you over to the snakes who haul you before the snake god (a
creature in a bottle) who divides you against yourself.
DYNAMIC 1 (BODY)
61. TO FEEL (To experience the feeling of being alive, also could be
translated as To Live) (bears)
Environment = snow covered forest & mountains, these are pretty
much real bears, not bear people, you offend the spirit guardian of the
forest by making mess, also hunters chase you (fox people with rifles)
Inc 2 loc = Canton, China
Pyramid = Green Bay, Wisc.
The price of sensation is pain
To survive is to depend on others for sensation
Time = sun swings over snow covered forest.
Space = snowy mountain slope.
God = statue of forest god (treelike man).
Difficult = Bear trying to catch fish.
Pain = tree falls on bear.
Trouble = Hunters (fox people)
Details: At start you are the master of all you survey, experiencing 7
incidents of wonderful feelings including climbing trees, scaring other
377
animals, sex, catching fish, eating honey, etc. But you mess up things
etc. & think its a lot of fun. It gets cold & you hibernate, bees sting you,
etc. You offend the guardian of the forest by making so much mess,
and hunters (fox people with rifles) chase you. There are tree people
(trees with faces) & you torture them with fire, you also burn down part
of the forest. The tree god catches you (in his spirit form) and takes you
to his alter & divides you against yourself. Now everything is terrible &
you age etc. Then the hunters kill & skin & eat you & bury the bones.
You can’t get out of the grave because they build a magic cairn over it
to keep you in. Plant devils come & drag your soul off to hell.
The goal here might be to experience instead of to feel.
62. TO REPLENISH (looks sort of like an old Arab)
Environment = desert & mts. Lots of stealing from Arab camp & from
robots, much need to rest.
Inc 2 loc = Jerusalem;
Pyramid = Shanghai, China
The price of motion is tiredness (strength is exhaustion?)
To survive is to depend on the creations of others
Time = sunset in the desert.
Space = sitting on rocks looking at sand.
Energy = hurling a spear.
Mass = the mountains.
Trouble = spider people
Details: You are sly and crafty and ride around with great exhilaration
and take what you want. There is treasure in the mountains and you
find it and steal it. You do 7 great thefts to replenish the tribe’s coffers.
Then, sinking downscale, you develop considerations on taking others
things and using others energy and get tired etc. You stumble on a
robot base in the mountains and steal from them and get in trouble.
Eventually the spider people (invader’s who own the robots) catch you
and take you before their computer god who divides you against
yourself. Then you age rapidly and totter about as the old man of the
mountains & die etc.
There might be some errors in this. Its possible that the goal is To
Survive, and that it comes between to eat and to endure.
378
63. TO EAT (tiger), env = jungle, eating monkeys, chased by natives,
sacrificed to the monkey gods (stone statues)
Inc 2 loc = Kenya;
Pyramid = S. India
The price of energy is guilt.
To survive is to depend on the energy of others.
Time = sun swings over tiger eating monkey on hill above jungle
Space = Tiger looking over plane.
Energy = tiger leaping between rocks.
Mass = tiger watching natives struggling to lift a waterbuck.
God = giant statue of a monkey.
Trouble = natives. (see Tiger symbols platen for full list).
Details: You’re the tiger in the jungle. You eat 7 monkeys with great
gain in strength and aliveness. Gradually you deteriorate, having
trouble with natives, elephants, rhinos, etc. Finally the natives capture
and cage you and haul you before the monkey gods who divide you
against yourself and then you age and starve, struggling in the jungle.
You die and the natives dance on your grave so that you can’t get out.
Then devil birds come and carry your soul off to hell in a volcano.
64. TO ENDURE (pyramid)
Environment = desert. You are a stationary pyramid (3 sides with 1 eye
in each, one eye for sex & sensation, 1 for blasting things with energy,
& 1 for hypnosis/control), you’re a god similar to the statue in to create
but immobile & need people to care for the pyramid, There is a space
opera city in the distance & you hypnotize the people in it to serve you
until they destroy you.
Inc 2 loc = Egypt;
Pyramid = New York
(inc 2 scene - the ground cracks open beneath the pyramid and it falls
into the fires of the Earth).
The price of endurance (or persistence or havingness?) is to be
weighted down.
To survive is to depend on the care of others
Time = sun swings over pyramid (with eye).
Space = desert (city in distance)
Energy = beam coming out from pyramid.
379
Matter = bricks of pyramid.
Danger (fear) = spaceship approaching pyramid.
Trouble = an old man with a staff.
Hurt = sandstorm abrading the pyramid.
Pain = beam from ship knocks off bricks from pyramid.
Control = eye of pyramid shoots beam into a one eyed man.
Excitement = a space opera type city.
Influence = a beam from the pyramid embraces the city.
Details: You are a sort of God (like the statue in To Create), but you are
immobile. You permeate the nearby city and the people (Egyptian like
but the headdresses are part of their heads) come to worship you. You
hypnotize rulers etc. and play games with the people, using them like
toys. At first you help the city (do 7 wondrous things, resolving
conflicts etc.), but eventually you’re just an evil influence. There are
other pyramids. You can intertwine your sensation beam with them for
sex but its very shallow. All feeling is slightly numb & heavy except for
pain which is very worrisome. As parts of the pyramid crumble, you
hypnotize people to rebuild & fix it. You come into competition with
another pyramid on the far side of the city & the 2 of you start a civil
war hypnotizing the people against each other. Eventually you get the
people to destroy the other pyramid and you know it is possible to die.
A prophet comes who is immune to your hypnosis (blind) and he calls
down the sky gods (giant man shaped spirits) who come down &
divide you against yourself. The people cease to worship you and you
decay & die & are buried by sand & eventually you’re thrown into hell
in a volcano.
------- End of Penalty Universe List -------
380
PENALTY UNIVERSES: TIGER UNIVERSE SYMBOLS
TIGER IMPLANT UNIVERSE
(The Goal To Eat)
SECTION 2: SYMBOLS
NOTE: (I found about 3/4 of these and then finally found platen 1. I got
the rest, and made corrections on a subsequent pass after running
platen 1 on the goal To Eat. Everything here read on the meter at one
point or another, but I could not at that time take this to an FNing
platen. Past a certain point, I was picking up charge on similar items in
other penalty universes when I tried to go further with this section. So I
began running platen 1 and spotting symbol items on other goals and
mapping out the entire series of penalty universes. Eventually the
whole mess fell apart with a huge persistent FN and I never really got
this platen fully straightened out. There are probably errors and
missing items and things out of sequence. But this platen was close
enough to take off a lot of charge and let me get to the items of platen
1 (which will go to an FNing platen) and it should at least give you an
idea about how these things fit together.).
This section defines the basic symbols used in the implant universe.
At this point, you are in a space with at least 5 dimensions. The
symbols are 3 dimensional pictures, but there is a bit of a time
component (you can feel a bit of motion in them) which is 4th
dimensional thickness (i.e. each one is really a series of 3 dimensional
pictures layered in a 4th dimension to give the appearance of motion)
that seem to be stacked up (in a 5th dimensional direction) like a pile of
photographs. You reach through this deck of symbols seeing each one
in turn. As you see each one, you get the intention “THIS MEANS ....”.
Each symbol is in the pile twice. The original form is in the first half and
the alter-ised form is in the second half. The second half was done in
reverse order. I.E., this goes A, B, C, then C, B, A. The meaning and
the basic scene are the same in the two copies of the symbol. The
alterations in the second half mainly consist of changes in color and
direction. I.E., something that’s blue the first time might be green the
second and the right and left sides of the picture might be switched as
in a mirror image. The later version is the alterised one that persisted
and it feels more “natural” than the original.
Sometimes you may have to compare the two copies of the symbol
and spot the difference Sometimes they make a minor addition or
change to the picture. Usually something uncomfortable such as
381
seeing exactly what it is that is being buried in the second picture only,
but this is not common.
It seems like they had to use symbol items at the beginning of the
implant to give any meaning to the mockups, because these things
were new and undefined and when the implant was first done, you
wouldn’t have even known who the good guys and the bad guys
were. The rest of the implant would all have been meaningless.
The first item immediately follows the last item of platen 1 on the goal
“To Eat”.
1. As you reach, you encounter the basic symbols. These are like a
stack of 3 dimensional pictures. You know that if you reach for
them, you will gain understanding.
TO EAT IS TO REACH FOR UNDERSTANDING
2. You connect with the thought of each symbol in turn.
TO EAT IS TO CONNECT WITH THOUGHT
3. As you connect to the first symbol, you realize this:
TO EAT IS THE BASIS OF ALL SYMBOLOGY
4. Now you contact the first and most basic symbols of all existence
TO EAT IS TO CONTACT SYMBOLS
5. Now you realize that through this you will achieve an
understanding of all existence
TO EAT IS TO KNOW THE BASIS OF ALL EXISTENCE
6. You reach into the first symbol. A brown tiger is eating a gray
monkey as the sun moves through the sky from right to left. The
tiger is on a small hill above a purple jungle.
THIS MEANS TIME
7. A gray bolder rolls down a hill
THIS MEANS MOTION
382
8. A brown tiger looks out over a purple grassy plain with light
green lamas. A gray waterbuck is visible in the background. The
tiger is up on the gray rocks.
THIS MEANS SPACE
9. A brown tiger leaps with a great bound between gray rocks
THIS MEANS ENERGY
10. A brown tiger watches black natives struggling to lift the carcass
of a gray waterbuck (water buffalo). They are by the waterhole.
THIS MEANS MASS
11. A tiger watches a family of zebras together in the tall grass
THIS MEANS AFFINITY
12. There is a waterhole. It is almost a small lake but shallow. There
are gray monkeys and green vultures and gray waterbucks and
other animals in different areas around it.
THIS MEANS REALITY
13. A tiger by the carcass of an antelope in the grass looks warningly
at another tiger.
THIS MEANS COMMUNICATION
14. A beautiful little yellow horse (about 1 foot high like the dawn
horse) sits facing a brown tiger who admires him. The horse is
on the left. They are in the grassland near a tree.
THIS MEANS ADMIRATION
15. A tree stands in the grasslands. The trunk is orange and the
leaves are purple. It absorbs energy from the sun (which is to
the right) and from the earth and it seems to be getting bigger.
THIS MEANS GROWTH
16. The next symbol is the jungle with trees and purple foliage and
shadows and vines. Some gray monkeys and a small brown
snake are almost in view. Its very aesthetic and interesting
383
THIS MEANS ADVENTURE
17. A gray monkey is in the tall grass
THIS MEANS FOOD (THAT WHICH IS EATEN)
18. A brown tiger is biting a gray monkey in the purple jungle
THIS MEANS EATING
19. Pink and yellow stripped zebras are running across the grassland
THIS MEANS FAST
20. A tiger struggles uphill
THIS MEANS DIFFICULT
21. A brown tiger is in mid air tumbling over a waterfall (on the left).
A blue eagle and a red lizard bird are in the air watching and a
pink rhino and a red croc are at the bottom in the water
THIS MEANS DISORIENTATION
22. There is a sort of earthquake. There are gray monkeys and some
brown tigers jumping around up on the gray rocks and it is all
shaking and rocks are flying in all directions.
THIS MEANS DISORDER
23. A brown tiger falls into a tree on the right and his cheek is
pierced by a branch.
THIS MEANS PAIN
24. Yellow ants are swarming over bodies (on the left) next to the
river (on the right) and there is a tiger tied by a vine to a tree with
ants swarming over him. He is struggling.
THIS MEANS TORTURE
25. There is a gray volcano slightly to the left. It has violet and green
flames. Rust red winged creatures (lizard birds - devils) are
circling above it. They appear small because this is in the
distance and the volcano is vast. You can see one carrying
something but you can’t see what.
384
THIS MEANS HELL
26. A brown tiger tears at the flesh of a gray waterbuck
THIS MEANS ACHIEVEMENT
27. A light green toucan (tropical bird) flies from right to left toward a
tree near the waterhole
THIS MEANS FLYING
28. A reddish pink rhino is charging a brown tiger and catching him in
the stomach with his horn (the tiger is in mid leap). The rhino is
on the left. They are in the grassland. The rhino looks sort of like
a triceratops with a big shield behind his head
THIS MEANS ATTACK
29. A gray waterbuck charges a brown tiger. The waterbuck is on
the right. The tiger is stepping aside.
THIS MEANS AVOIDANCE
30. Black natives are skinning a yellow & white giraffe with big knives
THIS MEANS CUT
31. It is dark in the grassland with a tree to the left. A pink and yellow
zebra looks to the left in terror at a rust red lizard bird (like a
pterodactyl but really files rather than glides and has a snake
head - they look sort of like gargoyles or flying devils). A rock
dropped by another lizard flying above has broken the zebras
back. A brown tiger watches
THIS MEANS TERROR
32. A great gray stone statue of a monkey. It is a monkey god. Its
hands are uplifted.
THIS MEANS GOD
33. Black natives are sitting in the village eating. You can see the
cutup remains of a gray waterbuck. A brown tiger watches from
the bushes.
THIS MEANS STEALTH
385
34. A black native is on his back (head to right) with a brown tiger
ontop of him. The native is struggling and holds a knife crosswise
in the tigers mouth cutting the lips and the back of the mouth to
either side. Blood flows from the tigers mouth
THIS MEANS BLEED
35. A black native who is wearing a yellowish loincloth and holding a
big spear.
THIS MEANS TROUBLE
36. A procession of black natives climb the gray rocks. They have
the body of a brown boar on poles. The procession goes up
from right to left.
THIS MEANS DEFEAT
37. A dirty messed up brown tiger, skinny and with his fur in tatters,
is hiding among the rocks. He is missing teeth.
THIS MEANS HOPELESSNESS
38. A brown tiger hangs on the side of a gray rock cliff. He has been
climbing but is too tired to continue. The rocks are on the left.
THIS MEANS WEAKNESS
39. There is a brown boar (wild pig with tusks). It is snorting and
snarling.
THIS MEANS FEROCIOUS
40. A tiger looks longingly at a monkey up out of reach in a tree.
THIS MEANS NEED
41. A black native lassos a pink and yellow zebra with a purple vine
rope. The native is on the right.
THIS MEANS CAPTURE
42. A green and violet (splotchy coloration) kangaroo hops out from a
bush startling a brown tiger. The kangaroo is on the right.
THIS MEANS SURPRISE
386
43. A brown tigress (female tiger) is sitting a den.
THIS MEANS SENSATION
44. A brown tiger hits an orange one with his paw. The orange tiger
is to the left. You are looking from behind (over the shoulder of)
the brown one.
THIS MEANS STRIKE.
45. An immaculate brown tiger is sitting upright in the grass facing
you.
THIS MEANS BEAUTY
46. A pink elephant on the left hits a charging tiger who is on the
right. The elephant’s tusk is smashing into the tiger’s cheek and
you can see some of the tiger’s teeth shattering.
THIS MEANS BREAK
47. A tiger stumbles around a waterhole
THIS MEANS DIZZY
48. There is a pit with the remains of a purple covering of leaves
around it. A pink and yellow zebra lies at the bottom with stakes
piercing it. A brown tiger cub is struggling to climb out of it. A
black native is to the left holding a spear ready to throw.
THIS MEANS TRAP
49. A brown tiger (facing right) is defecating
THIS MEANS DEGRADATION
50. Brown tiger cubs are playing with their mother watching.
THIS MEANS OBLIGATION
51. A brown tiger tears at the flesh of a lama. The lama is slightly
greenish in color. No blood splatters.
THIS MEANS SUCCESS
387
52. A giant green and silver spider with a white jewel in its forehead
spins and orange web. A brown tiger watches. The spider is to
the left. It is at least 5 times bigger than the tiger.
THIS MEANS CREATION
53. High grass is blowing in the wind. The sun is bright and warm
and the sky is blue.
THIS MEANS CONTENTMENT
54. A brown tiger is on his back, pierced by a spear.
THIS MEANS AGONY
55. A brown tiger is resting in the jungle in the dark.
THIS MEANS RECOVERY
56. There is a tigers den with a male, female, and 3 cubs. The tigers
are brown. It looks peaceful.
THIS MEANS HOME
57. An orange leopard with green spots leaps from a tree behind a
brown tiger. The tiger is to the right.
THIS MEANS AMBUSH
58. A pink elephant is throwing a brown tiger in the air.
THIS MEANS STRENGTH
59. A small brown snake is sinking its fangs into something (partial
view of a lama) as it contracts around it and squeezes.
THIS MEANS FAILURE
60. A green alter is in the jungle. There is a body of a gray monkey
on it (the alter is not overgrown with vines).
THIS MEANS WORSHIP
61. A blue eagle is on the back of a pink and yellow zebra who is
running to the right. The zebra’s head is turned back and is
bleeding and has great tears of flesh pulled out of his cheek and
388
his eye is missing. The eagle is tearing at him and has a strip of
flesh in his beak.
THIS MEANS TEAR
62. There is a handsome brown tiger leaping among the rocks.
THIS MEANS YOU
63. A brown tiger is running through the grass.
THIS MEANS RUN (GO FAST)
64. A brown tiger looks up at a vast roaring waterfall. The waterfall is
on the left.
THIS MEANS FORCE
65. A gray monkey is hiding under a tree. A brown tiger is searching
for him but cannot find him.
THIS MEANS HIDING
66. There is a far off jungle on the other side of the grassland. A bit of
the nearby jungle is visible to the right.
THIS MEANS DISTANCE
67. A big orange tiger pacing through the grass (note opposite color
from you).
THIS MEANS COMPETITION
68. A gray waterbuck is crashing through the jungle and a brown
tiger is chasing after him. They are going to the right.
THIS MEANS HUNTING
69. A brown tiger is stealing the hindleg of a gray waterbuck. Black
natives have their back to him and are looking the other way.
The tiger is on the right.
THIS MEANS CHEATING
70. A brown tiger watches the antics of a gray monkey with a yellow
stripe on his back.
389
THIS MEANS AMUSED
71. A brown tiger (on the left) steps in a burning campfire.
THIS MEANS BURN
72. A greenish lama is drinking from the waterhole. Behind his back a
red croc is creeping forward with his mouth wide open. The croc
looks happy and is on the left (slightly bigger longer legs than
earth crocs - these crocs could hop when on land).
THIS MEANS DUMB
73. A Brown tiger runs from a gray waterbuck.
THIS MEANS FLEE
74. A brown tiger jumps between two gray rocks
THIS MEANS LEAP
75. A Brown tiger on the right watches mesmerized as brown,
purple, yellow and green monkeys dance around a fire with
green and purple flames to the beat of black and brown drums
played by black natives. the fire is on the left and the drums are
behind it.
THIS MEANS TRANCE
76. Green vultures are picking over the body of a brown tiger.
THIS MEANS DECAY
77. There is a big hole in the ground. The black natives are pushing
something into it but you can’t quite make out what it is.
THIS MEANS TO LOSE
78. A blue eagle is sitting on the stiff leg of a dead pink and yellow
zebra (rigor mortis). The eagle is to the left.
THIS MEANS STIFF
79. A dark and turbulent river winds through the jungle. It flow from
right to left and froths like there are rapids.
390
THIS MEANS TURMOIL
80. A rock area high above the grass and jungle. The sun glitters on
the rocks. There is some grass and some gray monkeys
climbing around and a green vulture in the sky.
THIS MEANS SKILL
81. A gray monkey has thrown a piece of green fruit which hits a
brown tiger in the nose. The monkey is on the right.
THIS MEANS THROW
82. A brown tiger roars at an elephant
THIS MEANS ROAR
83. There is a tigers den with brown tigers - male, female, and 3
cubs. A brown boar is running around in it. The tigers are
snarling. It is chaotic.
THIS MEANS UPSET
84. A brown tiger facing left looks sorrowfully at the dead body of a
gray monkey with a yellow stripe who has been slashed by a
tiger’s claws.
THIS MEANS REGRET
85. A herd of green lamas is stampeding
THIS MEANS CONFUSION
86. A brown tiger has come upon a sleeping rhino and is quietly
backing away. The rhino is reddish pink and has a big armor
plate behind its head (looks more like a triceratops than a rhino).
The rhino is on the left. They are on the riverbank.
THIS MEANS SLEEPING
87. There is a native village with huts of brown straw and some
black natives standing around.
THIS MEANS DANGER
391
88. Bright blue bats fly out of a cave. The rock is green and the
foliage around it is purple. The cave is on the left.
THIS MEANS MYSTERY
89. A black native spears a pink ostrich with his head in the ground.
THIS MEANS UNAWARE
90. A wide open tiger’s mouth, tilted slightly to the right. 3 teeth are
missing, 2 broken, and others have black spots and holes in
them. Particles of food are caught in the teeth and decaying.
THIS MEANS ROT
91. An old brown tiger stumbles along.
THIS MEANS DISABILITY
92. A brown tiger has bands of black energy crosswise through his
body.
THIS MEANS EVIL
93. Natives with torches run through the night. A stampeding pink
rhino is behind them.
THIS MEANS PANIC
94. A brown tiger is lying in the grass panting watching pink and
yellow zebras run off in the distance.
THIS MEANS TIREDNESS
95. A spear is sticking in the flank of a brown tiger.
THIS MEANS INJURY
96. A yellow and white giraffe runs from a brown tiger. They are
running from left to right.
THIS MEANS FEAR
97. A brown tiger going over a gray cliff
THIS MEANS FALL
392
98. A cage made of something like bamboo is in the jungle. It is
empty.
THIS MEANS ENTRAPMENT
99. There is some meat on a spit cooking over a fire. The stones
ringing the open fire are gray.
THIS MEANS HOT
100. A bolt of lightning strikes a tree on the side of the trail. It
strikes with great force. The trail runs off to the right.
THIS MEANS ELECTRICAL (or - this means zap)
101. It is snowing. There are patches of snow on the gray rocks.
THIS MEANS COLD
102. A wild brown boar is being cut open with a knife. The
black native doing it is partially visible.
THIS MEANS KILL
103. A pink and yellow zebra lies dead in the desert. He is
slightly to the left. A blue bat is draining his blood. A red lizzard
bird (devil) is in the sky. A yellow reptile watches. The parched
earth is purple/gray. There is a pink skull and the pink skeleton of
a tiger.
THIS MEANS DEATH
104. A volcano on the left is erupting. Lava flows and there is
smoke and burning. Black natives and gray waterbucks and
many other creatures are running in panic.
THIS MEANS DOOM
105. A gray waterbuck is charging at a brown tiger. A tigress is
watching.
THIS MEANS TO FIGHT
106. A brown tiger stands on the rocks. he is tall and proud.
There is an alter before him on which is the carcass of a gray
waterbuck. A procession of black natives moving from right to
393
left is carrying more carcasses to him. There are more carcasses
pilled on the grassy plain and other creatures wait patiently to be
slaughtered for him.
THIS MEANS WIN
107. You see a landscape below you (this is the original inverted
version of the big map).
violet mountains
the far jungle (purple)
x x brown grassland
x
x * * * * /
gray rocks x * purple /river
x * jungle /
x x * trail /
* * %%%%
* * %%% swamp
THIS MEANS THE UNIVERSE
108. A wide dirt trail leads between the trees in the jungle. The
trail disappears off to the left.
THIS MEANS PROCEED
End of section II part A.
Then comes part B. It begins with the item “This Means Proceed”, and
the colors and directions are reversed. It seems like you’re going one
way and then you’ve swung around and are going the other way. Then
you get the map again, and everything is switched right to left etc.
Now the mountains are brown, the jungles are green, etc. and
everything carries on in reverse order. The brown tigers become
orange tigers, the pink elephants become gray, etc.
If reading this was at all restimulative, then spot “To Eat Is Native State”
at the top of platen 1, and spot being pushed into it and pushing others
into it.
394
CHAPTER 6 - DIVIDE AND CONQUER
From the earliest days of Scientology we have known that things are
not one sided, but operate in both directions. The engrams of
Dianetics, seen in 1950 only from the view of what has been done to
the PC, were in 1952 found to have a balancing side in the PCs
commission of overt acts against others.
In light of this, it would seem obvious that if the PC was suffering from
being infested by others, then he must also be infesting others
himself. If there were incidents which joined beings together, then
there must also be incidents which caused the being to divide.
Ron only discusses this briefly, primarily in the HCL lectures of 1952,
and the last mention of it that I’m aware of was around 1954 in the 3rd
ACC. Unfortunately, he says very little that is useful concerning how to
audit this, the only technique (as far as I know) being to run mockups of
dividing.
This was the rock on which I floundered for many years. I tried all sorts
of techniques. I researched implant platens where the being was
forced to divide and found that they would not run out more than a few
of these splits before I would start to get sick. I tried NOTS techniques
and found them almost unworkable in this area. I experimented with
trying to blow out ridges that were dividing me by means of energy
flows. Everything failed or only worked briefly and marginally.
And then I found the key process which is easy and works consistently
without problems. It is quite simple. If you spot or otherwise sense
something that might be a part of yourself which is split off, isolated, or
otherwise blocked from your awareness, you have it do the following
command: POINT TO THE BEING THAT YOU DIVIDED FROM.
Something will seem to go somewhere. And you will feel better and
unbothered.
Apparently there is an important factor in the order or pattern of
division. Lets say that A0 divides into B1 and B2. Now B1 divides into
C3 and C4 and B2 divides into D5 and D6. Here and now all there is is
C3, C4, D5 and D6. If C3 is the conscious viewpoint and it finds D6,
then when it runs the process on D6, D6 will point to D5 and rejoin it. If
you try to handle the split any other way, you find yourself trying to
force D6 to rejoin C3 which doesn’t work.
This indicates why the other techniques I tried worked so sporadically.
Occasionally I would be dealing with a split off piece that could rejoin
395
directly, but usually I wasn’t. And the attempt to get it to rejoin would
create a sort of bypassed charge in terms of the missing piece that
was in between, which is why it was so easy to get sick while fooling
around with this.
Furthermore, the above process will work to some degree on BTs, so
you don’t have to worry too much about whether you’ve really got a
split off piece of yourself or something else. If there is any remnant
after running the above, use “Who Are you”. Sometimes there is a
whole crowd of BTs that become visible after blowing one of these
splits, and usually you can just run the Who question immediately. You
can also repeat the Point command given above. The pointing often
undoes valences etc. because it gets back to the basic identity.
Occasionally blowing one of these splits will reveal some large very
solid mental machinery built out of programmed machine entities
(which I abbreviate to PME). If so, then use the key command on them
for undoing the machine building implants. The command is “Spot
being made into a machine”.
If you run this point command on yourself, you should find that you
can indeed point in some strange direction and you feel a bit better and
more certain of yourself and who you are. But you will not takeoff and
rejoin some other thetan or something like that. There apparently is a
difference between truly separate individuals who split off of the same
earlier being and unconsciously split off pieces of an individual. The
latter will rejoin on being handled whereas the former will remain
separate but know better who they are.
The “pointing” works even when it is done in a vague and sloppy
manner, you don’t have to be very precise about it. The pointing is not
necessarily in a physical direction. Also, you are not necessarily
pointing to where the other being is now. Usually the pointing is
towards the original direction in which the split occurred.
Since this works on any BT, it might act as an undercut or at least as a
repair on OT3 or NOTS, but this has yet to be determined in a practical
sense.
I am nowhere near finished with running this level. Therefore, I can’t
guarantee that everything I say about it is correct. The best I can do is
give you my notes and trust that the above process will carry you
through any mistakes or restimulation. To the best of my knowledge,
there were only 10,000 individuals on the early track. My guess is that
this is the number of separate pieces of theta that split off from the
infinite static and went through the Jewel of Knowledge independently
396
of each other. Their only connection is that each one is part of the
underlying static and they all share the fact of having experienced the
jewel.
Each of these basic individuals was capable of assuming many
identities simultaneously and being in many places at once. This total
level of skill and ability is still available to us despite the fact that we
have been heavily implanted and otherwise abberated into being
located in one place and doing only one thing at a time.
These individuals eventually divided many times and eventually
became the trillions who inhabit this universe.
When an individual truly and completely divides, the result is two
complete fully capable copies. There is no parceling out of spiritual
resources or loss of horsepower. Both are identical, one is not senior
to the other. Both copies have the full remembrance of being the
original that divided. From that point on, they each evolve individually.
If my analysis of the original purpose behind it all is correct (e.g. to
balance the infinite nothingness with creation), then these two will
never rejoin because there is no benefit to having fewer unique
individuals.
A split off piece of an individual, on the other hand, is not a separate
being. It is simply a part of themselves, often sent off somewhere or
hidden or otherwise kept out of sight. These fragments can be aware
in the sense of perceiving and recording and reacting to things, but
they are not self aware. They can think, but they have no self
perception of their own thinking.
Don’t make the mistake of thinking that you have some big conscious
oversoul that you are a subordinate piece of. There is stuff at higher
realities which you might call an oversoul because it generates much
of the manifestations of space-time and arranges things for you, but it is
not somebody else. It is you, and you are the conscious self-aware
portion of that “oversoul”. It is simply that you are completely
unconscious in those higher realities. As you wake up, you will find
that you are still you, except bigger. So this “oversoul” is simply part of
your greater subconscious and works much like your heartbeat and all
the other things that you do for (or to) yourself automatically.
An individual cannot actually have an effect imposed on him by
another. The only mechanism consists of an individual copying and
mocking up for himself the proposed effects that another is attempting
to project at him. But it is split of portions of the person operating at a
sub-awareness level which do this copying and mocking up on an
397
automatic basis so that you have the apparancy of one person hitting
another when the only thing that can really happen is for one person to
give a picture of getting hit to another and talk him into creating it.
This almost turns NOTS into a joke. All a BT can do is talk one of your
own split pieces into mocking up a somatic for you. There is no way
that they can impinge directly. Its just that you’ve got so much of
yourself running on automatic and most of it is stupid enough to accept
orders from anybody.
The assist where you put somatics or emotions or drug effects or
whatever into the walls or room objects is actually a drill whereby you
are redirecting your own split off machinery to aim at another target
than the place where its normally directed.
Most of the determination of agreed upon reality is coming from PMEs
(Programmed Machine Entities) of which you may be a few of them
but most of them are part of other individuals. However, the copying
of the results computed by this machinery and projecting it into your
own reality is done exclusively by split off pieces of yourself because
there is nothing else that could affect you.
An interesting process at this level is “From where might you be
mocking up ...” and when you find a spot that seems right, have it
point to the being it divided from.
Note that the pointing is done mentally and must not be limited to three
dimensional physical universe directions. Most of this stuff is not within
the current 3 dimensional reality. Some of it is sideways of reality in a
sort of 4th or 5th dimensional direction. Other stuff is in other universes
and the “pointing” is sort of a pointing out the location of something in a
completely disrelated space and time. There is some natural splitting.
You put bits of yourself onto people and places and things that you
want to keep track of or influence. Since these are not enforced, they
can pretty much be brought back under control by simple exercise.
You can master dissolving these things and putting them back at will.
There’s actually nothing that stops you from dissolving these or
controlling these pieces except your own worry that you wouldn’t be
able to put them back or that you will loose track of things. So all you
have to do is drill projecting and dissolving split pieces because you’ll
let go of the ones you don’t need as soon as you’re certain that you can
put them back as needed. This is actually your natural mechanism for
staying in the game and remaining connected to other people.
Putting out split pieces is not the actual abberation. The abberation is
splitting without control or awareness and losing control and
398
awareness over pieces that are already split. This often happens
under the impact of implants. One point that is still under research is
whether or not we have multiple self aware operating centers. In other
words, we might each be a number of different people and making a
point of not knowing about our other selves from any of the individual
viewpoints. This might be like a computer running multiple programs
and shifting memory banks as it timesliced between the different
programs. Or imagine setting up a 4 player card game and playing
each of the 4 roles. You might mock up a personality for each one
(maybe one is greedy and one is skillful and one is having fun and one
is trying not to make a fool of himself) and then intentionally pretend to
not know what the other 3 are thinking as you play each role.
If this is the case, then it is different location, information, resources,
and goals which differentiate your handling of the individual operating
centers. And don’t make the mistake of thinking that you’re everybody
else. You’d only be a small percentage. Maybe one in a billion. But the
galaxy is large and even that ratio might mean that you are millions of
different people. We used to operate this way on the early track, but
we were aware of doing it.
I will guarantee that there are complete splits which make other
individuals and that there are sub-aware split off pieces of each
individual but I cannot guarantee that this third area of split self-aware
portions of the same being is real. In the presence of heavy charge, it
is possible either to dub-in something that isn’t there or to suppress
knowledge of something that is there and I’m not yet far enough along
on this area to avoid those pitfalls.
The entire subject of beings splitting has been heavily abberated by
implants. These include:
a) Simply smashing the person apart by force.
b) Making someone be in two places and implanting the two
locations with different mutually antagonistic goals so that from
each viewpoint, he will fight back against the other one.
c) Nasty tricks like showing you a fake mirror reflection of yourself
which shows you dividing (when you’re not) and telling you that
you are splitting and can’t resist doing it (and eventually you resist
too hard or go into apathy and then you do split).
d) The big mass implants made you put pieces of yourself onto
others to control them and keep them human.
399
e) In a similar vein, there were police implants which made you
split off and place “control entities” onto “criminals”. Some
societies made everyone do a bit of this on a regular basis as
part of their civic duty.
f) Some of the early track military organizations had officers splitting
off and pushing control entities onto their underlings etc. going all
the way down the chain of command so that an invasion force
would operate as a single unit managed by a thetan at the top.
g) Sometimes you were made to split to provide servants or
laborers for various reasons. Thetans are the coin of this
universe. One of the reasons people can be infested with BTs so
easily is that they have early postulates about acquiring entities
for use as servants and slaves.
h) It was common, especially in the symbols universe, to put
pieces of yourself into thought pools to copy emotions and
sensations. Some of this was of your own free will (you liked
having sensations etc.) but some of it was enforced or later
hidden and removed from your control so that you could be
made to feel pain etc.
i) You intentionally set up machinery (which can be found in
various non-physical directions) to create reality etc. for yourself
and put pieces of yourself into it. But again this was heavily
implanted and put out of your control so that you could be
enslaved.
j) Even the penalty universes used items like “To eat is to be the
tiger in back and hide from myself forever” (there is a whole
series of these “tiger in back” items). If anything got stirred up by
reading this, have it point to the being that it divided from.
Don’t make the mistake of thinking that we’re all one. There are other
people out there. But we are fewer than we think.
Since I’ve barely started on this area myself, I don’t have a lot to say
about it. So instead, I’ll round this document out with some related
topics.
400
A MORE ACCURATE LOOK AT INCIDENT 2
The Galactic Confederacy was fairly small as far as star empires go. It
grew up in the aftermath of Arslycus which had enslaved the
populations of this and the next inward spiral arms (millions of planets)
and put the galaxy into a dark age with its collapse.
After a major collapse, the people will rally around strong leaders and
look to them for salvation. And so the stage is set for feudal warlords
and ambitious demagogues to form their own little empires in the
darkness.
These empires are typically founded by low order OTs who then
gradually decay due to overts, mistakes, corruption, and debaucheries.
With advanced technologies and controlled reincarnation, such an
individual might last many thousands or even hundreds of thousands of
years, but eventually falls to a more cunning manipulator or a
revolutionary leader or whatever. And then the cycle repeats.
Feudal Japan has the right flavor for describing the Galactic
Confederacy, except, of course, the technology was much more
advanced and the people did have more rights and freedoms (you can’t
maintain a high technology with serfs).
These empires often try to attract “gods” both to handle cataclysmic
disasters and as a way to back up the emperor’s power as his own
abilities are failing. Usually a real god (by which I mean a high order
OT) is not that interested in managing governments but will back up an
emperor who keeps him entertained. The last emperor of the
Confederacy had been particularly adept at attracting gods to the
civilization and keeping them under control.
One of the more common parthenons of gods (but far from the only
one) used the terminals of the penalty universes. In theory, there is a
set of 64 including The Tiger and The Clown (the wise fool) and The
Pilot etc. If you’re going to be a god, you need some kind of
manifestation, and its useful to pick one that is hard for ordinary people
to confront because it often gets you instant agreement.
So there were statues to all these guys in the temples, and the people
would come and pray for stuff (very carefully and humbly least they
get zapped) and the gods usually would keep a line on their various
statues and occasionally even grant something. A real god would not
actually be in the statue, they were normally disembodied and
materialized bodies at will, but they used these statues as anchor
401
points. Often they would simply appear as a face hanging in the sky (at
least if they wanted to overawe the masses) rather than showing up in
a body.
Of course a small empire like the Confederacy wouldn’t manage to fill
the entire parthenon, and the OT they managed to attract to be, lets
say, The Pilot would not be a very powerful or sophisticated one in
comparison with the kind of Pilot a big empire might get. But on the
other hand, weaker gods are easier to control and safer to have
around. At worst, they might smash a city rather than tossing an entire
planet into the sun.
As to how somebody gets to be a god, there are two ways. Either
they entered this universe that way (high wizards from the magic
universe bypassing incident 1 and showing up here with maximum
horsepower). Or they are ordinary people who dedicate many lifetimes
to researching their way out of the trap and dig out far enough to
rekindle OT abilities.
As a little aside, falling to the temptations of becoming a god (or
stopping at an even lower point and becoming an emperor or
whatever) is one of the reasons nobody makes it all the way out.
Because, of course, you then remain in the trap and eventually decay
back down to human. This was the fate of the Pilot of that old
Confederacy. He had researched far far more than I know right now
and became a god sometime around 121 million years ago. And with
that, he let the search for truth die and in the long run, he was smashed
and ended up back down here with the rest of us. I don’t claim to be
more than a fragment of that shattered individual. I think you’ll find
many of us. And shattered pieces of other gods as well. I think
everyone has done the god trip at sometime or other, and we’re all still
here, and more human than ever.
As a last bit of background on The Pilot, by the time of incident 2, he
had decayed significantly and was suffering from various upsets and
anti-social tendencies. He didn’t get on well with the others gods nor
did he like crowded planets. So they had sort of shunted him off to a
jungle world known as Teegeak (many English spellings are possible,
the name comes from the cry of one of the more common types of
dinosaur). There he played with the animals and manipulated the
genetic line and acted as a sort of a nature god over the dinosaurs. It
was not a highly populated world. Mostly ranger stations and hunting
parties, all very careful to put offerings at The Pilot’s shrines and
working hard not to mess up the environment and get him mad at
them. The planet had never been properly colonized because it was a
402
copy of the original Earth (from the fall of home universe) and therefore
was considered too restimulative for a sane civilization.
The emperor, either because he felt his abilities had weakened too far,
or because he had pissed one of the gods off and wanted to be out of
the area for awhile, decided to go off on some kind of a quest and left,
never to return. He placed the empire in the hands of the loyal officers
until his return. The loyal officers were so called because they had
been loyal to the emperor in some revolution or other.
The loyal officers were to periodically elect one amongst themselves
as the chairman of the council and protector of the realm. He ruled on
behalf of the absent emperor but his powers were severely
constrained. The ruling council also included elected representative of
the noble families, various guilds, and even some sort of union
representatives (which were the common people’s only elected
spokesmen).
Quite a few of the loyal officers wanted to become the next emperor,
but none dared to do so. Instead, they maneuvered for position and
played the usual games of palace intrigue. Xemu was one of the more
ambitious and ruthless ones and he engineered incident 2 after
becoming chairman.
Another group involved in this were the implant dealers. These are
about the equivalent of gun runners. Periodically, they get chased out
of an area by lynching parties and set up somewhere else a few
thousand lightyears away. The group that set up business here just
before incident 2 was rumored to have actually fled here from the
Andromedia Galaxy (millions of light years away) at some time in the
distant past.
Implants are recorded and kept on file and sold for a price. The various
ones used in incident 2 had been around for a long time and are not
unique to incident 2. They can be found at many different dates
individually. The whole file cabinet full of them can also be found being
used together in incident 2. It will almost never be the basic (or first
time) that any one of them was used on a particular person. Big mass
implants like incident 2 are the implant dealer’s top of the line item and
are both vary rare and extremely expensive. Xemu almost bankrupt
the empire buying this one.
The implants are recorded on crystals. These crystals are simply the
high tech equivalent of computer chips and are used for everything
from running navigation programs to recording music or whatever.
403
But an implant needs to be projected telepathically. So you need very
decayed beings who have been made into machines (programmed
machine entities) who will read the pre-recorded implant (commands
and pictures) off of the crystals and project them into people.
Simple implant devices consist of a projector and a crystal (with the
implant recorded on it) and possibly some sort of energy beam and
most important, a bunch of entities built into the machine to do the
telepathic projection. They will aim one of these things at a “criminal” or
prisoner of war and condition him to be a good boy or whatever.
These are common in advanced civilizations and are simple affairs to
buy, setup, and run.
A mass implant, on the other hand, requires tons of exotic hardware
and super implant devices capable of blanketing a planet. These are
placed in satellites (so they wouldn’t be destroyed, the implant dealers
save them and carry them from place to place) which are set in
geosynchronous orbit (meaning the satellite remains over one spot).
Devices are also placed in volcanoes (where they can run lines deep
into the earth) and energy ribbons are run between the satellites and
the volcanoes (you need two terminals). Once the force ribbons are
grounded (which includes ionizing a path from orbit down to the
surface), the volcanoes can be blown with nuclear weapons. Then the
devices in the satellites can project telepathic pictures across the
planet (no movie screens).
To sell an operation of this kind, the implant dealers will send in agents
to stir up revolutionaries and renegades and then present themselves
at court to offer helpful solutions to the riots and troubles. In Xemu’s
case, he wanted to seize power so they had his co-operation in these
covert activities. The great social cleanup would not only round up all
the revolutionaries, minorities, troublemakers, etc. but would also
provide a covert means of eliminating anyone who would object to
Xemu’s grab for power.
Note that you can’t just shoot criminals in a society like the
Confederacy. Reincarnation was known and there was some slight
retention of past life memories even among the common people. A
criminal would be back in business within twenty years and might be
looking to get even as well. With high tech, the normal lifespan gets up
around 200 years easily so that you might feel very threatened by the
same bad guys showing up again and again.
To get all the victims to Earth for the implant, they had to be shot with
a drug that put them into suspended animation. Since the body is still
alive, the thetan stays in it (unless he’s very smart and able) and it can
404
be frozen and shipped. This was well within the Confederacy’s normal
capabilities, whereas devices that could handle a bodiless thetan were
exotic super technology that would have to be purchased at fantastic
prices (they had a few of these things to guard the ruler from casual
attacks by demi-gods, but they were not practical for broad use). Once
the mass implant started, it wouldn’t matter if the victim’s body died
because he’d be here on Earth getting hit with energy fields that were
capable of controlling a bodiless thetan as long as he was still using
some sort of energy form (i.e. an astral body or whatever) when he
was between lives (the implant dealers hardware was far more
advanced and expensive than that used by the Confederacy).
They needed a lightly populated planet to setup on, and preferably it
should be a restimulative place. Namely, a copy of the original Earth.
And so they chose Teegeek, which is our Earth at the time of “The
Great Dying” which killed off the dinosaurs. Incident 2 IS the great
dying, and it is a few million years earlier than is indicated by radio
carbon dating because the nuclear explosions raised the background
radiation level temporarily. The scientists calculate their dates with the
assumption that the radiation level is constant, so that if they see a
higher count, they think the object being dated was buried more
recently because it hasn’t decayed as far (rather than starting from a
higher radiation level). So they date the iridium layer (which is indicative
of a planet wide catastrophe) and the billions of bone fragments (see
books like “Digging Dinosaurs”) at around 67 million years ago instead
of 75 million. Of course the current scientific explanation of the layer is
that a comet hit the Earth (a really large body planetary impact will
probably generate enough heat to go nuclear).
They had to get the Pilot away from Earth, but these guys know how
to deal with the occasional god that gets in their way. If they desecrate
the shrines and incite riots and protest marches against one of these
gods, he’ll generally only zap a few people before he says “the hell
with it” and goes off to find some civilization which will appreciate him.
Gods like to be worshipped rather than criticized.
When Incident 2 started, The Pilot was thousands of light years away,
looking around for an interesting place to settle down. He was mad at
the Confederacy and really didn’t care what happened to them, but he
had invested a lot of time in the wildlife of Earth and still had some
connections to the lifeforms. When the first explosions went off, he felt
a great cry for help and immediately snapped back to the skies above
Earth. And there he beheld billions of people lining the beaches and
creatures dying in all directions.
405
The senior OT ability within an existing universe is the ability to take
control over the mockup of that universe or a portion thereof. The
basic underlying static does not care which fragment of itself is the
source point for a mockup. It does not matter which fragment originally
created something in actual fact, anyone can become the one who
created it by accepting that responsibility and by assuming the task of
continuing to create it in present time. And with that responsibility
comes cause and control and the ability to alter the creation.
Early on the track, thetans would fight over who was actually
responsible and in control, but in the more recent universes, the
general tendency is to fight to avoid responsibility and so it becomes
easy for prospective gods to raise their hands and say “Here, give me
the responsibility” and all the fools will happily turn all their
responsibility and therefore control of the universe over to these gods.
If you’re a god and you see some calamity or something you want to
control, your first action is to become the one who’s mocking it up.
Let’s say, for example, a dam bursts because some foolish engineer
built it wrong. You (as a god) come by and say “I’m mocking it up”. You
project this telepathically with lots of intention, and everybody will
agree with you right away because they don’t want to be blamed for
the dam bursting. Most especially, all the guys who built the dam will
be more than happy to hand off all responsibility to you. And as a god,
you don’t care about being blamed for anything. Part of the road to
becoming a god is to be willing to do anything and accept causation for
anything. So you don’t mind being the one who made the dam burst.
And with that, you gain control over the mockup. Then all you have to
do is change your mind about what you want to have happen in the
area and it all shifts around because now it is your dream rather than
theirs which is controlling the projection of reality. And after the dam
snaps back together and the devastation is erased by your postulates,
the people are even more willing to agree with your being cause over
everything because they like the results.
So when The Pilot appears in the skies during the mass implant, his
immediate and instinctive reaction is to broadcast telepathically “I’M
MOCKING IT UP” and the reactions of all the living things and captured
people on Earth is to agree with that intention. And the implant stops
dead in its tracks.
But the programmed entities in the satellites, and the implant dealer’s
crew, (and possibly another of the gods who was supporting Xemu in
the effort to do the implant) did not go compulsively into agreement,
but instead insisted that they were mocking it up.
406
The result of this is that everything hangs suspended in the balance
and the individuals fighting for control go into a sort of “glare” fight and
battle for who can take the most responsibility. And if he’d just hung
on, the pilot would have won because he had the massed agreement
of the population behind him. But the fight took time, and the pilot was
a weak god who counted on only having to be responsible for
anything really horrible for only a moment until he could change it
around. And that wasn’t happening. And so he was sitting there with
full responsibility for having designed and launched the implant and for
everything that had already impacted on the people and also for having
abandoned the planet earlier. It was just a bit too much and he
flinched. And that was the end of him.
You remain a god as long as you can take responsibility without
suffering any consequences, and when you fail, you begin to flinch at
responsibility and down you go. And in attempting to stop the implant
and failing, he caved in and went through the implant along with
everyone else.
I don’t know too much about the subsequent events in the
Confederacy. Ron’s story is that the loyal officers rebelled and
overthrew Xemu. I suppose that at that point they were claiming to be
loyal to the people although that was not the origin of the name. A few
of the other gods might have remained around (there weren’t many to
begin with) but most were probably driven off as was the Pilot (but
they didn’t have the intimate connection to Earth and so would not
have come back). At a guess, The Tiger (from the old penalty universe
with the goal “To Eat”) might have remained and supported Xemu and
his mass implanting. Possibly the Faire Queen (from the penalty
universe with the goal “To Beautify”) might have remained to oppose
the implanting. Ron talks of her palace blowing up. But that would not
have been on Earth. Perhaps the implant had pictures of the
explosion. The Pilot, by the way, originates in the penalty universe
with the goal “To Guide”. To be one of these gods, you had to be
capable of using penalty universe mockups without keying in and
sliding into the low toned decay and collapse that is pictured in the
penalty universes.
Although mass implants are rare, the track is long and there have been
many of them, both before and after Incident 2. They can’t normally be
run without first running out the penalty universes because they
intentionally key in the penalty universe mockups so very heavily. But
Incident 2 has one special characteristic, which is that it was stopped
momentarily by the pilot’s failed attempt, and that gives you a way to
run it without having to handle the tons of restimulation that occurs in
the later parts of the incident. Because it did stop for a few seconds,
407
you can run off the beginning part and bail out when the Pilot shows
up without being carried forward willy nilly into the later heavier parts
of the incident. Trying to run those later sections (which are not basic)
without first running the penalty universes is what pretty much did Ron
in.
Basically we had a Catch 22. You had to run charge off of the mass
implants to be able to get at the penalty universes. But you had to run
the penalty universes first before you could safely handle the mass
implants. Ron found the way for others to run Incident 2 safely and
sacrificed himself in the process, because he had to run the end of the
incident to find the beginning.
Note: The list of volcanoes given on OT3 is not very accurate. The
Earth has shifted around a bit. You get away with it because the names
of the volcanoes are not in the bank and the being spots what he
needs to. Someone like a geologist who actually knows very precisely
where the modern volcanoes are might actually have a lot of trouble
on OT 3 because he may force things to match the locations he knows
and that could act as a wrong location. Most people only have a vague
idea where Krakatoa is located, for example. So if they need to spot a
volcano somewhere in that part of the world, they call it Krakatoa and
that’s good enough. I never bothered assessing a volcano list when
running an entity through incident 2. It works just fine to have them
point without bothering to put a name on it. The best way to do any
volcano handling on OT3 is to simply have the being point to the
volcano where he was implanted and don’t do any assessments.
408
PROGRAMMED MACHINE ENTITIES (PMEs)
There is light machinery which is simply mocked up and heavy
machinery which is built out of beings.
Light machinery generally resolves easily with mockup processes and
Nots techniques. By light, I mean machinery which is directly mocked
up as itself. For example, you just mock up an electric generator in the
kitchen and postulate that its running and feeding energy to the
refrigerator. A BT can mock up a machine like this or get stuck in a
machine that another is mocking up or infest a machine that you are
mocking up. In all cases, the BTs can be blown easily with the Nots
valence technique. As far as your case is concerned, you can just
mock up and throw away lots of these machines and have a good time
and gain plenty of havingness. This kind of machinery can be very
complex and can even have a great deal of mass if you’re up to
making very solid postulates.
But there is another class of machinery. This machinery consists of a
series of programmed postulates that mock something up or cause
something to occur.
For example, you make the postulate “When the door opens, a bucket
of water will appear and splash down on the person’s head. If they
scream at this, then a mouse will run out of the closet, otherwise a
clown face will appear and say ‘have a nice day’”. You mock this up
one day and leave it hanging there over the door until it triggers. Or
you have it happening forever after until you turn it off or somebody
else erases it.
These postulated programs can be very complex. They are just like
computer programs except that they can range all the way upwards to
tools which create and manage universes.
In their pure form, these programmed machines (or simply a
programmed series of postulates) can be very useful and are only
slightly abberative. Their big original liability was that one could set
them to run forever, forget them, and loose control. Later on the track,
they also get infested with BTs that copy them, gum up the works,
etc. Again this can be handled by blowing off the beings with Nots
techniques.
Usually one puts the programming on a sort of template for the
machine. This will usually be off in some separate space that you
409
mocked up. You reach back and put a little intention (or energy later on
the track) onto one of these templates to trigger the machine.
Since people could erase each other’s machinery rather easily, we
started making copies of templates and running levels of alter-is to hide
things so that someone might have to track back through 3 or 4 levels
of finding the template behind the template to get to the basic template
of a machine. Of course, if someone unmocked a machine of yours,
you could simply mock it up again.
However, we were sliding downscale and by the time of the Symbols
universe, we had very complex machinery and too many
considerations of inability to keep it all mocked up in the face of
opposition. And so a new idea was born to make machinery which
would persist. The idea was to make beings into machines so that
they would keep them mocked up. This is the first period in which
beings were built into programmed machines. But people were still
fairly powerful and they didn’t remain machines forever. It happened to
everybody many times. You’d be capture and built into a machine and
stay that way for a thousand or a trillion years and they you’d wake up
and say “the hell with this” and take off. None of the current machine
entities trace all the way back to the symbols universe.
The current batch of Programmed Machine Entities or PMEs (which is
how I’ll refer to these) mostly traces back to the magic universe. The
magic universe was really machine crazy, building beings into magic
wands and rings of power and all sorts of stuff. But there’s also quite a
few that were built in this universe and the occasional ones which trace
back to the Theta-Mest wars.
The beings are made into machine cores which follow a programmed
series of postulates laid out on a machine template. Note that the
being’s own postulates do not enter into the picture. He’s just running
off a program willy nilly. So use a gentle touch on these guys and don’t
get mad at them for what the machine is doing. These guys are slaves
and have usually been stuck for a very long time.
In this universe, the implant dealers are the big manufacturers of
PMEs. A mass implant will leave lots of broken pieces of beings lying
around that are cleaned up by the dealers who sold the implant to the
government. They take these back to their factories. Also, ordinary
electronics implants frequently build up a pile of dregs in the implant
chamber which consists of BTs etc. that were knocked off of the guys
who got implanted. These are also taken to the factories. The implant
dealers scare the government with stories that make them look at
410
these dregs like radioactive waste so that they even pay the implanters
to do this clean up.
Besides building PMEs into implant machines, the modern factories
also tailor PMEs for other uses. One popular form is the Virus. Here I’m
not using a symbolic name, I’m talking about the actual physical
viruses that the doctors fight against. They’re not quite life forms, but
they make the body sick and they put little anchor points into the cells
that happen to look like mini versions of the black cylinder machine
cores that these guys have been made into.
Viruses are generally sold for use against enemy populations.
However, they are also released on prison planets to keep the
inhabitants suppressed. Specifically, a huge load of them was dumped
here over the last ten thousand years to keep the planet in check after
the current space empire decided to use this as a prison planet.
Running back some Virus PMEs, they all seemed to come from recent
mass implants either around 18,000 or 7,000 years ago, sat up on the
shelf for a long time, and then were released on Earth at various times,
mostly during the dark ages.
PME programming often includes a splitter mechanism. The being is
made to divide in two (i.e., what I’m calling the split viewpoint or SV
mechanism). This is in the programming.
When you run a Virus, you will find thousands of PMEs in the body. If
you run one, it blows but then is “replaced” by the original splitting
again and reappearing in the location. You can run it again and get the
same dates and everything and have it blow again only to reappear.
What you do is reach back to the original and run that one instead.
You’ll find that that will blow thousands of its later copies out of the
body. But sometimes even that one will be “replaced”. So you reach
back another level. You find that your going off into some strange
space somewhere to find these basic underlying originals. Just keep
working back until you blow one that doesn’t get replaced.
When handling a virus, always check for a replacement after it blows.
After blowing out the basic one, check back through the series of
templates and into the body to see if any of its split viewpoints didn’t
blow. Sometimes they need a little nudge to leave (blow by inspection
or with “who are you”).
If you get sick with a virus or your handling someone else who’s sick
with a virus, you usually have to blow off a few Virus PMEs before the
body recovers. I.E., there may be 3 or 4 different basic individuals
411
each with their own dates etc. underlying the sickness. Also, there’s a
strong tendency for the virus to reappear again. So check for more
each day during the following week. It seems like there’s yet another
mechanism even further back of all this that keeps trying to put a new
virus in to replace the old one (but its not a true “replacement” as
described above because it will have its own dates etc. rather than
being another copy of the old one). With this technique, you should be
able to get an instant resurgence with a small amount of auditing. I.E.,
sickness gone rather than the usual “maybe now I’ll start getting better”
that happens in many assists. Then each time the body starts to
relapse, just blow another virus out until your completely over it.
Many forms of PMEs have this replacement quality and you have to
work back through a few layers of templates to get to the original. You
will also find an occasional BT or Cluster who’se doing this sort of thing
too, but its rare. If you blow something on a fairly specific answer and
then get the same thing again a bit later, and its not that somebody is
copying the one who blew, then check for replacement and trace back
to the original. There were a number of times on Nots when I kept
getting the same valence answer from endless beings in the same
location over the course of weeks (in between running other things). It
can invalidate your ability to blow things and make Nots seem endless.
Part of the handling is to get them to spot the first time they were
made into a machine in the symbols universe. The machine building
process seemed to use a cylinder which was covered with pictures of
all of the penalty universe terminals. The being would have a nonconfront
on at least some of these images so he would be unable to
move through the wall of the cylinder even though he could pass
through ordinary mest easily. It was his flinch at these mockups. The
non-confront was so bad that he would be unwilling to touch the wall of
the cylinder and would scrunch down inside. A whole pile of beings
would be put into one of these and then the cylinder would be made
to shrink. The victims would squeeze tighter and tighter together
inside. This is a high pressure cluster forming incident. Then they
were implanted and programmed. The incident is much more
complex but all that’s needed is to spot the cylinder at the beginning.
Prior to this you will find them being captured by one kind of trap or
another. A common trap used a pyramid with penalty universe
symbols on layers of walls. The being would wander in, the door
would close, and he’d be stuck. Other kinds of traps used penalty
universe symbols like a giant tiger or mermaid or whatever and he’d
be drawn in by the aesthetic of the mockup and then held by a keyin
on the later part of the penalty universe. There were also symbol traps
based on the valence masses such as the Scientist or the Girl or
whatever. Since the valence masses were originally implanted by use
412
of penalty universe terminals, it seems that all the traps in the symbols
universe depended either directly or indirectly on his flinching at the
original penalty universe terminals. So you can have him spot being
captured and then shift his attention earlier to the penalty universes
and undercut his being entrapped.
As far as the actual routine for handling PMEs, there is a short form and
a long form. Its difficult for these guys to wake up and blow, they’ve
been mest for so long. So the long form addresses the entire cycle of
their entrapment in detail and pulls them up out of it on an easy
gradient. But its a lot of time and work to run it. Using the short form
depends on your having enough horsepower and granting enough
beingness to get them to spot a couple key things without bothering to
handle all the other stuff that’s on the long form.
You’ll need to know the long form and probably need to run it a few
times to get your causativeness up. Then you can start simplifying
steps until your down to the short form version. Really it would be nice
to get up to the point where you can free these guys purely by
inspection and granting of beingness, but its like raising the dead.
Sometimes you can find a PME directly. But usually you’ve just got a
machine to handle. The machine includes the PME and template and
all sorts of mockups and usually lots of BTs and Clusters being part of
the machine. You can just run the whole machine on the following
rundown and most of it will blow early on leaving the machine core
which you handle by finishing the rundown. With Nots techniques or
simple date/locate on the machine building incident, the machine
appears to blow and you might think that its all gone. But a few days
later, the machine core gets the thing mocked up again and some new
BTs get entrapped in it and the whole thing is there again. So if a
machine appears to blow, check for a remnant machine core and
continue if it reads.
MACHINE HANDLING - LONG FORM
1. Locate the PME or the machine containing the PME (if a machine,
check PME for read since there are also simple machines which
only need BT handling). If its obvious that there’s a more basic
original behind it (somewhere else), then shift to that one.
2. Handle out-int. Machines almost always have out-int, but check int
first and skip if no read.
WANT TO GO IN
413
CAN’T GET IN
KICKED OUT OF SPACES
CAN’T GO IN
BEING TRAPPED
FORCED IN
PULLED IN
PUSHED IN
MADE TO GO IN
MADE INTO A MACHINE
Note that the last 2 are my additions. On small reads, indicate that
it is “correct for some” and continue assessing. When you get a
good read, indicate it as the primary charge. The charge can also
be on the “ON” variation of these (i.e. Pulled On, Pushed On, etc.)
but I only found this in rare cases where the machine was built
up in layers (such as a layered blanket of confusion).
You could actually do a whole int rundown here, but the real int
charge is generally on the machine chain for these guys and the
incident where they were made into a machine is the basic on
their being forced in or whatever. So just go on with machine
handling which takes you to basic faster.
3. Optional: Date when they went into the body. This is useful on a
virus or other mobile PME that went in recently. For ordinary
machinery that was built, installed in you, and has remained there
ever since, this step is not very useful except for producing
research data. On a virus, you can even date when they were
first sent to Earth.
4. Have them spot being made into a machine. If necessary, date
and locate it. Easiest is to first check which universe (this one,
magic universe, or an earlier universe). You can do the locate by
having them point. I have gone so far as to assess star maps for
the location of a machine building factory (on recently built
viruses - its no good on old dates because the stars move relative
to each other) but this doesn’t seem worth the bother.
Recent machines were generally in a mass implant before the
machine building process. You can have them spot this and
again do a date locate and also spot the prior moment of capture
or whatever is the beginning of the incident.
Only do this step until the machine comes apart. Eventually, you
get so that you can grant them enough beingness and have them
414
spot being made into a machine with enough theta to just have
the machine come apart at that point.
If the machine goes on this step, check for a residual machine
core and only continue if it is present.
You can go on to the next step without the machine fully coming
apart as long as it loosens up significantly. But if its staying very
solid and not reading well, check for overts on making others into
machines.
5. Have them spot the first time they were made into a machine. I
have always found this to be in the symbols universe (but
maybe there will be an exception someday or maybe some will
need to spot intermediate incidents before getting basic). If
necessary, have them spot the machine building cylinder. I’m
reluctant to date/locate on this step because you may still be
dealing with a composite and different individuals might have
different specific dates etc. for this.
If this seems impossible for them to do, have them spot making
others into machines in the symbols universe.
6. Have them spot being captured before being built into a
machine. I used to check for pyramid trap, symbol trap, etc. and
try to identify it, but its more unnecessary work that is difficult to
do. Instead, simply swing their attention earlier to the penalty
universes and indicate that these underlie all the symbols
universe entrapment techniques.
7. Assess for the penalty universe underlying their entrapment. Do
this by assessing the dynamics. Then check the goals for the
best reading dynamic. Sometimes you get multiple reads. Just
take the best reading. Sometimes your still dealing with a
composite and may need to run a couple goals (in the same or
different dynamics) to blow everything.
8. As you find each penalty universe goal, have them run it as
follows: Spot “To (goal) is Native State” Spot being pushed into
this And/or pushing another into this And/or others pushing
others into this Spot “To (goal) is Native State” If needed, ask Who
Are You (get a “Me” answer) If needed, do another goal on them.
Often some blow but there’s some left. You can also just try to
use the first goal, To Create. If another goal is really hot, it might
not run, but usually it will run as the second goal after the
heaviest charged one has come off.
415
9. If there still seems to be something left, run the agreements
universe by having them do the following: Spot rushing to get
into agreement. Spot going through the triangle. Spot the first line
“To Agree is Native State” Look earlier and spot when you
decided to agree. If needed, ask Who Are You (get a “Me”
answer) If needed, you can also have them spot encouraging
others to agree and others encouraging others to agree. Or have
them spot working on the agreements universes (specifying the
agreements or designing the universes or postulating them).
Each of the above steps can shortcut. You spot the goal and the being
charged up on it blows. There’s others left but its not their main area of
charge so you go on to the next step.
Running a wrong goal is not much of a problem. To some degree,
everyone has charge on all 64 of these goals. So it doesn’t give you out
list phenomena. But sometimes you will get someone objecting
because he wants to run a different goal and your trying to run a being
that blew already. If someone is spotting a goal, others usually ride
along in an interested manner even if its not the one they want to run.
You do have to watch out for overrun. Handle by having them spot the
moment of relief and acknowledge it (or use a full rehab procedure, but
its rarely needed).
Sometimes you will suddenly find the whole mess blowing apart into a
cloud of individuals. Simply sit there and acknowledge and handle
partial blows if needed. Sometimes you simply need to take a break at
a point like this and give them a chance to sort out and take off or
whatever. Then check back in a while to see if some need more
handling or whether there’s still a remnant of the machine to be run.
Also watch for replacements as mentioned earlier. You can also have
simple copying going on.
Ordinary Nots phenomena can also apply. You can have one machine
trying to hold on to another or hiding another. Sometimes there is a
repair machine that tries to keep the machine your running in place or
copies it when it leaves.
MASS CLEARING FOR LARGE TEMPLATES FULL OF MACHINES.
Sometimes you get back to a big interconnected mess of PMEs.
Blowing one out is hard because the others try to keep it there. Also,
there can be so many that single handling just takes too long.
416
The following will blow off many (but not all). It tends to clean up an
area. It is based on the fact that many will ride along with interest while
a being is spotting a penalty universe. Given a large collection of PMEs,
there will at least be a few who can run any particular goal.
So do a broad attention span and run the entire composite on the set of
penalty universes. Generally you can start from create and go through
the list of goals in order. You do this like step 8 above. The goal and
each spotting step should read. Quite a few should blow on each goal.
At some point, they will all get the pattern of the penalty universes, i.e.
all the goals were screwed up the same way and you’ll get a big
release on the ones whose goals haven’t been run. Don’t continue
running the goals past this point (if you do, you may have to clean up
lots of overrun individuals). If a goal doesn’t read, suspect that this
release point has just happened.
Then do step 9 above (agreements universe) to handle anything
remaining. Acknowledge individuals if needed and then take a break.
Although this will cause many to blow and tend to clean up a template,
there will still be many who were not up to running on the mass
clearing. Since they are generally halfway there, sometimes you can
just blow them by inspection or with Who Are You (me). The usual
technique would be to use the machine handling short version (below)
on them (even if your still using the long version in general) because
they’ve already been loosened up.
MACHINE HANDLING - SHORT VERSION
Here we are counting on your ability to grant them so much beingness
and lifting them up to spotting the items with so much certainty that
most of the steps can be bypassed. If necessary, you can use an
action from the long version if it seems to indicate.
This is the preferred process and should be used whenever possible.
Its short and easy enough that it can be used out of session once your
perceptions are up to it. Early on, this is important for assists so that
you can handle something even if you can’t get to a meter right away.
Further down the line, it gives you a trick for taking apart theta traps
even if you don’t have a body and E-meter handy.
This process is a developed skill and you have to work up to it on a
gradient. You should get a read on each step and see things coming
apart and blowing.
417
1. Locate the machine (it will read on machine or PME).
2. Have it Spot Being Made Into A Machine.
It should loosen up significantly on this step (maybe not quite as
much as on step 4 of the long version). If necessary you can date
this or even shift into anything on steps 2 to 4 of the long version.
But really you can always do it with a simple spotting action if
you endow enough life to barrel them past the out-int and past
their flinch on the time and location of the incident.
3. Have them spot the first time they were made into a machine.
This is the same as step 5 of the long version. But in the long
version, you can get away with a shabby step 5 and still carry
them through with steps 6 onwards. In this case step 5 must be
well done so they really blow the charge.
4. Have them spot making others into machines.
5. Have them spot being tricked into thinking that machines were
necessary.
I didn’t have steps 4 and 5 originally and that made it difficult to do
step 6 below. Once I finally added these two steps, most of them
began blowing on step 5 and the remainder generally left on a
simple who are you. After that it never seemed necessary to go
on to step 7, but I’m including it here in case it is necessary when
you are first getting started.
6. Ask them Who Are You (getting the Me answer) At first I was
running the long form steps 7 and 8 here getting them to run the
penalty universes. This requires assessment and is too long. You
can still do it here if it seems necessary. I kept trying to simply
have them run the agreements universe, but it didn’t usually
work until I hit on asking Who Are You first to restore some more
life to them. This gets them up to doing it. Sometimes they even
blow on this step, but not often (that changed when I added
steps 4 and 5 above, now they blow easily on this step). Usually
they are still a bit in shell shock from being a machine for so long
and feel they need something to beef themselves up a bit (so
they wouldn’t get caught again) before taking off.
7. Run the agreements universe.
418
Spot rushing to get into agreement. Spot going through the
inverted triangle (golden). Spot the first line “To Agree is Native
State” Look earlier and spot when you decided to agree. If
needed, ask Who Are You (get a “Me” answer) This is the same
as step 9 of the long version.
This short version runs very quickly. It can be done in a minute or two
with spectacular results. As in all machine handling, watch for
replacements and work back to the original if it occurs.
TROUBLESOME MACHINERY
You can handle any type of machine on an assist basis. But you
shouldn’t get into a major project to handle other kinds of machinery
until these troublesome ones are knocked out.
1. Viruses
Unlike most machinery, these are semi-mobile and only attach to the
body on a temporary basis. They replicate themselves endlessly and
you have to work hard to get back to the original. Unlike germs, these
are not true living organisms. The scientists consider them to be a
weird sort of half life. The pictures of viruses under electron
microscopes look like little machine cores.
At this time I’m not certain if germs will run as easily (since they are
real life forms with a cellular structure) but its worth a try.
A nice idea would be to eradicate a specific viral disease from the
planet by completely unmocking its base template. But this may be
wishful thinking. Once people are holding a disease to make
themselves right or whatever, they’re liable to simply copy it and
reactivate it.
2. Wraiths
In folklore, a wraith is an energy draining spirit. I’ve borrowed the term
to describe a PME that does this. As is the case with Viruses, quite a
few of these were set loose on Earth in the last few thousand years or
so. They are semi-mobile and do not permanently attach themselves
to an individual. But normally once they get in a body, they stay with it
until it dies.
419
The wraith is a sort of energy drain. They make one tired and weak.
Possibly the fast aging that occurs on Earth is due to them. As you get
older the body is gradually accumulating more of them. Eventually
there are so many that there is no energy left to keep the body running
properly. I think that you will find that you pick up a few of these each
year. You can date the year when one went into the body quite easily.
After the body dies I think they stay in long after the Thetan and GE
leave and try to drain out the last dregs of energy. Then they
exteriorize and go searching for another body to dive into.
If you are seeing BTs blow as little sparks of energy or dots of light
occasionally (they don’t always emit energy on blowing so you don’t
always see this even if you can), then an exterior wraith is very very
visible. It looks like a single point source of energy (just like a BT) but it
is very much brighter, almost dazzling. They may be shedding or
otherwise expending the energy that they drained while they are
searching for a new body. They always move in a zig-zag evasive
pattern working in towards the body fairly rapidly (a few seconds to
cross the room and dive in).
Once in the body, they pull in energy instead of emitting it and stop
being so easily visible. When you try to contact them to run them, they
tend to jump around in the body rather than staying in one place. But
they usually only move around in a small area. Just get the idea of
putting out an attention unit that will stay attached to them as they jump
around and start auditing them. Usually they settle down as soon as
you get them to do a command. They blow quite easily.
3. Disheartening Machinery.
These are mobile machines which put out thoughts of being lazy,
apathetic, tired, disheartened, etc. Also discouraging thoughts like its all
hopeless etc.
These are mobile machines which drift in and hang around for awhile
and then wander off. Sometimes they go in the head, other times they
stay outside. Sometimes they get stuck to other machinery your
carrying around and then they can stay with you for many lifetimes.
Unlike the wraiths, they are slow and nebulous. The apathy they mock
up affects them too. If you are up to seeing BTs as sparks, these often
look like vague colored spheres.
This stuff is mostly used against enemy populations during wars to
reduce opposition. You may have old ones stuck to you from old wars
420
on other planets as well as the current batch drifting around here on
Earth.
4. Monitors
Monitor machinery was installed and attached to people to keep an
eye on them. You’ve probably been dragging some of these around
for quite awhile (maybe even as far back as the magic universe).
They try to stay hidden and watch you (they read on Monitors or
Watchers). Often they are over the head or behind the back. Their job
is to tattle on you when you do something you shouldn’t. Many report
to old police forces that are long gone and therefore are not really
troublesome.
But some of them are spotters for the control machinery back in old
invader installations etc. If you levitate an object or do some other
spectacular verboten thing, they call the attention of these other guys
who will then focus on you and try to block your abilities or key you in
with an implant from a distance. If this happens, blow the remote
machinery and also blow the monitor (or else he’ll just get another
remote machine pointed at you).
5. Protective Machines
There is also machinery which tries to block your handling machinery
or hides machinery or otherwise interferes with your auditing of
machinery. There is also repair machinery which tries to put machines
back when you blow them. Sometimes you handle a machine and it
starts coming apart and then another machine stops them from
blowing. These all handle fairly easily once you spot them.
There are also implants which tell you that you shouldn’t blow
machinery (especially machinery installed by the police) and stir up
your own overts of installing machinery in others to control them. You
should be able to blow this on inspection.
Going a step further, there are also the cases where you contributed a
piece of yourself to a machine installed in someone else. This may
have been forced by an implant or you may have been convinced that
it was your civic duty or contributed it as the price of a spell you
wanted to work as a magician or whatever. You can often blow this by
inspection or assess for the penalty universe underlying the splitter
implant and spot the native state item from the split viewpoint. General
421
handling of split viewpoints is a separate rundown. But if you find a
certain kind of machine very hard to handle, find where your doing it to
someone else and blow that.
MORE ON RUNNING MACHINES
Assessing the penalty universes can be hard if you have charge on
them. Its best to concentrate on running penalty universes before
doing too much machine handling.
Also, the penalty universes are a more intimate portion of your real
case than machinery added ontop of you. Probably you should just
handle the troublesome machinery and then leave the rest until much
later in auditing unless some part of it really draws your attention.
Machinery can blow without FNing. If your pulling something out of a
big complex mass, that’s enough to suppress an FN. Also, fooling
around with lists of halfway run penalty universes etc. can suppress an
FN. Also, its often not your personal case anyway. So don’t make a big
deal about FNing these as they blow.
But you should have clean reads and a reasonably clean needle.
If a lot of machinery is in restim, it can drive the TA up. If this is the
case, the TA comes down into range very easily as you blow off a few
(and the meter reads fairly well as you run them). If its not coming
down, see if you’ve overrun a bunch of them (especially if you did
mass clearing on a bunch in the previous session) or check other
reasons for high TA.
There’s lots and lots of machinery of various types. Some of it you
even bought and paid for. Some of it is attached to you and some to
the GE and some of it IS the body mockup.
422
CONTROL ENTITIES
Control Entities (CEs) are active, semi-aware intelligent beings
implanted to keep one jailed or under control. They do not respond to
machine (PME) type handling at all (they object to being considered
machinery) and are very difficult to handle with ordinary Nots
techniques (I was only rarely able to blow any of these before
developing this rundown). They are usually set up as “Jailers” or
blocking perceptions or keeping you from thinking or knowing about
certain things etc. They answer up as being “Smart, honest, able
individuals doing their duty for society”.
They generally come from police implants. Here the “honest citizen
doing his duty” is implanted with false data and made to split off a piece
of himself which is then implanted into a “criminal” to keep him jailed
and under control. The “Jail” is the body and these guys are supposed
to keep you in the body. Usually you find them in one or another of the
various levels of astral body (i.e., you have to shift up in vibration band
and move a bit sideways in a non-physical 4th dimensional direction).
This has apparently been in use for a long time and the practice goes
as far back as the Thought universe. You will find them in the “thought”
level body keeping you in the “spirit (conflicts universe) body and in the
spirit body keeping you in the low level astral body (magic universe)
and in the low level astral body keeping you in the physical body etc.
Usually they are implanted to keep you or themselves from
questioning the state or police methods or from finding out about the
real nature of reality or higher universes etc. Generally they did not
seem interested in keeping one from doing criminal things. Apparently
one was being sentenced to a lower universe (?) or lower plane of
existence and the “police” didn’t care if you acted as a criminal as long
as you didn’t escape and come back to plague them. The bit about
being loyal to the state and not questioning police methods was
probably aimed mainly at the CEs themselves so that they wouldn’t
cognite and blow.
They key point is that these CEs consider that they are blocking you
for good reasons and will not generally blow or get out of your way
until you get them to spot that they were implanted with false data.
They are much more awake and active than the usual BT. They are
not generally malicious. They act like mis-guided ethics officers acting
on wrong data. Often the blows are very spectacular with visible
clouds of blue fire and jumps in one’s vision (your view of the physical
universe will hop up and down for a moment without your eyes
moving).
423
You will find these installed in earlier universes to keep one down in
lower universes. You will also find them installed in higher planes of
this universe to keep one down in lower planes etc. A very active
source of these seems to be an astral plane organization known as
“Control Central” which is very busy at making CEs and PMEs.
The usual instructions for these CEs are to make one obey the
“physical universe laws” of the lower universe or plane to which the
victim is being sentenced. Sometimes the victim has the connotation of
being a criminal but other times it is somebody who has earned the
privilege of going to a lower plane (i.e., he’s being permitted to reincarnate
after being judged) and the CEs are being installed to make
sure he follows the rules.
There is also an army/invader type variation on this. In this version, the
members of a fighting team (platoon or whatever) are all split and cross
implanted into each other to inspire “courage, loyalty, trustworthiness,
and to make sure everyone obeys orders”. Since each soldier depends
on the others staying brave etc. during the fight, they are quite easily
convinced that the implant is necessary and beneficial.
There are probably many other variations of group members being
cross-implanted into each other. I suppose a big league sales team
could even do this to make sure that everyone pushes the product
hard. But these kind of CEs should blow very easily (and many
probably went on Nots or whatever) because (unlike the police kind
discussed above) they do not have a PT why for remaining in place. If
necessary, this rundown should handle them as well since the keynote
of this is always splitting for some purpose and being implanted with
false data and/or a false purpose.
In some cases, you will find that the CE split was allowed in exchange
for something. Someone might go to a wizard and trade a piece of his
soul to pay for some favor. I.E., he splits off a CE which the wizard (or
whatever) will then program up and use against someone.
Sometimes you might have to have the CE you’re running spot the
overt flow of making others into CEs or implanting others with false
data.
You should also spot times when you did these overts as well.
Besides running out CEs that you find impinging on you, you should
also run out splits of yourself where you are being a CE on someone
else. You can spot where you were made to split and then spot the
false data implanted into the split off piece of yourself (this false data
424
pushes you into the split viewpoint out of agreement with you in your
normal viewpoint and keeps you divided). But when you run one of
these, you will generally find that there are a number of beings
meshed together with the same false data implant etc. Your piece is
only part of a small cluster with the false data implant being the cluster
forming incident. The easiest way to run this is to spot yourself being
part of a CE somewhere and then just do the full CE rundown (below)
as if you were running somebody else. Your piece will come free and
the others will blow. Often you feel freed on the first command or two
but you carry on to completion to handle the others. This avoids the
problems of cross-copying etc. that might otherwise develop.
I worked this out and ran it long before I found the “Point to” processes
which I have added as step 5 below. Hopefully, this upgraded version
will make the rundown much easier.
CONTROL ENTITY RUNDOWN
1. SPOT BEING MADE INTO A CE.
2. ask “MADE TO SPLIT TO SAVE SOCIETY?” if no read, then ask
“Made to split to gain something?” if no read, then ask “Made to
split to serve a higher purpose?” 3. SPOT BEING IMPLANTED
WITH FALSE DATA. (if incorrect, then use “Spot being implanted
with a false purpose”. If still no joy (not reading etc.), then use
flow 2, “spot implanting others with false data” or making others
into CEs.).
4. SPOT THE FIRST TIME YOU WERE IMPLANTED WITH FALSE
DATA. (if necessary, steer the CEs attention toward the false
jewel of knowledge in the motions universe since this is usually
the basic on false data).
5. POINT TO THE BEING YOU DIVIDED FROM.
6. WHO ARE YOU? (me).
7. If you were running a penalty universe when the CE turned up,
and the CE is still around, have him spot the native state item at
the top of the penalty universe.
8. If more handling is needed (i.e., the CE has freed up a bit but is
waiting for something more to be done), then run the top of the
agreements universe (rushing into agreement, triangle, To
425
AGREE IS NATIVE STATE, spot your decision to agree before
that).
426
THOUGHT POOLS
Thought Pool: A location containing thoughts and ideas and
sometimes pictures into which a being may extend his awareness to
experience what has been placed therein. A pool might be created by
an individual or a group. It is then made to persist so that it can be
viewed. In some cases, the pool is meant to be contributed to (with
additional creations) by subsequent viewers.
Thought pools were very popular in the home universe era. There
were entertaining ones which were like combination of a museum and
a poem and ideas all at once in a structure perceived by permeation.
Often they were non-linear and you would slide around between
pictures/mockups (in contrast with a story universe where the
sequence is meant to be linear).
There is also a special kind of thought pool which is dynamic in nature.
These act as communication relay points or cross copy relays which
are used to enable a group of beings who are playing together to stay
aligned to the same mockups. In this case, the beings generally leave
a portion of themselves within the pool. For example, 5 thetans want
to play basketball. They need to agree on the court and the ball and
their bodies (so they don’t accidentally slide through each other) etc.
Now if one player throws the ball, all the others have to know that and
keep their mockups in the same position or else there might be 5
different balls each going their own way. So they setup a pool and
each places a portion of themselves into it while playing. These
portions are in physical telepathic contact and cross copy the ball’s
location etc. so that all will agree on it. In this case, the beings playing
would choose to not-know the data that they know within the pool (in
the pool they have to know where every molecule is to keep the
playing field mocked up) to make the game more interesting (i.e., they
might not see where the ball is etc.).
In the home universe matrix, one would push into or pull out of these
dynamic pools very freely. among other things, these would be part of
the entry point to the various individual universes and one would push
a bit of oneself in to them to pick up the cross-copy that kept the
universe mocked up. Later on the track, pools that are used to keep
universes mocked up became much more compulsive. The central
hubs of the universe machines that keep this universe in place
(through a perpetual cross-copy) are dynamic thought pools, but they
are enmeshed in a much more complicated structure to keep them
protected etc. so that people don’t fool with them or just pull out of this
universe very easily.
427
Pools which hold one in agreement and cross-copy are not inherently
abberative, but they become so when one is in them compulsively.
The really troublesome pools are somatic pools which include pains,
sensations, emotions, and attitudes. At basic, this is where somatics
come from. Let’s say that you bang your fist on the wall. You are just
moving a mockup against another mockup. The body mockup is
generated by machinery (generally PMEs although you can also put a
body there with purely mocked up machinery or even just mock up a
body directly). The machinery is programmed to reach back to the
appropriate pool to bring up the feeling of banging on the wall. If the
body machinery or template is based on PMEs or is at all infested with
BTs, then you have beings present who can go out of PT and remain
connected to the pool even after you stop banging the wall. Or they
can be restimulated into thinking that you are banging on the wall
when your not, as is specified in the Dianetic A=A logic. This results in
the psychosomatic pains (as opposed to the PT somatic of feeling it
when it really is happening). Running an incident Dianetically pulls
them up to PT and causes them to disconnect from the pool. Blowing
the BT or PME (or whatever) can also turn off the somatic by removing
the being who is holding the connection. Note that you can’t get
sensations from these pools unless you also have a piece of yourself
in them because at basic its always you mocking it up.
You can also knock out a somatic by disconnecting the line to the pool.
But note that once the entities in the body connect to the pool, then
entities in the pool also connect back to the body, so these
connections are not easy to dissolve. Furthermore, at a deep level,
you do not want to lose out on feeling things, so you wouldn’t
completely unmock your connections to these things. But you can
temporarily suspend the connections at will when the sensations are
not desired. Removing the pool connection is senior to most other
handlings in that it can undo PT somatics as well as psychosomatic.
The emotional basic incident set up emotional clouds which are
basically pools for each emotion.
There are “reality mirrors” which are basically cross copy pools. They
are generally formed by implants. There are some that were setup
before incident 2 that use items like “it is not safe to look” and
“everything is in you and you cannot look at yourself so you must see
yourself in a mirror”. These reality mirrors are things you look into
instead of looking directly at reality. It is pretty hard to manipulate
MEST universe stuff if your seeing a reflection of it and trying to levitate
the reflection (like trying to levitate something that is on a TV screen
428
image rather than the object itself, if you could get a beam on it, you
would only move the entire TV set).
There are abberative pools such as the Pools of suffering used in the
Magic and Motions universes. These were build based on some
absurd ideas that everyone had to suffer but you could have someone
else suffer for you. The “Gods” that were around in those days were
pretty abberated and miserable but still had considerable power.
Magicians would hook up with these “gods” and would get favors in
exchange for doing some suffering for the god (who would think that
this would make him feel better). Each magician would have a quota.
Instead of doing it themselves, they in turn would gather apprentices
and have them do the suffering for the god (and a bit for the magicians
too since they also believed this garbage). They would set up a pool of
suffering and each apprentice would have to put a piece of himself in it
to suffer on behalf of the god etc.
There are many other abberative pools as well. There are also
implants which make beings serve in these pools or put pieces of
themselves in these pools. You’ll probably find that you have quite a
few pieces of yourself stuck in various pools as well as having
impingement of various sorts come in from connections to pools.
You’ll want to run all this out as well as become causative about your
connections to universe cross-copy pools and somatic pools.
Techniques for handling pools:
1. Spot the formation of the pool. If needed, you can spot which
universe it was formed in. Also spot the common somatic of the
pool (if there is one) or what the pool does.
2. If a somatic turns on, then check for defenders who are
protecting the pool and handle (see below).
3. Handle the entities (generally PMEs) who are holding the pool
together (see below). Note that often they will only loosen up on
being handled and wouldn’t blow until the pool comes apart.
4. Then check if there is a more basic pool underlying the current
one and handle the same way.
If necessary, you can handle other beings in the pool as well, but
usually it will all come apart once you’ve handled all the ones that are
holding the basic pool together.
429
Pool entities can be handled as follows (other PME techniques
sometimes also work and might even be needed occasionally.
Sometimes defenders might need to be handled with CE techniques).
a) Spot being put into the pool.
b) Spot the first time you were made to serve in a pool.
(remaining steps only if necessary)
c) Spot making others serve in a pool.
d) Spot others making others serve in a pool.
e) Point to the being you divided from.
f) If not yet blow, then ask who are you.
(if necessary, spot To Create is Native State or spot building the
agreements universe).
I ran this without step (e) above because I hadn’t figured out the point
to process at that time. This improved version should be faster and
easier.
Note, often the first time they served in a pool was in the games
universe. Often, this first pool is a sort of universe machine with “To
create effects ...” type items. Although there are earlier pools (including
the group postulation of the penalty universes), this is the first time that
beings were implanted to fully split and have the split pieces pushed
into the pools (rather than simply extending a bit of your beingness
into a pool temporarily).
Once the pool comes apart, you may see lots of beings zipping
around. Give them a little time to blow before running something else.
Also, you can give them acknowledgments. If any beings hang, use
“who are you” on them. Also check for copies.
Often you handle a pool and it comes apart even though there is a
more basic pool. In this case, the more basic one might start sending
in replacements. So if the pool seems to show up again or somatics
persist etc., check if the is a more basic pool replacing the one that
blew.
Historical note: In the HCL lectures, Ron mentions that there were nice
thought pools around in Home Universe. Aside from this, I know of no
references or definitions in his materials.
430
SPIRAL DECAY AND DEATH
In History of Man and the tapes of 1952, Ron discusses the thetan
living in “spirals”, going through stages of being a “young” and then an
“old” thetan and then dying and then beginning a new spiral. This
usage of “spiral” came from the idea that the thetan was on a declining
spiral and each of these young to old periods represented one turn
around the spiral.
These turns around the spiral appear to be the lifespan of a theta body
which the thetan has his energy, machinery, pictures, etc. wrapped up
in. To the best that I can determine, there are a number of layers of
these things and they to some degree mimic the later series of
universes that we have come through. In metaphysics they also have
some idea of levels of spiritual bodies with the astral body being the
lowest.
Of special significance is the “energy” or “theta” body which goes back
to what I refer to as the “thought” or “theta” universe which is 3
universes back. This is where the person thought that he was an
energy production unit and this theta body is a simple cloud or sphere
characterized by having an energy level and an energy production
capability. At that time, the thetan believed himself to be one of the
“thought” people in conflict with the meat body people who were
breaking out of the conflicts universe and invading. This body type has
much of his identity and also his energy production capability tied up
with it. And because it is in agreement with energy, it slowly decays
(grows old).
But it was not actually a pure energy body because energy (at least on
the later track) requires particles in motion. The actual structure was
more like a cloud of golden specs constantly dancing around, and as it
ages, these specs slow down and eventually collapse into a
condensed point of mass. The thetan’s idea when this happens is that
he is dead and it ends up as some sort of theta gravesite, usually out in
deep space somewhere or at the bottom of a trap. Of course its boring
being dead, so he projects out a bit of himself which picks up another
theta body, but deep down, he still thinks he’s dead and just dreaming
about a new life until the new one gets so distracting that he forgets
about being dead. But even with this, only his awareness has moved
on, he still leaves part of himself and a good bit of his stuff behind in
the dead theta body.
Now most of this is pretty speculative, and there’s lots of work yet to
be done on the subject of processing these theta bodies, but I have
431
found one thing that I am quite confident of, and which is extremely
beneficial and workable. And that is to find these points of spiral death
and blow entities and split pieces of yourself out of those locations.
And that is actually a good technique for any level of dead body
including the meat body. Blowing BTs out of the grave in France
where I was buried last lifetime significantly opened up my recall of
that lifetime.
432
ARSLYCUS
Arslycus was a vast and troublesome city in space. Almost anyone
who was in this galaxy a few hundred million years ago has had some
involvement with it.
LRH References: HCL-22 5203Cxx How to audit a theta line HCL-27
5203Cxx How to search for incidents on the track PDC-(one of the early
lectures, I forget which one) Individual Track Map ( old tech Vol 1 p
238) uses arslycus as an example.
There is only a small amount of LRH data on this. I believe that the
date of 1 trillion years ago + given in the track map example is
incorrect.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Arslycus implanted people to make slaves. They used false track
implants, between lives implants, and body in pawn mechanisms.
They stripped the entire population from both this and the next inward
spiral arm of the galaxy. That’s probably around 500,000 inhabited
planets. Eventually they bumped into the borders of the Galactic
Empire which is in towards the central core of the Galaxy and were
finally destroyed.
(Note: at some point, the Galactic Empire was subverted or converted
by Hellatrobus, at least for awhile, and might then be termed the
Hellatrobian Galactic Empire. Their symbol was the cross. I’m still
having trouble sorting all this out. It might have been the war with
Arslycus that allowed Hellatrobus to gain power in the Galactic Empire,
because Arslycus and Hellatrobus were long term enemies.
Hellatrobus used implants to make people good. Arslycus used
implants to make slaves. The early Galactic Empire was against using
implants until Hellatrobus got their claws into them).
Normal planets are inhabited only on their surface. This is really a 2
dimensional area with only slight use of height etc. A space city with
total artificial control of gravity and energies is capable of building in 3
dimensions.
If you imagine the Earth spread out flat, and then additional earths each
supported a few hundred feet apart to a height of 8000 miles (the
diameter of the earth), you will see that a space city hardly larger than
433
the earth could have almost a quarter of a million times the surface area
of our planet.
Arslycus was actually much larger than this, being closer to the size of
the sun rather than the Earth. These tiny space empires of a few
hundred planets like Marcab or Espinol or the old Galactic Confederacy
could have their entire populations placed in a corner of a single level
of Arslycus. And Arslycus had many thousands of levels.
There was a great deal of space within the city. There were endless
little flat planes covered with blocks of suburban homes and
skyscrapers hanging at various angles in the air and roads in the sky
tying these all together. Light came from some sort of energized
glowing white clouds and the sky was blue with air everywhere. They
had full control of artificial gravity. You might look across at another
building hanging in the air and the people in it might be upside-down
relative to you. If you got a short distance away from any of the
buildings or surfaces (parks etc.), you were weightless and could swim
in the air (or rent wings to flap with etc.).
At the time it was started, around 626 million years ago, it was
probably a nice place, but it became very degraded.
At the center, they had a captive black hole, probably formed by
imploding a large star, which provided the power to run all of this.
The society eventually became an oppressive cast system, like India.
They were crazy on the subject of expansion because that let the
older low cast workers move up as new people were brought into the
system. Early on you will find planets invited to join and big time
politicians making deals to get high ranking positions for themselves
from bringing people in. Later on it wasn’t so easy to get recruits and
Arslycus began sending space fleets against planets to capture their
entire populations and make slaves of them.
Arslycus was located in the gap between our spiral arm and the next
spiral arm inward towards the center of the galaxy. Astronomy books
call these the Orion arm and the Sagittarius arm respectively since your
looking down the length of the arm that we are in when you look
towards Orion and you are looking towards the next arm inward (and
galactic center beyond it) when you look towards Sagittarius.
Since everyone in Arslycus was on a conscious and controlled
reincarnation (picking up adult vat grown bodies whenever they were
reborn), there were no new souls being born into the system. They
tried handling this by levying a slave tax and making people divide
434
themselves to produce a slave being (as was done in the magic
kingdom of Giliad which is an earlier similar on this kind of society) but
this was not successful and led to a revolt and the practice was
stopped. So the population could increase only by bringing in thetans
from outside.
Over the course of many millions of years, Arslycus raided both the
Orion and Sagittarius spiral arms for slaves. Eventually they captured
everybody from the edge of the galaxy inward to the edge of the
Galactic core in this quadrant of the galaxy (it was impractical to take
over the opposite side of the galaxy although some expeditions were
probably made in that area).
At the core, they ran into the Galactic Empire. This is an ancient
civilization with vast numbers of planets (hundreds of thousands). Stars
are much closer together in the hub of the galaxy and so the comm
lines are short enough to allow for a very big society. This is also
referred to as the Galactic Confederation (not the same as the Galactic
confederacy of Incident 2) since it protects a large number of
backwater planets and small empires that are not really part of the
empire but are its allies (forming a sort of confederation, much like the
British Commonwealth).
Unlike the small Galactic rim empires, the Galactic Empire was large
enough to match the population and resources of Arslycus. Although
Arslycus had immensely shorter internal comm lines and a tiny
defensive perimeter, its population was too heavily implanted and
apathetic to fight an evenly matched war so that after a few major
battles, Arslycus gave up on any direct attempts to raid the Empire.
So Arslycus became covert. One practice was to launch slave raids
against backwater planets that could not defend themselves. They
would snatch all the people they could and then flee from empire
fleets which would arrive and chase them back to the heavily defended
outer perimeter of Arslycus.
Another ploy was to setup traps to capture empire ships. These were
like black rifts in space. Ships would disappear into them, be
vaporized, and the thetans shipped off to Arslycus. For a long time, the
empire thought that this was some natural phenomena and was all
concerned about what they thought were some kind of space warps
that were appearing and grabbing ships. Yet another practice was to
seed between lives pickup mechanisms into the skies above empire
planets. These were telepathic projections of things like heavenly
gates etc. They were a sort of shallow imitation of the Helatrobus
435
operation. Between lives souls would get suckered into these and be
whisked away to Arslycus.
Arslycus put vast amounts of effort into researching earlier track
implants for the purposes of getting more and more slaves. It was the
true home of the Brainwashing Psychs by which I mean the people
who research the mind for the purpose of control rather than freedom.
It was a very respected high cast position there.
Eventually the empire got so fed up that it committed all of its
resources to the destruction of Arslycus. Even so, it could not wipe out
the Arslycian space fleet or do more than minor damage to the city.
Among other defenses, there were endless robot controlled “space
ships” that were just big frames of girders (like a skyscraper under
construction) that could project rays and energy fields and protect the
city.
But the black hole was a weak spot. Dead planets were collected in
quantity and empire OTs (this is the society that operated on a limited
OT basis) drove planet after planet into the hole so that it gained too
much mass too quickly. This made the black hold unstable and the
Arslycian technicians lost control of it.
The city’s power sources blew and the artificial gravity went wild. It all
pulled apart and everyone there fell through the sky.
The city might have fallen about 226 million years ago (?).
THE GUILT IMPLANT
This incident is used on people when they are first captured by
Arslycus and to subdue them again when necessary (i.e., if someone
is caught escaping). You can assess for the number of times it was
done (I got 43 times). Spot and date the first time.
This incident is a combination of false track and misdating of your own
pictures. They badger you for overts and get you to put a picture of
one of your overts up on a thought sensitive screen. This is supposed
to be a therapy. Later they show you the picture with a wrong date
and make you wrong for having done the overt.
This interrogation of the individual to get his overts and put them up on
a screen seems to be chronic in the later days of Arslycus. They kept
the pictures on file and used them against you later. There are many
436
minor incidents of this sort but the big one is the Guilt implant with its
huge dose of false track.
As is usual with false track incidents, they give you lots of pictures of
your arriving for the implant and departing from it to make it hard to
spot the beginning and the end.
They say that they are going to show you a history of the universe.
They show you arriving in the Mest universe in a doll body in a
reception room full of angels. There is a big window or picture on the
wall which shows the galaxy. They tell you this is what happened in
the year zero and that it is 76 Trillion years ago (the correct date for the
start of this universe is 86 trillion and the picture is pure fabrication).
These pictures are appearing on a screen with dates running along
side of them. As you look at them, you are hit with energy waves and
Items come booming out from the walls with sharp electric shocks.
The picture sequence showing you your “existence” in this universe
follows the penalty universe goals.
They say that these are your postulates.
The first one is “To Create”. The picture is some vague attempt to
approximate the 1st penalty universe using doll body forms in this
universe.
Note that arslycus didn’t like doll bodies. They were a pure meat body
culture. So all this false early track shows you as a doll body.
They say that then you failed to create and decided to destroy.
Now they badger you about “what did you destroy”. They make you
find an incident and put the picture up on the screen. They have some
sort of electrical field which gives them the equivalent of a meter read
and they use this to make sure that the incident is real. Then they put a
wrong date on this incident (to fit their false history of when you
postulated “to destroy”).
They go on to the next penalty universe goal (to mock up) and do the
same thing with it.
All 64 penalty universe goals are done, with false pictures for the
positive side, and the overts you dredged up given to you with a
wrong date as the negative side of the goal.
437
Then they tell you what a louse you are and run through the misdated
overt pictures again. They tell you how you have to repent and make
amends. They tell you that you must agree to do penance for this by
working almost as a slave for millions of years.
If you give up a small overt, they ridicule you and make fun of you as
well as hitting you with beams until you give up a big overt.
This implant makes you feel guilty, propitiative, and teaches you that
its safer to withhold your overts. Badgering sec checks and any kind of
ethics action on overts given up in session can key this implant in
heavily. And that really bars the road out because you do need to
confront your overts to make it, it just doesn’t work if its unsafe to do
so. Another liability of this implant is that if you spot it halfway, you can
get the idea that all of these overts are false track, and they’re not,
they’re just misdated and made solid by the implant.
After this implant, you’re put to work.
THE ARSLYCAN BETWEEN LIVES IMPLANT
They get you attached to a segment of brain tissue or something like
that which is kept in a jar. This might be the brain of the first body
you’re given after the guilt implant above. This is used to give you
orders and call you back whenever you die. Your regular bodies are
vat grown to adulthood and you get one by going through this
between lives area.
It’s very much like Christian or Buddhist mythology. You die and
appear in the judgment hall. There you are badgered for the overts
you committed in your last life. Again these are put up on a screen.
Their idea of overts consists of having done a sloppy job one day or of
thinking bad thoughts about the government. Almost anything a free
being would want to do is an overt. They pile a big ledger of these up
against you.
Depending on your attitude etc. the Judge often just sentences you to
another lifetime of work and tells you to be good.
If you were really bad (ran away from your job for a week or
something like that), they send you to hell. Hell is mostly a false track
implant showing you being tortured up on a screen with a false
duration of many years. But they end it in a real mockup of hell where
438
you stand around for a few hours breathing in sulfur fumes and feeling
thankful that your waiting to be released after all those years.
In the rare cases where your very good, they reward you with some
time in heaven and give you a similar false track implant with pictures
of you being in paradise followed by a few pleasant hours in the “exit
depot” from heaven waiting to be reincarnated.
This between lives experience is actually fairly short so that they could
process lots of people through it without using too many
administrators and technicians.
This incident also includes lots of duplicate pictures of your arriving and
departing and lots of orders to forget this etc. But they didn’t want you
to forget it completely. They just want it obscured so that you
remember it very vaguely (to take the rough edges off of the false track
pictures) and feel very respectful about your duties.
This whole thing tends to fall apart as you spot all the false data they
u s e d a g a i n s t y o u .
439
ADVANCED SOLO NOTS
I continued long past EP on Solo NOTs. I probably audited as many
hours after the EP as I did before it occurred. During this auditing, I ran
into quite a few areas that did resolve using NOTs techniques. I also
ran into a number of areas that did not resolve. For these other areas
such as actual GPMs and implant universes, NOTs is not the why.
These need to be handled with their own rundowns.
Since the areas that did resolve with NOTs techniques might be
prerequisites to running the new levels, this write-up will describe
these so that they can be handled if needed.
BACKGROUND INFORMATION
The EP of S/NOTS is cause over life. This is simply ceasing to be the
effect of BT (Body Thetan) think and being able to do what you want to
with BTs. I.E., your just so much bigger than they are and no longer
mis-owning pictures, thoughts, etc. and know it with certainty. This
includes the ability to blow anything by inspection (not that you don’t
do this before, but at this point it became THE technique). Also, at this
moment, BTs ceased to be the why on the case.
After experiencing this, I went along for about a week knocking out
everything still lying around using blow by inspection. This lead to a
second much bigger EP. I realized with reality that location was a lie (of
course we’ve all read the axiom, but this is really knowing and seeing it
with reality). I went exterior to this universe - like being exterior to the
body and reaching in but instead I was out of this (and any other
universe) and reaching in to play the game. I don’t know if this happens
standardly at the end of solo NOTs or if it is a wild variable like the way
that some people hit theta clear while running Power processing.
This location cog has a strange effect on BT handling. You see, they
aren’t really located anywhere. Its only that they think they are and it
can vary depending on how much they think they’re in one place Vs
another. They can be in your body or on Acturas or in the space and
time of INC 1 depending on what they think, and although they are not
cause over this, they move around depending on restimulation. All you
have to do is decide that a bunch are in your body and they can be
there. Or you can mock up a slight agreement with the middle of
Jupiter, and find a whole bunch there.
440
Once you’ve had the location cog, it is generally enough to just touch
one and he realizes that he’s not located, nor was he ever located in
the first place and he frees up. One thing that messes this up is to run
NOTS processes “locating” BTs. You can still spot where one happens
to think he is, but if you push it, or search for one somewhere, you
frequently find yourself forcing a BT to occupy that location.
Let’s say that one is in a table. You touch him and he realizes he’s not
there (and never was except by a foolish consideration) and ceases to
be there. This happens so fast that you keep trying to locate him.
Since you can reach anywhere in space or time in any universe, you
can still reach him and the effect is to put him back. This not only lays
in a false location but it also invalidates a big cog for the BT. It only
takes about 5 minutes of S/NOTS review after the location EP to get
you into this mess. With this data, it should only take you a moment to
spot enforcing a location and to dust the BT off and send him on his
way. Without this data, you could have trouble for years.
Since they do shift around based on consideration, its very easy to shift
BTs into the body to have something to run if you continue past EP.
This can get really awful if you get run on an audited NOTs rundown
(e.g. audited on you by someone else) after completing. Between the
auditor’s intention to find something and your intention to obey his
commands and the basic wrong indication of doing more after EP, you
end up dragging them into the body from all over the universe. And
because this is slightly invalidative, your ability to blow them by
inspection gradually deteriorates. The appropriate correction list item
would be “Putting them there to run?”.
Another thing that happens on continuing past EP is that you can start
mocking up BTs that aren’t there. You get into doing this by blaming
things on them when it is not the correct reason. Then you think there
really should be something there when there isn’t, so you mock up
something. Then, because you are saying that this mockup of yours is
somebody else, you have one hell of a time blowing it. So you also
need “Mocking up BTs that aren’t there?” on the correction lists.
One very interesting effect which might occur is that some BTs copy
the cause over life cog and start evangelistically going around freeing
others out of trees and flowers and old theta traps etc. This is fine.
Sometimes they come back for advice. Unfortunately, if you go long
past EP, you begin to invalidate the state yourself. Occasionally, these
guys pick that up and also cave in on the inval and frequently collapse
back into you in a state of misery that’s impossible to resolve unless
you spot that this is what happened and rehab their EP.
441
After EP, there are two other things that fool you and make you think
you’re not done. The first of these is hidden standards. It is true that the
BT cross copy is one of the reasons you can’t walk through walls, but it
is not the only reason. You also have your own whys for not doing
this. Once your no longer the effect of BT considerations, it is foolish to
blame your inability in some area on BTs. It is your own responsibility
and considerations. To say that the stop is due to a BT is a wrong why.
After EP, if you could walk through walls, you would even if a BT is
saying no you can’t. After all, you can open a door over a BTs protest
without a second thought about the matter.
Any inability, physical problem, aberration, or out point can be made
worse by BTs. But there is nothing for which the why is always BTs.
Anything can also be due to your own postulates and considerations
etc. There are other OT levels.
The other thing that fools you is that BTs can be masked by your own
aberrations. Lets say you have horrible overts with carving knives (or
these knives play a big part in an actual GPM that you can’t confront).
You might not spot a BT being a carving knife or hiding in a carving
knife. It is not that the BT keeps you from perceiving him or is creating
a non confront on carving knives. It is your own non-confront. So as
you do things that raise your confront, BTs do show up and blow.
After EP, they generally blow by inspection unless you have a why
that is keeping you from inspecting. After EP, you don’t have any nonconfront
of BTs and can’t be fooled by their attempts to hide, block, or
obscure things. However, you are still at liberty to non-confront
something on your own that happens to contain a BT.
After EP, you can and should continue to handle BTs. Because of the
non-confront factor, you can find and blow considerable numbers of
them while running other materials that address your own case.
If you have overrun the EP, the above discussion should help you
rehab it. You need to dust off your ability and certainty on handling BTs
and get rid of any invalidation on it so that you can blow them easily by
inspection when they show up on more advanced processing. The
blow by inspection ability deteriorates quickly on inval so don’t let
anything shake your confidence in this area. Clean up the skill and use
it and don’t let anybody or anything put you into a Q & A about it.
NOTS PHENOMENA
There are a few NOTS phenomena that you should know about just in
case you didn’t hit these already. For me they turned up on audited
442
NOTs but I had heard about these kinds of things in the HCL lectures.
By the way, you should listen to these lectures (The Hubbard College
Lectures of early 1952), especially the later ones (History of Man, Theta
Bodies, How to audit a Theta line, etc.) for additional information. They
contain a great deal of data about entities and “idle spirits” and what
they do and how to get them to blow.
During heavy overts, motivators, ARCXs, and other things which cause
valence shifts, it often happens that a BT crosses over from one
individual to another. This is probably one of the big reasons for a
valence shift. The BT winds up connected both to you and to the other
terminal and you may spot him in either body (or in the location of the
incident or anywhere).
You can also have a BT who’s going around influencing others against
you. This is one of the mechanisms of pulling things in (but there are
others as well - its not all due to BTs).
Probably the phone call business in the Suppressed person rundown
works because there is a mutual exchange of BTs during heavy
suppression.
NOTS ACCELERATION TECHNIQUES
There are some things you can do to increase your horsepower in
handling BTs. These are beneficial even after EP. These might even
be runable by someone on OT3 once Incident 2 has cooled down but
perhaps I’m being overly optimistic.
First, if you can run PDC mockup techniques successfully, try mocking
up bodies and mocking up BTs in them and then mockup someone
blowing them all out by inspection.
Second, run overts connected with the area. This includes implanting
and also simply using BTs (or other enslaved beings). for your own
gain. This is especially common in magic track. You would throw a BT
at someone to compel them to do something or talk to someone’s BTs
(as in hypnosis) to have a hidden effect on them. Often the magic spells
contained items out of implants said in older whole track languages that
were no longer understood by the average person which were meant
to wake up and command someone’s BTs. Real voodoo worked by
getting some of the target person’s BTs to move into the doll and
create a cross-copy between the voodoo doll and the individual’s body.
It’s actually a mild version of bodies in pawn.
443
There are times when you thought of captive souls as wealth. The old
wizards had a motto. It was “Beings are the coin of the universe”. It
was a very deadly coin and you still bear the scars. Run out the overts
and be free.
THE INEFFECTIVENESS OF BTS
Implanting somebody with BTs was actually totally ineffective as a
control mechanism. They cannot actually create very much of an effect
on the person. In this regard, we’re quite thick skinned.
Any time you see a really major gain occur from blowing a BT, realize
that the BT was restimulating rather than creating the condition. If you
look deeper, you will find that the person himself mocked up the
aberration or somatic originally and the BT was simply keeping it
irritated.
You need to alternate BT handling with handling the PC’s own case or
else you will get a deterioration of responsibility because the PC will
start mocking the BTs up as being cause. In actual fact, the BTs are
generally being heavily affected by the PC, he just doesn’t realize how
much he is kicking them around.
On NOTS one finds out that there are a tremendous number of
dormant BTs (in comparison with a very small quantity of active ones).
The impression one gets is that there are so many dormant ones
because they were overwhelmed by the implants. This is wrong.
These guys were overwhelmed by the thetan (e.g. the PC). He keeps
them dormant and knocked out.
The person wakes up in the morning and he feels a little sluggish
because some BTs started waking up while he was off dreaming, and
they are now having a field day messing up the body. The PC just
feels a little tired, but he projects some intention and pushes himself
out of bed anyway. This tiny push is enough to swamp out hundreds
of BTs and knock them back into unconsciousness. Its that easy.
If BTs seem to be making the body sick, you can just bet, dollars to
donuts, that the PC has some postulate to be sick buried out of sight
somewhere. They just can’t do it otherwise.
Most BTs are just fragments of beings. And even when you do get a
complete individual operating as a BT, they have zero havingness and
almost no awareness. They just can’t stand up to the level of intention
that a fully aware and alive thetan can project.
444
The only thing that you can do which can get you in real trouble with
BTs is to postulate that they are cause and say that they are
responsible for the condition that you are in. Its like finding a moron
and handing him a knife and then spending a few hours coaxing him
into stabbing you with it.
CLEANUP OF TRACK AND IMPLANTS
You will find that there are BTs stuck back in the time and place of
major implants. These are not actually located in the body, they really
stayed back there (which is different from BTs who came forward in
the body and only have the old implant in restim). You will find that
they have lines reaching out from the old implant down to the body.
Usually they will be stuck up near the top of the incident. Generally
they wound up that way because they hit a point in the implant where
they were unwilling to continue on and tried to reverse time and go
backwards. That got them stuck. They stayed located in that spot and
refused to agree with any subsequent forward progress in time (i.e.,
not-is-ness) and kept the early part of the implant mocked up. But they
had earlier implants to stay attached to the Theta being who was going
through the implant, so they still have a line attached to him.
I originally found these by tracing down lines connected to the body
(there are many reasons for these lines). However, its easier to run
these simply by checking over an old implant and scanning it for BTs.
If you do it that way, you don’t have the problem of tracing the line or
figuring out which implant it is. Generally these will blow easily by
having them spot the first item of the implant or the first moment of
impact or by spotting being pushed into the implant. Often they will
simply leave on being spotted or acknowledged or on being granted a
little beingness.
For implants done in this universe, Incident 1 is an undercut. The
platens of OT2 cover a large number of the heavy electronic implants
of this universe. You will find that the dates in the OT2 materials are
also correct in addition to the combined use of all of these in Incident 2.
These implants are recorded on memory crystals and sold by Implant
dealers for use on unruly populations. Often you will find that the
Implant dealers will first go around acting as third parties and agent
provocateurs to create civil unrest and then will make a big profit on
the sale of the devices to a paranoid king or emperor. In the case of
Incident 2, the Confederacy simply bought everything in the catalogue.
So you can find each implant individually at many different dates and in
many different societies in addition to finding all of them in the R6
portion of Incident 2. By the way, don’t be afraid of memory crystals in
445
general. They are simply the space opera equivalent of computer
chips and recording tape.
You can also find some stuck in the clearing course materials. These
predate Incident 1 (they occur in an earlier universe). If they don’t blow
on inspection, acknowledgment, or granting of beingness, have them
spot the first item of the CC or have them spot being at the top of the
spiral staircase immediately prior to the first run of CC (each spiral
contained a run).
This technique applies in general when dealing with BTs stuck in
implants of whatever sort. Normally you blow by inspection. If that
doesn’t handle, then blow by having them spot the first moment of the
incident. Your knowledge of the anatomy of the track can help here,
but if you don’t know, just have them spot the beginning and earlier
beginnings or the beginnings of an earlier similar incident. The solo
NOTs “what are you” technique also works but they are often being an
item in the implant and this makes for difficult listing and should be
avoided (wrong wording of an implant item can kick other things into
restim). You can use “Who are you” with good results if they have been
loosened up enough to give a “Me” answer without listing valences.
Use your judgment on this. Always use “Who are you” on partial blows.
You can also find a pile of BTs and Clusters back at each point of
“Spiral Death”. These are times when you “died” as a thetan. They are
the bottoms of the “spirals” mentioned in History of Man. There will be
some moment when you were in really bad shape and then you were
really smashed badly by something and just plain gave up as a being.
The whole “theta body” (really an energy body) that you were using at
the time collapses in on itself and “dies” and your consideration is that
you have died as a being. Generally you leave a piece of yourself
behind at this point along with a mass of energy and facsimiles and
mental machinery. Some of the BTs and clusters that were stuck to
you at that time will stay there as well but will continue to keep a line
connecting them to you. You are also connected by the piece of
yourself that you leave there and also by your own considerations (you
will have some idea that you never left). Generally you only have to
blow off the BTs and Clusters. The NOTs techniques work well here
or you can run them back to the joiner or cluster forming incident. After
these are gone, the split off portion of yourself generally rejoins
naturally and you feel a bit bigger. If this doesn’t happen and if (and
only if) you get a feeling of still being stuck there, then first try for
BTs/Clusters. If that’s not it, run a little regret off of the death and look
for overts prior to it. These splits are easier to run than most splitter
incidents because they were formed by simple force (which is easy to
446
confront after Clear). (if you do have any trouble, use “point to the being
you divided from ).
Bodies in Pawn are more difficult to handle. Again there will be lines
running from the current body to the one in Pawn. There will be a
large number of BTs and Clusters holding these lines both in the
current body holding the one in pawn and in the pawned body holding
the current body. Often they are mixed up as to exactly which body
they are in. After you’ve blown them all, you’ll find that you also left a
piece of yourself in the other body. Generally there will be an implant
where you were made to divide yourself and be in 2 positions. In each
position (you are usually standing beside yourself) they implant you
with opposing goals so that you detest yourself in the other position.
This keeps you from recombining the viewpoints even though your
running both sides. One side goes into the body in pawn and holds
you connected. Usually there is a phrase about leaving your real self
behind when you are sent from there to Earth (or where ever). Try to
blow this simply by spotting the lie. Also, try spotting the earlier
beginning (see Before Earth in History of Man) and try spotting earlier
overts you did do and overts you were falsely accused of just prior to
the incident. Also check for the overt of doing this to somebody else. If
all else fails and if you are still troubled by the body in pawn, you can
list out the opposing goals, but this can be difficult and should be
avoided if possible.
Bodies in pawn are not limited to space opera track in this universe. It
was quite common to keep a piece of someone’s body in a jar and
give it orders on the magic track. Earlier universes also had similar
control techniques, not necessarily dependent on having a piece of
someone’s body since bodies were not as important early on. The
trick can be worked using anything that will get a being to leave a bit of
his beingness in a spot where you can give it orders.
You will also find that there are monitor, suppresser, and control BTs
focused down at you from a distance. These may be in invader
installations or whatever. They also have lines running down into your
space and they try to block OT abilities. Often they get active when
you try to do the drills in Creation of Human Ability Route 1 or the drills
on the old OT 5 and 6. If you’ve done these, you should check back
and discover release points where you did gain an ability and had it
immediately blocked by a suppresser BT. Often these BTs are in
some sort of implant station that has long since been destroyed. For
example, in the distant past there was a large orbital station around
Venus. Its long gone, but the BTs are still there going around in orbit
and keeping a vague mockup of the station in place. An unsuspecting
being can wander in there and get hit with an implant right now in PT.
447
Implant machines are partially made of MEST (computer circuitry and
energy waves etc.) and partially made of implanted beings who intend
the items telepathically. These unfortunate beings are “manufactured”
into the machines by implant salesmen (after they have gotten a
civilization to smash its citizens, the salesmen will kindly help clean up
and take the ruined remnants of beings off to their factories).
You can go quite far with these techniques, but once you start getting
into earlier universes, eventually you’ll run into entire universes built as
implants. Although these same principles will continue to apply, the
implant universes are much more complex. You shouldn’t be afraid of
bumping into them and you can knock a few BTs out of them without
getting into trouble. But don’t fool with them too much until you get all
the data.
The above information on handing bodies in pawn and suppresser
BTs focused on you from a distance etc. explains the occasional big
cave in that some people have following a manifestation of OT abilities.
They begin to wake up as a being and manipulate the universe and
then they’re sick and they feel that the space invaders or magicians or
whatever are after them. And to some degree, it’s true. It is beside the
point whether or not the MEST of some old body in pawn or implant
station or whatever is still around or not. There is a theta remnant in
these things that can activate in PT and give the guy trouble unless he
knows enough to handle it. Just blow the BTs and clean up any pieces
of yourself that you left behind and the trouble will turn off.
448
NOTS IN SCIENCE FICTION
This section is only intended as an entertaining interlude.
There are 3 famous science fiction stories about BT-like entities who
control us and feed on our emotions. These stories all have the idea
that the entities themselves block our ability to see them (which has
some truth to it, I didn’t see active BTs as sparks until I had done a
good bit of NOTs, and these sparks are visible to the naked eye and
you will see one entering or leaving somebody occasionally). They
also include the idea that if you find out about them while you’re still
under their control, they will make you kill yourself (which does not
seem to be the case). Furthermore, they include the idea that if
somebody were to get rid of these entities, other people who still had
them would be influenced to hate the person who had gotten rid of
them.
Except for the bit about them blocking perception, all these ideas
seem to be false. But they make for very interesting reading.
The ideas trace back to Charles Fort, who came to the conclusion that
we are cattle, owned and milked (for emotion or energy) by hidden
beings.
The first and most famous of these stories is “Sinister Barrier” by Eric
Frank Russell. If I remember correctly, it was written in the late 1930s
during Russell’s Fortean period (he also did a short story about
continents in the sky, and a powerful but outdated novel about Earth
the prison planet called “Dreadful Sanctuary”). Russell calls them Vitrons
and has them hovering over the person’s head. The book opens with
people who discover this being forced to commit suicide.
This novel was well known to Ron and may partially explain why he
put such fantastic cautions on dealing with these things. Its amusing to
note that at the end of the original version of “Dianetics the Evolution of
a Science” which appeared in the May 1950 Astounding Science
Fiction, there were an extra few paragraphs where he mentions
Russell’s book. It was something to the effect that Russell was right in
saying that there was a sinister barrier, but the barrier was not from
some outside agency, it was in men’s own minds.
The next of the famous ones (there are certainly other stories in this
vein) is Colin Wilson’s “The Mind Parasites”. Again the story opens with
suicides, and the hero manages to overcome the impulse when he
realizes it is coming from an outside source. Eventually a team of
449
people who managed to free themselves from this influence discover
that these entities were blocking OT abilities and begin mastering
telekinesis etc. The same author is also famous for his writings in the
field of metaphysics. The science fiction movie “Lifeforce” was based
on one of his stories.
The third one is “Noplegarth” by Jack Vance. His entities are called
“Noples” and anyone who doesn’t have a Nople can see them riding on
other people’s shoulders. The interesting twist in his story is that when
people finally become free of their Noples, they can now be grabbed
and taken over telepathically by an even worse being who lives on a
far planet.
All of these are well written and quite entertaining. And reading stories
is a good way to try out ideas and consider them in the abstract
without getting your own fears and personal considerations mixed up
into it.
450
SPLIT VIEWPOINTS (SVs)
(I wrote this long before I found the “point to the being you divided
from” process which makes handling split pieces easy. The techniques
given here are the earlier ones which only worked sporadically. The
later write-up on “divide and conquer” takes precedence over this one.
This write-up is included here to provide more background information
and as a record of research.).
In earlier technology, we only addressed one side of the mechanism
whereby a thetan infests and abberates another. The concern has
been completely aimed at clearing the thetan of the influences of other
theta units such as the BTs and Clusters discovered on OT3 and the
PMEs, CEs, and other entities covered in these writings. But in truth,
there are 2 sides to every coin and the thetan himself is actually
fragmented and secretly running split off pieces of himself which are
busily abberating other people. In other words, he can find that he is
being a BT on many other human beings walking around here on
Earth and elsewhere. We will call these fragments Split Viewpoints
(SVs).
Before we talk further about SVs, let’s take a look at the sane behavior
underlying this phenomena.
There are 3 ways to endow something with life. First, you can animate
it with unaware thought, second, you can go over and animate it
yourself, or third, you can divide into two individuals and have one of
you animate it.
It is easy to place a thought in something. You can actually build quite
complex constructions of programmed thought which will do all sorts
of interesting things even to the degree where someone else is fooled
into believing that they are looking at a real thetan. A good example of
this is a computer. The programmer’s labor long and hard postulating a
complex pattern of thought which often appears to act in an intelligent
and independent manner, but this thought is not aware of being aware
and is not creative in the fullest sense of the word. Look inside a
computer sometime, there’s lots of thought but no thetan unless
someone has shoved in a BT to screw up the works.
You are also capable of being in two places at once. Really, your not
located anyway, so you could operate from all positions in this
u n i v e r s e s i m u l t a n e o u s l y . Y o u c a n p u t l i t t l e b i t s o f y o u r
intention/attention units in all sorts of places and do lots of things from
these positions and have quite a good time doing this. Sometimes you
451
do this and hide it from yourself to have interesting game conditions
and surprises etc. In its pure form, there’s nothing very abberated
about this.
A thetan can also divide into two individuals. In this case, both have the
same earlier track, but they each go their own way thereafter. Ron
mentions this very briefly in the HCL lectures and in the 5th ACC. My
own research finds that there were only a small number of individuals
(10,000 or so) present at the beginning of the Home Universe era. The
trillions who are here now all trace back to those few early beings.
If this all begins with a “Static” which can duplicate itself, then it makes
sense that the individuals later on the track can still do this trick. I can
imagine that one could postulate a “new soul” that had no track or
experience, but such a being would be a full god without the basis for
agreement to connect to this sequence of universes, so he simply
wouldn’t be here. The only way you’d get someone in here would be
to let him share the track which leads here, and that means that at the
moment of division, you are both the same. Then each of you hurry’s
up and gets different real fast.
Note that once divided, these true individuals do not merge together
again. There would be no purpose in it. You wouldn’t choose to
terminate one of the two theta lines because each is interesting and
adds to the game. Also note that early on the track, this is not
abberative. Later on, we find mild aberrations because of
considerations of havingness and limited ability to create, but generally
you handled this is some sensible manner. Usually, when you divided
you had some good reason and a sensible plan. For example, you
were very interested in continuing to operate where you were but also
heard of something very interesting to do elsewhere and decided to
become two so that both could be experienced to their fullest.
There might also be some sort of paired reproduction of thetans in a
2D like manner, but I have no awareness or data on this right now. It
would seem possible because there are a few vague comments by
Ron about the basic thetan being two rather than one in the HCL
lectures and in the 3rd ACC. If so, then it is conceivable that two
thetans could each produce a half which would merge together into an
individual. The resulting individual would obviously have to have a full
track back to native state, but it might be a dual track. I don’t think that
this will make any difference in processing (he can still spot and handle
early track), so the question doesn’t need to be settled at this time.
And so we have the 3 mechanisms in their sane form. He can put
some thought (which is not aware of being aware) over there, or he
452
can operate from a viewpoint over there (except its not over there, its
just one of many locations he owns and operates from), or he can
divide and one of him goes over there. This is the sanity that underlies
a vast sphere of aberration.
The thetan can be made to divide, and hide from himself, and in each
of these split fragments, he can be made to abberate himself and
others. These split pieces are not quite true individuals (you have to
live your own track to become individual). They are more like the
result of putting out intention/attention units to operate from various
places. But the heavy unawareness and implanted goals that are
generally present make these pieces more separated than you would
expect so that they are almost individuals. There are many variations
of these and some come closer to one extreme or the other.
We will refer to this entire class of theta units as split viewpoints (SVs).
Generally, this is an abberated partial split that is not quite a totally
separate individual. The PC can discover that he is being each of his
many fragments (SVs) but he makes a point of not- knowing about this
from his primary theta line where he is maintaining himself as a unique
individual.
Mostly he’s 90 percent unconscious in each of his split viewpoints, but
he does have a least a small amount of awareness and intelligence
there. Often you will find an SV where he has a great cheerful glee at
abberating himself and others.
The PC generally has deep and strong considerations that memory is
locational and will only use the memories in a particular operating
location that were acquired in that location. He doesn’t let the data cross
over. He also will usually insist that responsibility is also location
dependent. Himself in position A is not responsible for what he did in
position B. He hangs onto this attitude because he’s often committing
overts and doesn’t want the blame to cross over.
VOLITIONAL SVs
Although most SVs are setup by implants, he also does this himself on
purpose. He will push a sneaky little piece of himself into someone
else to control them. In this society, you see this often on the 2D.
This does not occur on a simple attempt to handle somebody or in
making some postulates etc., it is a real attempt to compel someone
by pushing a piece of yourself into their head. I don’t think that most
people do this very often, but you should at least be able to find a few
453
times where you did in this lifetime. Usually the action is of short
duration and you pull out again and dissolve the split, but occasionally
you might leave a piece in there permanently. These should all be
cleaned up. Also, chains of overts of trying to compel people should
be run out.
I think that we will find that rape includes the rapist pushing an SV into
the victim (the victim would find it as a BT). We might also find that this
generally occurs when an SP drives someone PTS which gives us
another explanation for the phone calls on the suppressed person
rundown.
You will also find that the pc has sometimes split off a helpful SV. He
does this as a defense mechanism. For example, he knows the
thought police are going to catch him and so he sends a piece of
himself off to hide and come back later to break him out of jail. He
makes himself forget this so that the police wouldn’t read his mind and
find out about it. Sometimes these are clouding his mind or abilities to
keep the police from finding out. Usually the need for these is long
gone but he never noticed and is still keeping things from himself.
COMPULSION SVs
The thetan has frequently been implanted to split into pieces from
which he is ordered to emit various compulsions at himself and others.
A significant version of this is the “compel” item derived off of each
penalty universe (covered in another write-up).
In an early version of this, he simply puts pieces of himself into a big
pool representing “Eternity” from where he sends compulsions at
himself. Later implants make him fragment and place him in various
locations around himself and others emitting these compulsions. His
fragments appear like BTs to other people.
The compulsion SVs will be covered in more detail in a separate writeup.
THE 5 WAY GPMs This implant has him divide into 5 valences for
each of these “Actual GPMs” and try to push himself, as each of these
valences, into other people for the purpose of acting out the GPM in
life. This is run out with its own platen. See the write-up on the 5 way
GPMs.
POOLS AND UNIVERSE MACHINERY
454
The PC has often been made to put a piece of himself into a cross
copy pool of one kind or another as described in the write-up on Pool
Theory. This includes emotion clouds and somatic pools and the big
cross copy pools in the universe machinery through which he keeps
the universe continually created. He’s in these pools along with
everyone else. This maintains the physical contact that everyone
thinks is needed to maintain a consistent experience of reality and
feelings and somatics etc.
One interesting thing that everyone does is to divide after dropping the
body and say that only one copy has the earlier identity and memory.
This copy is fed into the universe machinery for preservation. The
remaining copy (by which we mean you) is supposedly a pure
untainted new individual. Of course this doesn’t work, but it contributes
significantly to forgetting the previous life and pretending that you’re
someone new.
OTHER SPLITTER IMPLANTS
There are numerous implants that make the individual divide. The
usual physical universe technique is to force him to be in two places
by use of force (energy waves etc.) and then implant mutually
detestable goals into him in the two different locations so that he will
keep them separated. He might be implanted to be a policeman and
hate crooks in one position and implanted to be a criminal and hate
police in the other, so that from each viewpoint, he despises himself in
the other valence.
Another common technique is simple trickery and treachery, giving
him false data and convincing him to split for his own survival or for the
sake of helping others.
Mass implants generally have people divide many ways and become
BTs on each other. This is true of incident 2. He didn’t simply get
infested with BTs, he also became many BTs which were implanted
into others.
Double body incidents include dividing and “leaving your real self
behind” in the body that is held in pawn.
HANDLING
Sometimes you might have handled a split by running it as a BT,
especially when you were running a BT on someone else’s body.
455
Sometimes someone else blows a BT which is one of your SVs and
you just feel a bit better or have some cognition out of thin air.
The main technique is simply to blow by inspection. You just spot the
SV and the division dissolves or you spot the moment in the implant
when you divided or you spot the item that did it. Often, spotting the
decision to divide will cure it (especially true for volitional splits that
weren’t forced by an implant).
When one of these dissolves, you don’t generally abandon the location
or whatever. You just become bigger and can consciously operate
from more viewpoints. Note that you’re not going to absorb or drain
any other individuals. If something is independent enough to go its
own way, then it will.
One technique you can use is to simply reassume the viewpoint and
responsibility. You can get on the other side of the “valence wall” and
run flows or mockups of the wall to dissolve it.
You can also use ordinary BT handling techniques. One thing that
works on difficult ones is to assess for the underlying penalty universe
goal and either have the SV spot the top or spot the top of it yourself
from the SV viewpoint.
Often an SV will also have BTs accumulated around it and copying it.
What frequently happens is that the split dissolves immediately on
inspection and then a BT copies the split viewpoint and pretends to be
you since this is a good way to control you or create an effect or
simply because it is interesting.
Because of this, if you need to run something on the SV beyond
simply blow by inspection, it is usually best to run it as if it were a BT.
This will dissolve splits and restore your ability to occupy the location
as yourself while also blowing any copying BTs and allowing anything
that has become a separate individual to free up and blow.
Sometimes you will find yourself waking up in a “senior” viewpoint.
These may be “oversouls” or whatever and often are in higher
universes or in traps of various kinds. Generally your are almost
unconscious in these viewpoints but you have the idea that they were
the “big” you and your earth existence is the lesser copy. Often, you
got out of traps or whatever by leaving yourself behind and extending
out a “lesser remote viewpoint”. The handling is to clean up machinery
etc. (PMEs, CEs, etc.) that is surrounding you in the “higher” viewpoint.
Usually the perception of these turns on for a brief while and then
fades. Use the opportunity to clean up everything you can get your
456
hands on. You might have to pick up one of these areas a number of
times before you get enough of the trap taken apart to free yourself
from it completely. Just persist in blowing things and don’t Q and A too
much about where you are or what’s going on. You’ll just get dub in
until you pull off enough of the surrounding weight.
457
CHAPTER 7 - OT DRILLS AND ADVANCED PROCESSES
This is just a collection of various interesting OT processes. My opinion
is that you will do best switching off between drills and case handling
rather than specializing in one or the other.
There are many OT drills in the Scientology materials of 1952-4. A
small percentage of them made it into the old OT 5 and 6, but those
could be considered quickie levels compared to what could have been
done. Note that old 5 and 6 were put together in the quickie era of
Scientology and were never expanded.
A number of these processes are in the book “Creation of Human
Ability”. The drills given in route 1 were probably favorites of Ron’s,
but the book also contains the SOP 8C rundown which (except for the
opening procedure) is loaded with OT processes. There are more
processes in the tech volumes for this time period. Especially
interesting are the processes given in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd ACC tapes.
The group processing sessions of the 3rd ACC are real eye openers.
I’m not going to repeat all of Ron’s material here. You should study it in
the original form if at all possible. Instead, I will limit myself (with a few
exceptions) to additional things that I have come up with, or significant
improvements on Ron’s versions.
458
MY FAVORITE EXTERIORIZATION PROCESSES
FIND SOME PLACES WHERE YOU’RE NOT
This is Ron’s process from the 2nd ACC and SOP 8C step 1. The pure
form often turns on at least some faint degree of exterior perception,
and there are many variations. See SOP 8C.
EXTERIORIZATION BY ALTERNATE SPOTTING
You lie down and close your eyes. Then: SPOT 3 POINTS IN THE
BODY. SPOT 3 POINTS IN THE ROOM. The commands are run
alternately.
This is Ron’s process from the 5th ACC. He even uses it on a group
processing tape, so its a bit silly to keep it locked up on the upper
levels.
SELF ANALYSIS as an OT Drill.
This is done using the book “Self Analysis”.
Alter each command from “Recall a time when ....” to “Look around the
city and see if you can Spot ....”. Skip any commands which don’t make
sense in the altered form.
You take a command from the book, alter it as above, close your eyes,
and then get the idea that your looking down at the city and try to Spot
the thing asked for. Do the command a number of times, until you feel
good about it. Then go on to the next command.
Don’t worry about whether or not your really seeing anything or just
imagining it. At first you probably are imagining it, but gradually you’ll
start picking up on real stuff and getting things half right. True clear and
certain exterior perception is way up there. Don’t expect it to happen
in one big jump. Work on drills like this occasionally and gradually your
perception improves.
You can also use simple versions of locational processes in a similar
manner, spotting things that you like or that are safe to look at or
whatever.
459
I came up with this variation of self analysis myself, but Ron also had a
similar alternate use in 1953 which was to change all the commands
from “recall” to “mockup” so that the book could be used for self
audited mockup processing. There was even a printed version of this
variation which was published as “Self Analysis in Scientology”, but of
course its no longer available at the CofS since mockup processing
was forbidden by an HCOB in the early sixties.
SIMPLY SLIDING OUT.
Richard Monroe had a nice exteriorization technique in his book “Far
Journeys”. He would simply lay down, close his eyes, and roll over
without moving the body, leaving it behind him.
Ron had a similar technique in the 1st ACC. He would have the student,
sitting in a chair, remain in the chair while he had the body get up and
walk away. The student, as a being, should in theory see the body
walking away from him.
Monroe’s technique has the advantage of not requiring the PC to work
the motor controls of the body while he is separating from it.
In either case, we are separating the motion of the thetan and the
body, having one stay in place while the other moves.
TECHNIQUES THAT ARE NOT VERY GOOD.
Many of the yoga and metaphysical techniques are not ideal.
Often they work with the chakras (disks of energy in the “astral” body)
or the third eye (which is surrounded by energy fields) or other forms
of heavy energy flows.
These can sometimes exteriorize somebody, but they are difficult and
stir up all sorts of energy fields, which often make it more difficult to
get out. Fooling around with these things should be left to the
advanced students and will be discussed in another write-up.
The only one that I found to be easily workable was to very lightly run
a gentle flow of energy up and down the spine and gradually slide out
while doing that. This seems to work because you are reassuring
yourself that you can retain your control and connection to the body so
that you feel safer about sliding out.
460
SOP 8C REVISITED
The steps of SOP 8C were one of Ron’s better collections of OT
processes, but they were put together very early in the subject, and
are mostly general suggestions rather than precisely worked out
processes. The auditors of that time were expected to take a general
idea and come up with appropriate commands as they worked with
the PC. There is something to be said for this approach, but it requires
a great deal of skill and is neither suitable for self auditing nor for use
by any but the most knowledgeable auditors.
In light of this, I took a few sentences from SOP 8C and turned them
into a modern style rundown. This ran very nicely as a solo process. It
is presented here both as a useful rundown and as an example of how
to make the various steps of SOP 8C into a powerful modern rundown.
The bulk of it still needs to be put together this way.
HANDLING ORDERS
This is run exterior.
Get a number of answers for each question before going on to the
next one. Continue going through the questions in a round robin
fashion until you have a big win.
a) Spot some people who are not giving you orders.
b) Spot some people who you are not giving orders to.
c) Spot some people who are not giving orders to others.
d) Spot some people who are not receiving orders from others.
e) Spot some people who are not giving orders to themselves.
When this is complete, you go on to the next process which is the
same questions run on things instead of people.
a) Spot some things which are not giving you orders.
b) Spot some things which you are not giving orders to.
c) Spot some things which are not giving orders to others.
461
d) Spot some things which are not receiving orders from others.
e) Spot some things which are not giving orders to themselves.
The third process is on places.
a) Spot some places which are not giving you orders.
b) Spot some places which you are not giving orders to.
c) Spot some places which are not giving orders to others.
d) Spot some places which are not receiving orders from others.
e) Spot some places which are not giving orders to themselves.
The next one is on groups.
a) Spot some groups that are not giving you orders.
b) Spot some groups that you are not giving orders to.
c) Spot some groups that are not giving orders to others.
d) Spot some groups that are not receiving orders from others.
e) Spot some groups that are not giving orders to themselves.
The fifth one is on governments.
a) Spot some governments which are not giving you orders.
b) Spot some governments which you are not giving orders to.
c) Spot some governments which are not giving orders to others.
d) Spot some governments which are not receiving orders from
others.
e) Spot some governments which are not giving orders to
themselves.
Then lifeforms.
a) Spot some lifeforms that are not giving you orders.
462
b) Spot some lifeforms that you are not giving orders to.
c) Spot some lifeforms that are not giving orders to others.
d) Spot some lifeforms that are not receiving orders from others.
e) Spot some lifeforms that are not giving orders to themselves.
Then energies.
a) Spot some energies that are not giving you orders.
b) Spot some energies that you are not giving orders to.
c) Spot some energies that are not giving orders to others.
d) Spot some energies that are not receiving orders from others.
e) Spot some energies that are not giving orders to themselves.
And finally run it on spirits. (if it seems to indicate to do so, you can also
run this on “gods”, but I tend to bundle them together with spirits). This
would be a real speed up process for somebody who is moving
slowly on Nots or having trouble with it.
a) Spot some spirits who are not giving you orders.
b) Spot some spirits who you are not giving orders to.
c) Spot some spirits who are not giving orders to others.
d) Spot some spirits who are not receiving orders from others.
e) Spot some spirits who are not giving orders to themselves.
FOLLOWING ORDERS
After doing the above, it seemed like a good idea to run the following,
which produced a good result.
Spot a time when you choose to follow other’s orders for the sake of
having a game. Notice a few things about that time. Then Spot an
earlier time etc. until you either get the first time, or reach the earliest
one you can. If you don’t already feel exceedingly good about it, then
463
handle that earliest one by alternate spotting (something in the incident,
something in the room) until you do feel really good about it.
Next, Spot a time when you talked others into following your orders for
the sake of having a game. Handle as above.
Note that we’re aiming for a state where you have freedom of choice
about following or disagreeing with orders and do not follow them
compulsively but can choose to do so if you’re interested in the game
to which the orders apply.
THE SOP 8C GOALS PROCESS
Here’s another nifty process based on SOP 8C.
a) Spot some goals you do not have.
b) Spot some goals that others do not have.
c) Spot some goals that you don’t have for another person.
d) Spot some goals that another person doesn’t have for you.
e) Spot some goals that another person doesn’t have for others.
464
SOME HIGH POWERED PROCESSES
Of the many things I thought up and tried, these were some of the
best.
UNIVERSE EXTERIORIZATION
Spot three points in the room. Spot three points outside of this
universe.
Run alternately.
See what you come up with.
MUST NOT TOUCH
Pick an object in the room. Imaging that you are starting to put an
energy beam on it. Have the walls yell “Mustn’t Touch” at you, and you
pull the beam back very quickly.
Repeat this with different objects until you feel something release and
feel very good.
INFINITE MOCKUPS
Pick an object in the room and mock up a copy of it. Then run the
copy out to infinity by stretching thousands of them off into the
distance with the postulate that the copies go on endlessly. Then
unmock it and repeat with another object.
When you do the unmock step, you should be able to simply decide to
have it vanish and have it do so. However, the first few times, it may
be a bit sticky and persistent because there is so much havingness to
the mockup that you may want to hang onto it or other entities may try
to keep it there. So if there’s any problem dissolving the mockup, then
mockup more infinite runs of the same object, and make them
different colors. When you have enough, you will find it easy to snap
them out of existence.
OWNERSHIP OF REALITY
465
Pick a section of a wall. Make it as big as you can have and encompass
comfortably, maybe a circle a yard or so in diameter.
Run alternately:
a) Get the idea that you’re mocking it up.
b) Get the idea that another is mocking it up.
When this flattens, go on to the next pair of commands and run them
the same way.
a) Get the idea that you’re mocking it up.
b) Get the idea that society is mocking it up.
Continue on, substituting the following list of terminals in place of
society in command b above, always alternating the idea that you are
mocking it up with the idea that the other thing is mocking it up. Run
each one as long as it produces change.
The list is: Lifeforms
The body
Your machinery
The object itself (get the idea that the wall is mocking itself up)
The physical universe
Agreed upon machinery
Spirits
God.
Once you have finished all ten of the above processes, you should
have a good awareness of who is mocking up the wall. If not, then run
the above set of processes again. You can pick a different wall or
some large object (make sure its big and heavy) on subsequent
passes.
I learned a lot from running this. One of the things I learned was that I
was usually not the one mocking it up but I could be. Often nobody is
mocking it up except for old machinery which continues to make it
persist. Sometimes many people are each contributing a percentage
and sometimes a particular person grabs it all. The whole thing is in a
state of flux with the responsibility and control floating around by
postulate.
ENERGY BEAM DRILL
466
I fooled around a lot with energy beams (and so did Ron to some
degree in 1952) without a lot of results or a great deal of reality until I
stumbled upon this process.
One of the problems in working with beams is that you try to do
something with them and the lack of physical universe reaction causes
you to invalidate the beam, so you never get very far or have a chance
to build up strength. So its a mistake to try to put a beam on anything
and use it (unless you’re very far along). What’s needed is an isometric
where you actually start to feel something and get some feedback
without needed to overcome physical universe reality. And that’s what
this drill will do.
Mockup an invisible energy beam hanging in the air. Make it about
three feet long. An energy beam does not emit energy. It is a sort of
standing wave flowing within itself. These beams are used to grip
things and to push and pull at stuff, but we are not going to do that in
this process. Here we just want a beam hanging in the air
disconnected from anything. You don’t have to get into the mechanics
of it (charge flows in and out of the ends between the center of the
beam and its surface which have different potentials and its a steady
state perpetual motion). Just get the idea that you have an energy
beam there, no matter how tenuous and unreal it seems.
Now alternately stretch the beam out to 10 feet and compress it back
down to 3 feet. Do this steadily back and forth. Don’t just mock it up as
two different sizes alternately, its the stretching and contracting that
make the process work. And at each of the two positions, you
postulate that it is the size that it should be and then you stretch or
compress it anyway.
After a little while, the beam will start having a tendency to snap into
one position or the other and will resist being changed, but you make it
do what you want anyway because its your beam. You will find that
you have to wrestle a bit with it sometimes. Always stop at a point
where you have the beam fully under control and feel good about it.
This is not something you do entirely at one sitting. It is a drill and its
like exercising, you do a little each day and build up muscles.
Eventually you will realize that you are dealing with real force and
energy of considerable power and its no longer a tenuous imaginary
little thing.
Carrying on in the face of no feedback is the hardest part, but it can be
done. At one time I read a description of the normally unused muscles
that could wiggle the ears. So I sat for an hour alternately tensing and
467
relaxing those muscles without feeling anything or having anything
happen, just imagining it so to speak. And then the muscle twitched,
and then it moved and after that I could move my ears around. Not a
very useful skill, but very educational.
DUAL REALITY
The basic postulates underlying the physical matter in this universe
are “It is there” and “It isn’t there”. Both are equally true. Both are
equally powerful. And both are basic. Holding two mutually exclusive
postulates simultaneously causes the mockup to go into a state of
vibration, and that is what we see when we examine the material of
this universe.
It is very hard to hold these two postulates simultaneously in the same
space. So we need to work up to it.
Get two identical objects. Two pencils or two pieces of paper or
whatever. Put them alongside each other. Look at one and put the
postulate in it that it is there. Look at the other and put the postulate in
it that it isn’t there. Alternate back and forth a few times. Then reverse
which postulate goes on which object and do a few commands. Then
flip back to the first pair of commands etc. When this becomes easy,
go on to the next step.
Now simultaneously postulate that the object on the right is there and
the one on the left isn’t. Then simultaneously postulate that the one on
the left is there and the one on the right isn’t. Keep alternating these
two commands.
When this becomes easy, try to get both postulates into the same
object simultaneously. Do this alternately on the two objects rather
than fixating on one of them. Do the best you can. Stop on a win even
if its not a full result.
Then repeat the above with 2 mocked up objects. Then repeat again
with 2 more physical objects.
Keep alternating the entire rundown on physical and mocked up
objects until you can comfortably put both postulates into the same
place simultaneously.
POOR BODY
468
When the body is injured or killed, one has a tendency to sympathize
with it, feel sorry for it, and interiorize into it to try and fix it. The impact
of dying will often exteriorize somebody, and then they hop right back
into the body to try and reanimate it. This doesn’t work. You can heal
the body, animate the body, and control the body better from outside.
The following drill helps overcome this impulse as well as being an
exteriorization process.
a) Pick an object in the room (large objects are best).
b) Decide that there is something wrong with the object (makeup
whatever you like).
c) Feel sorry for the object. Sympathize with it. Say “Oh the poor
thing”.
d) Imagine that you are interiorizing into the object to fix it. Imagine
that you are inside of it and its mass is all around you. Just get as
much reality on this as you can, it doesn’t have to be perfect.
e) Look around inside the object and realize that this is not a good
place to fix it from and that you have made a mistake.
f) Exteriorize from the object. Imagine that you are looking down at
it. Mockup fixing it from outside. Put a beam on it and say “There
that fixes it”. Then let go of it.
Then pick another object and repeat the above.
End off when you feel really good and can see that you have always
done better fixing things from outside rather than by getting into them.
For your second run at this process (you don’t have to do it
immediately after the above), run it with mock ups instead of physical
objects. Begin with a large mocked up object. As soon as the drill
seems a bit comfortable, change over to mockups of injured bodies
until you are free of the impulse to get into them to fix them.
For the third run, use mockups of dead bodies. In this case, on step f,
you should alternate between mocking up fixing it successfully from
outside (so that it is resurrected) and deciding that it isn’t worth the
trouble and abandoning it. In either case, you see that it is no good to
get back in it after it is dead.
469
Note that in the real world, if the body has died from shock (in other
words, a momentary impact that might have stopped the heart, rather
than permanent heavy damage), you might have a good chance at
reviving it (restarting the heart or whatever) simply by grabbing onto it
from outside and pouring in some energy, maybe even slamming a
beam into the heart to get it to restart (similar to the electrical jolt that
the hospitals use for this). With this you would at least have a chance,
whereas diving into the body will decrease your horsepower and
reduce the likelihood of your being able to do anything at all.
A final run can be done with this process, picking actual body parts on
your current body. Makeup things wrong and dive in to fix them, and
then see that you can fix them better from outside etc.
As a little side note, you can mockup beams into anything fairly easily.
But actually achieving any real effects with those beams is a different
matter, and is a much higher gradient. Your own body is the easiest
thing to affect because your ownership and havingness is well
established and everyone agrees that its yours. The next gradient is
physical objects. Actually impinging on someone else’s body with a
beam is the most difficult because you’re going to hit all of their
unconscious defenses that protect the body.
470
SOP 8 OT
The top of the early bridge was SOP 8-OT (Standard operating
procedure version 8 for OTs) which was covered in the 3rd ACC. This
was to be done after running the OT drills of SOP 8C (SOP 8 for clinical
use). It did not have a formal procedure but instead was a sort of roll
your own aimed at handling whatever else was in the way of making
OT.
It primarily consisted of using the standard procedures of that time
period (mockups, havingness, copying things, taking over
automaticities by doing them consciously, etc.) to handle whatever was
left, with special emphasis on a number of targets such as confront of
nothingness, confront of bodies, courage, ability to mockup any
sensation for yourself without a body, etc.
But despite the lack of an overall procedure, there were a great deal of
processes given in the lectures and I have tried to collect together
some of them here. I have taken the liberty of modernizing and
formalizing these somewhat, so this is my own interpretation. It is also
far from a complete list, especially as regards the powerful group
processing sessions that are included in the lectures.
The final target was to get out with all your stuff (you could leave now
but you wouldn’t because you’d lose everything) rather than remaining
here as an OT in this universe. But Ron suggests that if you do make it
out, you should leave a copy of yourself behind so that your friends
etc. don’t get upset.
TRUTH/UNTRUTH
run alternately
a) Spot 3 things that are true
b) Spot 3 things that are not true
c) Spot 3 things that are true for another
d) Spot 3 things that are not true for another
e) Spot 3 things that are true for others
f) Spot 3 things that are not true for others
471
GRANTING RIGHTS
Best done outside in a busy area, but this can also be done in the room
or the woods etc. This should then also be run exterior.
Do each command a number of times, concentrating especially on the
first two and being very specific about the exact rights you are
granting. Then repeat the entire set of commands.
a) Grant things/people the right to be there
b) Grant things/people the right to do what they are doing.
c) Have them give you the right to grant rights.
d) Grant others the right to grant rights
e) Have others grant you the right to grant rights
WRONGNESS
Walk around the block and find things wrong. If nothing is obviously
wrong, then find things that are unreasonably wrong, such as the
shrubbery doesn’t change colors to compliment the girl’s clothes etc.
Do this for at least an hour.
Then do this exterior, drifting around cities and countryside, beginning
with your local area.
CERTAINTY
For each dynamic, Spot what you are most certain of.
DISAGREEMENT
a) Spot 3 things you don’t have to agree with.
b) Spot 3 things you don’t have to communicate with
c) Spot 3 things you don’t have to like.
WASTING
472
Run each of these as a separate process: If your doing this solo, then
for each question, write down answers until you feel good.
1. Mockup a way to waste knowing about things
2. Mockup a way to waste perceptions
3. Mockup a way to waste enthusiasm
4. Mockup a way to waste anger
5. Mockup a way to waste hostility
6. Mockup a way to waste fear
7. Mockup a way to waste grief
8. Mockup a way to waste effort
9. Mockup a way to waste pain
10. Mockup a way to waste sensation
11. Mockup a way to waste symbols
12. Mockup a way to waste thinking
13. Mockup a way to waste eating
14. Mockup a way to waste sex
15. Mockup a way to waste mystery
16. Mockup a way to waste matter
17. Mockup a way to waste energy
18. Mockup a way to waste space
19. Mockup a way to waste time
7. HAVING
Run alternately until you feel very good
1. Spot 3 mysteries that would be interesting.
2. Spot 3 people you wouldn’t mind having sex with.
3. Spot 3 foods you wouldn’t mind eating.
4. Spot 3 ideas you wouldn’t mind having.
5. Spot 3 symbols you wouldn’t mind displaying.
473
6. Spot 3 sensations you wouldn’t mind having
7. Spot 3 efforts you wouldn’t mind doing
8. Spot 3 emotions you wouldn’t mind feeling
9. Spot 3 sounds you wouldn’t mind hearing
10. Spot 3 things you wouldn’t mind seeing
11. Spot 3 things you wouldn’t mind knowing
(on ‘2’, Ron uses “3 kinds of sex you wouldn’t mind having”).
PRESENT TIME
Run alternately
a) Resent present time
b) Desire present time
BARRIERS
Run alternately
a) Spot some barriers that are not in front of your face
b) Spot some barriers that are not behind you
c) Spot some barriers that are not on your right side
d) Spot some barriers that are not on your left side
e) Spot some barriers that are not above you
f) Spot some barriers that are not below you
BLACKNESS
a) Pick an object in the room
b) Mockup a ridge of blackness in front of it.
c) Alternately fix your attention on the blackness and take your
attention off of it a few times.
474
Then continue until you feel comfortable, have no attraction to the
blackness and can ignore it and look through it.
Then repeat this with another object, etc.
Then close your eyes, mockup a ridge of blackness, and alternately fix
and unfix your attention on it as above. Repeat, placing the ridge in
different directions.
LAYERS OF BLACKNESS
Close your eyes and mockup many layers of blackness around you.
Look through each layer in turn to see the next one.
CREATION
Have objects accuse you of not creating them. You acknowledge them
and tell them that their wrong.
OBJECTIVE EXTERIORIZATION
a) Spot an object in the room.
b) Get the idea of interiorizing into the object and being it. Mockup
being in the object as thoroughly as possible, and actually go into
it to whatever degree you can.
c) Then exteriorize from it.
Repeat many times.
The above can also be done exterior, spotting objects around the city
etc.
EMOTION
Feel an emotion and make the body feel a different one.
INTERIORIZATION
Mockup exteriorizing and pushing yourself back in.
475
Repeat until you have no urge to go in.
OCCLUSION
Close your eyes.
a) Spot an occlusion or blackness.
b) Alternately be in it, and be here, until it lessens.
Repeat.
ALRIGHT
a) Spot 3 things in the body that are alright.
b) Spot 3 things outside of the body that are alright
ALIVENESS
Have the walls say alternately, “you must make me alive”, “you mustn’t
make me alive”.
THOUGHT
Put out a thought and mockup an effect coming back.
Repeat until you feel good.
NOTHING/SOMETHING
Alternately put up nothing around yourself and something around
yourself.
When you mockup something around yourself, consciously alter it
slightly at least once to ensure that you are being causative over
creating the mockup rather than just pulling in an old picture.
You can start out doing this in the body, mocking up things like water,
air, pudding, energy clouds, cotton, wood, granite, and steel around
you.
476
Then do it exterior, including putting up chairs, tables, symbols, basic
objects, and bodies. With bodies especially, be sure to shift the
appearance around a few times because there will be a tendency to
put up old bodies that you’ve had or seen on TV etc.
MIRRORS
Look in the mirror and flinch.
After you have done this many times, then alternate:
a) Look in the mirror and flinch.
b) Look in the mirror and see your ideal self.
For step b above, you mockup your ideal and look at that instead of
the image in the mirror.
c) Look in the mirror and see nothing.
After these are all done, then pick objects (walls etc.) that are nonreflective
and mock them up as being mirrors and repeat the above
drills.
FLINCHING
Look around and Spot things and flinch at them.
Then repeat the process exterior, looking over the city.
FLITTER
Mockup flitter, which is like golden sparks (or use white sparks if you
have trouble with golden). Push waves of flitter against objects and pull
it back.
This is intended to raise perception.
ANIMAL BODIES
477
Pick some non-human body type such as a lion or a horse. Imagine
yourself as that creature and visualize how you would move the limbs
etc. Then exteriorize from that body.
Repeat this a number of times.
BEINGNESS
a) What kind of object can you be for certain.
b) Be it and experience it.
Repeat many times.
Then do the same for “what kind of energy”. After that, do “what kind of
space”.
MEMORY
Run alternately.
a) Order yourself to forget something.
b) Remember it anyway.
PERCEPTION
Leaving your eyes open, look around the room but don’t see it while
you do so. Inspect things very carefully, but don’t see them.
Now close your eyes and inspect the room without seeing it.
TERMINALS
In each process, run the two questions alternately.
a) Find 2 particles that you don’t object to having together.
b) Find 2 particles that you don’t object to having apart.
a) Find 2 objects that you don’t object to having together.
b) Find 2 objects that you don’t object to having apart.
478
a) Find 2 animals that you don’t object to having together.
b) Find 2 animals that you don’t object to having apart.
a) Find 2 people that you don’t object to having together.
b) Find 2 people that you don’t object to having apart.
a) Find 2 spaces that you don’t object to having together.
b) Find 2 spaces that you don’t object to having apart.
AFFINITY
Find some things which are holding together and get how nice that is.
FALLING UPWARDS
Mockup falling upwards and other things falling upwards in
disagreement with gravity.
BLACKNESS MACHINERY
Mockup machines that make blackness and throw them away.
REMEDY OF HAVINGNESS
Mockup an acceptable copy of the Earth and then deteriorate it until it
snaps in. Repeat.
MACHINERY
a) Find a machine you can be.
b) Now be it and perform its function.
Do this in mockup form for ordinary physical universe machinery, such
as cars and drill presses.
Then do it for mental machinery.
Then do it for machinery that stops things, such as machinery which
stops you from remembering, perceiving, and doing OT abilities.
479
Then do it for “unmocking” machinery which unmocks your mockups
etc. You put up a picture, then you be the unmocking machine which
snaps it up and makes it vanish etc.
Then do it for compulsively creating machinery which puts the walls
there etc.
ENJOYMENT AND ADMIRATION.
Mockup enjoyment in various places.
Put clouds of pleasure over various cities.
Mockup crowds of people admiring you.
NOBILITY
Put Nobility into the walls.
Go to a crowded place and postulate nobility into various people.
Then put clouds of nobility over various cities.
TERROR
a) Put feelings of terror into the walls
b) Make your body flip flop around as if in pain and terror.
c) Then do mockups of the body flip flopping around.
COURAGE
Its easier to run courage at a distance from the body, so begin
processing it that way.
a) Mockup clouds of courage over various cities.
b) Go to a crowded place and postulate courage into specific
individuals.
c) Mockup a way to waste courage.
480
d) Put feelings of courage into the walls.
Then mockup a feeling of courage in the face of blackness and repeat
a) to d) above using that version of courage.
Then mockup a serene and contemptuous type of courage and repeat
a) to d) above using that version of courage.
Next take the serene and contemptuous courage and alternately mock
it up around yourself and around others.
MORE ON COURAGE
Mockup force particles out in space.
Alternately mockup yourself and others being there and being
courageous about them.
Repeat this with various specifics such as lightning storms, explosions,
planets being thrown around, etc. Do this far away from the body.
MORE ON INTERIORIZATION
Interiorize into and exteriorize from buildings, mountains, planets, and
suns.
SPLITTING
Mockup splitting into two, both in a body and exterior.
481
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - INTRODUCTION
This isn’t really expected to work. After all, how would the mailmen
feel if we started floating packages to each other cross country. It
would put a lot of people out of their jobs and get everybody upset. So
let’s put aside, for awhile, our intentions of amazing the neighbors and
making policemen wrong and drop the idea of actually moving MEST
at a distance.
But levitation is a very, very interesting topic and there are a lot of
hidden standards built up on it. This makes it a very attractive area for
OT drilling because it generates a lot of enthusiasm. It’s just the sort of
thing to tease one into discarding some pet aberration and expand out
a bit further. So the real target of this rundown is not really levitation,
which is a minor skill, but rather, it is the restoration of the ability to
operate as a being.
We shouldn’t concentrate entirely upon case. You will find that in
running the penalty universes deeply, sometimes so much blows that
you need some sort of OT drills or havingness to expand out into the
space that has been freed up. For this we have all the havingness
processes, and Creation of Human Ability, and loads of other materials
from the 1950s. We also have the levitation drills given here. You can
use this rundown occasionally, but don’t concentrate on it exclusively.
Use other OT drills as well and concentrate on cleaning out the major
incidents of the early track (penalty universes etc.) since those
aberrations will have to go before you let yourself have very much
horsepower.
This write-up contains many things which I believe have a bearing on
the matter, but there’s probably more yet to be discovered.
GENERAL INFORMATION
It is expected that when you do levitate an object, it will be easy and
effortless. In my few experiences with this, I never noticed any strain
or drain of energy. So don’t pound away at these drills and work a
sweat up on your brow. It doesn’t work that way.
What I did observe on a number of occasions, and what I’ve also heard
from others is that it is usually done accidentally, without forethought or
consideration. One just forgets for a moment that he’s not suppose to
and simply moves something. So it has to be primarily a matter of
consideration.
482
Therefore, it would seem that we can skip the problem of having
enough energy to levitate an object. But this doesn’t mean that we can
ignore the subject of energy, because considerations about using
energy might still be an inhibiting factor. Note that lifting an ashtray into
the air, even if you do it purely by postulate without mocking up any
energy, does add potential energy to the Mest universe (the ashtray
will fall with a bang if you let go of it).
As a preliminary step to putting together this rundown, I wrote up and
examined my own early experiences with levitation in this lifetime.
This write-up is included here as background information.
BACKGROUND
Most of my few early experiences with levitation were one of a kind
miraculous happenings that could not be repeated or experimented
with. However, there was an exception in the form of Table Tipping
seances that my family used to do at home when I was in my teens. In
this, a crowd sits around a table (usually a light card table) chanting
“Table Up” for many many hours until the table floats up (either tilting
or floating completely). This really does work. I even tried it once with
two other kids to make sure the adults weren’t fooling us. Note that we
never had any professional mediums involved in this. It can be done
consistently if you persist long enough (but it is a truly long time). We
never knew if we were pulling in some spirit between bodies or just
getting an unknowing group effect. We would ask the table questions
(having it dip once for yes and twice for no), but there was little
accuracy to the responses.
I don’t particularly recommend this practice (you might be pulling in
undesirable spirits, or messing with other undiscovered stuff, and it
does little good for your case), but there are a couple things I observed
from it.
First, there would not be a single twitch (nothing encouraging
whatsoever) for most of the time spent chanting. In other words, we
would be 90% there and nothing would be happening. Once we got
the first true twitch, there would be only a few minutes of twitching
and then the table would rise cleanly into the air in a very precise
manner with no shaking or wavering at all. If anyone raised one finger
off the table, it would drop like a stone. Sometimes one of us would be
around but not in the seance. In that case, we would often have them
go over and try to push down on the table. When I tried this, it felt like
pushing down on a float in the water. It took considerable force to get it
down by an inch or two.
483
Also, there was an oddness to the feel of the energy, and the feel of
the table, and the way it moved. It did not seem at all like someone
invisible was lifting it or like it was being moved by mechanical means.
It also didn’t have the snap of a strong magnetic field, but it did have
some similarities to motions induced by light electrostatic charges in
lab experiments I did in school. Since nobody’s hair stood on end, it
would not actually have been electrostatic, but the similarity implies an
energy field of some sort. My impression is that a field permeated the
table and moved it rather than some beam coming down and pulling it
up. One could feel a faint energy flow through one’s hands to the table
and a bit of attraction between the table and the hands (you had to
forcefully pull your hand off to break contact).
From this, I would conclude that although it might be possible to lift an
ashtray with an energy beam, it might be easier to permeate the
ashtray and move it upwards that way.
Another conclusion is that there will not be a twitch until your 90% of
the way there. This is not good for auditing. Let’s say that right now,
you can grab an ashtray theta-wise and lift 5%. Then you do some drills
and you come upscale to lifting 20%. But the ashtray doesn’t even
twitch, so you invalidate the gain and drop back down to 5% where you
were before.
I think this happens constantly whenever anyone tries to levitate
things. You could get up to an 80% level and still see no results and
simply invalidate it all. It’s very hard to drill things which are
“impossible” because you don’t get enough wins and because the
universe is continually proving to you that your not getting anywhere.
I don’t think that the weight or size of the object makes any difference
unless you pick something bigger than you can move with your hands
(which brings in additional considerations of inability). I think that when
your at the 20% level, you become cause over 20% of the is-ness of a
match or an ashtray or a 20 pound weight. Therefore, it doesn’t help to
use a lighter object. It might actually be harder if the object is too light
because it might lower your havingness. So work with objects that
have some weight to them rather than with scraps of paper etc.
Also, I don’t think you’ll see any effects on a weighing scale until your
up at the 90% level because the object is in a MEST frame of reference
and agreeing with that and behaving properly until you get so much
cause over it that you can override that.
TR8 uses a nice trick to get around this. By having you move the
ashtray, you get wins and increase your causation. My experience is
484
that when this is done well, you begin to feel like your moving the
ashtray by postulate and only keeping in a physical comm line with
your hand rather than moving it via the body. All by itself, this might be
a 40 or 50% level of causation. You should have enough sense not to
invalidate this kind of win even though it doesn’t quite go far enough to
actually get the object into the air.
The other Scientology process in this area is the levitation drill given in
the Doctorate Course. In this drill, you exteriorize and put a beam on
your finger and lift the finger with it. Occasionally you vary this by
doing mockups of levitating. Once this is working well, you go on to
moving the hand and the arm etc. See the tapes on this.
My experience with the PDC levitation drill is that the body’s muscles
conveniently offset the normal drag of gravity even when relaxed. In
other words, if you physically keep the finger totally relaxed (and don’t
use your muscles to move it or hold it still), it is almost weightless as
far as levitating it is concerned. As long as you only try natural motions
(which are possible to the body), this condition is present and you can
work a beam on the body and move it quite easily. By itself, this will
not get you to the point of floating the body into the air. In this drill, the
body is still carrying it’s own weight for the most part. But you can very
distinctly move a body part with what seems to be only about the 20%
level of causation. This gives you some wins and lets you observe
how to use a beam and gives you a chance to orient the beam in the
right way (rather than reverse vector) etc. Also, you will find that you
can feel a comfortable flow of energy in the body part when you do
this, it helps with healing etc. It actually makes the body feel quite
good, possibly because it is reducing slightly the constant 100%
struggle against gravity.
At one time I drilled this extensively and got quite good at it. Then I
played around with other people, putting beams on their hands and
having them put beams on mine. This works if the person will relax
their hand completely and let the other person be in control. When
someone put a beam on my hand, it felt quite pleasant and the pull
was very slight. I could let my hand go along with it and be moved
around, but I was still carrying most of the weight of the hand. If two
people take turns moving each others hands around this way, they can
see that the other person’s hand does go where they want it to without
their telling the other person. This validates the fact that they are
having some effect even though they are far from the point where
they could move it against the other person’s will or carry a dead
weight against the force of gravity.
485
Another observation concerns two instances where I did move an
object without thinking about it. In one case I pushed a pack of
cigarettes and in the other I turned off a burner on the stove. In both
cases I was not looking at the object when my attention jumped to it
and I got a very clear, very close (within a few inches) exterior view
(full color, very real) of the object and just gave it a push without
thinking. One of these incidents occurred on a session break while
running old OT6, the other one occurred a few weeks after getting
power processing.
It would seem that the most important targets would be factors which
raise the PC’s willingness to levitate, and which improve his reach and
responsibility, and the removal of stops which might prevent his doing
this. These would be more important than trying to increase the
horsepower of his energy beams or something like that. These rare
occurrences of moving an object tend to indicate that one is already
strong enough energy wise to handle small objects so that lack of
horsepower would not be the right why.
Additional theory will be included with the processes in the rundown
below.
LEVITATION RUNDOWN INSTRUCTIONS
The entire rundown should be repeated many times, but not in quick
succession. Do a single run from the preliminary step down to the end
(including a number of passes through the later steps as indicated) as a
major action. Later, when it seems appropriate, repeat the entire
rundown.
The general idea is to do these processes lightly, validate the first win
that occurs on a process, and go on to the next step. Don’t Q & A with
the physical universe or worry about physical objects not moving.
Don’t keep testing whether you can levitate, using it as a hidden
standard to evaluate your gains. You will need to make lots and lots of
earth shattering gains and wins on this before something will even
twitch. If you decide that you are cause over the object, then you are,
even if it doesn’t move. Don’t believe what the universe says, believe
yourself instead. The universe is out to fool you and keep everything
in its place.
If you get invalidated or start feeling that it’s all impossible, look for an
entity (BT, PME, CE, etc.) who is invalidating and handle with the
appropriate technique.
486
In general, letters are used to designate individual commands which
are run alternately within a single process whereas numbers are used
to designate processes.
This rundown is meant to be done solo only. An auditor can’t say
verbal commands fast enough to get good results on most OT drills or
mockup processes. Also, these techniques are experimental and
might well be out gradient or dangerous if pushed too hard at the PC
by an auditor. Running solo adds the extra protection factor of working
fully under your own causation.
It is expected that you can exteriorize easily and do mockup
processing without trouble. If not, SOP 8C or similar rundowns would
be a better starting point. Note that all references to SOP 8C refer to the
OT rundown (formulas 1 to 8) rather than the opening procedure (see
Creation of Human Ability).
487
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - PRELIMINARY STEP
This section primarily contains subjective processes. Some of them
may go to major EPs which might have to be rehabbed rather than run
some more on a subsequent pass.
In theory, these should generally be 4 flow (quad) processes, but in
many cases it did not seem appropriate. The processes of the mid-
1950s used brackets (multiple flows) often but not always, so I have
used that kind of approach here, adding flows anytime it seemed right
but not being rigorous about it. If you feel that an additional flow needs
to be run for a particular process, or you get some BPC on a missing
flow, feel free to add another flow to the process.
For this preliminary step, get an FN before starting (fly a rud or
whatever).
RUDS ON LEVITATION
Fly the ARCX, PTP, MWH, Eval, and Inval ruds on levitation.
Also check for any entities (BTs, etc.) with an ARCX, PTP, or MWH on
levitation and handle with the appropriate techniques. Note, don’t work
this to death, just get the easy ones. There are plenty of processes in
this rundown that will clean up these areas more thoroughly.
LEVITATION STRAIGHTWIRE
Each of these commands should be run a number of times to an FN or
a win as you would do with self analysis questions. You can work over
the list a second time if necessary. The whole thing should go to a nice
EP. If you do get in trouble, use the next to the last list of self analysis.
a1) Recall a time when you enjoyed levitating something
a2) Recall a time you enjoyed someone else levitating something.
a3) Recall a time another enjoyed others levitating things
b1) Recall a time when you disliked levitating something
b2) Recall a time you disliked it when another levitated something
b3) Recall a time another disliked it when others levitated
c1) Recall a time you levitated something because it was important
to do so
488
c2) Recall a time you felt it was important for another to levitate
c3) Recall a time another felt it was important for others to levitate
d1) Recall a time you levitated something to create a good effect
d2) Recall a time you felt it created a good effect for another to
levitate
d3) Recall a time another felt it created a good effect for others to
levitate
e1) Recall a time you could levitate something and choose not to.
e2) Recall a time another could levitate something and choose not to.
e3) Recall a time others could levitate something and choose not to.
f1) Recall a time you levitated something and it improved
communication.
f2) Recall a time another levitated something and it improved
communication.
f3) Recall a time others levitated something and it improved
communication.
g1) Recall a time you levitated something and it increased affinity.
g2) Recall a time another levitated something and it increased affinity.
g3) Recall a time others levitated something and it increased affinity.
h1) Recall a time you levitated something and it was really real.
h2) Recall a time another levitated something and it was really real.
h3) Recall a time others levitated something and it was really real.
DECISIONS
a) Now lets get off some more considerations and decisions on the
area.
b) Recall some decisions you’ve made about levitating.
c) Recall some decisions another has made about levitating.
d) Recall some decisions others have made about levitating.
e) Write down some bad effects you could create by levitating.
f) Write down some good effects you could create by levitating.
g) Write down some games it would spoil if you levitated.
489
h) Write down some new games you could have if you levitated.
HAVINGNESS
Walk around and physically touch and let go of objects in the room.
2.5 HELP
He’s probably restraining himself from levitating because he’s been
convinced that not doing it is a way to help out other people. We need
to run off the considerations of helping by not doing it and then run the
earlier part which would be helping by doing it.
a) How could you help another by not levitating.
b) How could another help you by not levitating
c) How could another help others by not levitating.
d) How could another help themselves by not levitating.
e) How could you help yourself by not levitating.
f) How could you help another by levitating.
g) How could another help you by levitating 2.5.8 How could
another help others by levitating.
h) How could another help themselves by levitating.
i) How could you help yourself by levitating.
PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
a) Spot a problem that not levitating would solve.
b) How would that be a solution?
a) Spot a problem that another or others might solve by not
levitating.
b) How would that be a solution?
a) Spot a problem that you might solve by preventing others from
levitating.
490
b) How would that be a solution?
a) Spot a problem that you might solve for others by not levitating.
b) How would that be a solution?
PROBLEMS AND RESISTANCE
Theory: To have a PTP, the PC must be resisting the other side and
feeding it energy by doing so. I worked this into a command that
works like dynamite. It can be applied to other areas besides levitation.
Run command b) a number of times for each answer to command a).
a) Spot a problem that you could have with levitation.
b) What would you have to resist to make that a problem.
a) Spot a problem that another could have with levitation.
b) What would he or she have to resist to make that a problem.
a) Spot a problem that others could have with levitation.
b) What would they have to resist to make that a problem.
PROBLEMS OF COMPARABLE MAGNITUDE
Since levitating might handle too many of your existing problems for
you to tolerate, run the following:
a) Spot some problems of comparable magnitude to being unable
to levitate.
b) Spot some problems that others would consider to be of
comparable magnitude to being unable to levitate.
CONNECTEDNESS
a) Spot objects in the room that you would be willing to connect
with.
b) Spot objects in the room that you would be willing to make
connect with you.
INVALIDATION
491
This is simply the inval rudiment done on the subject of levitation.
However, the area is prone to self-invalidation, so we’ll extend it out to
6 flows. Run these with ITSA, earlier similar ITSA just like a general
inval rud.
a) On levitation, have you invalidated yourself.
b) On levitation, has another or others invalidated themselves.
c) On Levitation, have you been invalidated by another.
d) On levitation, have you invalidated another.
e) On levitation, has another invalidated others.
f) On levitation, have you gotten another or others to invalidate
themselves.
RESISTANCE
a) Spot objects in the room and into each one put a resistance to
being levitated.
b) Spot objects in the room and into each one put a willingness to
be levitated.
PREPCHECK
This stirs up too much charge without providing enough of an ITSA
line. Of all the processes in this rundown, this is the only one that
bogged down when I tried it (I wrote up the entire rundown as a sort of
CSing action for myself before I ran it, although I had come up with and
tried some of the individual processes earlier). I could probably run it
now easily (after doing the entire rundown once), so maybe it belongs
here for a second pass. Or if you have an auditor available, you might
have him run it on you. Just skip it if you’re running solo.
Run the prepcheck buttons “On Levitation”. Take each reading E/S to
an FN. As was done with the ruds, we’re just going for the easy stuff
and expecting the other processes to pick up more rather than running
these buttons endlessly.
The buttons are: Suppressed
Careful of
492
Didn’t reveal
Not-ised
Suggested
Mistake been made
protested
anxious about
decided
Withdrawn from
Reached
Ignored
Stated
Helped
Altered
Revealed
Asserted
Agreed (with).
CAUSE AND BLAME.
This is from the 3rd ACC. Run a few commands of a), then a few
commands of b), then back to a) etc.
a) Spot objects in the room and have each one look up and grant
you cause.
b) Spot objects in the room and have each one look up and blame
you.
OVERTS
Overts are a big reason for restraining oneself.
On each of these processes, spot an overt, then clear it using the
appropriate buttons (as in an overt rudiment) including going earlier
similar if necessary, then go back to the main question and spot
another overt etc. Take the main question to a big cog, FN, VGIs. (this
is a modernized version of prepchecking by the withhold system).
a) Spot an overt of harming something by levitating.
b) Spot overts of preventing others from levitating.
493
c) Spot times when you regretted having levitated something. If
necessary, scan the incident backwards. Spot the overt and
handle.
d) Spot times that you were justified in stopping others from
levitating. Write down the justifiers. Check for an earlier overt and
handle (either an overt against the terminal you stopped, or a
similar overt of your own, especially if you think you were really
justified in stopping them).
VALIDATING INABILITY
If the PC is not levitating, he’s probably getting paid not to.
a) How could you validate someone for not levitating?
b) How could another validate you for not levitating?
c) How could others validate others for not levitating?
OVERTS AND SOLUTIONS
People levitating causes so much trouble that we have worked very
hard to prevent it. After getting some charge off of the declining spiral
that results from the positive-negative goal inversion in the treadmill, it
occurred to me that we’re doing ourselves in by trying to solve the
problem of others committing overts. Hence, this process. It should
also be workable for other areas besides levitation.
Flow 1 a) Write down an overt you could commit against another or
others by levitating.
b) How could that be solved or prevented.
Flow 2 a) Write down an overt another could commit against you by
levitating.
b) How could that be solved or prevented.
Flow 3 a) Write down an overt another could commit against others by
levitating.
b) How could that be solved or prevented.
Flow 0. a) Write down an overt you could commit against yourself by
levitating.
b) How could that be solved or prevented.
494
REACH AND WITHDRAW
Spot objects in the room. For each one, mentally reach and let go of it
3 times.
a) Recall some postulates you have made about levitation.
b) Recall some postulates another has made about levitating.
c) Recall some postulates others have made about levitating.
d) Recall some postulates you have made about another or others
doing levitation.
VALENCES
There are probably one or more valences which you consider are
capable of levitating but which you are unwilling to be. We’ll clean this
up with the SOP8D “safe” command (see Creation of Human Ability).
a) Spot someone who should be prevented from levitating.
This is not intended as a listing question. Whenever you get an answer
that reads well, generalize the terminal (if not already in a general form)
and run the following repetitively:
b) Spot some places where (terminal) would be safe.
RIGHT/WRONG
There might be some old service facs. connected with the area. I don’t
know of a good way to list for these, but we can try some possibilities
and see if they read.
Test each of the following pairs of questions for a read. If you get a
read on one of the questions in a pair, then run it (alternating),
otherwise don’t.
a) How could you make yourself right by not levitating.
b) How could you make others wrong by not levitating.
a) How could you make yourself right by preventing levitation.
b) How could you make others wrong by preventing levitation.
495
WILLINGNESS PROCESSING
One of the reasons you stop yourself from levitating is because you
don’t want others to do it and also because your afraid of things flying
around out of control etc.
Your not going to be willing to levitate unless your willing to have
others do it as well. So we’re going to improve your willingness in this
area. To avoid running in the direction of a no games condition, this has
to be alternated with a “willingness for self” type command.
a) Look around and find an object you’d be willing to move.
b) Look around and find an object you’d be willing for another to
move.
a) Look around and find an object you’d be willing to move.
b) Look around and find an object you’d be willing for a spirit to
move.
a) Look around and find an object you’d be willing to move.
b) Look around and find an object you’d be willing for a BT to move.
a) Look around and find an object you’d be willing to move.
b) Look around and find an object you’d be willing to have move by
itself.
496
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - ADVANCED PROCESSES (Space etc.)
EXTERIORIZATION
This is the great exteriorization process of 1953. It is especially good in
that it raises perception (especially when run while already exterior)
and can be used many times.
Spot some places where you are not.
NEGATIVE LOCATIONAL
Everyone probably has loads of automatic machinery all over the place
that’s moving things and holding them still etc. See the general theory
of SOP 8C and additional data in the 2nd and 3rd ACCs.
a) Spot some places where you don’t have to levitate
b) Spot some places where another doesn’t have to levitate
c) Spot some objects you don’t have to levitate.
d) Spot some objects another doesn’t have to levitate.
e) Spot some people you don’t have to stop from levitating things.
f) Spot some people another doesn’t have to stop from levitating
things.
g) Spot some objects you don’t have to hold still.
h) Spot some objects another doesn’t have to hold still.
MUST NOT TOUCH
a) Spot objects in the room and as you spot them, have each one
say “Mustn’t Touch”.
b) Spot objects in the room and as you spot them, you say to them
“Mustn’t Touch”.
c) Spot objects in the room. For each one, put a beam on it and as
you do so, have the walls yell “Mustn’t Touch” at you.
497
d) Spot objects in the room. For each one, put a beam on it and as
you do so, you yell “Mustn’t Touch” at the walls.
OVERTS ON MEST
Agreed upon universes are shared by other people. Although you
might say that Mest feels no pain and can’t be hurt, you can still
commit an overt by running the stuff. Think of a nice lake with children
and ducks and plants and things, maybe even a sailing club and some
guardian spirits etc. In other words, this lake, which is basically part of
the 6th dynamic, is pro-survival to a whole load of other dynamics.
Now you come along and commit an overt against the water, fouling it
up or something. Its basically an overt of messing up the playing field.
This sort of thing makes you restrain yourself from reaching and
controlling Mest.
One of the earliest overts, perhaps the basic overt, in the home
universe era was messing up the environment of a shared universe.
Maybe you didn’t like something in it and zapped it just as if it was your
own private universe. This gets the other users, who might have liked
the mockup you zapped, a bit upset. The penalty universes were built
to solve this sort of behavior (obviously, it didn’t work).
So we’ll need to clean up overts against the 6th dynamic to free up our
ability to reach and handle it.
The first group of processes is based on R2-61 in C of HA.
a) Spot a spot where you decided to protect Mest.
b) Spot a spot in the room.
a) Spot a spot where you decide that you’d messed up the space.
b) Spot a spot in the room.
a) Spot a spot where you decided that you’d ruined some object.
b) Spot a spot in the room.
a) Spot a spot where you decided that you’d misused some energy.
b) Spot a spot in the room.
a) Spot a spot where you decided that you’d messed up the future
of an area.
b) Spot a spot in the room.
498
O/W ON MEST
Same theory as above.
a) What have you done to an environment
b) What have you withheld from an environment
a) What has another done to an environment
b) What has another withheld from an environment
a) What have others done to an environment
b) What have others withheld from an environment
O/J ON MEST
Same theory as 3.12 above.
a) What have you done to objects
b) how have you justified that
a) What have you done to energies
b) how have you justified that
a) What have you done to spaces
b) how have you justified that
a) What have you done to the future of an environment
b) how have you justified that.
CAUSE O/W ON MEST
a) what could you cause to happen to an object.
b) What could you hold back from doing to an object.
a) What could another cause to happen to an object
b) What could another hold back from doing to an object
a) What could you cause to happen to an energy
b) What could you hold back from doing to an energy.
a) What could another cause to happen to an energy
b) What could another hold back from doing to an energy.
499
a) What could you cause to happen to a space
b) What could you hold back from doing to a space.
a) What could another cause to happen to a space
b) What could another hold back from doing to a space.
a) What could you postulate into an object’s future
b) What could you withhold from postulating into an object’s future.
a) What could another postulate into an object’s future
b) What could another hold back from postulating into an object’s
future.
CONSEQUENCES
Levitating things might have some consequences.
Write down some ways in which it might affect society if people could
levitate.
Mockup nonsense type consequences that could result from people
levitating (i.e. it might make everyone turn blue etc.). Roll each mockup
into a ball and shove it into the walls.
OBJECTS
Based on SOP 8C formula 5 and 3rd ACC lecture 57 of 2/5/54.
First, Exteriorize if you can.
a) Spot some objects which are not shooting at you.
b) Spot some objects which are not coming in at you
c) Spot some objects which you’re not trying to keep away from
other objects.
d) Spot some objects which you’re not trying to get to leave the
universe.
e) Spot some objects which you’re not trying to get to appear in the
universe.
f) Spot some objects which you don’t need a deed of title to.
500
g) Spot some objects which you wouldn’t mind looking at if they
appeared suddenly.
h) Spot some objects which, if they appeared suddenly, wouldn’t
immediately drive you away.
i) Spot some objects which you wouldn’t mind having disappear.
j) Spot some objects which you wouldn’t mind having remain in
your space.
HORRIBLE CONSEQUENCES
If you really did move an object, something dreadful would probably
happen and you’d be sorry you did it. So, deep down, you make sure
that you don’t break the rules and get in trouble. After all, alarm bells
might go off or the universe might unravel etc. So let’s run out these
horrible consequences that your anticipating.
a) What horrible thing might happen if you levitated an object? Note
down the answers. If an answer reads well, run the following on
it, when flat, return to the first question.
b) Put a mock up of the horrible thing happening out in front of you.
c) Make it more solid
d) Copy it many times and make the copies more solid.
e) Mock up more copies, this time changing the colors and moving
things around in the mockup etc.
f) Start shoving some of these mockups into the body and throwing
some away etc. Keep mocking up more and pushing them
around (into the body or throwing away or whatever you want to
do with them).
g) Continue until you feel great relief or a sudden certainty of
causation or total knowingness about the situation.
Then go back to question a.
By the way, the above process works anytime you get the idea that
something horrible is going to happen. It let’s you blow the silly
restimulations that scare you and also runs out real incidents that are
501
getting ready to happen (sitting out there on postulated future track) so
that they don’t occur. In the rare cases where an upcoming incident
refuses to unmock, the process gives you enough certainty and
knowingness to sidestep the undesirable event.
MOCKUPS OF FLINCHING
a) Spot an object in the room. Mock yourself up as deciding that
your going to levitate the object. Mock yourself up as putting a
beam on it and then flinching and saying “no way” and unmocking
the beam without moving the object. (repeat with many different
objects).
b) Spot an object in the room. Mock someone else up and have
them decide that their going to levitate the object. Mock them up
as putting a beam on it and then flinching and saying “no way”
and unmocking the beam without moving the object. (repeat with
many different objects).
Sometimes objects were rigged to explode when you touched them,
either as a trap, or as part of an implant to cut your power down.
c) Spot objects in the room. For each one, put a beam on it and
mock it up as exploding.
d) Spot objects in the room. For each one, mock up somebody else
putting a beam on it and having it explode in their face.
e) Spot objects in the room. For each one, put a beam on it and
mock it up as imploding.
f) Spot objects in the room. For each one, mock up somebody else
putting a beam on it and having it implode in their face (the
vacuum pulls at them).
LOCATIONAL
a) From where could you levitate an object.
b) From where could another levitate an object.
WASTING
502
Mock up a way to waste the ability to levitate.
SOME MORE STOPS
Check each of these for a read. If it does, then do ITSA earlier similar
ITSA to FN.
a) Getting someone to stop levitating your stuff by convincing him
that you can only levitate the things that you have created.
b) Deciding that since you can’t levitate, your going to make sure
that nobody else can either.
c) Being ordered to levitate something that you don’t want to and
getting out of it by proving that you really can’t do it.
d) Being convinced that you shouldn’t do it because it sets a bad
example for others who would try to do it with poor control and
mess things up.
REMEDY OF HAVINGNESS
Run this on big rectangular blocks of: 1) Glass 2) Wood 3) plastic 4)
Steel.
Mockup a copy of the object. Make it as large and massive as possible.
Make the copy more and more discreditable until it snaps in. Now
mock up lots and lots of copies of this mockup in all directions and
have them keep snapping in as long as possible.
Once they wouldn’t snap in anymore, then mock up lots more in all
directions around the body and push them in. Keep doing it until it
feels really good and your havingness is high. Also throw some away.
If you can, get big avalanches of lots of copies of the object flowing
both into and away from the body. Change the colors occasionally and
make the mockups more solid.
Then pick a point to operate from way out in space somewhere. Move
to the point and look around. See some stars off in the distance. Now
mock up lots more of these discreditable copies of the object and keep
pushing them into this operating point from all directions. Be both in
the point receiving the mass and pushing the mass in from outside.
Occasionally throw some copies away as well.
503
When you don’t give a damn about the mass of the object anymore,
make the copy nicer until it either snaps in again or it seems very
interesting and worth having. Then go on with the process.
Keep this up until you can easily have or not have extremely beautiful,
wonderful, aesthetic copies of the Object.
504
LEVITATION RUNDOWN - ENERGY
A bit of cleanup on the subject of energy will also be needed. This is
not intended as a complete handling, that would be a full rundown all
by itself.
RUDS.
Fly the ARCX, PTP, and MWH Rud “On Using Energy”
STRAIGHTWIRE.
a) Recall controlling Energy
b) Recall another controlling energy
c) Recall others controlling energy
d) Prepcheck Skip this step if you’re running solo (see my earlier
discussion).
PREPCHECK
Run the prepcheck buttons “On Energy”. Take each reading E/S to FN.
STARTING AND STOPPING ENERGY.
Go around the house and start and stop energy flows by turning things
on and off. Notice the flow when you turn something on and the no
flow when you turn something off. Start with a water faucet where the
flow is visible and then do light switches etc. until you feel good about
starting and stopping energy flows.
OVERTS
Overts are a big reason for restraining oneself.
On each of these processes, spot an overt, then clear it using the
appropriate buttons (as in an overt rudiment) including going earlier
similar if necessary, then go back to the main question and spot
505
another overt etc. Take the main question to a big cog, FN, VGIs. (this
is a modernized version of prepchecking by the withhold system).
a) Spot an overt of harming something by creating energy.
b) Spot overts of preventing others from creating energy.
c) Spot times when you regretted having created some energy. If
necessary, scan the incident backwards. Spot the overt and
handle.
d) Spot times that you were justified in stopping others from
creating energy. Write down the justifiers. Check for an earlier
overt and handle (either an overt against the terminal you
stopped, o